Top Banner
CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL: MEDICAL SERVICE 1
81
Welcome message from author
This document is posted to help you gain knowledge. Please leave a comment to let me know what you think about it! Share it to your friends and learn new things together.
Transcript
Page 1: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL

MEDICAL SERVICE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 1

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

H E A D Q U A R T E R SCAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL CENTCOM

ARMED FORCES OF THE PHILIPPINESCamp Lapulapu Cebu City

CC23 02 February 2009

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURESNUMBER 01-2009

GENERAL

11 This SOP lists procedures that are unique to the Medical Service CLSH CENTCOM AFP and should be used as a guideline for its personnel in accomplishing routines or recurring actions or matters in providing services to the patients of this hospital

12 This SOP is used to advise new personnel or newly-attached units of the procedures followed in this unit

13 Upon instruction of the CO CLSH this SOP may be changed or any portion of it may be deleted or amended to meet altered conditions of newly accepted practices in administration and medicine

14 Preparation publication and distribution of this hospital SOP are the responsibility of the Operation Officer CLSH and Chief Medical Services of the hospital shall prepare the appropriate portions of this SOP

2 PHYSICAL EXAMINATIONS

21Requesting party will secure their request to be signed by their CO or Chief of Office for PE personnel approvalnotation prior to proceed of any physical examination to the different section

22PE personnel is responsible for the briefing of the requesting party about the procedures of Physical Examination

23PE personnel is the over-all supervisor to all applicants for physical examinations

24General PE

PE personnel is responsible for the checking of documents prior to General Physical Examination

25PE personnel is responsible for the typing job and filing of documents after the Gen PE

26PE personnel is responsible for the issuance of certification for Promotion Reenlistment ETAD Commissionship FILLER and Enlistment

27PE personnel is responsible to all documents for Medical and Dental doctors signature

28PE personnel is responsible to all incoming and outgoing documents

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 2

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

29 PE personnel is responsible for the information of concern applicants about the working days of documents from 3-5 days allowance depending the availability of the medical doctors to sign the final Report of Medical Examination

210 PROCEDURE DURING PHYSICAL EXAMINATION

The following steps for PE

STEP I - FROM PE SECTION TO NP SECTIONSTEP II - FROM NP SECTION TO LAB SECTIONSTEP III - FROM LAB SECTION TO X-RAY SECTIONSTEP IV - FROM X-RAY SECTION TO ECG SECTIONSTEP V - FROM ECG SECTION TO DENTALSTEP VI - FROM DENTAL TO EENT SECTION STEP VII - FROM EENT SECTION TO OPS FOR GEN PESTEP VIII - FROM OPS RETURN BACK TO PE SECTION

FOR TYPING

SCHEDULED FOR PEGEN PE

DAYS MORNING AFTERNOONM ndash W - F 0800H - 1130H (ROUTINE PE) 1330H -1630H - (GEN PE)T - TH 0800H - 1130H (ROUTINE PE)

211 Steps for civilian medical certificate

STEP I - Get authority duly signed OPD OIC and Chief JAGOSTEP II - Get OPD recordSTEP III - For CBC UA Chest X-ray ECG pay first FSU for

The proceduresSTEP IV - Go to labs chest x-ray ECGSTEP V - Go to MOD for P ESTEP VI - Issuance of Medical Certificate

SOP MOD

1 Duty MOD will takeover the responsibilities of running the medical aspect of the hospital during hisher tour of duty As such she will be responsible for permitting admissions and discharge permitting evacuation and surgery monitoring of all patients supervising medical interns PGIrsquos nurses and their interns and other volunteers

2 Decisions requiring the level of authorization of CLSH Commanding Officer must be referred to CLSH Commanding Officer

3 MOD tour of duty will be for 24hours or until proper endorsement is done 4 The incoming and outgoing MOD must be both present during the morning

endorsement to facilitate efficient turn-over of medical care5 At no occasion will the MOD leave hisher post6 MOD are tasked to be trainers of medical paramedical interns PGIrsquos and other

paramedical volunteers as such they must be guided with the policies stated in AFP Circ 12 dtd 12 Aug 1989 It is stated that the training of medical and paramedical interns shall achieve the following

a motivate medical and paramedical personnel in the military careerb contribute to the national defence effort in building trained medical

manpower

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 3

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

c assist technical and administrative personnel of AFP hospitals in their various functions with patient care

d afford clinical training to the various interns in fulfilment of statutory requirements for the completion of their respective courses andor requirements prior to government board examinations

e Help promote pleasant civilian-military relationship7 At no time shall the interest and welfare of patients be subordinated to the

conduct of the affiliation training program8 rules and regulations regarding the conduct of training shall be prescribed by The

Surgeon General AFP9 the total number of interns accepted in AFP hospitals shall not exceed one per

five patient

PT SECTION SOP

1the CLSH PT Section can accept PT volunteers who are certified by MECS and PRC and who are from trainingteaching hospitals which are duly recognized by the Department of Health2 CLSH OTPT Section operates for 8hours3 Application for CLSH PTOT volunteer will be guided by the CLSH Security SOP4 PT NCOIC will assist the C Clinical Section in orienting the volunteers on the military protocol and on the CLSH SOP5 Accepted Volunteers must act in accordance to the policies of CLSH and CENTCOM policies regarding the behaviour duties and responsibilities similar to those of the CLSH employees

3 LABORATORY SECTION

31 PersonnelCPT LOUISE A CAJITA MC ndash OICTSG ULYSSES C BONTUYAN PA ndash NCOICMs Manresa D Cantildeales ndash Medical TechnologistMs Joan S Quibedo ndash Medical Technologist

32 Working HoursMon ndash Ms Manresa D Cantildeales 0700H ndash 1600HTues ndash Ms Joan S Quibedo 0700H - 1600H

Ms Manresa D Cantildeales 0700H ndash 1600HWed - Ms Manresa D Cantildeales 0700H ndash 1600HThu - Ms Manresa D Cantildeales 0700H ndash 1600H

Ms Joan S Quibedo 0700H ndash 1600HFri - Ms Joan S Quibedo 0700H ndash 1600HSat - Ms Manresa D Cantildeales 0800H ndash 1200HSun - Ms Joan S Quibedo 0800H ndash 1200H

33 Schedule of Different Laboratory examinations

Blood Chemistry

Tuesday and Thursday (except ldquoSTATrdquo or as scheduled or requested by MOD any days)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 4

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Extraction Time 0730H ndash 0800H In-Patient0800H ndash 0830H Out-Patient

34 All Out-Patient must secure a request from the MOD and must submit their request to the Laboratory a day before the scheduled extraction for proper instruction and scheduling We will not entertain patients who are not scheduled for that particular day All out-patients are advised to follow the schedule above We will not entertain patients after the cut-off time

35 For all in-patients the NOD should submit their request to the laboratory a day before the schedule of extraction

35-1 CBC UA SE etc

All out-patient should secure request from the MOD and should get their case number from the AampD Section before going to the laboratory Urine and stool specimens should strictly be in the morning only Cut-off time to all examinations is upto 1100H only except for ldquoSTATrdquo request

35-2 AFP (Sputum exam) and Newborn Screening ndash In-Patient ndash only Nurse-On-Duty should coordinate first with the Med-On-Duty for scheduling

35-3 Examinations done on outside laboratories ndash NOD must coordinate first

with the Med-Tech on duty for pricing and scheduling

35-4 Physical Examinations for Promotion Reenlistment Enlistment CAD APE etc MWF ndash 0800H ndash 1100H (cut-off time)

35-5 Results

Releasing of Out-Patient is at 1500HIn-Patient ndash Duty Med-Tech will endorse the result as soon as it is done

4 PHARMACY SECTION

41 DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

41-1 Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

a Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothesb Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities

(for Dependents)

41-2 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 5

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0800H ndash 1100H

41-3 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their

respective dispensary41-4 Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines41-5 No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

42 REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

42-1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

42-2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 PHYSICAL THERAPY

51 PT SESSION

51-1 Requesting party will secure their request to be signed by the Medical

Officer512 PT personnel is responsible for the briefing of the requesting party

about the procedures of PT Section

51-3 PT personnel is the over-all supervisor to all patients for physical therapy

treatment51-4 PT personnel is responsible the issuance of certification to all PT

volunteers 51-5 PT personnel is responsible for the issuance of medical certificate

to the patient

51-6 PT personnel is responsible on attending the PT treatment to the patients

51-7 Civilian patient are required to pay every treatment session thru Sgt Ancheta the finance before physical therapy treatment to the

patient 51-8 PT personnel are responsible to write PT notes every Physical

Therapy Treatment to the patient

52 SCHEDULE FOR PT TREATMENT

DAY MORNING AFTERNOONMONDAY TO FRIDAY 0800H ndash 1200H NONE

6 EENT EXAMINATION

61 EENT SESSION

61-1 Requesting party will secure their request to be signed by the Medical

Officer61-2 EENT personnel is responsible and assist the EENT doctor during

EENT

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 6

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

examination61-3 EENT personnel is the over-all supervisor to all patients for EENT

examination61-4 EENT personnel is responsible the issuance of certification and

medical certificate to all patients

61-5 EENT Doctor personnel is responsible on attending for the EENT treatment to the patients

61-6 EENT personnel is responsible to write EENT Doctor notes every every

EENT Treatment to the patient61-7 EENT personnel is responsible to all in and out communications at

EENT section

61-8 EENT personnel is responsible logbooks at EENT Section

62 SCHEDULE FOR EENT TREATMENT

DAY MORNING AFTERNOONM - W - F 0800H ndash 1130H 1330H -1630HT - TH 0800H ndash 1130H 1330H- 1430H

1500H - ATHLETIC

7 OBYNE SECTION

71 OBGYNE SECTION MISSION

To provide prenatal care and proper follow up for all normal and abnormal cases

of obtestric and gynecologic pateints

72 Prenatal schedule and consultation

DAY SCHEDULE MORNING AFTERNOONMON TO FRI PRENATAL 0800H-

1200H1300H-1700H

TUE amp THUGYNE CONSULTATIONFAMILY PLANING CONSUL

0800H-1200H

1300H-1700H

WEDNESDAY IMUNIZATION 0800H-1200H

73 The following are entitled to free prenatal check-up

1ST priority - Military personnel active service2ND priority - Direct dependents3RD priority - Civilian employees4TH priority - Unmaried dependents are entitled prenatal less than

18 years old of age

74 Check ndash up provided they will secure an authority duly signed by the OBGYNE

head CO and JAGO and pay the prenatal fee as prescribed by GHQ

4 2 1 - Retirees and Veterans

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 7

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 2 2 - Authorized civilians4 2 3 - Married or Unmarried dependents 18 years and above

` 42 1 - Children of dependents whether married or unmarried dependents

75 Requirements for pre-natal and consultation

a MilitaryDependents IDb Latest payslip of Military Personnelc MDRMarriage Contractd Newborn Screening payment six hundred pesos (P60000) only to be

Collected at 29 weeks AOGe Delivery Room requirements should be endorsed to Dependents Ward DR at 32 weeks AOG

8 NEURO PSYCHO EXAMINATION

81 Psychometrician or Psychologist will administer tests prescribed only in the AFPR G165-362 dtd 29 October 1996

81-1 For enlistment and trainee1 Intelligence Tests (Note IQ will not be reported as IQ points but

in terms of range eg not as 75 but ldquoAveragerdquo)2 Personality Tests

a Sentence Completion Testb MMPI or its equivalentc NP Forms

81-2 For Annual PE (Active Duty Status)1 Guilford-Zimmerman Temperament Survey2 Those who have not taken an IQ test will be required to take the SRA 3 Verbal Forms or the Personnel Tests for Industry

81-3 For Reenlistment1 NP Screening Forms2 Sentence Completion Forms

81-4 For Retirement (Officers and EM)Psychiatric interview to include review of clinicalhealthy records

81-5 For Supply Accountable Officer1 IQ Test3 Personality Test

82 The manner in which the psychologist or psychometrician administers the tests will be guided by their training

83 The manner with which they give recommendations will be guided by the provisions stated in the AFPR G pp 79-91

84 In the absence of an authorized NP Screener the CO will sign 42and 72 in the AFP PE form

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 8

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

85 Personnel will be allowed to take NP examination upon approval of their requests from COPE personnel

86 Schedule of Examinations

MondayAM - Scheduling of ExamPM - Conduct NP Examination

TuesdayAM - EvaluationInterviewRecordingPM - Athletics

WednesdayAM ndash PM - Conduct NP Examination

ThursdayAM - EvaluationInterviewRecordingPM - Athletics

FridayAM - PM - Conduct NP Examination

87 NP Examination Results will be forwarded to PE personnel for consolidation and

record purposes

88 In instances where the expertise of a Psychiatrist is needed and none is available

in the hospital a request for augmentation has to be made to the higher headquarters addressed to a military hospital which has an in-house Psychiatrist

9 X-RAY EXAMINATIONS

97 For Physical Examinations91-1 Applicants must present form from PE section prior examination91-2 Schedule of Examinations will be from Monday to Friday from

0800H-1130H

91-3 X-Ray result will be forwarded to PE section for consolidation

98 For Out-Patient92-1 Patient must present request signed by the duty MOD922 Schedule of Examinations will be from Monday to Friday from

0800H ndash 1130H

99 For In-Patient99-1 Examinations will be done anytime upon request from the MOD

910 Wednesday is Maintenance Day no examinations except emergency cases

10 OUT-PATIENT CONSULTATION

101 Requirements for consultation

101-1 Military Personnel ndash present military ID101-2 Dependents ndash present dependents IDMDR

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 9

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

101-3 CAA ndash present CAA ID101-4 Civilian Employees ndash present ID101-5 Authorized Civilians ndash must fill-up Authorization to be signed by CO

Prior consultation

102 Schedule of Consultation

Monday amp Wednesday

AM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM ndash 1330H ndash 1430H

Tuesday amp ThursdayAM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM - Athletics

FridayAM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM - 1330H ndash 1530H

103 Patients should be taken vital signsblood pressure prior examination104 Issuance of Medical Certificate must be upon approval of the MOD and

control number should be indicated with CLSH Office Seal

11 POLICIES AND GUIDELINES IN CONDUCTING DIAGNOSTIC EXAMINATIONS

111 Radiology Section

The attending physician writes order of X-ray examination in the patientrsquos chart

The ward nurse prepares a request of X-ray examination Radiology personnel logs request in their logbook The ward man accompanies the patient to the x-ray section For special procedures appropriate SOP is followed The ward nurse documents the time date manner of moving

and condition of the patient An X-ray personnel forwards the x-ray result to the ward

concerned and asks the recipient to sign in the logbook

Ward staff refers significant result to the attending physician and attaches the result to the patientrsquos

chart

112 Laboratory Section

The ward nurse fills up a laboratory examination request and forwards it to the laboratory The request must contain the

patientrsquos complete name which includes the middle name the patientrsquos rank age unit birth date name of the exam to be performed and the date it is to be performed

The patient is instructed on the proper collection of specimen Cut-off time for all examinations is up to 1100H only except for

ldquoSTATrdquo Patients admitted beyond 1100H who require routine laboratory exams such as CBC and UA shall

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 10

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

have their examinations performed the following day

ldquoSTATrdquo laboratory examinations are coordinated and done immediately

Sputum exams and newborn screenings are coordinated first with the medical technologist-on-duty for scheduling

Repeat sputum exams are prioritized over new PTB cases for AFB smear

Newborn screening is done only after the infant is 24 hours old Infants scheduled for newborn screening will be cord dressed

but will be not bathed on the morning of the exam Blood chemistry studies are done on Tuesdays and Thursdays

only Laboratory requests for such exams must be forwarded a day prior to the exam

Examinations to be done at outside laboratories or specimens that need to be sent out must be coordinated first by the

NOD with the medical technologist-on-duty for pricing and scheduling

Payment for outside laboratories must be settled by the Supply Section Officer-in-charge with the permission of the Admin

Officer Laboratory results will be endorsed by the medical technologist-

on-duty as soon as they are available

12 POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS ADVANCE DIRECTIVES

121 Any person of legal age and of sound mind may make an advance directive for physicians to administer terminal care when he she

suffers from the terminal phase of a terminal illness PROVIDED that

a He she is informed of the medical consequences of his her choice b He she releases those involved in his her care from any

obligation relative to the consequences on his her decisionc His her decision will not prejudice health and safety d A written request must be signed by the patient himherself duly

witnessed by a relative or significant others or a hospital personnel

e In case the patient is incapable of giving the consent and a third party consent is required the following persons in the order of priority stated hereunder may give consent

a Spouseb Son of or daughter of legal age

c Either parent d Brother or sister of legal age or e Guardian

122 Consent form once signed and witnessed should be attached to patients chart for filling

13 POLICIES ON DOCTORrsquoS ROUNDS

Doctorrsquos rounds are made everyday in the morning Except for unusual cases which are made daily

Unusual observations are referred to the Medical Officer of the (MOD) after duty hours

New orders are carried out promptly and accurately Routine laboratory treatments are done after treatment

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 11

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

14 POLICIES ON DISCHARGING A PATIENT

141 Military Patients

141a Return to Duty

a Attending physician writes the discharge orderb Patientrsquos chart should be reviewed for completeness

particularly the Cover Sheet which should be signed by the Medical Officer

c Upon receipt of order for discharge Disposition Slip (Cover Sheet) is prepared and forwarded to A amp D Section for issuance of Special Order

d Discharged patients will report to their respective unit first hour of their Expected Date of Return to Duty (EDRD) No discharge will be made on the date of disposition Patients may go on pass before EDRD depending on the Ward Officerrsquos discretion or they may also stay in the hospital until their EDRD

e Prior to discharge patients are given Clearance Form to be completed

f The duty nurse writes and gives discharge instructions to the patient and significant others as well as the date of follow-up check up

g PhilHealth Form shall be properly accomplished by the patient attached with MDR Form and military ID

h Retro-evac patients when recovered these patients will be discharged accordingly following routine disposition of all patients

i The duty nurse checks all equipment items issued to patient are returned

j Discard all medicine card tags except for roster card Indicate EDRD and final diagnosis on the roster card and retained it until EDRD is due

k Locate patientrsquos name on the A amp D book and write the final diagnosis and EDRD opposite their names

l Log patientrsquos name in the discharge checklist and send to A amp D Section together with the chart which is arranged properly and have it properly received by the A amp D personnel

m Drop patient from census on the date of discharge n Document discharge time date condition of patient and

manner of leaving Nursing Unit

141b Discharge by Evacuationa Bring the chart with order final diagnosis and completed cover

sheet to the A amp D Section so that three copies of evacuation papers can be accomplished and evacuation flights can be coordinated

b Evacuation paper Letter Order Narrative Summary and pertinent diagnostic results (together with x-ray plates ECG Tracing etc) are given to the patient and checked by the NOD

c Patients are prohibited to carry firearms during the travel Firearms or deadly weapons of patients for evacuation shall remain in deposit with CLSH storeroom for safekeeping

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 12

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

d Indicate final diagnosis date of evacuation and place to be evacuated opposite the patientrsquos name in the A and D book and drop from census

e Return borrowed items in the CSR

141c Transfer of Hospital (within Cebu) a When the patient needs extensive medicalsurgical

management beyond the capability of the hospital Ward Officer is responsible for completion of all data necessary for transfer to include preparation of Narrative Summary

b Ward master ward man on duty will forward Disposition Form to A amp D Section

c Narrative summary will go with the patient chart should remain in the hospital for future use filing and safekeeping

141d Discharge by Deatha When death occurs on the ward the nurse on duty shall

immediately notify the A amp D Section personnel on duty who should prepare the death certificate The last attending Medical Officer completes the diagnosis and other clinical requirements

b Post mortem care should be done before sending the cadaver to the morgue

c All belongings of the deceased shall be properly accounted for and turned over to the relatives properly receipted

d A death certificate shall be given to the immediate relatives who will accompany the cadaver to the funeral parlor

e Log patientrsquos final diagnosis datetime of death in the A and D book and census

142 Dependents1421Discharge procedure is the same as that of the military except that

they can be discharged on the day of disposition once clearance is obtained

1422For the patientrsquos who are discharged against medical advice the patient of legal age or his her parent and or relative are made to sign a certificate to the effect that the hospital shall not be responsible for anything that would happen to the patient after he leaves the hospital after the doctorrsquos order which is also signed by two (2) witnesses

143 Civilian 1431Civilian employees retired military personnel dependents of retired

military personnel pure civilian have the same discharge procedure as dependents

1432Nurse on Duty should prepare billing prior to discharge 1433Billing of Civilian patients will be done by the Finance Sergeant1434Obligations such as hospital charges shall be settled at the

Admission and Disposition (A amp D) Section before discharge 1435Civilian employee with Phil health form must accomplish the form

in order to obtain clearance from the A amp D Section Medicines medical supplies diagnostic examinations and days of hospitalization should be listed and forwarded to the A amp D Section with the patientrsquos chart

1436Dependents of retired military personnel - same as above1437Retired Military Personnel (RMP) - only mess is charge1438Pure civilian - same as the civilian employees

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 13

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1439Patient presents a duly accomplished clearance prior to the release of discharge order and receipt of payment to the nurse on duty

15 EMERGENCY ROOM POLICIES AND GUIDELINES

1 only emergency cases are entertained in the ER General consultations are referred to the OPD After office hours and on SaturdaySunday and Holiday consultations may be entertained upon the discretion of the OPD

2 patients must be referred to the MOD

3 NOD should obtain the patientrsquos chief complaint weight vital signs get gestational data (LMP ED BP FH FHT if the patient is an OBGYNE case) and other admitting notes

4 inform patient of the existing hospital policies and guidelines upon admission (visiting schedule rights responsibilities policies and regulations

5 provide watcherrsquos id and provide the admin on duty with the list of admitted patients

6 NOD must facilitate requisition of hospital number

7 MOD attends to the patients The nurse on duty assists the MOD in performing assessments

8 for admitted patients MOD writes order for the medical treatment and the ER nurse on duty immediately executes them

9 a signed consent must be obtained from the patients In case of minor or handicapped patients guardians must fill up the consent for them

10NOD should facilitate laboratory works

11 IVF insertion is done either by the PGI on dutyMOD or NOD

12NOD starts giving the medications available Drugs that require skin testing must be performed at the ER and this should be confirmed by the physician and recorded in the patientrsquos chart

13MODNOD gives initial health teachings to the client or significant others as needed

14NOD regulates the IVF of patients before transporting to the ward

15 if patient refuses admission she must inform the MOD and sign a waiver denouncing the hospital from any liabilities A thorough explanation by the MOD shall be afforded to the patient upon signing of the waiver

16 illiterate patientscompanion must be asked to have their thumb marks on the record

17all stocks medicines used by the patient must be replaced as soon as possible on or before the patient leaves the ER This will be done by the duty ER NCO

18only emergency cases are provided with ER stocks NOD gets the prescription and have these items replaced by the pharmacy andor CSR

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 14

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

19ER NOD duty ER NCO will be held accountable for whatever lossesdeficiencies that may occur during hisher shift

20 inventory of all ER items is done every after shift by the NOD

21ER NCOIC must submit a monthly inventory report to the pharmacy and supply section for auditing purposes

22consultations are not entertained in the ER during office hours They are referred to the OPD

23communicableInfectious conditions which require isolation and cases other than OB-GYNEPedia are not accepted for admission but referred to other agencies after MOD has evaluated the patient The MOD should call and should be the one to make the call to the hospital where the patient is to be transferred to

24wounds of more than 24-hour duration are not entertained in te ER but in the OPD except on holidays Saturdays and Sundays

25 for invasive procedures a consent signed by the patient (if adult) companion andor guardian should be obtained before treatment or care is instituted

26should patient refuse she cannot be submitted to a particular treatment This should be properly documented on the patientrsquos record and have the patient sign a waiver for the refusal

27 for emergency cases where a patientrsquos life is in danger no consent is necessary However proper notation shall be made on the patientrsquos record by the physician and must be affirmed by a witness

28media is not allowed within the ER premises to avoid distortion in the management of patients

29dean on arrival (DOA) clients in ER cases are classified in the following categories

DOA Criteria0 vital signs ndash CPR done rarr failedNo death certificate shall be issuedER death ndash 0 vital signs rarr CPRrarr reviverarr died within 26 hoursHospital issue death certificateDOA and ER deaths should be marked on the patientrsquos record in bold

letters using ball pen

30all procedures performed in the ER shall be subjected to official charging which will be forwarded to the different branch of services where the patient belongs Only CENTCOM organic military personnel will be carried free of charge

15 POLICIES ON DO NOT RESUSCITATE (DNR)

151 Definition of Terms151a Resuscitation is a medical procedure which seeks to

restore cardiac andor respiratory function to individuals who have sustained a cardiac andor respiratory arrest

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 15

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

151b Do Not Resuscitate (DNR) is a medical order to provide no resuscitation to individuals for

whom resuscitation is not warranted151c Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) is the

common term used to refer to resuscitation However the options available to treat very sick patients are broader than CPR as literally defined Other options include intensive care antibiotic therapy hydration and nutritional support Appropriate comfort care measures should be employed for all patients especially terminally ill patients

152 DNR Protocol

1521WILL suction the airway administer oxygen position for comfort splint or immobilize control bleeding provide pain medication provide emotional support and contact other appropriate health care providers and

1521WILL NOT administer chest compressions insert an artificial airway administer resuscitative drugs defibrillate or

cardiovert provide respiratory assistance (other than suctioning the airway and administering oxygen) initiate resuscitative IV or initiate cardiac monitoring

153 Types of DNR Orders

1531a DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time the order

is given DNR Comfort Care orders permit comfort care only both before and during a cardiac or respiratory arrest Resuscitative therapies will not be

administered prior to an arrest This order is generally regarded as appropriate for patients who have a terminal illness short life expectancy little chance of surviving CPR and a desire to let nature take its course in the face of an impending arrest

1531b DNR Comfort Care-ArrestDNR Comfort Care-Arrest orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time of a cardiac or respiratory arrest A cardiac arrest occurs when there is an absence of a palpable pulse A respiratory arrest occurs when there are no spontaneous respirations or there is agonal breathing Resuscitative therapies will be administered before an arrest but not during an arrest The term DNR (without additional wording) when recorded in the medical chart shall be considered a DNR Comfort Care-Arrest order

1531c DNR Specified All other DNR orders are DNR Specified orders DNR Specified orders modify the DNR Protocol in some respect either in treatment modalities or in the timing of the protocol activation

1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 16

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart

1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order

DNR is a medical order to be given only by authorized health care practitioners DNR orders generally should be given with the informed consent of the patient or the patientrsquos surrogate decision-maker Ideally the physician should sensitively discuss the DNR option with the patient while the patient is mentally competent However DNR orders are often considered for patients who are comatose or who otherwise lack decisional capacity with whom this discussion has not occurred or cannot occur

In cases when a patient lacks decisional capacity the DNR option should be considered in conjunction with the patients advance directives if known or should be discussed with a surrogate A surrogate may be designated by a patient as the attorney-in-fact in a Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care A surrogate may also be identified as the first available person(s) from the following list in order

f Spouseg Son of or daughter of legal age h Either parent i Brother or sister of legal age or j Guardian

In all cases the primary physician should discuss the DNR option with the patient if possible and the surrogate(s) if appropriate There is no obligation to offer or initiate CPR if resuscitation would be futile ie if resuscitation would not achieve its physiological objective would offer no benefit to the patient and would violate reasonable medical standards

154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart

The words DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care-Arrest or DNR Specified should be recorded on the left-hand side of the medical chart (where advance directives are maintained) along with the date time rationale for the DNR order the names of the patient andor family members involved in the decision and a statement that the patient andor surrogate was fully informed about and consented to the DNR order If a DNR Specified order is recorded the modifications to the DNR Protocol should be specified in the medical chart as well as the desired timing of the activation of the modified Protocol

DNR decisions for inpatients should be transmitted clearly to those caring for the patients A DNR order should never result in the abandonment of a patient and steps should

155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders

The DNR order should be reassessed as part of the ongoing evaluation of an inpatient A DNR order should be affirmed modified or revoked only after a discussion between the primary physician and the patient if possible or the surrogate(s) if appropriate and the consent of the patient or surrogate DNR orders should be reassessed frequently and

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 17

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

as conditions warrant Reassessments of DNR orders should be documented in the medical chart If a DNR order is changed from one of the three types of DNR orders to a different type the patients DNR bracelet should be replaced with a new bracelet containing the revised designation If a DNR order is revoked the DNR bracelet should be removed and destroyed A physician or other health care worker who feels that he or she cannot honor a patients DNR request may not prevent or delay the transfer of the patient to a physician or facility which will honor the DNR status

156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care

The administration of anesthesia necessarily involves some practices and procedures that might be viewed as resuscitation in other settings Prior to any inpatient or outpatient invasive procedure for which the policy requires the documentation of informed consent any existing DNR order should when possible be reviewed with the patient or the patients surrogate As a result of this review the status of the DNR order during the perioperative period should be affirmed clarified or modified based on the preferences of the patient Any clarifications or modifications should be documented in the medical chart along with a notation indicating if or when the original DNR order should be reinstated Concurrence on these issues by the primary physician the surgeon and the anesthesiologist is desirable The DNR bracelet should not be removed during the perioperative period even if the DNR order has been temporarily modified

157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives

In the event of a conflict between one of the three types of DNR orders and an advance directive which has become effective because a person is unable to communicate and is terminally ill or permanently unconscious the instructions from the document (or person named as an Attorney-in-Fact) ranked higher in the following list shall prevail

a Living will of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

b Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care or an Attorney-in-Fact acting in accordance therewith of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

c DNR order d

16POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS DISCHARGE INSTRUCTION

161 The patient or his her legal guardian has the right to be informed by the physician or his her delegate ( nurse) of his her continuing health care requirements following discharge including instructions about

a Take home medicationsb Dietc Physical activityd Special instructions

- Signs to watch out for - When to bring the patient back to the physician- Instructions to follow in the event of untoward incidences

complications

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 18

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

e Follow-up Check-upf All other pertinent information to promote health and well-being

162 At the end patientrsquos confinement he she is entitled to a brief written summary of the course of his her illness which shall include at least the history physical examination diagnosis medications surgical procedure ancillary and laboratory procedures and the plan of further treatment and which shall be provided by the attending physician

17 POLICIES ON DISCLOSURE OF PATIENTrsquoS INFORMATION

171 The privacy of the patients must be assured at all stages of his her treatment Similarly the patient has the right to be free from unwarranted public exposure EXCEPT in the following cases

a When his her mental or physical condition is in controversy and the appropriate court in its discretion orders him her to submit to a physical or mental examination by a physician

b When the public health and safety so demandc When the patient waives his her rights

172 Any health care provider or practitioner involved in the treatment of the patient and all those who have legitimate access to the patientrsquos record is not authorized to divulge any information to a third party who has no concern with the care and welfare of the patient without his Her consent EXCEPT

a When such disclosure will benefit public health and safetyb When it is in the interest of justice and upon the order of a competent

courtc When patients waives in writing the confidential nature of such

information d When it is needed for continued medical treatment or advancement of

medical science subject to de-identification of patient and shared medical confidentiality for those who have access to the information

1721 Informing the spouse or the family to the first degree of the patientrsquos medical condition may be allowed Provided that the patient of legal age have the right to choose on whom to inform

1722 In case the patient is not of legal age or is mentally incapacitated such information shall be given to the parents legal guardian or his her next of kin

18 ETHICAL CONSIDERATIONS IN THE ADMINISTRATION OF BLOOD

181 The physician should obtain the patients informed consent before administering blood products This includes explaining to the patient the relative benefits and risks of receiving and not receiving the blood product as well as any reasonably viable alternatives

182 Generally in emergency situations where treatment is necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient and consent is not available (because the patient is unconscious or otherwise unable to consent) the physician may administer blood products (and any other treatment) necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient This does not apply if

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 19

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

the patient has expressly refused the treatment before becoming incompetent

183 A competent adult is entitled to refuse or cease any treatment for any reason

184 Parents ordinarily have the responsibility to provide consent on behalf of their young children however it is highly unlikely that parents can refuse life-saving treatment for their children Physicians may not simply override a parents refusal

185 Although it is legally clear that a mentally competent adult is entitled to refuse any medical treatment including a blood transfusion physicians have a responsibility to ensure that the refusal is truly informed and voluntary

186 In the case of adults who were once competent but have become temporarily or permanently incompetent substitute consent laws generally provide that their prior wishes regarding treatment decisions should be respected to the extent that they are known or can be determined

19 LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

191 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for IN-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSDoctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientStaff Nurse Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Proceed to the requesting Ward and collect

blood for the ordered examination Take specimen to the laboratoryExamine specimen Sign the resultRecord the result on its respective logbookRecord the result in PhilHealth logbookEndorse the result to the ward

Nurse On Duty Receive the result Refer the result to the Doctor on Duty

192 Specimens Received for Examination

Forms Needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatientPresent specimen with laboratory request signed by the Physician

Medical Technologist Receive specimen and laboratory requestExamine the specimen

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 20

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Sign the resultRecord the result to the respective logbook Endorse the Result to the Nurse on Duty for In- Patients and Release result to patients in OPD

193 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for OUT-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatient Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Receive the request and collect blood for the

ordered examination Examine specimen Sign the result Record the result on its respective logbook Record the result in OPD logbook Release the result

Patient Take the result to the Physician in OPD

194 Monthly Laboratory Report Census

Form Needed Monthly Report Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSMedical Technologist Record all daily results in the

logbookPrepare Monthly report based on the daily report of examinationsSign the reportGive the report to the OIC of the Laboratory for approval

OIC Laboratory Sign and approve the reportMedical Technologist Release the report

2 Laboratory Uniform

Laboratory uniform is a must on all working days except holidays but must be in laboratory gown when with patients

3 Request Slips

In-patient request slips must be completely filled -up by the nurse medical clerk

Out-patient request slips must be duly signed by the Medical Doctor on Duty assigned in OPD

Only requests from the CLSH Hospital will be honored by the laboratory

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 21

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Examination Performed

A Hematology

1 CBC (Complete Blood Count)2 Platelet Count3 Hemoglobin Test4 Clotting Time5 Bleeding Time

B Clinical Microscopy

1 Urinalysis2 Fecalysis

C Blood Banking and Serology

1 Blood Typing2 Hepatitis B Determination (Qualitative)3 Syphilis (Qualitative)

D Bacteriology

1 Acid fast Staining

E Blood Chemistry

1 Cholesterol2 Triglyceride3 Fasting Blood Sugar4 Blood Uric Acid5 Blood Urea Nitrogen6 Serum Creatinine

5 Reasons for ordering laboratory measurements examinations

a To confirm a clinical impression or establish a diagnosisb To rule out a diagnosisc To monitor therapy (management guide)d To establish prognosise To screen for or detect disease

SPECIMEN COLLECTION

2 General Procedure for Obtaining Blood

1 Skin Puncture2 Venous Puncture

Technique for Venous Puncture

1 Identify the patient2 If fasting is required confirm that fasting order has been followed3 Inform the patient of the procedure to be done

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 22

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Prepare the patient and all equipment needed5 Select a suitable vein for venipuncture Veins of the antecubital fossa in

particular the median cubital and cephalic veins are preferred Wrist ankle and hand veins may also be used If one arm has an intravenous line use the other arm to draw a blood specimen

6 Cleanse the venipuncture site with 70 isopropyl alcohol Allow the arm to dry Do not touch the swabbed area with any unsterile object

7 Apply a tourniquet several inches above the puncture site Never leave the tourniquet in place longer than one minute

8 Anchor the vein firmly both above and below the puncture site Use either the thumb and middle finger or thumb and index finger

9 Perform the venipuncture10Release the tourniquet when blood begins to flow11After all blood has been drawn have the patient relax his or her fist Do

not allow the patient to pump the hand12Place a clean sterile cotton ball lightly over the side Withdraw the needle

then apply pressure to the site13Mix tubes with anticoagulant For syringe-drawn specimens transfer blood

to appropriate tubes taking precautions to avoid hemolyzing the specimens Follow any special handling procedures

14Check condition of the patient whether patient is faint and that bleeding is under control

15Dispose of contaminated material such as needles syringes cotton etc16Deliver tubes of blood for testing to appropriate departments

An additional protocol is important in the venipuncture procedure Follow the recommended ldquoorder of drawrdquo when collecting tubes To avoid contamination draw specimens into non-additive tubes before tubes with additives

17Let the blood sample retract completely before centrifuging Separate serum from clotted blood Make sure proper labeling is observed and practiced

HEMATOLOGY

Preparation and staining of Blood Smears for Diffferential Count

Principle

The examination of the peripheral blood smear is the most important examination one can do in hematological evaluation of a patient

Materials Needed

1 Pricker or lancet2 Microscope slides3 Spreader4 Pencil5 Cotton soaked in alcohol6 Dry cotton

Procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 23

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 Puncture the skin as desired and wipe away the first drop of blood2 Touch the surface of the clean slide to a small drop of blood the drop

should be placed near one end of the slide3 Turn the slide over such that the drop of blood is now on the top side and

the other end of the slide away from the drop of the blood is held by the thumb and forefinger of the left hand The other finger serves to support the slide

4 Pick up another slide and loosely between thumb and forefinger of the right hand

5 The slide in the right hand is called the spreader slide Place the spreader in front of the drop and pull back until it touches the drop

6 As soon as the blood spreads by capillary attraction almost to the edge of the slide push the spreader forwards at an angle of approximately 30-45 degrees using a rapid even motion

Note

The weight of the slide is the only pressure applied the thickness of the spread is controlled by the size of the drop the angle at which the spreader slide is held and the speed of spreading The greater the angle the thicker and shorter is the film

7 Dry the slide in air when dried write the name of the patient and date in the thick end of the blood film using a pencil or at the other side of the slide

Staining for Differential Count

Reagents

Rapid Romanowsky staining using ldquorapi-diffrdquo

Solution A Fixing solution MethanolSolution B Acid dye EosinSolution C Basic dye Methylene blueSolution D Buffer pH 68 phosphate buffer

Procedure

1 Prepare a blood smear and air dry

2 Fix by immersing in Solution A for 30 seconds

3 Transfer without rinsing or drying to Solution B and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

4 Without rinsing transfer the slide to Solution C and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

5 Rinse briefly in buffered water pH 68 and allow to dry

Results Macroscopically

Smear in pinkish violet

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 24

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Normal Values

Neutrophils 40-60

Lymphocytes 20-40

Monocyte 4-8

Eosinophil 1-3

Basophil 0-1

Stab 0-1

Peripheral Blood Smear

Procedure in reading peripheral blood smear

1 Examine the blood smear grossly against the light and note the contour and background color

2 Examine under the low power in order to ascertain the adequacy of the staining and select the best fields for study

3 Note agglutination or rouleaux formation of erythrocytes

4 Examine the slides systematically starting at the thin end In this way reduplication of the field is avoided Fields should be avoided in which the red cells are stacked up or are in rouleaux and fields should be examined in which the red cells are well separated and the white cells thinly spread

5 Examine the erythrocytes and note variations in size shape color hemoglobin content abnormal objects in cytoplasm and number of nucleated red cells per 100 leukocytes

6 Examine the WBC and study the morphology

CLINICAL MICROSCOPY

Routine Urinalysis

I Organization of Work

Steps Multistix Test

1 Agitate the urine container Examine the urine with regards to color and transparency

2 Fill the centrifuge tube with the urine

3 Dip a multistix strip into the tube and determine the following by comparing with test chart after specific reading time

a Specific Gravity - 45 ndash 60 seconds

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 25

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

b Ph - time not criticalc Protein - read immediatelyd Glucose - 10 ndash 30 seconds

II Microscopic Examination

Procedure

1 Mix the urine well first and obtain a few cc into a test tube2 Centrifuge urine for five minutes3 Decant the supernatant liquid in a quick motion so that the

sediments are left at the bottom of the test tube4 Place in a clean slide5 Examine under the microscope (regulate lighting by adjusting the

substage diaphragm)6 Focus first at low power then shift to the high power objective

Report as follows

1 RBC and WBC ndash average cells hpf2 Casts ndash average casts per hpf3 Epithelial Cells lpf or accasional few moderate abundant4 Crystals lpf are rare few moderate abundant

Fecalysis

I Macroscopic or Physical Examination

1 Form Consistency and Size

2 Color

II Direct fecal Smear

Procedure

1 Place a drop of saline on the slide2 Using an applicator stick take a small portion of the stool

Formed ndash take the portion from well inside the sampleMucus or watery ndash take the portion from the bloodstained mucus on the surface or from the surface of the liquid

3 mix the sample with the drop of saline on the slide4 Examine the specimen under LPO then shift to HPO5 Report as follows

Normal No Parasite seenMucous Normal - a very small amount

Blood - no blood present

BACTERIOLOGY

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 26

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

SPUTUM EXAMINATION

Acid Fast Bacilli

Signs and symptoms of Asymptomatic Patient

1 Cough for 2 weeks duration or more2 Chest and upper back pains for one month duration or more3 Hemoptysis or blood streaking4 On and off afternoon fever for one month duration or more5 Regressive loss of weight

Collection of specimen

1 Identify the patient through signs and symptoms2 Instruct the patient properly3 Collect the first sputum in the morning4 The patient should be standing if possible5 He should take a very deep breath filling his lungs6 He should empty his lungs in one breath coughing as hard and deeply as

he can7 He should spit what he brings up into the jar or sputum cup8 Label the jar or sputum cup with his name and date

After Collection

Check that sufficient amount of sputum has been produced

The sputum of an infected person usually containsa thick mucus air bubblesb threads of fibrinc patches of pusd occasional brownish streaks of blood

Preparation of Sputum Smears

Materials glass slides (new if possible unscratched) inoculating loop or coconut midribs cotton wool plug on metal wire for flaming alarm clock (timer)

Procedure

1 Prepare two slides Take a purulent potion of the sputum one scrath slide using either one sterile inoculating loop or two to form tongs

2 Make the smear as thin as possible covering as large an area as possible tracing concentric circles well separated but not reaching the edges of the slide

Preparation for fixing Sputum Smear

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 27

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Materials sputum smears alcohol lamp match

Procedure of fixing

1 Dry smears in the air2 Fix the smears by passing the slides three times through the flame3 Let it cool before staining

Preparation in Staining using Ziehl-Neelsen (Hot Method)

Principle The tubercule bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis is acid-fast and stains res with Ziehl-Neelsen stain while almost all other organisms stain blue

Materials alcohol lamp match forceps sputum smears cotton wool soaked in 70 ethanol Ziehl-Neelsen reagents denatured alcohol (for burning)

Reagents1 carbol fuchsin2 acid water or acid alcohol3 aqueous methylene blue

Procedure in staining

1 Cover the slides with filtered carbol fuchsin2 Dip the cotton wool swab in the methylated spirit ignite and pass slowly

under the slides to heat them3 As soon as steam begins to rise set the timer at five minutes4 Continue to heat so that the steam is seen but without boiling for five

minutes add more fuchsin immediately to avoid drying5 Wash with tap water or distilled water6 Decolorize with acid water or acid alcohol for one minute7 Wash with tap water8 Counterstain with aqueous methylene blue for thirty seconds or one

minute9 Wash with tap water for one minute10Drain and leave to dry on a slide rack

Examine under Oil Immersion Field

Results

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 28

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 2: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

H E A D Q U A R T E R SCAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL CENTCOM

ARMED FORCES OF THE PHILIPPINESCamp Lapulapu Cebu City

CC23 02 February 2009

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURESNUMBER 01-2009

GENERAL

11 This SOP lists procedures that are unique to the Medical Service CLSH CENTCOM AFP and should be used as a guideline for its personnel in accomplishing routines or recurring actions or matters in providing services to the patients of this hospital

12 This SOP is used to advise new personnel or newly-attached units of the procedures followed in this unit

13 Upon instruction of the CO CLSH this SOP may be changed or any portion of it may be deleted or amended to meet altered conditions of newly accepted practices in administration and medicine

14 Preparation publication and distribution of this hospital SOP are the responsibility of the Operation Officer CLSH and Chief Medical Services of the hospital shall prepare the appropriate portions of this SOP

2 PHYSICAL EXAMINATIONS

21Requesting party will secure their request to be signed by their CO or Chief of Office for PE personnel approvalnotation prior to proceed of any physical examination to the different section

22PE personnel is responsible for the briefing of the requesting party about the procedures of Physical Examination

23PE personnel is the over-all supervisor to all applicants for physical examinations

24General PE

PE personnel is responsible for the checking of documents prior to General Physical Examination

25PE personnel is responsible for the typing job and filing of documents after the Gen PE

26PE personnel is responsible for the issuance of certification for Promotion Reenlistment ETAD Commissionship FILLER and Enlistment

27PE personnel is responsible to all documents for Medical and Dental doctors signature

28PE personnel is responsible to all incoming and outgoing documents

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 2

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

29 PE personnel is responsible for the information of concern applicants about the working days of documents from 3-5 days allowance depending the availability of the medical doctors to sign the final Report of Medical Examination

210 PROCEDURE DURING PHYSICAL EXAMINATION

The following steps for PE

STEP I - FROM PE SECTION TO NP SECTIONSTEP II - FROM NP SECTION TO LAB SECTIONSTEP III - FROM LAB SECTION TO X-RAY SECTIONSTEP IV - FROM X-RAY SECTION TO ECG SECTIONSTEP V - FROM ECG SECTION TO DENTALSTEP VI - FROM DENTAL TO EENT SECTION STEP VII - FROM EENT SECTION TO OPS FOR GEN PESTEP VIII - FROM OPS RETURN BACK TO PE SECTION

FOR TYPING

SCHEDULED FOR PEGEN PE

DAYS MORNING AFTERNOONM ndash W - F 0800H - 1130H (ROUTINE PE) 1330H -1630H - (GEN PE)T - TH 0800H - 1130H (ROUTINE PE)

211 Steps for civilian medical certificate

STEP I - Get authority duly signed OPD OIC and Chief JAGOSTEP II - Get OPD recordSTEP III - For CBC UA Chest X-ray ECG pay first FSU for

The proceduresSTEP IV - Go to labs chest x-ray ECGSTEP V - Go to MOD for P ESTEP VI - Issuance of Medical Certificate

SOP MOD

1 Duty MOD will takeover the responsibilities of running the medical aspect of the hospital during hisher tour of duty As such she will be responsible for permitting admissions and discharge permitting evacuation and surgery monitoring of all patients supervising medical interns PGIrsquos nurses and their interns and other volunteers

2 Decisions requiring the level of authorization of CLSH Commanding Officer must be referred to CLSH Commanding Officer

3 MOD tour of duty will be for 24hours or until proper endorsement is done 4 The incoming and outgoing MOD must be both present during the morning

endorsement to facilitate efficient turn-over of medical care5 At no occasion will the MOD leave hisher post6 MOD are tasked to be trainers of medical paramedical interns PGIrsquos and other

paramedical volunteers as such they must be guided with the policies stated in AFP Circ 12 dtd 12 Aug 1989 It is stated that the training of medical and paramedical interns shall achieve the following

a motivate medical and paramedical personnel in the military careerb contribute to the national defence effort in building trained medical

manpower

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 3

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

c assist technical and administrative personnel of AFP hospitals in their various functions with patient care

d afford clinical training to the various interns in fulfilment of statutory requirements for the completion of their respective courses andor requirements prior to government board examinations

e Help promote pleasant civilian-military relationship7 At no time shall the interest and welfare of patients be subordinated to the

conduct of the affiliation training program8 rules and regulations regarding the conduct of training shall be prescribed by The

Surgeon General AFP9 the total number of interns accepted in AFP hospitals shall not exceed one per

five patient

PT SECTION SOP

1the CLSH PT Section can accept PT volunteers who are certified by MECS and PRC and who are from trainingteaching hospitals which are duly recognized by the Department of Health2 CLSH OTPT Section operates for 8hours3 Application for CLSH PTOT volunteer will be guided by the CLSH Security SOP4 PT NCOIC will assist the C Clinical Section in orienting the volunteers on the military protocol and on the CLSH SOP5 Accepted Volunteers must act in accordance to the policies of CLSH and CENTCOM policies regarding the behaviour duties and responsibilities similar to those of the CLSH employees

3 LABORATORY SECTION

31 PersonnelCPT LOUISE A CAJITA MC ndash OICTSG ULYSSES C BONTUYAN PA ndash NCOICMs Manresa D Cantildeales ndash Medical TechnologistMs Joan S Quibedo ndash Medical Technologist

32 Working HoursMon ndash Ms Manresa D Cantildeales 0700H ndash 1600HTues ndash Ms Joan S Quibedo 0700H - 1600H

Ms Manresa D Cantildeales 0700H ndash 1600HWed - Ms Manresa D Cantildeales 0700H ndash 1600HThu - Ms Manresa D Cantildeales 0700H ndash 1600H

Ms Joan S Quibedo 0700H ndash 1600HFri - Ms Joan S Quibedo 0700H ndash 1600HSat - Ms Manresa D Cantildeales 0800H ndash 1200HSun - Ms Joan S Quibedo 0800H ndash 1200H

33 Schedule of Different Laboratory examinations

Blood Chemistry

Tuesday and Thursday (except ldquoSTATrdquo or as scheduled or requested by MOD any days)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 4

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Extraction Time 0730H ndash 0800H In-Patient0800H ndash 0830H Out-Patient

34 All Out-Patient must secure a request from the MOD and must submit their request to the Laboratory a day before the scheduled extraction for proper instruction and scheduling We will not entertain patients who are not scheduled for that particular day All out-patients are advised to follow the schedule above We will not entertain patients after the cut-off time

35 For all in-patients the NOD should submit their request to the laboratory a day before the schedule of extraction

35-1 CBC UA SE etc

All out-patient should secure request from the MOD and should get their case number from the AampD Section before going to the laboratory Urine and stool specimens should strictly be in the morning only Cut-off time to all examinations is upto 1100H only except for ldquoSTATrdquo request

35-2 AFP (Sputum exam) and Newborn Screening ndash In-Patient ndash only Nurse-On-Duty should coordinate first with the Med-On-Duty for scheduling

35-3 Examinations done on outside laboratories ndash NOD must coordinate first

with the Med-Tech on duty for pricing and scheduling

35-4 Physical Examinations for Promotion Reenlistment Enlistment CAD APE etc MWF ndash 0800H ndash 1100H (cut-off time)

35-5 Results

Releasing of Out-Patient is at 1500HIn-Patient ndash Duty Med-Tech will endorse the result as soon as it is done

4 PHARMACY SECTION

41 DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

41-1 Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

a Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothesb Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities

(for Dependents)

41-2 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 5

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0800H ndash 1100H

41-3 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their

respective dispensary41-4 Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines41-5 No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

42 REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

42-1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

42-2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 PHYSICAL THERAPY

51 PT SESSION

51-1 Requesting party will secure their request to be signed by the Medical

Officer512 PT personnel is responsible for the briefing of the requesting party

about the procedures of PT Section

51-3 PT personnel is the over-all supervisor to all patients for physical therapy

treatment51-4 PT personnel is responsible the issuance of certification to all PT

volunteers 51-5 PT personnel is responsible for the issuance of medical certificate

to the patient

51-6 PT personnel is responsible on attending the PT treatment to the patients

51-7 Civilian patient are required to pay every treatment session thru Sgt Ancheta the finance before physical therapy treatment to the

patient 51-8 PT personnel are responsible to write PT notes every Physical

Therapy Treatment to the patient

52 SCHEDULE FOR PT TREATMENT

DAY MORNING AFTERNOONMONDAY TO FRIDAY 0800H ndash 1200H NONE

6 EENT EXAMINATION

61 EENT SESSION

61-1 Requesting party will secure their request to be signed by the Medical

Officer61-2 EENT personnel is responsible and assist the EENT doctor during

EENT

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 6

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

examination61-3 EENT personnel is the over-all supervisor to all patients for EENT

examination61-4 EENT personnel is responsible the issuance of certification and

medical certificate to all patients

61-5 EENT Doctor personnel is responsible on attending for the EENT treatment to the patients

61-6 EENT personnel is responsible to write EENT Doctor notes every every

EENT Treatment to the patient61-7 EENT personnel is responsible to all in and out communications at

EENT section

61-8 EENT personnel is responsible logbooks at EENT Section

62 SCHEDULE FOR EENT TREATMENT

DAY MORNING AFTERNOONM - W - F 0800H ndash 1130H 1330H -1630HT - TH 0800H ndash 1130H 1330H- 1430H

1500H - ATHLETIC

7 OBYNE SECTION

71 OBGYNE SECTION MISSION

To provide prenatal care and proper follow up for all normal and abnormal cases

of obtestric and gynecologic pateints

72 Prenatal schedule and consultation

DAY SCHEDULE MORNING AFTERNOONMON TO FRI PRENATAL 0800H-

1200H1300H-1700H

TUE amp THUGYNE CONSULTATIONFAMILY PLANING CONSUL

0800H-1200H

1300H-1700H

WEDNESDAY IMUNIZATION 0800H-1200H

73 The following are entitled to free prenatal check-up

1ST priority - Military personnel active service2ND priority - Direct dependents3RD priority - Civilian employees4TH priority - Unmaried dependents are entitled prenatal less than

18 years old of age

74 Check ndash up provided they will secure an authority duly signed by the OBGYNE

head CO and JAGO and pay the prenatal fee as prescribed by GHQ

4 2 1 - Retirees and Veterans

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 7

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 2 2 - Authorized civilians4 2 3 - Married or Unmarried dependents 18 years and above

` 42 1 - Children of dependents whether married or unmarried dependents

75 Requirements for pre-natal and consultation

a MilitaryDependents IDb Latest payslip of Military Personnelc MDRMarriage Contractd Newborn Screening payment six hundred pesos (P60000) only to be

Collected at 29 weeks AOGe Delivery Room requirements should be endorsed to Dependents Ward DR at 32 weeks AOG

8 NEURO PSYCHO EXAMINATION

81 Psychometrician or Psychologist will administer tests prescribed only in the AFPR G165-362 dtd 29 October 1996

81-1 For enlistment and trainee1 Intelligence Tests (Note IQ will not be reported as IQ points but

in terms of range eg not as 75 but ldquoAveragerdquo)2 Personality Tests

a Sentence Completion Testb MMPI or its equivalentc NP Forms

81-2 For Annual PE (Active Duty Status)1 Guilford-Zimmerman Temperament Survey2 Those who have not taken an IQ test will be required to take the SRA 3 Verbal Forms or the Personnel Tests for Industry

81-3 For Reenlistment1 NP Screening Forms2 Sentence Completion Forms

81-4 For Retirement (Officers and EM)Psychiatric interview to include review of clinicalhealthy records

81-5 For Supply Accountable Officer1 IQ Test3 Personality Test

82 The manner in which the psychologist or psychometrician administers the tests will be guided by their training

83 The manner with which they give recommendations will be guided by the provisions stated in the AFPR G pp 79-91

84 In the absence of an authorized NP Screener the CO will sign 42and 72 in the AFP PE form

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 8

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

85 Personnel will be allowed to take NP examination upon approval of their requests from COPE personnel

86 Schedule of Examinations

MondayAM - Scheduling of ExamPM - Conduct NP Examination

TuesdayAM - EvaluationInterviewRecordingPM - Athletics

WednesdayAM ndash PM - Conduct NP Examination

ThursdayAM - EvaluationInterviewRecordingPM - Athletics

FridayAM - PM - Conduct NP Examination

87 NP Examination Results will be forwarded to PE personnel for consolidation and

record purposes

88 In instances where the expertise of a Psychiatrist is needed and none is available

in the hospital a request for augmentation has to be made to the higher headquarters addressed to a military hospital which has an in-house Psychiatrist

9 X-RAY EXAMINATIONS

97 For Physical Examinations91-1 Applicants must present form from PE section prior examination91-2 Schedule of Examinations will be from Monday to Friday from

0800H-1130H

91-3 X-Ray result will be forwarded to PE section for consolidation

98 For Out-Patient92-1 Patient must present request signed by the duty MOD922 Schedule of Examinations will be from Monday to Friday from

0800H ndash 1130H

99 For In-Patient99-1 Examinations will be done anytime upon request from the MOD

910 Wednesday is Maintenance Day no examinations except emergency cases

10 OUT-PATIENT CONSULTATION

101 Requirements for consultation

101-1 Military Personnel ndash present military ID101-2 Dependents ndash present dependents IDMDR

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 9

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

101-3 CAA ndash present CAA ID101-4 Civilian Employees ndash present ID101-5 Authorized Civilians ndash must fill-up Authorization to be signed by CO

Prior consultation

102 Schedule of Consultation

Monday amp Wednesday

AM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM ndash 1330H ndash 1430H

Tuesday amp ThursdayAM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM - Athletics

FridayAM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM - 1330H ndash 1530H

103 Patients should be taken vital signsblood pressure prior examination104 Issuance of Medical Certificate must be upon approval of the MOD and

control number should be indicated with CLSH Office Seal

11 POLICIES AND GUIDELINES IN CONDUCTING DIAGNOSTIC EXAMINATIONS

111 Radiology Section

The attending physician writes order of X-ray examination in the patientrsquos chart

The ward nurse prepares a request of X-ray examination Radiology personnel logs request in their logbook The ward man accompanies the patient to the x-ray section For special procedures appropriate SOP is followed The ward nurse documents the time date manner of moving

and condition of the patient An X-ray personnel forwards the x-ray result to the ward

concerned and asks the recipient to sign in the logbook

Ward staff refers significant result to the attending physician and attaches the result to the patientrsquos

chart

112 Laboratory Section

The ward nurse fills up a laboratory examination request and forwards it to the laboratory The request must contain the

patientrsquos complete name which includes the middle name the patientrsquos rank age unit birth date name of the exam to be performed and the date it is to be performed

The patient is instructed on the proper collection of specimen Cut-off time for all examinations is up to 1100H only except for

ldquoSTATrdquo Patients admitted beyond 1100H who require routine laboratory exams such as CBC and UA shall

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 10

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

have their examinations performed the following day

ldquoSTATrdquo laboratory examinations are coordinated and done immediately

Sputum exams and newborn screenings are coordinated first with the medical technologist-on-duty for scheduling

Repeat sputum exams are prioritized over new PTB cases for AFB smear

Newborn screening is done only after the infant is 24 hours old Infants scheduled for newborn screening will be cord dressed

but will be not bathed on the morning of the exam Blood chemistry studies are done on Tuesdays and Thursdays

only Laboratory requests for such exams must be forwarded a day prior to the exam

Examinations to be done at outside laboratories or specimens that need to be sent out must be coordinated first by the

NOD with the medical technologist-on-duty for pricing and scheduling

Payment for outside laboratories must be settled by the Supply Section Officer-in-charge with the permission of the Admin

Officer Laboratory results will be endorsed by the medical technologist-

on-duty as soon as they are available

12 POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS ADVANCE DIRECTIVES

121 Any person of legal age and of sound mind may make an advance directive for physicians to administer terminal care when he she

suffers from the terminal phase of a terminal illness PROVIDED that

a He she is informed of the medical consequences of his her choice b He she releases those involved in his her care from any

obligation relative to the consequences on his her decisionc His her decision will not prejudice health and safety d A written request must be signed by the patient himherself duly

witnessed by a relative or significant others or a hospital personnel

e In case the patient is incapable of giving the consent and a third party consent is required the following persons in the order of priority stated hereunder may give consent

a Spouseb Son of or daughter of legal age

c Either parent d Brother or sister of legal age or e Guardian

122 Consent form once signed and witnessed should be attached to patients chart for filling

13 POLICIES ON DOCTORrsquoS ROUNDS

Doctorrsquos rounds are made everyday in the morning Except for unusual cases which are made daily

Unusual observations are referred to the Medical Officer of the (MOD) after duty hours

New orders are carried out promptly and accurately Routine laboratory treatments are done after treatment

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 11

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

14 POLICIES ON DISCHARGING A PATIENT

141 Military Patients

141a Return to Duty

a Attending physician writes the discharge orderb Patientrsquos chart should be reviewed for completeness

particularly the Cover Sheet which should be signed by the Medical Officer

c Upon receipt of order for discharge Disposition Slip (Cover Sheet) is prepared and forwarded to A amp D Section for issuance of Special Order

d Discharged patients will report to their respective unit first hour of their Expected Date of Return to Duty (EDRD) No discharge will be made on the date of disposition Patients may go on pass before EDRD depending on the Ward Officerrsquos discretion or they may also stay in the hospital until their EDRD

e Prior to discharge patients are given Clearance Form to be completed

f The duty nurse writes and gives discharge instructions to the patient and significant others as well as the date of follow-up check up

g PhilHealth Form shall be properly accomplished by the patient attached with MDR Form and military ID

h Retro-evac patients when recovered these patients will be discharged accordingly following routine disposition of all patients

i The duty nurse checks all equipment items issued to patient are returned

j Discard all medicine card tags except for roster card Indicate EDRD and final diagnosis on the roster card and retained it until EDRD is due

k Locate patientrsquos name on the A amp D book and write the final diagnosis and EDRD opposite their names

l Log patientrsquos name in the discharge checklist and send to A amp D Section together with the chart which is arranged properly and have it properly received by the A amp D personnel

m Drop patient from census on the date of discharge n Document discharge time date condition of patient and

manner of leaving Nursing Unit

141b Discharge by Evacuationa Bring the chart with order final diagnosis and completed cover

sheet to the A amp D Section so that three copies of evacuation papers can be accomplished and evacuation flights can be coordinated

b Evacuation paper Letter Order Narrative Summary and pertinent diagnostic results (together with x-ray plates ECG Tracing etc) are given to the patient and checked by the NOD

c Patients are prohibited to carry firearms during the travel Firearms or deadly weapons of patients for evacuation shall remain in deposit with CLSH storeroom for safekeeping

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 12

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

d Indicate final diagnosis date of evacuation and place to be evacuated opposite the patientrsquos name in the A and D book and drop from census

e Return borrowed items in the CSR

141c Transfer of Hospital (within Cebu) a When the patient needs extensive medicalsurgical

management beyond the capability of the hospital Ward Officer is responsible for completion of all data necessary for transfer to include preparation of Narrative Summary

b Ward master ward man on duty will forward Disposition Form to A amp D Section

c Narrative summary will go with the patient chart should remain in the hospital for future use filing and safekeeping

141d Discharge by Deatha When death occurs on the ward the nurse on duty shall

immediately notify the A amp D Section personnel on duty who should prepare the death certificate The last attending Medical Officer completes the diagnosis and other clinical requirements

b Post mortem care should be done before sending the cadaver to the morgue

c All belongings of the deceased shall be properly accounted for and turned over to the relatives properly receipted

d A death certificate shall be given to the immediate relatives who will accompany the cadaver to the funeral parlor

e Log patientrsquos final diagnosis datetime of death in the A and D book and census

142 Dependents1421Discharge procedure is the same as that of the military except that

they can be discharged on the day of disposition once clearance is obtained

1422For the patientrsquos who are discharged against medical advice the patient of legal age or his her parent and or relative are made to sign a certificate to the effect that the hospital shall not be responsible for anything that would happen to the patient after he leaves the hospital after the doctorrsquos order which is also signed by two (2) witnesses

143 Civilian 1431Civilian employees retired military personnel dependents of retired

military personnel pure civilian have the same discharge procedure as dependents

1432Nurse on Duty should prepare billing prior to discharge 1433Billing of Civilian patients will be done by the Finance Sergeant1434Obligations such as hospital charges shall be settled at the

Admission and Disposition (A amp D) Section before discharge 1435Civilian employee with Phil health form must accomplish the form

in order to obtain clearance from the A amp D Section Medicines medical supplies diagnostic examinations and days of hospitalization should be listed and forwarded to the A amp D Section with the patientrsquos chart

1436Dependents of retired military personnel - same as above1437Retired Military Personnel (RMP) - only mess is charge1438Pure civilian - same as the civilian employees

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 13

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1439Patient presents a duly accomplished clearance prior to the release of discharge order and receipt of payment to the nurse on duty

15 EMERGENCY ROOM POLICIES AND GUIDELINES

1 only emergency cases are entertained in the ER General consultations are referred to the OPD After office hours and on SaturdaySunday and Holiday consultations may be entertained upon the discretion of the OPD

2 patients must be referred to the MOD

3 NOD should obtain the patientrsquos chief complaint weight vital signs get gestational data (LMP ED BP FH FHT if the patient is an OBGYNE case) and other admitting notes

4 inform patient of the existing hospital policies and guidelines upon admission (visiting schedule rights responsibilities policies and regulations

5 provide watcherrsquos id and provide the admin on duty with the list of admitted patients

6 NOD must facilitate requisition of hospital number

7 MOD attends to the patients The nurse on duty assists the MOD in performing assessments

8 for admitted patients MOD writes order for the medical treatment and the ER nurse on duty immediately executes them

9 a signed consent must be obtained from the patients In case of minor or handicapped patients guardians must fill up the consent for them

10NOD should facilitate laboratory works

11 IVF insertion is done either by the PGI on dutyMOD or NOD

12NOD starts giving the medications available Drugs that require skin testing must be performed at the ER and this should be confirmed by the physician and recorded in the patientrsquos chart

13MODNOD gives initial health teachings to the client or significant others as needed

14NOD regulates the IVF of patients before transporting to the ward

15 if patient refuses admission she must inform the MOD and sign a waiver denouncing the hospital from any liabilities A thorough explanation by the MOD shall be afforded to the patient upon signing of the waiver

16 illiterate patientscompanion must be asked to have their thumb marks on the record

17all stocks medicines used by the patient must be replaced as soon as possible on or before the patient leaves the ER This will be done by the duty ER NCO

18only emergency cases are provided with ER stocks NOD gets the prescription and have these items replaced by the pharmacy andor CSR

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 14

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

19ER NOD duty ER NCO will be held accountable for whatever lossesdeficiencies that may occur during hisher shift

20 inventory of all ER items is done every after shift by the NOD

21ER NCOIC must submit a monthly inventory report to the pharmacy and supply section for auditing purposes

22consultations are not entertained in the ER during office hours They are referred to the OPD

23communicableInfectious conditions which require isolation and cases other than OB-GYNEPedia are not accepted for admission but referred to other agencies after MOD has evaluated the patient The MOD should call and should be the one to make the call to the hospital where the patient is to be transferred to

24wounds of more than 24-hour duration are not entertained in te ER but in the OPD except on holidays Saturdays and Sundays

25 for invasive procedures a consent signed by the patient (if adult) companion andor guardian should be obtained before treatment or care is instituted

26should patient refuse she cannot be submitted to a particular treatment This should be properly documented on the patientrsquos record and have the patient sign a waiver for the refusal

27 for emergency cases where a patientrsquos life is in danger no consent is necessary However proper notation shall be made on the patientrsquos record by the physician and must be affirmed by a witness

28media is not allowed within the ER premises to avoid distortion in the management of patients

29dean on arrival (DOA) clients in ER cases are classified in the following categories

DOA Criteria0 vital signs ndash CPR done rarr failedNo death certificate shall be issuedER death ndash 0 vital signs rarr CPRrarr reviverarr died within 26 hoursHospital issue death certificateDOA and ER deaths should be marked on the patientrsquos record in bold

letters using ball pen

30all procedures performed in the ER shall be subjected to official charging which will be forwarded to the different branch of services where the patient belongs Only CENTCOM organic military personnel will be carried free of charge

15 POLICIES ON DO NOT RESUSCITATE (DNR)

151 Definition of Terms151a Resuscitation is a medical procedure which seeks to

restore cardiac andor respiratory function to individuals who have sustained a cardiac andor respiratory arrest

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 15

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

151b Do Not Resuscitate (DNR) is a medical order to provide no resuscitation to individuals for

whom resuscitation is not warranted151c Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) is the

common term used to refer to resuscitation However the options available to treat very sick patients are broader than CPR as literally defined Other options include intensive care antibiotic therapy hydration and nutritional support Appropriate comfort care measures should be employed for all patients especially terminally ill patients

152 DNR Protocol

1521WILL suction the airway administer oxygen position for comfort splint or immobilize control bleeding provide pain medication provide emotional support and contact other appropriate health care providers and

1521WILL NOT administer chest compressions insert an artificial airway administer resuscitative drugs defibrillate or

cardiovert provide respiratory assistance (other than suctioning the airway and administering oxygen) initiate resuscitative IV or initiate cardiac monitoring

153 Types of DNR Orders

1531a DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time the order

is given DNR Comfort Care orders permit comfort care only both before and during a cardiac or respiratory arrest Resuscitative therapies will not be

administered prior to an arrest This order is generally regarded as appropriate for patients who have a terminal illness short life expectancy little chance of surviving CPR and a desire to let nature take its course in the face of an impending arrest

1531b DNR Comfort Care-ArrestDNR Comfort Care-Arrest orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time of a cardiac or respiratory arrest A cardiac arrest occurs when there is an absence of a palpable pulse A respiratory arrest occurs when there are no spontaneous respirations or there is agonal breathing Resuscitative therapies will be administered before an arrest but not during an arrest The term DNR (without additional wording) when recorded in the medical chart shall be considered a DNR Comfort Care-Arrest order

1531c DNR Specified All other DNR orders are DNR Specified orders DNR Specified orders modify the DNR Protocol in some respect either in treatment modalities or in the timing of the protocol activation

1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 16

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart

1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order

DNR is a medical order to be given only by authorized health care practitioners DNR orders generally should be given with the informed consent of the patient or the patientrsquos surrogate decision-maker Ideally the physician should sensitively discuss the DNR option with the patient while the patient is mentally competent However DNR orders are often considered for patients who are comatose or who otherwise lack decisional capacity with whom this discussion has not occurred or cannot occur

In cases when a patient lacks decisional capacity the DNR option should be considered in conjunction with the patients advance directives if known or should be discussed with a surrogate A surrogate may be designated by a patient as the attorney-in-fact in a Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care A surrogate may also be identified as the first available person(s) from the following list in order

f Spouseg Son of or daughter of legal age h Either parent i Brother or sister of legal age or j Guardian

In all cases the primary physician should discuss the DNR option with the patient if possible and the surrogate(s) if appropriate There is no obligation to offer or initiate CPR if resuscitation would be futile ie if resuscitation would not achieve its physiological objective would offer no benefit to the patient and would violate reasonable medical standards

154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart

The words DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care-Arrest or DNR Specified should be recorded on the left-hand side of the medical chart (where advance directives are maintained) along with the date time rationale for the DNR order the names of the patient andor family members involved in the decision and a statement that the patient andor surrogate was fully informed about and consented to the DNR order If a DNR Specified order is recorded the modifications to the DNR Protocol should be specified in the medical chart as well as the desired timing of the activation of the modified Protocol

DNR decisions for inpatients should be transmitted clearly to those caring for the patients A DNR order should never result in the abandonment of a patient and steps should

155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders

The DNR order should be reassessed as part of the ongoing evaluation of an inpatient A DNR order should be affirmed modified or revoked only after a discussion between the primary physician and the patient if possible or the surrogate(s) if appropriate and the consent of the patient or surrogate DNR orders should be reassessed frequently and

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 17

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

as conditions warrant Reassessments of DNR orders should be documented in the medical chart If a DNR order is changed from one of the three types of DNR orders to a different type the patients DNR bracelet should be replaced with a new bracelet containing the revised designation If a DNR order is revoked the DNR bracelet should be removed and destroyed A physician or other health care worker who feels that he or she cannot honor a patients DNR request may not prevent or delay the transfer of the patient to a physician or facility which will honor the DNR status

156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care

The administration of anesthesia necessarily involves some practices and procedures that might be viewed as resuscitation in other settings Prior to any inpatient or outpatient invasive procedure for which the policy requires the documentation of informed consent any existing DNR order should when possible be reviewed with the patient or the patients surrogate As a result of this review the status of the DNR order during the perioperative period should be affirmed clarified or modified based on the preferences of the patient Any clarifications or modifications should be documented in the medical chart along with a notation indicating if or when the original DNR order should be reinstated Concurrence on these issues by the primary physician the surgeon and the anesthesiologist is desirable The DNR bracelet should not be removed during the perioperative period even if the DNR order has been temporarily modified

157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives

In the event of a conflict between one of the three types of DNR orders and an advance directive which has become effective because a person is unable to communicate and is terminally ill or permanently unconscious the instructions from the document (or person named as an Attorney-in-Fact) ranked higher in the following list shall prevail

a Living will of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

b Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care or an Attorney-in-Fact acting in accordance therewith of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

c DNR order d

16POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS DISCHARGE INSTRUCTION

161 The patient or his her legal guardian has the right to be informed by the physician or his her delegate ( nurse) of his her continuing health care requirements following discharge including instructions about

a Take home medicationsb Dietc Physical activityd Special instructions

- Signs to watch out for - When to bring the patient back to the physician- Instructions to follow in the event of untoward incidences

complications

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 18

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

e Follow-up Check-upf All other pertinent information to promote health and well-being

162 At the end patientrsquos confinement he she is entitled to a brief written summary of the course of his her illness which shall include at least the history physical examination diagnosis medications surgical procedure ancillary and laboratory procedures and the plan of further treatment and which shall be provided by the attending physician

17 POLICIES ON DISCLOSURE OF PATIENTrsquoS INFORMATION

171 The privacy of the patients must be assured at all stages of his her treatment Similarly the patient has the right to be free from unwarranted public exposure EXCEPT in the following cases

a When his her mental or physical condition is in controversy and the appropriate court in its discretion orders him her to submit to a physical or mental examination by a physician

b When the public health and safety so demandc When the patient waives his her rights

172 Any health care provider or practitioner involved in the treatment of the patient and all those who have legitimate access to the patientrsquos record is not authorized to divulge any information to a third party who has no concern with the care and welfare of the patient without his Her consent EXCEPT

a When such disclosure will benefit public health and safetyb When it is in the interest of justice and upon the order of a competent

courtc When patients waives in writing the confidential nature of such

information d When it is needed for continued medical treatment or advancement of

medical science subject to de-identification of patient and shared medical confidentiality for those who have access to the information

1721 Informing the spouse or the family to the first degree of the patientrsquos medical condition may be allowed Provided that the patient of legal age have the right to choose on whom to inform

1722 In case the patient is not of legal age or is mentally incapacitated such information shall be given to the parents legal guardian or his her next of kin

18 ETHICAL CONSIDERATIONS IN THE ADMINISTRATION OF BLOOD

181 The physician should obtain the patients informed consent before administering blood products This includes explaining to the patient the relative benefits and risks of receiving and not receiving the blood product as well as any reasonably viable alternatives

182 Generally in emergency situations where treatment is necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient and consent is not available (because the patient is unconscious or otherwise unable to consent) the physician may administer blood products (and any other treatment) necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient This does not apply if

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 19

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

the patient has expressly refused the treatment before becoming incompetent

183 A competent adult is entitled to refuse or cease any treatment for any reason

184 Parents ordinarily have the responsibility to provide consent on behalf of their young children however it is highly unlikely that parents can refuse life-saving treatment for their children Physicians may not simply override a parents refusal

185 Although it is legally clear that a mentally competent adult is entitled to refuse any medical treatment including a blood transfusion physicians have a responsibility to ensure that the refusal is truly informed and voluntary

186 In the case of adults who were once competent but have become temporarily or permanently incompetent substitute consent laws generally provide that their prior wishes regarding treatment decisions should be respected to the extent that they are known or can be determined

19 LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

191 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for IN-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSDoctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientStaff Nurse Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Proceed to the requesting Ward and collect

blood for the ordered examination Take specimen to the laboratoryExamine specimen Sign the resultRecord the result on its respective logbookRecord the result in PhilHealth logbookEndorse the result to the ward

Nurse On Duty Receive the result Refer the result to the Doctor on Duty

192 Specimens Received for Examination

Forms Needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatientPresent specimen with laboratory request signed by the Physician

Medical Technologist Receive specimen and laboratory requestExamine the specimen

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 20

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Sign the resultRecord the result to the respective logbook Endorse the Result to the Nurse on Duty for In- Patients and Release result to patients in OPD

193 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for OUT-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatient Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Receive the request and collect blood for the

ordered examination Examine specimen Sign the result Record the result on its respective logbook Record the result in OPD logbook Release the result

Patient Take the result to the Physician in OPD

194 Monthly Laboratory Report Census

Form Needed Monthly Report Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSMedical Technologist Record all daily results in the

logbookPrepare Monthly report based on the daily report of examinationsSign the reportGive the report to the OIC of the Laboratory for approval

OIC Laboratory Sign and approve the reportMedical Technologist Release the report

2 Laboratory Uniform

Laboratory uniform is a must on all working days except holidays but must be in laboratory gown when with patients

3 Request Slips

In-patient request slips must be completely filled -up by the nurse medical clerk

Out-patient request slips must be duly signed by the Medical Doctor on Duty assigned in OPD

Only requests from the CLSH Hospital will be honored by the laboratory

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 21

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Examination Performed

A Hematology

1 CBC (Complete Blood Count)2 Platelet Count3 Hemoglobin Test4 Clotting Time5 Bleeding Time

B Clinical Microscopy

1 Urinalysis2 Fecalysis

C Blood Banking and Serology

1 Blood Typing2 Hepatitis B Determination (Qualitative)3 Syphilis (Qualitative)

D Bacteriology

1 Acid fast Staining

E Blood Chemistry

1 Cholesterol2 Triglyceride3 Fasting Blood Sugar4 Blood Uric Acid5 Blood Urea Nitrogen6 Serum Creatinine

5 Reasons for ordering laboratory measurements examinations

a To confirm a clinical impression or establish a diagnosisb To rule out a diagnosisc To monitor therapy (management guide)d To establish prognosise To screen for or detect disease

SPECIMEN COLLECTION

2 General Procedure for Obtaining Blood

1 Skin Puncture2 Venous Puncture

Technique for Venous Puncture

1 Identify the patient2 If fasting is required confirm that fasting order has been followed3 Inform the patient of the procedure to be done

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 22

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Prepare the patient and all equipment needed5 Select a suitable vein for venipuncture Veins of the antecubital fossa in

particular the median cubital and cephalic veins are preferred Wrist ankle and hand veins may also be used If one arm has an intravenous line use the other arm to draw a blood specimen

6 Cleanse the venipuncture site with 70 isopropyl alcohol Allow the arm to dry Do not touch the swabbed area with any unsterile object

7 Apply a tourniquet several inches above the puncture site Never leave the tourniquet in place longer than one minute

8 Anchor the vein firmly both above and below the puncture site Use either the thumb and middle finger or thumb and index finger

9 Perform the venipuncture10Release the tourniquet when blood begins to flow11After all blood has been drawn have the patient relax his or her fist Do

not allow the patient to pump the hand12Place a clean sterile cotton ball lightly over the side Withdraw the needle

then apply pressure to the site13Mix tubes with anticoagulant For syringe-drawn specimens transfer blood

to appropriate tubes taking precautions to avoid hemolyzing the specimens Follow any special handling procedures

14Check condition of the patient whether patient is faint and that bleeding is under control

15Dispose of contaminated material such as needles syringes cotton etc16Deliver tubes of blood for testing to appropriate departments

An additional protocol is important in the venipuncture procedure Follow the recommended ldquoorder of drawrdquo when collecting tubes To avoid contamination draw specimens into non-additive tubes before tubes with additives

17Let the blood sample retract completely before centrifuging Separate serum from clotted blood Make sure proper labeling is observed and practiced

HEMATOLOGY

Preparation and staining of Blood Smears for Diffferential Count

Principle

The examination of the peripheral blood smear is the most important examination one can do in hematological evaluation of a patient

Materials Needed

1 Pricker or lancet2 Microscope slides3 Spreader4 Pencil5 Cotton soaked in alcohol6 Dry cotton

Procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 23

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 Puncture the skin as desired and wipe away the first drop of blood2 Touch the surface of the clean slide to a small drop of blood the drop

should be placed near one end of the slide3 Turn the slide over such that the drop of blood is now on the top side and

the other end of the slide away from the drop of the blood is held by the thumb and forefinger of the left hand The other finger serves to support the slide

4 Pick up another slide and loosely between thumb and forefinger of the right hand

5 The slide in the right hand is called the spreader slide Place the spreader in front of the drop and pull back until it touches the drop

6 As soon as the blood spreads by capillary attraction almost to the edge of the slide push the spreader forwards at an angle of approximately 30-45 degrees using a rapid even motion

Note

The weight of the slide is the only pressure applied the thickness of the spread is controlled by the size of the drop the angle at which the spreader slide is held and the speed of spreading The greater the angle the thicker and shorter is the film

7 Dry the slide in air when dried write the name of the patient and date in the thick end of the blood film using a pencil or at the other side of the slide

Staining for Differential Count

Reagents

Rapid Romanowsky staining using ldquorapi-diffrdquo

Solution A Fixing solution MethanolSolution B Acid dye EosinSolution C Basic dye Methylene blueSolution D Buffer pH 68 phosphate buffer

Procedure

1 Prepare a blood smear and air dry

2 Fix by immersing in Solution A for 30 seconds

3 Transfer without rinsing or drying to Solution B and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

4 Without rinsing transfer the slide to Solution C and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

5 Rinse briefly in buffered water pH 68 and allow to dry

Results Macroscopically

Smear in pinkish violet

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 24

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Normal Values

Neutrophils 40-60

Lymphocytes 20-40

Monocyte 4-8

Eosinophil 1-3

Basophil 0-1

Stab 0-1

Peripheral Blood Smear

Procedure in reading peripheral blood smear

1 Examine the blood smear grossly against the light and note the contour and background color

2 Examine under the low power in order to ascertain the adequacy of the staining and select the best fields for study

3 Note agglutination or rouleaux formation of erythrocytes

4 Examine the slides systematically starting at the thin end In this way reduplication of the field is avoided Fields should be avoided in which the red cells are stacked up or are in rouleaux and fields should be examined in which the red cells are well separated and the white cells thinly spread

5 Examine the erythrocytes and note variations in size shape color hemoglobin content abnormal objects in cytoplasm and number of nucleated red cells per 100 leukocytes

6 Examine the WBC and study the morphology

CLINICAL MICROSCOPY

Routine Urinalysis

I Organization of Work

Steps Multistix Test

1 Agitate the urine container Examine the urine with regards to color and transparency

2 Fill the centrifuge tube with the urine

3 Dip a multistix strip into the tube and determine the following by comparing with test chart after specific reading time

a Specific Gravity - 45 ndash 60 seconds

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 25

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

b Ph - time not criticalc Protein - read immediatelyd Glucose - 10 ndash 30 seconds

II Microscopic Examination

Procedure

1 Mix the urine well first and obtain a few cc into a test tube2 Centrifuge urine for five minutes3 Decant the supernatant liquid in a quick motion so that the

sediments are left at the bottom of the test tube4 Place in a clean slide5 Examine under the microscope (regulate lighting by adjusting the

substage diaphragm)6 Focus first at low power then shift to the high power objective

Report as follows

1 RBC and WBC ndash average cells hpf2 Casts ndash average casts per hpf3 Epithelial Cells lpf or accasional few moderate abundant4 Crystals lpf are rare few moderate abundant

Fecalysis

I Macroscopic or Physical Examination

1 Form Consistency and Size

2 Color

II Direct fecal Smear

Procedure

1 Place a drop of saline on the slide2 Using an applicator stick take a small portion of the stool

Formed ndash take the portion from well inside the sampleMucus or watery ndash take the portion from the bloodstained mucus on the surface or from the surface of the liquid

3 mix the sample with the drop of saline on the slide4 Examine the specimen under LPO then shift to HPO5 Report as follows

Normal No Parasite seenMucous Normal - a very small amount

Blood - no blood present

BACTERIOLOGY

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 26

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

SPUTUM EXAMINATION

Acid Fast Bacilli

Signs and symptoms of Asymptomatic Patient

1 Cough for 2 weeks duration or more2 Chest and upper back pains for one month duration or more3 Hemoptysis or blood streaking4 On and off afternoon fever for one month duration or more5 Regressive loss of weight

Collection of specimen

1 Identify the patient through signs and symptoms2 Instruct the patient properly3 Collect the first sputum in the morning4 The patient should be standing if possible5 He should take a very deep breath filling his lungs6 He should empty his lungs in one breath coughing as hard and deeply as

he can7 He should spit what he brings up into the jar or sputum cup8 Label the jar or sputum cup with his name and date

After Collection

Check that sufficient amount of sputum has been produced

The sputum of an infected person usually containsa thick mucus air bubblesb threads of fibrinc patches of pusd occasional brownish streaks of blood

Preparation of Sputum Smears

Materials glass slides (new if possible unscratched) inoculating loop or coconut midribs cotton wool plug on metal wire for flaming alarm clock (timer)

Procedure

1 Prepare two slides Take a purulent potion of the sputum one scrath slide using either one sterile inoculating loop or two to form tongs

2 Make the smear as thin as possible covering as large an area as possible tracing concentric circles well separated but not reaching the edges of the slide

Preparation for fixing Sputum Smear

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 27

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Materials sputum smears alcohol lamp match

Procedure of fixing

1 Dry smears in the air2 Fix the smears by passing the slides three times through the flame3 Let it cool before staining

Preparation in Staining using Ziehl-Neelsen (Hot Method)

Principle The tubercule bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis is acid-fast and stains res with Ziehl-Neelsen stain while almost all other organisms stain blue

Materials alcohol lamp match forceps sputum smears cotton wool soaked in 70 ethanol Ziehl-Neelsen reagents denatured alcohol (for burning)

Reagents1 carbol fuchsin2 acid water or acid alcohol3 aqueous methylene blue

Procedure in staining

1 Cover the slides with filtered carbol fuchsin2 Dip the cotton wool swab in the methylated spirit ignite and pass slowly

under the slides to heat them3 As soon as steam begins to rise set the timer at five minutes4 Continue to heat so that the steam is seen but without boiling for five

minutes add more fuchsin immediately to avoid drying5 Wash with tap water or distilled water6 Decolorize with acid water or acid alcohol for one minute7 Wash with tap water8 Counterstain with aqueous methylene blue for thirty seconds or one

minute9 Wash with tap water for one minute10Drain and leave to dry on a slide rack

Examine under Oil Immersion Field

Results

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 28

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 3: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

29 PE personnel is responsible for the information of concern applicants about the working days of documents from 3-5 days allowance depending the availability of the medical doctors to sign the final Report of Medical Examination

210 PROCEDURE DURING PHYSICAL EXAMINATION

The following steps for PE

STEP I - FROM PE SECTION TO NP SECTIONSTEP II - FROM NP SECTION TO LAB SECTIONSTEP III - FROM LAB SECTION TO X-RAY SECTIONSTEP IV - FROM X-RAY SECTION TO ECG SECTIONSTEP V - FROM ECG SECTION TO DENTALSTEP VI - FROM DENTAL TO EENT SECTION STEP VII - FROM EENT SECTION TO OPS FOR GEN PESTEP VIII - FROM OPS RETURN BACK TO PE SECTION

FOR TYPING

SCHEDULED FOR PEGEN PE

DAYS MORNING AFTERNOONM ndash W - F 0800H - 1130H (ROUTINE PE) 1330H -1630H - (GEN PE)T - TH 0800H - 1130H (ROUTINE PE)

211 Steps for civilian medical certificate

STEP I - Get authority duly signed OPD OIC and Chief JAGOSTEP II - Get OPD recordSTEP III - For CBC UA Chest X-ray ECG pay first FSU for

The proceduresSTEP IV - Go to labs chest x-ray ECGSTEP V - Go to MOD for P ESTEP VI - Issuance of Medical Certificate

SOP MOD

1 Duty MOD will takeover the responsibilities of running the medical aspect of the hospital during hisher tour of duty As such she will be responsible for permitting admissions and discharge permitting evacuation and surgery monitoring of all patients supervising medical interns PGIrsquos nurses and their interns and other volunteers

2 Decisions requiring the level of authorization of CLSH Commanding Officer must be referred to CLSH Commanding Officer

3 MOD tour of duty will be for 24hours or until proper endorsement is done 4 The incoming and outgoing MOD must be both present during the morning

endorsement to facilitate efficient turn-over of medical care5 At no occasion will the MOD leave hisher post6 MOD are tasked to be trainers of medical paramedical interns PGIrsquos and other

paramedical volunteers as such they must be guided with the policies stated in AFP Circ 12 dtd 12 Aug 1989 It is stated that the training of medical and paramedical interns shall achieve the following

a motivate medical and paramedical personnel in the military careerb contribute to the national defence effort in building trained medical

manpower

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 3

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

c assist technical and administrative personnel of AFP hospitals in their various functions with patient care

d afford clinical training to the various interns in fulfilment of statutory requirements for the completion of their respective courses andor requirements prior to government board examinations

e Help promote pleasant civilian-military relationship7 At no time shall the interest and welfare of patients be subordinated to the

conduct of the affiliation training program8 rules and regulations regarding the conduct of training shall be prescribed by The

Surgeon General AFP9 the total number of interns accepted in AFP hospitals shall not exceed one per

five patient

PT SECTION SOP

1the CLSH PT Section can accept PT volunteers who are certified by MECS and PRC and who are from trainingteaching hospitals which are duly recognized by the Department of Health2 CLSH OTPT Section operates for 8hours3 Application for CLSH PTOT volunteer will be guided by the CLSH Security SOP4 PT NCOIC will assist the C Clinical Section in orienting the volunteers on the military protocol and on the CLSH SOP5 Accepted Volunteers must act in accordance to the policies of CLSH and CENTCOM policies regarding the behaviour duties and responsibilities similar to those of the CLSH employees

3 LABORATORY SECTION

31 PersonnelCPT LOUISE A CAJITA MC ndash OICTSG ULYSSES C BONTUYAN PA ndash NCOICMs Manresa D Cantildeales ndash Medical TechnologistMs Joan S Quibedo ndash Medical Technologist

32 Working HoursMon ndash Ms Manresa D Cantildeales 0700H ndash 1600HTues ndash Ms Joan S Quibedo 0700H - 1600H

Ms Manresa D Cantildeales 0700H ndash 1600HWed - Ms Manresa D Cantildeales 0700H ndash 1600HThu - Ms Manresa D Cantildeales 0700H ndash 1600H

Ms Joan S Quibedo 0700H ndash 1600HFri - Ms Joan S Quibedo 0700H ndash 1600HSat - Ms Manresa D Cantildeales 0800H ndash 1200HSun - Ms Joan S Quibedo 0800H ndash 1200H

33 Schedule of Different Laboratory examinations

Blood Chemistry

Tuesday and Thursday (except ldquoSTATrdquo or as scheduled or requested by MOD any days)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 4

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Extraction Time 0730H ndash 0800H In-Patient0800H ndash 0830H Out-Patient

34 All Out-Patient must secure a request from the MOD and must submit their request to the Laboratory a day before the scheduled extraction for proper instruction and scheduling We will not entertain patients who are not scheduled for that particular day All out-patients are advised to follow the schedule above We will not entertain patients after the cut-off time

35 For all in-patients the NOD should submit their request to the laboratory a day before the schedule of extraction

35-1 CBC UA SE etc

All out-patient should secure request from the MOD and should get their case number from the AampD Section before going to the laboratory Urine and stool specimens should strictly be in the morning only Cut-off time to all examinations is upto 1100H only except for ldquoSTATrdquo request

35-2 AFP (Sputum exam) and Newborn Screening ndash In-Patient ndash only Nurse-On-Duty should coordinate first with the Med-On-Duty for scheduling

35-3 Examinations done on outside laboratories ndash NOD must coordinate first

with the Med-Tech on duty for pricing and scheduling

35-4 Physical Examinations for Promotion Reenlistment Enlistment CAD APE etc MWF ndash 0800H ndash 1100H (cut-off time)

35-5 Results

Releasing of Out-Patient is at 1500HIn-Patient ndash Duty Med-Tech will endorse the result as soon as it is done

4 PHARMACY SECTION

41 DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

41-1 Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

a Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothesb Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities

(for Dependents)

41-2 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 5

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0800H ndash 1100H

41-3 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their

respective dispensary41-4 Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines41-5 No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

42 REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

42-1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

42-2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 PHYSICAL THERAPY

51 PT SESSION

51-1 Requesting party will secure their request to be signed by the Medical

Officer512 PT personnel is responsible for the briefing of the requesting party

about the procedures of PT Section

51-3 PT personnel is the over-all supervisor to all patients for physical therapy

treatment51-4 PT personnel is responsible the issuance of certification to all PT

volunteers 51-5 PT personnel is responsible for the issuance of medical certificate

to the patient

51-6 PT personnel is responsible on attending the PT treatment to the patients

51-7 Civilian patient are required to pay every treatment session thru Sgt Ancheta the finance before physical therapy treatment to the

patient 51-8 PT personnel are responsible to write PT notes every Physical

Therapy Treatment to the patient

52 SCHEDULE FOR PT TREATMENT

DAY MORNING AFTERNOONMONDAY TO FRIDAY 0800H ndash 1200H NONE

6 EENT EXAMINATION

61 EENT SESSION

61-1 Requesting party will secure their request to be signed by the Medical

Officer61-2 EENT personnel is responsible and assist the EENT doctor during

EENT

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 6

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

examination61-3 EENT personnel is the over-all supervisor to all patients for EENT

examination61-4 EENT personnel is responsible the issuance of certification and

medical certificate to all patients

61-5 EENT Doctor personnel is responsible on attending for the EENT treatment to the patients

61-6 EENT personnel is responsible to write EENT Doctor notes every every

EENT Treatment to the patient61-7 EENT personnel is responsible to all in and out communications at

EENT section

61-8 EENT personnel is responsible logbooks at EENT Section

62 SCHEDULE FOR EENT TREATMENT

DAY MORNING AFTERNOONM - W - F 0800H ndash 1130H 1330H -1630HT - TH 0800H ndash 1130H 1330H- 1430H

1500H - ATHLETIC

7 OBYNE SECTION

71 OBGYNE SECTION MISSION

To provide prenatal care and proper follow up for all normal and abnormal cases

of obtestric and gynecologic pateints

72 Prenatal schedule and consultation

DAY SCHEDULE MORNING AFTERNOONMON TO FRI PRENATAL 0800H-

1200H1300H-1700H

TUE amp THUGYNE CONSULTATIONFAMILY PLANING CONSUL

0800H-1200H

1300H-1700H

WEDNESDAY IMUNIZATION 0800H-1200H

73 The following are entitled to free prenatal check-up

1ST priority - Military personnel active service2ND priority - Direct dependents3RD priority - Civilian employees4TH priority - Unmaried dependents are entitled prenatal less than

18 years old of age

74 Check ndash up provided they will secure an authority duly signed by the OBGYNE

head CO and JAGO and pay the prenatal fee as prescribed by GHQ

4 2 1 - Retirees and Veterans

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 7

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 2 2 - Authorized civilians4 2 3 - Married or Unmarried dependents 18 years and above

` 42 1 - Children of dependents whether married or unmarried dependents

75 Requirements for pre-natal and consultation

a MilitaryDependents IDb Latest payslip of Military Personnelc MDRMarriage Contractd Newborn Screening payment six hundred pesos (P60000) only to be

Collected at 29 weeks AOGe Delivery Room requirements should be endorsed to Dependents Ward DR at 32 weeks AOG

8 NEURO PSYCHO EXAMINATION

81 Psychometrician or Psychologist will administer tests prescribed only in the AFPR G165-362 dtd 29 October 1996

81-1 For enlistment and trainee1 Intelligence Tests (Note IQ will not be reported as IQ points but

in terms of range eg not as 75 but ldquoAveragerdquo)2 Personality Tests

a Sentence Completion Testb MMPI or its equivalentc NP Forms

81-2 For Annual PE (Active Duty Status)1 Guilford-Zimmerman Temperament Survey2 Those who have not taken an IQ test will be required to take the SRA 3 Verbal Forms or the Personnel Tests for Industry

81-3 For Reenlistment1 NP Screening Forms2 Sentence Completion Forms

81-4 For Retirement (Officers and EM)Psychiatric interview to include review of clinicalhealthy records

81-5 For Supply Accountable Officer1 IQ Test3 Personality Test

82 The manner in which the psychologist or psychometrician administers the tests will be guided by their training

83 The manner with which they give recommendations will be guided by the provisions stated in the AFPR G pp 79-91

84 In the absence of an authorized NP Screener the CO will sign 42and 72 in the AFP PE form

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 8

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

85 Personnel will be allowed to take NP examination upon approval of their requests from COPE personnel

86 Schedule of Examinations

MondayAM - Scheduling of ExamPM - Conduct NP Examination

TuesdayAM - EvaluationInterviewRecordingPM - Athletics

WednesdayAM ndash PM - Conduct NP Examination

ThursdayAM - EvaluationInterviewRecordingPM - Athletics

FridayAM - PM - Conduct NP Examination

87 NP Examination Results will be forwarded to PE personnel for consolidation and

record purposes

88 In instances where the expertise of a Psychiatrist is needed and none is available

in the hospital a request for augmentation has to be made to the higher headquarters addressed to a military hospital which has an in-house Psychiatrist

9 X-RAY EXAMINATIONS

97 For Physical Examinations91-1 Applicants must present form from PE section prior examination91-2 Schedule of Examinations will be from Monday to Friday from

0800H-1130H

91-3 X-Ray result will be forwarded to PE section for consolidation

98 For Out-Patient92-1 Patient must present request signed by the duty MOD922 Schedule of Examinations will be from Monday to Friday from

0800H ndash 1130H

99 For In-Patient99-1 Examinations will be done anytime upon request from the MOD

910 Wednesday is Maintenance Day no examinations except emergency cases

10 OUT-PATIENT CONSULTATION

101 Requirements for consultation

101-1 Military Personnel ndash present military ID101-2 Dependents ndash present dependents IDMDR

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 9

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

101-3 CAA ndash present CAA ID101-4 Civilian Employees ndash present ID101-5 Authorized Civilians ndash must fill-up Authorization to be signed by CO

Prior consultation

102 Schedule of Consultation

Monday amp Wednesday

AM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM ndash 1330H ndash 1430H

Tuesday amp ThursdayAM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM - Athletics

FridayAM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM - 1330H ndash 1530H

103 Patients should be taken vital signsblood pressure prior examination104 Issuance of Medical Certificate must be upon approval of the MOD and

control number should be indicated with CLSH Office Seal

11 POLICIES AND GUIDELINES IN CONDUCTING DIAGNOSTIC EXAMINATIONS

111 Radiology Section

The attending physician writes order of X-ray examination in the patientrsquos chart

The ward nurse prepares a request of X-ray examination Radiology personnel logs request in their logbook The ward man accompanies the patient to the x-ray section For special procedures appropriate SOP is followed The ward nurse documents the time date manner of moving

and condition of the patient An X-ray personnel forwards the x-ray result to the ward

concerned and asks the recipient to sign in the logbook

Ward staff refers significant result to the attending physician and attaches the result to the patientrsquos

chart

112 Laboratory Section

The ward nurse fills up a laboratory examination request and forwards it to the laboratory The request must contain the

patientrsquos complete name which includes the middle name the patientrsquos rank age unit birth date name of the exam to be performed and the date it is to be performed

The patient is instructed on the proper collection of specimen Cut-off time for all examinations is up to 1100H only except for

ldquoSTATrdquo Patients admitted beyond 1100H who require routine laboratory exams such as CBC and UA shall

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 10

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

have their examinations performed the following day

ldquoSTATrdquo laboratory examinations are coordinated and done immediately

Sputum exams and newborn screenings are coordinated first with the medical technologist-on-duty for scheduling

Repeat sputum exams are prioritized over new PTB cases for AFB smear

Newborn screening is done only after the infant is 24 hours old Infants scheduled for newborn screening will be cord dressed

but will be not bathed on the morning of the exam Blood chemistry studies are done on Tuesdays and Thursdays

only Laboratory requests for such exams must be forwarded a day prior to the exam

Examinations to be done at outside laboratories or specimens that need to be sent out must be coordinated first by the

NOD with the medical technologist-on-duty for pricing and scheduling

Payment for outside laboratories must be settled by the Supply Section Officer-in-charge with the permission of the Admin

Officer Laboratory results will be endorsed by the medical technologist-

on-duty as soon as they are available

12 POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS ADVANCE DIRECTIVES

121 Any person of legal age and of sound mind may make an advance directive for physicians to administer terminal care when he she

suffers from the terminal phase of a terminal illness PROVIDED that

a He she is informed of the medical consequences of his her choice b He she releases those involved in his her care from any

obligation relative to the consequences on his her decisionc His her decision will not prejudice health and safety d A written request must be signed by the patient himherself duly

witnessed by a relative or significant others or a hospital personnel

e In case the patient is incapable of giving the consent and a third party consent is required the following persons in the order of priority stated hereunder may give consent

a Spouseb Son of or daughter of legal age

c Either parent d Brother or sister of legal age or e Guardian

122 Consent form once signed and witnessed should be attached to patients chart for filling

13 POLICIES ON DOCTORrsquoS ROUNDS

Doctorrsquos rounds are made everyday in the morning Except for unusual cases which are made daily

Unusual observations are referred to the Medical Officer of the (MOD) after duty hours

New orders are carried out promptly and accurately Routine laboratory treatments are done after treatment

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 11

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

14 POLICIES ON DISCHARGING A PATIENT

141 Military Patients

141a Return to Duty

a Attending physician writes the discharge orderb Patientrsquos chart should be reviewed for completeness

particularly the Cover Sheet which should be signed by the Medical Officer

c Upon receipt of order for discharge Disposition Slip (Cover Sheet) is prepared and forwarded to A amp D Section for issuance of Special Order

d Discharged patients will report to their respective unit first hour of their Expected Date of Return to Duty (EDRD) No discharge will be made on the date of disposition Patients may go on pass before EDRD depending on the Ward Officerrsquos discretion or they may also stay in the hospital until their EDRD

e Prior to discharge patients are given Clearance Form to be completed

f The duty nurse writes and gives discharge instructions to the patient and significant others as well as the date of follow-up check up

g PhilHealth Form shall be properly accomplished by the patient attached with MDR Form and military ID

h Retro-evac patients when recovered these patients will be discharged accordingly following routine disposition of all patients

i The duty nurse checks all equipment items issued to patient are returned

j Discard all medicine card tags except for roster card Indicate EDRD and final diagnosis on the roster card and retained it until EDRD is due

k Locate patientrsquos name on the A amp D book and write the final diagnosis and EDRD opposite their names

l Log patientrsquos name in the discharge checklist and send to A amp D Section together with the chart which is arranged properly and have it properly received by the A amp D personnel

m Drop patient from census on the date of discharge n Document discharge time date condition of patient and

manner of leaving Nursing Unit

141b Discharge by Evacuationa Bring the chart with order final diagnosis and completed cover

sheet to the A amp D Section so that three copies of evacuation papers can be accomplished and evacuation flights can be coordinated

b Evacuation paper Letter Order Narrative Summary and pertinent diagnostic results (together with x-ray plates ECG Tracing etc) are given to the patient and checked by the NOD

c Patients are prohibited to carry firearms during the travel Firearms or deadly weapons of patients for evacuation shall remain in deposit with CLSH storeroom for safekeeping

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 12

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

d Indicate final diagnosis date of evacuation and place to be evacuated opposite the patientrsquos name in the A and D book and drop from census

e Return borrowed items in the CSR

141c Transfer of Hospital (within Cebu) a When the patient needs extensive medicalsurgical

management beyond the capability of the hospital Ward Officer is responsible for completion of all data necessary for transfer to include preparation of Narrative Summary

b Ward master ward man on duty will forward Disposition Form to A amp D Section

c Narrative summary will go with the patient chart should remain in the hospital for future use filing and safekeeping

141d Discharge by Deatha When death occurs on the ward the nurse on duty shall

immediately notify the A amp D Section personnel on duty who should prepare the death certificate The last attending Medical Officer completes the diagnosis and other clinical requirements

b Post mortem care should be done before sending the cadaver to the morgue

c All belongings of the deceased shall be properly accounted for and turned over to the relatives properly receipted

d A death certificate shall be given to the immediate relatives who will accompany the cadaver to the funeral parlor

e Log patientrsquos final diagnosis datetime of death in the A and D book and census

142 Dependents1421Discharge procedure is the same as that of the military except that

they can be discharged on the day of disposition once clearance is obtained

1422For the patientrsquos who are discharged against medical advice the patient of legal age or his her parent and or relative are made to sign a certificate to the effect that the hospital shall not be responsible for anything that would happen to the patient after he leaves the hospital after the doctorrsquos order which is also signed by two (2) witnesses

143 Civilian 1431Civilian employees retired military personnel dependents of retired

military personnel pure civilian have the same discharge procedure as dependents

1432Nurse on Duty should prepare billing prior to discharge 1433Billing of Civilian patients will be done by the Finance Sergeant1434Obligations such as hospital charges shall be settled at the

Admission and Disposition (A amp D) Section before discharge 1435Civilian employee with Phil health form must accomplish the form

in order to obtain clearance from the A amp D Section Medicines medical supplies diagnostic examinations and days of hospitalization should be listed and forwarded to the A amp D Section with the patientrsquos chart

1436Dependents of retired military personnel - same as above1437Retired Military Personnel (RMP) - only mess is charge1438Pure civilian - same as the civilian employees

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 13

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1439Patient presents a duly accomplished clearance prior to the release of discharge order and receipt of payment to the nurse on duty

15 EMERGENCY ROOM POLICIES AND GUIDELINES

1 only emergency cases are entertained in the ER General consultations are referred to the OPD After office hours and on SaturdaySunday and Holiday consultations may be entertained upon the discretion of the OPD

2 patients must be referred to the MOD

3 NOD should obtain the patientrsquos chief complaint weight vital signs get gestational data (LMP ED BP FH FHT if the patient is an OBGYNE case) and other admitting notes

4 inform patient of the existing hospital policies and guidelines upon admission (visiting schedule rights responsibilities policies and regulations

5 provide watcherrsquos id and provide the admin on duty with the list of admitted patients

6 NOD must facilitate requisition of hospital number

7 MOD attends to the patients The nurse on duty assists the MOD in performing assessments

8 for admitted patients MOD writes order for the medical treatment and the ER nurse on duty immediately executes them

9 a signed consent must be obtained from the patients In case of minor or handicapped patients guardians must fill up the consent for them

10NOD should facilitate laboratory works

11 IVF insertion is done either by the PGI on dutyMOD or NOD

12NOD starts giving the medications available Drugs that require skin testing must be performed at the ER and this should be confirmed by the physician and recorded in the patientrsquos chart

13MODNOD gives initial health teachings to the client or significant others as needed

14NOD regulates the IVF of patients before transporting to the ward

15 if patient refuses admission she must inform the MOD and sign a waiver denouncing the hospital from any liabilities A thorough explanation by the MOD shall be afforded to the patient upon signing of the waiver

16 illiterate patientscompanion must be asked to have their thumb marks on the record

17all stocks medicines used by the patient must be replaced as soon as possible on or before the patient leaves the ER This will be done by the duty ER NCO

18only emergency cases are provided with ER stocks NOD gets the prescription and have these items replaced by the pharmacy andor CSR

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 14

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

19ER NOD duty ER NCO will be held accountable for whatever lossesdeficiencies that may occur during hisher shift

20 inventory of all ER items is done every after shift by the NOD

21ER NCOIC must submit a monthly inventory report to the pharmacy and supply section for auditing purposes

22consultations are not entertained in the ER during office hours They are referred to the OPD

23communicableInfectious conditions which require isolation and cases other than OB-GYNEPedia are not accepted for admission but referred to other agencies after MOD has evaluated the patient The MOD should call and should be the one to make the call to the hospital where the patient is to be transferred to

24wounds of more than 24-hour duration are not entertained in te ER but in the OPD except on holidays Saturdays and Sundays

25 for invasive procedures a consent signed by the patient (if adult) companion andor guardian should be obtained before treatment or care is instituted

26should patient refuse she cannot be submitted to a particular treatment This should be properly documented on the patientrsquos record and have the patient sign a waiver for the refusal

27 for emergency cases where a patientrsquos life is in danger no consent is necessary However proper notation shall be made on the patientrsquos record by the physician and must be affirmed by a witness

28media is not allowed within the ER premises to avoid distortion in the management of patients

29dean on arrival (DOA) clients in ER cases are classified in the following categories

DOA Criteria0 vital signs ndash CPR done rarr failedNo death certificate shall be issuedER death ndash 0 vital signs rarr CPRrarr reviverarr died within 26 hoursHospital issue death certificateDOA and ER deaths should be marked on the patientrsquos record in bold

letters using ball pen

30all procedures performed in the ER shall be subjected to official charging which will be forwarded to the different branch of services where the patient belongs Only CENTCOM organic military personnel will be carried free of charge

15 POLICIES ON DO NOT RESUSCITATE (DNR)

151 Definition of Terms151a Resuscitation is a medical procedure which seeks to

restore cardiac andor respiratory function to individuals who have sustained a cardiac andor respiratory arrest

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 15

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

151b Do Not Resuscitate (DNR) is a medical order to provide no resuscitation to individuals for

whom resuscitation is not warranted151c Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) is the

common term used to refer to resuscitation However the options available to treat very sick patients are broader than CPR as literally defined Other options include intensive care antibiotic therapy hydration and nutritional support Appropriate comfort care measures should be employed for all patients especially terminally ill patients

152 DNR Protocol

1521WILL suction the airway administer oxygen position for comfort splint or immobilize control bleeding provide pain medication provide emotional support and contact other appropriate health care providers and

1521WILL NOT administer chest compressions insert an artificial airway administer resuscitative drugs defibrillate or

cardiovert provide respiratory assistance (other than suctioning the airway and administering oxygen) initiate resuscitative IV or initiate cardiac monitoring

153 Types of DNR Orders

1531a DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time the order

is given DNR Comfort Care orders permit comfort care only both before and during a cardiac or respiratory arrest Resuscitative therapies will not be

administered prior to an arrest This order is generally regarded as appropriate for patients who have a terminal illness short life expectancy little chance of surviving CPR and a desire to let nature take its course in the face of an impending arrest

1531b DNR Comfort Care-ArrestDNR Comfort Care-Arrest orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time of a cardiac or respiratory arrest A cardiac arrest occurs when there is an absence of a palpable pulse A respiratory arrest occurs when there are no spontaneous respirations or there is agonal breathing Resuscitative therapies will be administered before an arrest but not during an arrest The term DNR (without additional wording) when recorded in the medical chart shall be considered a DNR Comfort Care-Arrest order

1531c DNR Specified All other DNR orders are DNR Specified orders DNR Specified orders modify the DNR Protocol in some respect either in treatment modalities or in the timing of the protocol activation

1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 16

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart

1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order

DNR is a medical order to be given only by authorized health care practitioners DNR orders generally should be given with the informed consent of the patient or the patientrsquos surrogate decision-maker Ideally the physician should sensitively discuss the DNR option with the patient while the patient is mentally competent However DNR orders are often considered for patients who are comatose or who otherwise lack decisional capacity with whom this discussion has not occurred or cannot occur

In cases when a patient lacks decisional capacity the DNR option should be considered in conjunction with the patients advance directives if known or should be discussed with a surrogate A surrogate may be designated by a patient as the attorney-in-fact in a Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care A surrogate may also be identified as the first available person(s) from the following list in order

f Spouseg Son of or daughter of legal age h Either parent i Brother or sister of legal age or j Guardian

In all cases the primary physician should discuss the DNR option with the patient if possible and the surrogate(s) if appropriate There is no obligation to offer or initiate CPR if resuscitation would be futile ie if resuscitation would not achieve its physiological objective would offer no benefit to the patient and would violate reasonable medical standards

154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart

The words DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care-Arrest or DNR Specified should be recorded on the left-hand side of the medical chart (where advance directives are maintained) along with the date time rationale for the DNR order the names of the patient andor family members involved in the decision and a statement that the patient andor surrogate was fully informed about and consented to the DNR order If a DNR Specified order is recorded the modifications to the DNR Protocol should be specified in the medical chart as well as the desired timing of the activation of the modified Protocol

DNR decisions for inpatients should be transmitted clearly to those caring for the patients A DNR order should never result in the abandonment of a patient and steps should

155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders

The DNR order should be reassessed as part of the ongoing evaluation of an inpatient A DNR order should be affirmed modified or revoked only after a discussion between the primary physician and the patient if possible or the surrogate(s) if appropriate and the consent of the patient or surrogate DNR orders should be reassessed frequently and

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 17

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

as conditions warrant Reassessments of DNR orders should be documented in the medical chart If a DNR order is changed from one of the three types of DNR orders to a different type the patients DNR bracelet should be replaced with a new bracelet containing the revised designation If a DNR order is revoked the DNR bracelet should be removed and destroyed A physician or other health care worker who feels that he or she cannot honor a patients DNR request may not prevent or delay the transfer of the patient to a physician or facility which will honor the DNR status

156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care

The administration of anesthesia necessarily involves some practices and procedures that might be viewed as resuscitation in other settings Prior to any inpatient or outpatient invasive procedure for which the policy requires the documentation of informed consent any existing DNR order should when possible be reviewed with the patient or the patients surrogate As a result of this review the status of the DNR order during the perioperative period should be affirmed clarified or modified based on the preferences of the patient Any clarifications or modifications should be documented in the medical chart along with a notation indicating if or when the original DNR order should be reinstated Concurrence on these issues by the primary physician the surgeon and the anesthesiologist is desirable The DNR bracelet should not be removed during the perioperative period even if the DNR order has been temporarily modified

157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives

In the event of a conflict between one of the three types of DNR orders and an advance directive which has become effective because a person is unable to communicate and is terminally ill or permanently unconscious the instructions from the document (or person named as an Attorney-in-Fact) ranked higher in the following list shall prevail

a Living will of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

b Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care or an Attorney-in-Fact acting in accordance therewith of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

c DNR order d

16POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS DISCHARGE INSTRUCTION

161 The patient or his her legal guardian has the right to be informed by the physician or his her delegate ( nurse) of his her continuing health care requirements following discharge including instructions about

a Take home medicationsb Dietc Physical activityd Special instructions

- Signs to watch out for - When to bring the patient back to the physician- Instructions to follow in the event of untoward incidences

complications

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 18

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

e Follow-up Check-upf All other pertinent information to promote health and well-being

162 At the end patientrsquos confinement he she is entitled to a brief written summary of the course of his her illness which shall include at least the history physical examination diagnosis medications surgical procedure ancillary and laboratory procedures and the plan of further treatment and which shall be provided by the attending physician

17 POLICIES ON DISCLOSURE OF PATIENTrsquoS INFORMATION

171 The privacy of the patients must be assured at all stages of his her treatment Similarly the patient has the right to be free from unwarranted public exposure EXCEPT in the following cases

a When his her mental or physical condition is in controversy and the appropriate court in its discretion orders him her to submit to a physical or mental examination by a physician

b When the public health and safety so demandc When the patient waives his her rights

172 Any health care provider or practitioner involved in the treatment of the patient and all those who have legitimate access to the patientrsquos record is not authorized to divulge any information to a third party who has no concern with the care and welfare of the patient without his Her consent EXCEPT

a When such disclosure will benefit public health and safetyb When it is in the interest of justice and upon the order of a competent

courtc When patients waives in writing the confidential nature of such

information d When it is needed for continued medical treatment or advancement of

medical science subject to de-identification of patient and shared medical confidentiality for those who have access to the information

1721 Informing the spouse or the family to the first degree of the patientrsquos medical condition may be allowed Provided that the patient of legal age have the right to choose on whom to inform

1722 In case the patient is not of legal age or is mentally incapacitated such information shall be given to the parents legal guardian or his her next of kin

18 ETHICAL CONSIDERATIONS IN THE ADMINISTRATION OF BLOOD

181 The physician should obtain the patients informed consent before administering blood products This includes explaining to the patient the relative benefits and risks of receiving and not receiving the blood product as well as any reasonably viable alternatives

182 Generally in emergency situations where treatment is necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient and consent is not available (because the patient is unconscious or otherwise unable to consent) the physician may administer blood products (and any other treatment) necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient This does not apply if

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 19

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

the patient has expressly refused the treatment before becoming incompetent

183 A competent adult is entitled to refuse or cease any treatment for any reason

184 Parents ordinarily have the responsibility to provide consent on behalf of their young children however it is highly unlikely that parents can refuse life-saving treatment for their children Physicians may not simply override a parents refusal

185 Although it is legally clear that a mentally competent adult is entitled to refuse any medical treatment including a blood transfusion physicians have a responsibility to ensure that the refusal is truly informed and voluntary

186 In the case of adults who were once competent but have become temporarily or permanently incompetent substitute consent laws generally provide that their prior wishes regarding treatment decisions should be respected to the extent that they are known or can be determined

19 LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

191 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for IN-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSDoctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientStaff Nurse Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Proceed to the requesting Ward and collect

blood for the ordered examination Take specimen to the laboratoryExamine specimen Sign the resultRecord the result on its respective logbookRecord the result in PhilHealth logbookEndorse the result to the ward

Nurse On Duty Receive the result Refer the result to the Doctor on Duty

192 Specimens Received for Examination

Forms Needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatientPresent specimen with laboratory request signed by the Physician

Medical Technologist Receive specimen and laboratory requestExamine the specimen

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 20

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Sign the resultRecord the result to the respective logbook Endorse the Result to the Nurse on Duty for In- Patients and Release result to patients in OPD

193 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for OUT-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatient Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Receive the request and collect blood for the

ordered examination Examine specimen Sign the result Record the result on its respective logbook Record the result in OPD logbook Release the result

Patient Take the result to the Physician in OPD

194 Monthly Laboratory Report Census

Form Needed Monthly Report Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSMedical Technologist Record all daily results in the

logbookPrepare Monthly report based on the daily report of examinationsSign the reportGive the report to the OIC of the Laboratory for approval

OIC Laboratory Sign and approve the reportMedical Technologist Release the report

2 Laboratory Uniform

Laboratory uniform is a must on all working days except holidays but must be in laboratory gown when with patients

3 Request Slips

In-patient request slips must be completely filled -up by the nurse medical clerk

Out-patient request slips must be duly signed by the Medical Doctor on Duty assigned in OPD

Only requests from the CLSH Hospital will be honored by the laboratory

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 21

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Examination Performed

A Hematology

1 CBC (Complete Blood Count)2 Platelet Count3 Hemoglobin Test4 Clotting Time5 Bleeding Time

B Clinical Microscopy

1 Urinalysis2 Fecalysis

C Blood Banking and Serology

1 Blood Typing2 Hepatitis B Determination (Qualitative)3 Syphilis (Qualitative)

D Bacteriology

1 Acid fast Staining

E Blood Chemistry

1 Cholesterol2 Triglyceride3 Fasting Blood Sugar4 Blood Uric Acid5 Blood Urea Nitrogen6 Serum Creatinine

5 Reasons for ordering laboratory measurements examinations

a To confirm a clinical impression or establish a diagnosisb To rule out a diagnosisc To monitor therapy (management guide)d To establish prognosise To screen for or detect disease

SPECIMEN COLLECTION

2 General Procedure for Obtaining Blood

1 Skin Puncture2 Venous Puncture

Technique for Venous Puncture

1 Identify the patient2 If fasting is required confirm that fasting order has been followed3 Inform the patient of the procedure to be done

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 22

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Prepare the patient and all equipment needed5 Select a suitable vein for venipuncture Veins of the antecubital fossa in

particular the median cubital and cephalic veins are preferred Wrist ankle and hand veins may also be used If one arm has an intravenous line use the other arm to draw a blood specimen

6 Cleanse the venipuncture site with 70 isopropyl alcohol Allow the arm to dry Do not touch the swabbed area with any unsterile object

7 Apply a tourniquet several inches above the puncture site Never leave the tourniquet in place longer than one minute

8 Anchor the vein firmly both above and below the puncture site Use either the thumb and middle finger or thumb and index finger

9 Perform the venipuncture10Release the tourniquet when blood begins to flow11After all blood has been drawn have the patient relax his or her fist Do

not allow the patient to pump the hand12Place a clean sterile cotton ball lightly over the side Withdraw the needle

then apply pressure to the site13Mix tubes with anticoagulant For syringe-drawn specimens transfer blood

to appropriate tubes taking precautions to avoid hemolyzing the specimens Follow any special handling procedures

14Check condition of the patient whether patient is faint and that bleeding is under control

15Dispose of contaminated material such as needles syringes cotton etc16Deliver tubes of blood for testing to appropriate departments

An additional protocol is important in the venipuncture procedure Follow the recommended ldquoorder of drawrdquo when collecting tubes To avoid contamination draw specimens into non-additive tubes before tubes with additives

17Let the blood sample retract completely before centrifuging Separate serum from clotted blood Make sure proper labeling is observed and practiced

HEMATOLOGY

Preparation and staining of Blood Smears for Diffferential Count

Principle

The examination of the peripheral blood smear is the most important examination one can do in hematological evaluation of a patient

Materials Needed

1 Pricker or lancet2 Microscope slides3 Spreader4 Pencil5 Cotton soaked in alcohol6 Dry cotton

Procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 23

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 Puncture the skin as desired and wipe away the first drop of blood2 Touch the surface of the clean slide to a small drop of blood the drop

should be placed near one end of the slide3 Turn the slide over such that the drop of blood is now on the top side and

the other end of the slide away from the drop of the blood is held by the thumb and forefinger of the left hand The other finger serves to support the slide

4 Pick up another slide and loosely between thumb and forefinger of the right hand

5 The slide in the right hand is called the spreader slide Place the spreader in front of the drop and pull back until it touches the drop

6 As soon as the blood spreads by capillary attraction almost to the edge of the slide push the spreader forwards at an angle of approximately 30-45 degrees using a rapid even motion

Note

The weight of the slide is the only pressure applied the thickness of the spread is controlled by the size of the drop the angle at which the spreader slide is held and the speed of spreading The greater the angle the thicker and shorter is the film

7 Dry the slide in air when dried write the name of the patient and date in the thick end of the blood film using a pencil or at the other side of the slide

Staining for Differential Count

Reagents

Rapid Romanowsky staining using ldquorapi-diffrdquo

Solution A Fixing solution MethanolSolution B Acid dye EosinSolution C Basic dye Methylene blueSolution D Buffer pH 68 phosphate buffer

Procedure

1 Prepare a blood smear and air dry

2 Fix by immersing in Solution A for 30 seconds

3 Transfer without rinsing or drying to Solution B and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

4 Without rinsing transfer the slide to Solution C and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

5 Rinse briefly in buffered water pH 68 and allow to dry

Results Macroscopically

Smear in pinkish violet

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 24

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Normal Values

Neutrophils 40-60

Lymphocytes 20-40

Monocyte 4-8

Eosinophil 1-3

Basophil 0-1

Stab 0-1

Peripheral Blood Smear

Procedure in reading peripheral blood smear

1 Examine the blood smear grossly against the light and note the contour and background color

2 Examine under the low power in order to ascertain the adequacy of the staining and select the best fields for study

3 Note agglutination or rouleaux formation of erythrocytes

4 Examine the slides systematically starting at the thin end In this way reduplication of the field is avoided Fields should be avoided in which the red cells are stacked up or are in rouleaux and fields should be examined in which the red cells are well separated and the white cells thinly spread

5 Examine the erythrocytes and note variations in size shape color hemoglobin content abnormal objects in cytoplasm and number of nucleated red cells per 100 leukocytes

6 Examine the WBC and study the morphology

CLINICAL MICROSCOPY

Routine Urinalysis

I Organization of Work

Steps Multistix Test

1 Agitate the urine container Examine the urine with regards to color and transparency

2 Fill the centrifuge tube with the urine

3 Dip a multistix strip into the tube and determine the following by comparing with test chart after specific reading time

a Specific Gravity - 45 ndash 60 seconds

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 25

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

b Ph - time not criticalc Protein - read immediatelyd Glucose - 10 ndash 30 seconds

II Microscopic Examination

Procedure

1 Mix the urine well first and obtain a few cc into a test tube2 Centrifuge urine for five minutes3 Decant the supernatant liquid in a quick motion so that the

sediments are left at the bottom of the test tube4 Place in a clean slide5 Examine under the microscope (regulate lighting by adjusting the

substage diaphragm)6 Focus first at low power then shift to the high power objective

Report as follows

1 RBC and WBC ndash average cells hpf2 Casts ndash average casts per hpf3 Epithelial Cells lpf or accasional few moderate abundant4 Crystals lpf are rare few moderate abundant

Fecalysis

I Macroscopic or Physical Examination

1 Form Consistency and Size

2 Color

II Direct fecal Smear

Procedure

1 Place a drop of saline on the slide2 Using an applicator stick take a small portion of the stool

Formed ndash take the portion from well inside the sampleMucus or watery ndash take the portion from the bloodstained mucus on the surface or from the surface of the liquid

3 mix the sample with the drop of saline on the slide4 Examine the specimen under LPO then shift to HPO5 Report as follows

Normal No Parasite seenMucous Normal - a very small amount

Blood - no blood present

BACTERIOLOGY

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 26

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

SPUTUM EXAMINATION

Acid Fast Bacilli

Signs and symptoms of Asymptomatic Patient

1 Cough for 2 weeks duration or more2 Chest and upper back pains for one month duration or more3 Hemoptysis or blood streaking4 On and off afternoon fever for one month duration or more5 Regressive loss of weight

Collection of specimen

1 Identify the patient through signs and symptoms2 Instruct the patient properly3 Collect the first sputum in the morning4 The patient should be standing if possible5 He should take a very deep breath filling his lungs6 He should empty his lungs in one breath coughing as hard and deeply as

he can7 He should spit what he brings up into the jar or sputum cup8 Label the jar or sputum cup with his name and date

After Collection

Check that sufficient amount of sputum has been produced

The sputum of an infected person usually containsa thick mucus air bubblesb threads of fibrinc patches of pusd occasional brownish streaks of blood

Preparation of Sputum Smears

Materials glass slides (new if possible unscratched) inoculating loop or coconut midribs cotton wool plug on metal wire for flaming alarm clock (timer)

Procedure

1 Prepare two slides Take a purulent potion of the sputum one scrath slide using either one sterile inoculating loop or two to form tongs

2 Make the smear as thin as possible covering as large an area as possible tracing concentric circles well separated but not reaching the edges of the slide

Preparation for fixing Sputum Smear

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 27

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Materials sputum smears alcohol lamp match

Procedure of fixing

1 Dry smears in the air2 Fix the smears by passing the slides three times through the flame3 Let it cool before staining

Preparation in Staining using Ziehl-Neelsen (Hot Method)

Principle The tubercule bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis is acid-fast and stains res with Ziehl-Neelsen stain while almost all other organisms stain blue

Materials alcohol lamp match forceps sputum smears cotton wool soaked in 70 ethanol Ziehl-Neelsen reagents denatured alcohol (for burning)

Reagents1 carbol fuchsin2 acid water or acid alcohol3 aqueous methylene blue

Procedure in staining

1 Cover the slides with filtered carbol fuchsin2 Dip the cotton wool swab in the methylated spirit ignite and pass slowly

under the slides to heat them3 As soon as steam begins to rise set the timer at five minutes4 Continue to heat so that the steam is seen but without boiling for five

minutes add more fuchsin immediately to avoid drying5 Wash with tap water or distilled water6 Decolorize with acid water or acid alcohol for one minute7 Wash with tap water8 Counterstain with aqueous methylene blue for thirty seconds or one

minute9 Wash with tap water for one minute10Drain and leave to dry on a slide rack

Examine under Oil Immersion Field

Results

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 28

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 4: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

c assist technical and administrative personnel of AFP hospitals in their various functions with patient care

d afford clinical training to the various interns in fulfilment of statutory requirements for the completion of their respective courses andor requirements prior to government board examinations

e Help promote pleasant civilian-military relationship7 At no time shall the interest and welfare of patients be subordinated to the

conduct of the affiliation training program8 rules and regulations regarding the conduct of training shall be prescribed by The

Surgeon General AFP9 the total number of interns accepted in AFP hospitals shall not exceed one per

five patient

PT SECTION SOP

1the CLSH PT Section can accept PT volunteers who are certified by MECS and PRC and who are from trainingteaching hospitals which are duly recognized by the Department of Health2 CLSH OTPT Section operates for 8hours3 Application for CLSH PTOT volunteer will be guided by the CLSH Security SOP4 PT NCOIC will assist the C Clinical Section in orienting the volunteers on the military protocol and on the CLSH SOP5 Accepted Volunteers must act in accordance to the policies of CLSH and CENTCOM policies regarding the behaviour duties and responsibilities similar to those of the CLSH employees

3 LABORATORY SECTION

31 PersonnelCPT LOUISE A CAJITA MC ndash OICTSG ULYSSES C BONTUYAN PA ndash NCOICMs Manresa D Cantildeales ndash Medical TechnologistMs Joan S Quibedo ndash Medical Technologist

32 Working HoursMon ndash Ms Manresa D Cantildeales 0700H ndash 1600HTues ndash Ms Joan S Quibedo 0700H - 1600H

Ms Manresa D Cantildeales 0700H ndash 1600HWed - Ms Manresa D Cantildeales 0700H ndash 1600HThu - Ms Manresa D Cantildeales 0700H ndash 1600H

Ms Joan S Quibedo 0700H ndash 1600HFri - Ms Joan S Quibedo 0700H ndash 1600HSat - Ms Manresa D Cantildeales 0800H ndash 1200HSun - Ms Joan S Quibedo 0800H ndash 1200H

33 Schedule of Different Laboratory examinations

Blood Chemistry

Tuesday and Thursday (except ldquoSTATrdquo or as scheduled or requested by MOD any days)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 4

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Extraction Time 0730H ndash 0800H In-Patient0800H ndash 0830H Out-Patient

34 All Out-Patient must secure a request from the MOD and must submit their request to the Laboratory a day before the scheduled extraction for proper instruction and scheduling We will not entertain patients who are not scheduled for that particular day All out-patients are advised to follow the schedule above We will not entertain patients after the cut-off time

35 For all in-patients the NOD should submit their request to the laboratory a day before the schedule of extraction

35-1 CBC UA SE etc

All out-patient should secure request from the MOD and should get their case number from the AampD Section before going to the laboratory Urine and stool specimens should strictly be in the morning only Cut-off time to all examinations is upto 1100H only except for ldquoSTATrdquo request

35-2 AFP (Sputum exam) and Newborn Screening ndash In-Patient ndash only Nurse-On-Duty should coordinate first with the Med-On-Duty for scheduling

35-3 Examinations done on outside laboratories ndash NOD must coordinate first

with the Med-Tech on duty for pricing and scheduling

35-4 Physical Examinations for Promotion Reenlistment Enlistment CAD APE etc MWF ndash 0800H ndash 1100H (cut-off time)

35-5 Results

Releasing of Out-Patient is at 1500HIn-Patient ndash Duty Med-Tech will endorse the result as soon as it is done

4 PHARMACY SECTION

41 DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

41-1 Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

a Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothesb Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities

(for Dependents)

41-2 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 5

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0800H ndash 1100H

41-3 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their

respective dispensary41-4 Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines41-5 No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

42 REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

42-1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

42-2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 PHYSICAL THERAPY

51 PT SESSION

51-1 Requesting party will secure their request to be signed by the Medical

Officer512 PT personnel is responsible for the briefing of the requesting party

about the procedures of PT Section

51-3 PT personnel is the over-all supervisor to all patients for physical therapy

treatment51-4 PT personnel is responsible the issuance of certification to all PT

volunteers 51-5 PT personnel is responsible for the issuance of medical certificate

to the patient

51-6 PT personnel is responsible on attending the PT treatment to the patients

51-7 Civilian patient are required to pay every treatment session thru Sgt Ancheta the finance before physical therapy treatment to the

patient 51-8 PT personnel are responsible to write PT notes every Physical

Therapy Treatment to the patient

52 SCHEDULE FOR PT TREATMENT

DAY MORNING AFTERNOONMONDAY TO FRIDAY 0800H ndash 1200H NONE

6 EENT EXAMINATION

61 EENT SESSION

61-1 Requesting party will secure their request to be signed by the Medical

Officer61-2 EENT personnel is responsible and assist the EENT doctor during

EENT

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 6

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

examination61-3 EENT personnel is the over-all supervisor to all patients for EENT

examination61-4 EENT personnel is responsible the issuance of certification and

medical certificate to all patients

61-5 EENT Doctor personnel is responsible on attending for the EENT treatment to the patients

61-6 EENT personnel is responsible to write EENT Doctor notes every every

EENT Treatment to the patient61-7 EENT personnel is responsible to all in and out communications at

EENT section

61-8 EENT personnel is responsible logbooks at EENT Section

62 SCHEDULE FOR EENT TREATMENT

DAY MORNING AFTERNOONM - W - F 0800H ndash 1130H 1330H -1630HT - TH 0800H ndash 1130H 1330H- 1430H

1500H - ATHLETIC

7 OBYNE SECTION

71 OBGYNE SECTION MISSION

To provide prenatal care and proper follow up for all normal and abnormal cases

of obtestric and gynecologic pateints

72 Prenatal schedule and consultation

DAY SCHEDULE MORNING AFTERNOONMON TO FRI PRENATAL 0800H-

1200H1300H-1700H

TUE amp THUGYNE CONSULTATIONFAMILY PLANING CONSUL

0800H-1200H

1300H-1700H

WEDNESDAY IMUNIZATION 0800H-1200H

73 The following are entitled to free prenatal check-up

1ST priority - Military personnel active service2ND priority - Direct dependents3RD priority - Civilian employees4TH priority - Unmaried dependents are entitled prenatal less than

18 years old of age

74 Check ndash up provided they will secure an authority duly signed by the OBGYNE

head CO and JAGO and pay the prenatal fee as prescribed by GHQ

4 2 1 - Retirees and Veterans

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 7

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 2 2 - Authorized civilians4 2 3 - Married or Unmarried dependents 18 years and above

` 42 1 - Children of dependents whether married or unmarried dependents

75 Requirements for pre-natal and consultation

a MilitaryDependents IDb Latest payslip of Military Personnelc MDRMarriage Contractd Newborn Screening payment six hundred pesos (P60000) only to be

Collected at 29 weeks AOGe Delivery Room requirements should be endorsed to Dependents Ward DR at 32 weeks AOG

8 NEURO PSYCHO EXAMINATION

81 Psychometrician or Psychologist will administer tests prescribed only in the AFPR G165-362 dtd 29 October 1996

81-1 For enlistment and trainee1 Intelligence Tests (Note IQ will not be reported as IQ points but

in terms of range eg not as 75 but ldquoAveragerdquo)2 Personality Tests

a Sentence Completion Testb MMPI or its equivalentc NP Forms

81-2 For Annual PE (Active Duty Status)1 Guilford-Zimmerman Temperament Survey2 Those who have not taken an IQ test will be required to take the SRA 3 Verbal Forms or the Personnel Tests for Industry

81-3 For Reenlistment1 NP Screening Forms2 Sentence Completion Forms

81-4 For Retirement (Officers and EM)Psychiatric interview to include review of clinicalhealthy records

81-5 For Supply Accountable Officer1 IQ Test3 Personality Test

82 The manner in which the psychologist or psychometrician administers the tests will be guided by their training

83 The manner with which they give recommendations will be guided by the provisions stated in the AFPR G pp 79-91

84 In the absence of an authorized NP Screener the CO will sign 42and 72 in the AFP PE form

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 8

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

85 Personnel will be allowed to take NP examination upon approval of their requests from COPE personnel

86 Schedule of Examinations

MondayAM - Scheduling of ExamPM - Conduct NP Examination

TuesdayAM - EvaluationInterviewRecordingPM - Athletics

WednesdayAM ndash PM - Conduct NP Examination

ThursdayAM - EvaluationInterviewRecordingPM - Athletics

FridayAM - PM - Conduct NP Examination

87 NP Examination Results will be forwarded to PE personnel for consolidation and

record purposes

88 In instances where the expertise of a Psychiatrist is needed and none is available

in the hospital a request for augmentation has to be made to the higher headquarters addressed to a military hospital which has an in-house Psychiatrist

9 X-RAY EXAMINATIONS

97 For Physical Examinations91-1 Applicants must present form from PE section prior examination91-2 Schedule of Examinations will be from Monday to Friday from

0800H-1130H

91-3 X-Ray result will be forwarded to PE section for consolidation

98 For Out-Patient92-1 Patient must present request signed by the duty MOD922 Schedule of Examinations will be from Monday to Friday from

0800H ndash 1130H

99 For In-Patient99-1 Examinations will be done anytime upon request from the MOD

910 Wednesday is Maintenance Day no examinations except emergency cases

10 OUT-PATIENT CONSULTATION

101 Requirements for consultation

101-1 Military Personnel ndash present military ID101-2 Dependents ndash present dependents IDMDR

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 9

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

101-3 CAA ndash present CAA ID101-4 Civilian Employees ndash present ID101-5 Authorized Civilians ndash must fill-up Authorization to be signed by CO

Prior consultation

102 Schedule of Consultation

Monday amp Wednesday

AM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM ndash 1330H ndash 1430H

Tuesday amp ThursdayAM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM - Athletics

FridayAM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM - 1330H ndash 1530H

103 Patients should be taken vital signsblood pressure prior examination104 Issuance of Medical Certificate must be upon approval of the MOD and

control number should be indicated with CLSH Office Seal

11 POLICIES AND GUIDELINES IN CONDUCTING DIAGNOSTIC EXAMINATIONS

111 Radiology Section

The attending physician writes order of X-ray examination in the patientrsquos chart

The ward nurse prepares a request of X-ray examination Radiology personnel logs request in their logbook The ward man accompanies the patient to the x-ray section For special procedures appropriate SOP is followed The ward nurse documents the time date manner of moving

and condition of the patient An X-ray personnel forwards the x-ray result to the ward

concerned and asks the recipient to sign in the logbook

Ward staff refers significant result to the attending physician and attaches the result to the patientrsquos

chart

112 Laboratory Section

The ward nurse fills up a laboratory examination request and forwards it to the laboratory The request must contain the

patientrsquos complete name which includes the middle name the patientrsquos rank age unit birth date name of the exam to be performed and the date it is to be performed

The patient is instructed on the proper collection of specimen Cut-off time for all examinations is up to 1100H only except for

ldquoSTATrdquo Patients admitted beyond 1100H who require routine laboratory exams such as CBC and UA shall

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 10

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

have their examinations performed the following day

ldquoSTATrdquo laboratory examinations are coordinated and done immediately

Sputum exams and newborn screenings are coordinated first with the medical technologist-on-duty for scheduling

Repeat sputum exams are prioritized over new PTB cases for AFB smear

Newborn screening is done only after the infant is 24 hours old Infants scheduled for newborn screening will be cord dressed

but will be not bathed on the morning of the exam Blood chemistry studies are done on Tuesdays and Thursdays

only Laboratory requests for such exams must be forwarded a day prior to the exam

Examinations to be done at outside laboratories or specimens that need to be sent out must be coordinated first by the

NOD with the medical technologist-on-duty for pricing and scheduling

Payment for outside laboratories must be settled by the Supply Section Officer-in-charge with the permission of the Admin

Officer Laboratory results will be endorsed by the medical technologist-

on-duty as soon as they are available

12 POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS ADVANCE DIRECTIVES

121 Any person of legal age and of sound mind may make an advance directive for physicians to administer terminal care when he she

suffers from the terminal phase of a terminal illness PROVIDED that

a He she is informed of the medical consequences of his her choice b He she releases those involved in his her care from any

obligation relative to the consequences on his her decisionc His her decision will not prejudice health and safety d A written request must be signed by the patient himherself duly

witnessed by a relative or significant others or a hospital personnel

e In case the patient is incapable of giving the consent and a third party consent is required the following persons in the order of priority stated hereunder may give consent

a Spouseb Son of or daughter of legal age

c Either parent d Brother or sister of legal age or e Guardian

122 Consent form once signed and witnessed should be attached to patients chart for filling

13 POLICIES ON DOCTORrsquoS ROUNDS

Doctorrsquos rounds are made everyday in the morning Except for unusual cases which are made daily

Unusual observations are referred to the Medical Officer of the (MOD) after duty hours

New orders are carried out promptly and accurately Routine laboratory treatments are done after treatment

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 11

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

14 POLICIES ON DISCHARGING A PATIENT

141 Military Patients

141a Return to Duty

a Attending physician writes the discharge orderb Patientrsquos chart should be reviewed for completeness

particularly the Cover Sheet which should be signed by the Medical Officer

c Upon receipt of order for discharge Disposition Slip (Cover Sheet) is prepared and forwarded to A amp D Section for issuance of Special Order

d Discharged patients will report to their respective unit first hour of their Expected Date of Return to Duty (EDRD) No discharge will be made on the date of disposition Patients may go on pass before EDRD depending on the Ward Officerrsquos discretion or they may also stay in the hospital until their EDRD

e Prior to discharge patients are given Clearance Form to be completed

f The duty nurse writes and gives discharge instructions to the patient and significant others as well as the date of follow-up check up

g PhilHealth Form shall be properly accomplished by the patient attached with MDR Form and military ID

h Retro-evac patients when recovered these patients will be discharged accordingly following routine disposition of all patients

i The duty nurse checks all equipment items issued to patient are returned

j Discard all medicine card tags except for roster card Indicate EDRD and final diagnosis on the roster card and retained it until EDRD is due

k Locate patientrsquos name on the A amp D book and write the final diagnosis and EDRD opposite their names

l Log patientrsquos name in the discharge checklist and send to A amp D Section together with the chart which is arranged properly and have it properly received by the A amp D personnel

m Drop patient from census on the date of discharge n Document discharge time date condition of patient and

manner of leaving Nursing Unit

141b Discharge by Evacuationa Bring the chart with order final diagnosis and completed cover

sheet to the A amp D Section so that three copies of evacuation papers can be accomplished and evacuation flights can be coordinated

b Evacuation paper Letter Order Narrative Summary and pertinent diagnostic results (together with x-ray plates ECG Tracing etc) are given to the patient and checked by the NOD

c Patients are prohibited to carry firearms during the travel Firearms or deadly weapons of patients for evacuation shall remain in deposit with CLSH storeroom for safekeeping

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 12

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

d Indicate final diagnosis date of evacuation and place to be evacuated opposite the patientrsquos name in the A and D book and drop from census

e Return borrowed items in the CSR

141c Transfer of Hospital (within Cebu) a When the patient needs extensive medicalsurgical

management beyond the capability of the hospital Ward Officer is responsible for completion of all data necessary for transfer to include preparation of Narrative Summary

b Ward master ward man on duty will forward Disposition Form to A amp D Section

c Narrative summary will go with the patient chart should remain in the hospital for future use filing and safekeeping

141d Discharge by Deatha When death occurs on the ward the nurse on duty shall

immediately notify the A amp D Section personnel on duty who should prepare the death certificate The last attending Medical Officer completes the diagnosis and other clinical requirements

b Post mortem care should be done before sending the cadaver to the morgue

c All belongings of the deceased shall be properly accounted for and turned over to the relatives properly receipted

d A death certificate shall be given to the immediate relatives who will accompany the cadaver to the funeral parlor

e Log patientrsquos final diagnosis datetime of death in the A and D book and census

142 Dependents1421Discharge procedure is the same as that of the military except that

they can be discharged on the day of disposition once clearance is obtained

1422For the patientrsquos who are discharged against medical advice the patient of legal age or his her parent and or relative are made to sign a certificate to the effect that the hospital shall not be responsible for anything that would happen to the patient after he leaves the hospital after the doctorrsquos order which is also signed by two (2) witnesses

143 Civilian 1431Civilian employees retired military personnel dependents of retired

military personnel pure civilian have the same discharge procedure as dependents

1432Nurse on Duty should prepare billing prior to discharge 1433Billing of Civilian patients will be done by the Finance Sergeant1434Obligations such as hospital charges shall be settled at the

Admission and Disposition (A amp D) Section before discharge 1435Civilian employee with Phil health form must accomplish the form

in order to obtain clearance from the A amp D Section Medicines medical supplies diagnostic examinations and days of hospitalization should be listed and forwarded to the A amp D Section with the patientrsquos chart

1436Dependents of retired military personnel - same as above1437Retired Military Personnel (RMP) - only mess is charge1438Pure civilian - same as the civilian employees

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 13

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1439Patient presents a duly accomplished clearance prior to the release of discharge order and receipt of payment to the nurse on duty

15 EMERGENCY ROOM POLICIES AND GUIDELINES

1 only emergency cases are entertained in the ER General consultations are referred to the OPD After office hours and on SaturdaySunday and Holiday consultations may be entertained upon the discretion of the OPD

2 patients must be referred to the MOD

3 NOD should obtain the patientrsquos chief complaint weight vital signs get gestational data (LMP ED BP FH FHT if the patient is an OBGYNE case) and other admitting notes

4 inform patient of the existing hospital policies and guidelines upon admission (visiting schedule rights responsibilities policies and regulations

5 provide watcherrsquos id and provide the admin on duty with the list of admitted patients

6 NOD must facilitate requisition of hospital number

7 MOD attends to the patients The nurse on duty assists the MOD in performing assessments

8 for admitted patients MOD writes order for the medical treatment and the ER nurse on duty immediately executes them

9 a signed consent must be obtained from the patients In case of minor or handicapped patients guardians must fill up the consent for them

10NOD should facilitate laboratory works

11 IVF insertion is done either by the PGI on dutyMOD or NOD

12NOD starts giving the medications available Drugs that require skin testing must be performed at the ER and this should be confirmed by the physician and recorded in the patientrsquos chart

13MODNOD gives initial health teachings to the client or significant others as needed

14NOD regulates the IVF of patients before transporting to the ward

15 if patient refuses admission she must inform the MOD and sign a waiver denouncing the hospital from any liabilities A thorough explanation by the MOD shall be afforded to the patient upon signing of the waiver

16 illiterate patientscompanion must be asked to have their thumb marks on the record

17all stocks medicines used by the patient must be replaced as soon as possible on or before the patient leaves the ER This will be done by the duty ER NCO

18only emergency cases are provided with ER stocks NOD gets the prescription and have these items replaced by the pharmacy andor CSR

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 14

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

19ER NOD duty ER NCO will be held accountable for whatever lossesdeficiencies that may occur during hisher shift

20 inventory of all ER items is done every after shift by the NOD

21ER NCOIC must submit a monthly inventory report to the pharmacy and supply section for auditing purposes

22consultations are not entertained in the ER during office hours They are referred to the OPD

23communicableInfectious conditions which require isolation and cases other than OB-GYNEPedia are not accepted for admission but referred to other agencies after MOD has evaluated the patient The MOD should call and should be the one to make the call to the hospital where the patient is to be transferred to

24wounds of more than 24-hour duration are not entertained in te ER but in the OPD except on holidays Saturdays and Sundays

25 for invasive procedures a consent signed by the patient (if adult) companion andor guardian should be obtained before treatment or care is instituted

26should patient refuse she cannot be submitted to a particular treatment This should be properly documented on the patientrsquos record and have the patient sign a waiver for the refusal

27 for emergency cases where a patientrsquos life is in danger no consent is necessary However proper notation shall be made on the patientrsquos record by the physician and must be affirmed by a witness

28media is not allowed within the ER premises to avoid distortion in the management of patients

29dean on arrival (DOA) clients in ER cases are classified in the following categories

DOA Criteria0 vital signs ndash CPR done rarr failedNo death certificate shall be issuedER death ndash 0 vital signs rarr CPRrarr reviverarr died within 26 hoursHospital issue death certificateDOA and ER deaths should be marked on the patientrsquos record in bold

letters using ball pen

30all procedures performed in the ER shall be subjected to official charging which will be forwarded to the different branch of services where the patient belongs Only CENTCOM organic military personnel will be carried free of charge

15 POLICIES ON DO NOT RESUSCITATE (DNR)

151 Definition of Terms151a Resuscitation is a medical procedure which seeks to

restore cardiac andor respiratory function to individuals who have sustained a cardiac andor respiratory arrest

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 15

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

151b Do Not Resuscitate (DNR) is a medical order to provide no resuscitation to individuals for

whom resuscitation is not warranted151c Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) is the

common term used to refer to resuscitation However the options available to treat very sick patients are broader than CPR as literally defined Other options include intensive care antibiotic therapy hydration and nutritional support Appropriate comfort care measures should be employed for all patients especially terminally ill patients

152 DNR Protocol

1521WILL suction the airway administer oxygen position for comfort splint or immobilize control bleeding provide pain medication provide emotional support and contact other appropriate health care providers and

1521WILL NOT administer chest compressions insert an artificial airway administer resuscitative drugs defibrillate or

cardiovert provide respiratory assistance (other than suctioning the airway and administering oxygen) initiate resuscitative IV or initiate cardiac monitoring

153 Types of DNR Orders

1531a DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time the order

is given DNR Comfort Care orders permit comfort care only both before and during a cardiac or respiratory arrest Resuscitative therapies will not be

administered prior to an arrest This order is generally regarded as appropriate for patients who have a terminal illness short life expectancy little chance of surviving CPR and a desire to let nature take its course in the face of an impending arrest

1531b DNR Comfort Care-ArrestDNR Comfort Care-Arrest orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time of a cardiac or respiratory arrest A cardiac arrest occurs when there is an absence of a palpable pulse A respiratory arrest occurs when there are no spontaneous respirations or there is agonal breathing Resuscitative therapies will be administered before an arrest but not during an arrest The term DNR (without additional wording) when recorded in the medical chart shall be considered a DNR Comfort Care-Arrest order

1531c DNR Specified All other DNR orders are DNR Specified orders DNR Specified orders modify the DNR Protocol in some respect either in treatment modalities or in the timing of the protocol activation

1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 16

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart

1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order

DNR is a medical order to be given only by authorized health care practitioners DNR orders generally should be given with the informed consent of the patient or the patientrsquos surrogate decision-maker Ideally the physician should sensitively discuss the DNR option with the patient while the patient is mentally competent However DNR orders are often considered for patients who are comatose or who otherwise lack decisional capacity with whom this discussion has not occurred or cannot occur

In cases when a patient lacks decisional capacity the DNR option should be considered in conjunction with the patients advance directives if known or should be discussed with a surrogate A surrogate may be designated by a patient as the attorney-in-fact in a Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care A surrogate may also be identified as the first available person(s) from the following list in order

f Spouseg Son of or daughter of legal age h Either parent i Brother or sister of legal age or j Guardian

In all cases the primary physician should discuss the DNR option with the patient if possible and the surrogate(s) if appropriate There is no obligation to offer or initiate CPR if resuscitation would be futile ie if resuscitation would not achieve its physiological objective would offer no benefit to the patient and would violate reasonable medical standards

154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart

The words DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care-Arrest or DNR Specified should be recorded on the left-hand side of the medical chart (where advance directives are maintained) along with the date time rationale for the DNR order the names of the patient andor family members involved in the decision and a statement that the patient andor surrogate was fully informed about and consented to the DNR order If a DNR Specified order is recorded the modifications to the DNR Protocol should be specified in the medical chart as well as the desired timing of the activation of the modified Protocol

DNR decisions for inpatients should be transmitted clearly to those caring for the patients A DNR order should never result in the abandonment of a patient and steps should

155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders

The DNR order should be reassessed as part of the ongoing evaluation of an inpatient A DNR order should be affirmed modified or revoked only after a discussion between the primary physician and the patient if possible or the surrogate(s) if appropriate and the consent of the patient or surrogate DNR orders should be reassessed frequently and

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 17

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

as conditions warrant Reassessments of DNR orders should be documented in the medical chart If a DNR order is changed from one of the three types of DNR orders to a different type the patients DNR bracelet should be replaced with a new bracelet containing the revised designation If a DNR order is revoked the DNR bracelet should be removed and destroyed A physician or other health care worker who feels that he or she cannot honor a patients DNR request may not prevent or delay the transfer of the patient to a physician or facility which will honor the DNR status

156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care

The administration of anesthesia necessarily involves some practices and procedures that might be viewed as resuscitation in other settings Prior to any inpatient or outpatient invasive procedure for which the policy requires the documentation of informed consent any existing DNR order should when possible be reviewed with the patient or the patients surrogate As a result of this review the status of the DNR order during the perioperative period should be affirmed clarified or modified based on the preferences of the patient Any clarifications or modifications should be documented in the medical chart along with a notation indicating if or when the original DNR order should be reinstated Concurrence on these issues by the primary physician the surgeon and the anesthesiologist is desirable The DNR bracelet should not be removed during the perioperative period even if the DNR order has been temporarily modified

157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives

In the event of a conflict between one of the three types of DNR orders and an advance directive which has become effective because a person is unable to communicate and is terminally ill or permanently unconscious the instructions from the document (or person named as an Attorney-in-Fact) ranked higher in the following list shall prevail

a Living will of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

b Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care or an Attorney-in-Fact acting in accordance therewith of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

c DNR order d

16POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS DISCHARGE INSTRUCTION

161 The patient or his her legal guardian has the right to be informed by the physician or his her delegate ( nurse) of his her continuing health care requirements following discharge including instructions about

a Take home medicationsb Dietc Physical activityd Special instructions

- Signs to watch out for - When to bring the patient back to the physician- Instructions to follow in the event of untoward incidences

complications

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 18

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

e Follow-up Check-upf All other pertinent information to promote health and well-being

162 At the end patientrsquos confinement he she is entitled to a brief written summary of the course of his her illness which shall include at least the history physical examination diagnosis medications surgical procedure ancillary and laboratory procedures and the plan of further treatment and which shall be provided by the attending physician

17 POLICIES ON DISCLOSURE OF PATIENTrsquoS INFORMATION

171 The privacy of the patients must be assured at all stages of his her treatment Similarly the patient has the right to be free from unwarranted public exposure EXCEPT in the following cases

a When his her mental or physical condition is in controversy and the appropriate court in its discretion orders him her to submit to a physical or mental examination by a physician

b When the public health and safety so demandc When the patient waives his her rights

172 Any health care provider or practitioner involved in the treatment of the patient and all those who have legitimate access to the patientrsquos record is not authorized to divulge any information to a third party who has no concern with the care and welfare of the patient without his Her consent EXCEPT

a When such disclosure will benefit public health and safetyb When it is in the interest of justice and upon the order of a competent

courtc When patients waives in writing the confidential nature of such

information d When it is needed for continued medical treatment or advancement of

medical science subject to de-identification of patient and shared medical confidentiality for those who have access to the information

1721 Informing the spouse or the family to the first degree of the patientrsquos medical condition may be allowed Provided that the patient of legal age have the right to choose on whom to inform

1722 In case the patient is not of legal age or is mentally incapacitated such information shall be given to the parents legal guardian or his her next of kin

18 ETHICAL CONSIDERATIONS IN THE ADMINISTRATION OF BLOOD

181 The physician should obtain the patients informed consent before administering blood products This includes explaining to the patient the relative benefits and risks of receiving and not receiving the blood product as well as any reasonably viable alternatives

182 Generally in emergency situations where treatment is necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient and consent is not available (because the patient is unconscious or otherwise unable to consent) the physician may administer blood products (and any other treatment) necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient This does not apply if

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 19

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

the patient has expressly refused the treatment before becoming incompetent

183 A competent adult is entitled to refuse or cease any treatment for any reason

184 Parents ordinarily have the responsibility to provide consent on behalf of their young children however it is highly unlikely that parents can refuse life-saving treatment for their children Physicians may not simply override a parents refusal

185 Although it is legally clear that a mentally competent adult is entitled to refuse any medical treatment including a blood transfusion physicians have a responsibility to ensure that the refusal is truly informed and voluntary

186 In the case of adults who were once competent but have become temporarily or permanently incompetent substitute consent laws generally provide that their prior wishes regarding treatment decisions should be respected to the extent that they are known or can be determined

19 LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

191 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for IN-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSDoctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientStaff Nurse Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Proceed to the requesting Ward and collect

blood for the ordered examination Take specimen to the laboratoryExamine specimen Sign the resultRecord the result on its respective logbookRecord the result in PhilHealth logbookEndorse the result to the ward

Nurse On Duty Receive the result Refer the result to the Doctor on Duty

192 Specimens Received for Examination

Forms Needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatientPresent specimen with laboratory request signed by the Physician

Medical Technologist Receive specimen and laboratory requestExamine the specimen

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 20

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Sign the resultRecord the result to the respective logbook Endorse the Result to the Nurse on Duty for In- Patients and Release result to patients in OPD

193 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for OUT-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatient Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Receive the request and collect blood for the

ordered examination Examine specimen Sign the result Record the result on its respective logbook Record the result in OPD logbook Release the result

Patient Take the result to the Physician in OPD

194 Monthly Laboratory Report Census

Form Needed Monthly Report Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSMedical Technologist Record all daily results in the

logbookPrepare Monthly report based on the daily report of examinationsSign the reportGive the report to the OIC of the Laboratory for approval

OIC Laboratory Sign and approve the reportMedical Technologist Release the report

2 Laboratory Uniform

Laboratory uniform is a must on all working days except holidays but must be in laboratory gown when with patients

3 Request Slips

In-patient request slips must be completely filled -up by the nurse medical clerk

Out-patient request slips must be duly signed by the Medical Doctor on Duty assigned in OPD

Only requests from the CLSH Hospital will be honored by the laboratory

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 21

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Examination Performed

A Hematology

1 CBC (Complete Blood Count)2 Platelet Count3 Hemoglobin Test4 Clotting Time5 Bleeding Time

B Clinical Microscopy

1 Urinalysis2 Fecalysis

C Blood Banking and Serology

1 Blood Typing2 Hepatitis B Determination (Qualitative)3 Syphilis (Qualitative)

D Bacteriology

1 Acid fast Staining

E Blood Chemistry

1 Cholesterol2 Triglyceride3 Fasting Blood Sugar4 Blood Uric Acid5 Blood Urea Nitrogen6 Serum Creatinine

5 Reasons for ordering laboratory measurements examinations

a To confirm a clinical impression or establish a diagnosisb To rule out a diagnosisc To monitor therapy (management guide)d To establish prognosise To screen for or detect disease

SPECIMEN COLLECTION

2 General Procedure for Obtaining Blood

1 Skin Puncture2 Venous Puncture

Technique for Venous Puncture

1 Identify the patient2 If fasting is required confirm that fasting order has been followed3 Inform the patient of the procedure to be done

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 22

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Prepare the patient and all equipment needed5 Select a suitable vein for venipuncture Veins of the antecubital fossa in

particular the median cubital and cephalic veins are preferred Wrist ankle and hand veins may also be used If one arm has an intravenous line use the other arm to draw a blood specimen

6 Cleanse the venipuncture site with 70 isopropyl alcohol Allow the arm to dry Do not touch the swabbed area with any unsterile object

7 Apply a tourniquet several inches above the puncture site Never leave the tourniquet in place longer than one minute

8 Anchor the vein firmly both above and below the puncture site Use either the thumb and middle finger or thumb and index finger

9 Perform the venipuncture10Release the tourniquet when blood begins to flow11After all blood has been drawn have the patient relax his or her fist Do

not allow the patient to pump the hand12Place a clean sterile cotton ball lightly over the side Withdraw the needle

then apply pressure to the site13Mix tubes with anticoagulant For syringe-drawn specimens transfer blood

to appropriate tubes taking precautions to avoid hemolyzing the specimens Follow any special handling procedures

14Check condition of the patient whether patient is faint and that bleeding is under control

15Dispose of contaminated material such as needles syringes cotton etc16Deliver tubes of blood for testing to appropriate departments

An additional protocol is important in the venipuncture procedure Follow the recommended ldquoorder of drawrdquo when collecting tubes To avoid contamination draw specimens into non-additive tubes before tubes with additives

17Let the blood sample retract completely before centrifuging Separate serum from clotted blood Make sure proper labeling is observed and practiced

HEMATOLOGY

Preparation and staining of Blood Smears for Diffferential Count

Principle

The examination of the peripheral blood smear is the most important examination one can do in hematological evaluation of a patient

Materials Needed

1 Pricker or lancet2 Microscope slides3 Spreader4 Pencil5 Cotton soaked in alcohol6 Dry cotton

Procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 23

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 Puncture the skin as desired and wipe away the first drop of blood2 Touch the surface of the clean slide to a small drop of blood the drop

should be placed near one end of the slide3 Turn the slide over such that the drop of blood is now on the top side and

the other end of the slide away from the drop of the blood is held by the thumb and forefinger of the left hand The other finger serves to support the slide

4 Pick up another slide and loosely between thumb and forefinger of the right hand

5 The slide in the right hand is called the spreader slide Place the spreader in front of the drop and pull back until it touches the drop

6 As soon as the blood spreads by capillary attraction almost to the edge of the slide push the spreader forwards at an angle of approximately 30-45 degrees using a rapid even motion

Note

The weight of the slide is the only pressure applied the thickness of the spread is controlled by the size of the drop the angle at which the spreader slide is held and the speed of spreading The greater the angle the thicker and shorter is the film

7 Dry the slide in air when dried write the name of the patient and date in the thick end of the blood film using a pencil or at the other side of the slide

Staining for Differential Count

Reagents

Rapid Romanowsky staining using ldquorapi-diffrdquo

Solution A Fixing solution MethanolSolution B Acid dye EosinSolution C Basic dye Methylene blueSolution D Buffer pH 68 phosphate buffer

Procedure

1 Prepare a blood smear and air dry

2 Fix by immersing in Solution A for 30 seconds

3 Transfer without rinsing or drying to Solution B and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

4 Without rinsing transfer the slide to Solution C and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

5 Rinse briefly in buffered water pH 68 and allow to dry

Results Macroscopically

Smear in pinkish violet

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 24

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Normal Values

Neutrophils 40-60

Lymphocytes 20-40

Monocyte 4-8

Eosinophil 1-3

Basophil 0-1

Stab 0-1

Peripheral Blood Smear

Procedure in reading peripheral blood smear

1 Examine the blood smear grossly against the light and note the contour and background color

2 Examine under the low power in order to ascertain the adequacy of the staining and select the best fields for study

3 Note agglutination or rouleaux formation of erythrocytes

4 Examine the slides systematically starting at the thin end In this way reduplication of the field is avoided Fields should be avoided in which the red cells are stacked up or are in rouleaux and fields should be examined in which the red cells are well separated and the white cells thinly spread

5 Examine the erythrocytes and note variations in size shape color hemoglobin content abnormal objects in cytoplasm and number of nucleated red cells per 100 leukocytes

6 Examine the WBC and study the morphology

CLINICAL MICROSCOPY

Routine Urinalysis

I Organization of Work

Steps Multistix Test

1 Agitate the urine container Examine the urine with regards to color and transparency

2 Fill the centrifuge tube with the urine

3 Dip a multistix strip into the tube and determine the following by comparing with test chart after specific reading time

a Specific Gravity - 45 ndash 60 seconds

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 25

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

b Ph - time not criticalc Protein - read immediatelyd Glucose - 10 ndash 30 seconds

II Microscopic Examination

Procedure

1 Mix the urine well first and obtain a few cc into a test tube2 Centrifuge urine for five minutes3 Decant the supernatant liquid in a quick motion so that the

sediments are left at the bottom of the test tube4 Place in a clean slide5 Examine under the microscope (regulate lighting by adjusting the

substage diaphragm)6 Focus first at low power then shift to the high power objective

Report as follows

1 RBC and WBC ndash average cells hpf2 Casts ndash average casts per hpf3 Epithelial Cells lpf or accasional few moderate abundant4 Crystals lpf are rare few moderate abundant

Fecalysis

I Macroscopic or Physical Examination

1 Form Consistency and Size

2 Color

II Direct fecal Smear

Procedure

1 Place a drop of saline on the slide2 Using an applicator stick take a small portion of the stool

Formed ndash take the portion from well inside the sampleMucus or watery ndash take the portion from the bloodstained mucus on the surface or from the surface of the liquid

3 mix the sample with the drop of saline on the slide4 Examine the specimen under LPO then shift to HPO5 Report as follows

Normal No Parasite seenMucous Normal - a very small amount

Blood - no blood present

BACTERIOLOGY

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 26

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

SPUTUM EXAMINATION

Acid Fast Bacilli

Signs and symptoms of Asymptomatic Patient

1 Cough for 2 weeks duration or more2 Chest and upper back pains for one month duration or more3 Hemoptysis or blood streaking4 On and off afternoon fever for one month duration or more5 Regressive loss of weight

Collection of specimen

1 Identify the patient through signs and symptoms2 Instruct the patient properly3 Collect the first sputum in the morning4 The patient should be standing if possible5 He should take a very deep breath filling his lungs6 He should empty his lungs in one breath coughing as hard and deeply as

he can7 He should spit what he brings up into the jar or sputum cup8 Label the jar or sputum cup with his name and date

After Collection

Check that sufficient amount of sputum has been produced

The sputum of an infected person usually containsa thick mucus air bubblesb threads of fibrinc patches of pusd occasional brownish streaks of blood

Preparation of Sputum Smears

Materials glass slides (new if possible unscratched) inoculating loop or coconut midribs cotton wool plug on metal wire for flaming alarm clock (timer)

Procedure

1 Prepare two slides Take a purulent potion of the sputum one scrath slide using either one sterile inoculating loop or two to form tongs

2 Make the smear as thin as possible covering as large an area as possible tracing concentric circles well separated but not reaching the edges of the slide

Preparation for fixing Sputum Smear

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 27

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Materials sputum smears alcohol lamp match

Procedure of fixing

1 Dry smears in the air2 Fix the smears by passing the slides three times through the flame3 Let it cool before staining

Preparation in Staining using Ziehl-Neelsen (Hot Method)

Principle The tubercule bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis is acid-fast and stains res with Ziehl-Neelsen stain while almost all other organisms stain blue

Materials alcohol lamp match forceps sputum smears cotton wool soaked in 70 ethanol Ziehl-Neelsen reagents denatured alcohol (for burning)

Reagents1 carbol fuchsin2 acid water or acid alcohol3 aqueous methylene blue

Procedure in staining

1 Cover the slides with filtered carbol fuchsin2 Dip the cotton wool swab in the methylated spirit ignite and pass slowly

under the slides to heat them3 As soon as steam begins to rise set the timer at five minutes4 Continue to heat so that the steam is seen but without boiling for five

minutes add more fuchsin immediately to avoid drying5 Wash with tap water or distilled water6 Decolorize with acid water or acid alcohol for one minute7 Wash with tap water8 Counterstain with aqueous methylene blue for thirty seconds or one

minute9 Wash with tap water for one minute10Drain and leave to dry on a slide rack

Examine under Oil Immersion Field

Results

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 28

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 5: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Extraction Time 0730H ndash 0800H In-Patient0800H ndash 0830H Out-Patient

34 All Out-Patient must secure a request from the MOD and must submit their request to the Laboratory a day before the scheduled extraction for proper instruction and scheduling We will not entertain patients who are not scheduled for that particular day All out-patients are advised to follow the schedule above We will not entertain patients after the cut-off time

35 For all in-patients the NOD should submit their request to the laboratory a day before the schedule of extraction

35-1 CBC UA SE etc

All out-patient should secure request from the MOD and should get their case number from the AampD Section before going to the laboratory Urine and stool specimens should strictly be in the morning only Cut-off time to all examinations is upto 1100H only except for ldquoSTATrdquo request

35-2 AFP (Sputum exam) and Newborn Screening ndash In-Patient ndash only Nurse-On-Duty should coordinate first with the Med-On-Duty for scheduling

35-3 Examinations done on outside laboratories ndash NOD must coordinate first

with the Med-Tech on duty for pricing and scheduling

35-4 Physical Examinations for Promotion Reenlistment Enlistment CAD APE etc MWF ndash 0800H ndash 1100H (cut-off time)

35-5 Results

Releasing of Out-Patient is at 1500HIn-Patient ndash Duty Med-Tech will endorse the result as soon as it is done

4 PHARMACY SECTION

41 DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

41-1 Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

a Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothesb Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities

(for Dependents)

41-2 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 5

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0800H ndash 1100H

41-3 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their

respective dispensary41-4 Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines41-5 No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

42 REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

42-1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

42-2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 PHYSICAL THERAPY

51 PT SESSION

51-1 Requesting party will secure their request to be signed by the Medical

Officer512 PT personnel is responsible for the briefing of the requesting party

about the procedures of PT Section

51-3 PT personnel is the over-all supervisor to all patients for physical therapy

treatment51-4 PT personnel is responsible the issuance of certification to all PT

volunteers 51-5 PT personnel is responsible for the issuance of medical certificate

to the patient

51-6 PT personnel is responsible on attending the PT treatment to the patients

51-7 Civilian patient are required to pay every treatment session thru Sgt Ancheta the finance before physical therapy treatment to the

patient 51-8 PT personnel are responsible to write PT notes every Physical

Therapy Treatment to the patient

52 SCHEDULE FOR PT TREATMENT

DAY MORNING AFTERNOONMONDAY TO FRIDAY 0800H ndash 1200H NONE

6 EENT EXAMINATION

61 EENT SESSION

61-1 Requesting party will secure their request to be signed by the Medical

Officer61-2 EENT personnel is responsible and assist the EENT doctor during

EENT

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 6

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

examination61-3 EENT personnel is the over-all supervisor to all patients for EENT

examination61-4 EENT personnel is responsible the issuance of certification and

medical certificate to all patients

61-5 EENT Doctor personnel is responsible on attending for the EENT treatment to the patients

61-6 EENT personnel is responsible to write EENT Doctor notes every every

EENT Treatment to the patient61-7 EENT personnel is responsible to all in and out communications at

EENT section

61-8 EENT personnel is responsible logbooks at EENT Section

62 SCHEDULE FOR EENT TREATMENT

DAY MORNING AFTERNOONM - W - F 0800H ndash 1130H 1330H -1630HT - TH 0800H ndash 1130H 1330H- 1430H

1500H - ATHLETIC

7 OBYNE SECTION

71 OBGYNE SECTION MISSION

To provide prenatal care and proper follow up for all normal and abnormal cases

of obtestric and gynecologic pateints

72 Prenatal schedule and consultation

DAY SCHEDULE MORNING AFTERNOONMON TO FRI PRENATAL 0800H-

1200H1300H-1700H

TUE amp THUGYNE CONSULTATIONFAMILY PLANING CONSUL

0800H-1200H

1300H-1700H

WEDNESDAY IMUNIZATION 0800H-1200H

73 The following are entitled to free prenatal check-up

1ST priority - Military personnel active service2ND priority - Direct dependents3RD priority - Civilian employees4TH priority - Unmaried dependents are entitled prenatal less than

18 years old of age

74 Check ndash up provided they will secure an authority duly signed by the OBGYNE

head CO and JAGO and pay the prenatal fee as prescribed by GHQ

4 2 1 - Retirees and Veterans

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 7

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 2 2 - Authorized civilians4 2 3 - Married or Unmarried dependents 18 years and above

` 42 1 - Children of dependents whether married or unmarried dependents

75 Requirements for pre-natal and consultation

a MilitaryDependents IDb Latest payslip of Military Personnelc MDRMarriage Contractd Newborn Screening payment six hundred pesos (P60000) only to be

Collected at 29 weeks AOGe Delivery Room requirements should be endorsed to Dependents Ward DR at 32 weeks AOG

8 NEURO PSYCHO EXAMINATION

81 Psychometrician or Psychologist will administer tests prescribed only in the AFPR G165-362 dtd 29 October 1996

81-1 For enlistment and trainee1 Intelligence Tests (Note IQ will not be reported as IQ points but

in terms of range eg not as 75 but ldquoAveragerdquo)2 Personality Tests

a Sentence Completion Testb MMPI or its equivalentc NP Forms

81-2 For Annual PE (Active Duty Status)1 Guilford-Zimmerman Temperament Survey2 Those who have not taken an IQ test will be required to take the SRA 3 Verbal Forms or the Personnel Tests for Industry

81-3 For Reenlistment1 NP Screening Forms2 Sentence Completion Forms

81-4 For Retirement (Officers and EM)Psychiatric interview to include review of clinicalhealthy records

81-5 For Supply Accountable Officer1 IQ Test3 Personality Test

82 The manner in which the psychologist or psychometrician administers the tests will be guided by their training

83 The manner with which they give recommendations will be guided by the provisions stated in the AFPR G pp 79-91

84 In the absence of an authorized NP Screener the CO will sign 42and 72 in the AFP PE form

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 8

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

85 Personnel will be allowed to take NP examination upon approval of their requests from COPE personnel

86 Schedule of Examinations

MondayAM - Scheduling of ExamPM - Conduct NP Examination

TuesdayAM - EvaluationInterviewRecordingPM - Athletics

WednesdayAM ndash PM - Conduct NP Examination

ThursdayAM - EvaluationInterviewRecordingPM - Athletics

FridayAM - PM - Conduct NP Examination

87 NP Examination Results will be forwarded to PE personnel for consolidation and

record purposes

88 In instances where the expertise of a Psychiatrist is needed and none is available

in the hospital a request for augmentation has to be made to the higher headquarters addressed to a military hospital which has an in-house Psychiatrist

9 X-RAY EXAMINATIONS

97 For Physical Examinations91-1 Applicants must present form from PE section prior examination91-2 Schedule of Examinations will be from Monday to Friday from

0800H-1130H

91-3 X-Ray result will be forwarded to PE section for consolidation

98 For Out-Patient92-1 Patient must present request signed by the duty MOD922 Schedule of Examinations will be from Monday to Friday from

0800H ndash 1130H

99 For In-Patient99-1 Examinations will be done anytime upon request from the MOD

910 Wednesday is Maintenance Day no examinations except emergency cases

10 OUT-PATIENT CONSULTATION

101 Requirements for consultation

101-1 Military Personnel ndash present military ID101-2 Dependents ndash present dependents IDMDR

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 9

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

101-3 CAA ndash present CAA ID101-4 Civilian Employees ndash present ID101-5 Authorized Civilians ndash must fill-up Authorization to be signed by CO

Prior consultation

102 Schedule of Consultation

Monday amp Wednesday

AM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM ndash 1330H ndash 1430H

Tuesday amp ThursdayAM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM - Athletics

FridayAM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM - 1330H ndash 1530H

103 Patients should be taken vital signsblood pressure prior examination104 Issuance of Medical Certificate must be upon approval of the MOD and

control number should be indicated with CLSH Office Seal

11 POLICIES AND GUIDELINES IN CONDUCTING DIAGNOSTIC EXAMINATIONS

111 Radiology Section

The attending physician writes order of X-ray examination in the patientrsquos chart

The ward nurse prepares a request of X-ray examination Radiology personnel logs request in their logbook The ward man accompanies the patient to the x-ray section For special procedures appropriate SOP is followed The ward nurse documents the time date manner of moving

and condition of the patient An X-ray personnel forwards the x-ray result to the ward

concerned and asks the recipient to sign in the logbook

Ward staff refers significant result to the attending physician and attaches the result to the patientrsquos

chart

112 Laboratory Section

The ward nurse fills up a laboratory examination request and forwards it to the laboratory The request must contain the

patientrsquos complete name which includes the middle name the patientrsquos rank age unit birth date name of the exam to be performed and the date it is to be performed

The patient is instructed on the proper collection of specimen Cut-off time for all examinations is up to 1100H only except for

ldquoSTATrdquo Patients admitted beyond 1100H who require routine laboratory exams such as CBC and UA shall

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 10

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

have their examinations performed the following day

ldquoSTATrdquo laboratory examinations are coordinated and done immediately

Sputum exams and newborn screenings are coordinated first with the medical technologist-on-duty for scheduling

Repeat sputum exams are prioritized over new PTB cases for AFB smear

Newborn screening is done only after the infant is 24 hours old Infants scheduled for newborn screening will be cord dressed

but will be not bathed on the morning of the exam Blood chemistry studies are done on Tuesdays and Thursdays

only Laboratory requests for such exams must be forwarded a day prior to the exam

Examinations to be done at outside laboratories or specimens that need to be sent out must be coordinated first by the

NOD with the medical technologist-on-duty for pricing and scheduling

Payment for outside laboratories must be settled by the Supply Section Officer-in-charge with the permission of the Admin

Officer Laboratory results will be endorsed by the medical technologist-

on-duty as soon as they are available

12 POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS ADVANCE DIRECTIVES

121 Any person of legal age and of sound mind may make an advance directive for physicians to administer terminal care when he she

suffers from the terminal phase of a terminal illness PROVIDED that

a He she is informed of the medical consequences of his her choice b He she releases those involved in his her care from any

obligation relative to the consequences on his her decisionc His her decision will not prejudice health and safety d A written request must be signed by the patient himherself duly

witnessed by a relative or significant others or a hospital personnel

e In case the patient is incapable of giving the consent and a third party consent is required the following persons in the order of priority stated hereunder may give consent

a Spouseb Son of or daughter of legal age

c Either parent d Brother or sister of legal age or e Guardian

122 Consent form once signed and witnessed should be attached to patients chart for filling

13 POLICIES ON DOCTORrsquoS ROUNDS

Doctorrsquos rounds are made everyday in the morning Except for unusual cases which are made daily

Unusual observations are referred to the Medical Officer of the (MOD) after duty hours

New orders are carried out promptly and accurately Routine laboratory treatments are done after treatment

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 11

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

14 POLICIES ON DISCHARGING A PATIENT

141 Military Patients

141a Return to Duty

a Attending physician writes the discharge orderb Patientrsquos chart should be reviewed for completeness

particularly the Cover Sheet which should be signed by the Medical Officer

c Upon receipt of order for discharge Disposition Slip (Cover Sheet) is prepared and forwarded to A amp D Section for issuance of Special Order

d Discharged patients will report to their respective unit first hour of their Expected Date of Return to Duty (EDRD) No discharge will be made on the date of disposition Patients may go on pass before EDRD depending on the Ward Officerrsquos discretion or they may also stay in the hospital until their EDRD

e Prior to discharge patients are given Clearance Form to be completed

f The duty nurse writes and gives discharge instructions to the patient and significant others as well as the date of follow-up check up

g PhilHealth Form shall be properly accomplished by the patient attached with MDR Form and military ID

h Retro-evac patients when recovered these patients will be discharged accordingly following routine disposition of all patients

i The duty nurse checks all equipment items issued to patient are returned

j Discard all medicine card tags except for roster card Indicate EDRD and final diagnosis on the roster card and retained it until EDRD is due

k Locate patientrsquos name on the A amp D book and write the final diagnosis and EDRD opposite their names

l Log patientrsquos name in the discharge checklist and send to A amp D Section together with the chart which is arranged properly and have it properly received by the A amp D personnel

m Drop patient from census on the date of discharge n Document discharge time date condition of patient and

manner of leaving Nursing Unit

141b Discharge by Evacuationa Bring the chart with order final diagnosis and completed cover

sheet to the A amp D Section so that three copies of evacuation papers can be accomplished and evacuation flights can be coordinated

b Evacuation paper Letter Order Narrative Summary and pertinent diagnostic results (together with x-ray plates ECG Tracing etc) are given to the patient and checked by the NOD

c Patients are prohibited to carry firearms during the travel Firearms or deadly weapons of patients for evacuation shall remain in deposit with CLSH storeroom for safekeeping

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 12

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

d Indicate final diagnosis date of evacuation and place to be evacuated opposite the patientrsquos name in the A and D book and drop from census

e Return borrowed items in the CSR

141c Transfer of Hospital (within Cebu) a When the patient needs extensive medicalsurgical

management beyond the capability of the hospital Ward Officer is responsible for completion of all data necessary for transfer to include preparation of Narrative Summary

b Ward master ward man on duty will forward Disposition Form to A amp D Section

c Narrative summary will go with the patient chart should remain in the hospital for future use filing and safekeeping

141d Discharge by Deatha When death occurs on the ward the nurse on duty shall

immediately notify the A amp D Section personnel on duty who should prepare the death certificate The last attending Medical Officer completes the diagnosis and other clinical requirements

b Post mortem care should be done before sending the cadaver to the morgue

c All belongings of the deceased shall be properly accounted for and turned over to the relatives properly receipted

d A death certificate shall be given to the immediate relatives who will accompany the cadaver to the funeral parlor

e Log patientrsquos final diagnosis datetime of death in the A and D book and census

142 Dependents1421Discharge procedure is the same as that of the military except that

they can be discharged on the day of disposition once clearance is obtained

1422For the patientrsquos who are discharged against medical advice the patient of legal age or his her parent and or relative are made to sign a certificate to the effect that the hospital shall not be responsible for anything that would happen to the patient after he leaves the hospital after the doctorrsquos order which is also signed by two (2) witnesses

143 Civilian 1431Civilian employees retired military personnel dependents of retired

military personnel pure civilian have the same discharge procedure as dependents

1432Nurse on Duty should prepare billing prior to discharge 1433Billing of Civilian patients will be done by the Finance Sergeant1434Obligations such as hospital charges shall be settled at the

Admission and Disposition (A amp D) Section before discharge 1435Civilian employee with Phil health form must accomplish the form

in order to obtain clearance from the A amp D Section Medicines medical supplies diagnostic examinations and days of hospitalization should be listed and forwarded to the A amp D Section with the patientrsquos chart

1436Dependents of retired military personnel - same as above1437Retired Military Personnel (RMP) - only mess is charge1438Pure civilian - same as the civilian employees

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 13

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1439Patient presents a duly accomplished clearance prior to the release of discharge order and receipt of payment to the nurse on duty

15 EMERGENCY ROOM POLICIES AND GUIDELINES

1 only emergency cases are entertained in the ER General consultations are referred to the OPD After office hours and on SaturdaySunday and Holiday consultations may be entertained upon the discretion of the OPD

2 patients must be referred to the MOD

3 NOD should obtain the patientrsquos chief complaint weight vital signs get gestational data (LMP ED BP FH FHT if the patient is an OBGYNE case) and other admitting notes

4 inform patient of the existing hospital policies and guidelines upon admission (visiting schedule rights responsibilities policies and regulations

5 provide watcherrsquos id and provide the admin on duty with the list of admitted patients

6 NOD must facilitate requisition of hospital number

7 MOD attends to the patients The nurse on duty assists the MOD in performing assessments

8 for admitted patients MOD writes order for the medical treatment and the ER nurse on duty immediately executes them

9 a signed consent must be obtained from the patients In case of minor or handicapped patients guardians must fill up the consent for them

10NOD should facilitate laboratory works

11 IVF insertion is done either by the PGI on dutyMOD or NOD

12NOD starts giving the medications available Drugs that require skin testing must be performed at the ER and this should be confirmed by the physician and recorded in the patientrsquos chart

13MODNOD gives initial health teachings to the client or significant others as needed

14NOD regulates the IVF of patients before transporting to the ward

15 if patient refuses admission she must inform the MOD and sign a waiver denouncing the hospital from any liabilities A thorough explanation by the MOD shall be afforded to the patient upon signing of the waiver

16 illiterate patientscompanion must be asked to have their thumb marks on the record

17all stocks medicines used by the patient must be replaced as soon as possible on or before the patient leaves the ER This will be done by the duty ER NCO

18only emergency cases are provided with ER stocks NOD gets the prescription and have these items replaced by the pharmacy andor CSR

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 14

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

19ER NOD duty ER NCO will be held accountable for whatever lossesdeficiencies that may occur during hisher shift

20 inventory of all ER items is done every after shift by the NOD

21ER NCOIC must submit a monthly inventory report to the pharmacy and supply section for auditing purposes

22consultations are not entertained in the ER during office hours They are referred to the OPD

23communicableInfectious conditions which require isolation and cases other than OB-GYNEPedia are not accepted for admission but referred to other agencies after MOD has evaluated the patient The MOD should call and should be the one to make the call to the hospital where the patient is to be transferred to

24wounds of more than 24-hour duration are not entertained in te ER but in the OPD except on holidays Saturdays and Sundays

25 for invasive procedures a consent signed by the patient (if adult) companion andor guardian should be obtained before treatment or care is instituted

26should patient refuse she cannot be submitted to a particular treatment This should be properly documented on the patientrsquos record and have the patient sign a waiver for the refusal

27 for emergency cases where a patientrsquos life is in danger no consent is necessary However proper notation shall be made on the patientrsquos record by the physician and must be affirmed by a witness

28media is not allowed within the ER premises to avoid distortion in the management of patients

29dean on arrival (DOA) clients in ER cases are classified in the following categories

DOA Criteria0 vital signs ndash CPR done rarr failedNo death certificate shall be issuedER death ndash 0 vital signs rarr CPRrarr reviverarr died within 26 hoursHospital issue death certificateDOA and ER deaths should be marked on the patientrsquos record in bold

letters using ball pen

30all procedures performed in the ER shall be subjected to official charging which will be forwarded to the different branch of services where the patient belongs Only CENTCOM organic military personnel will be carried free of charge

15 POLICIES ON DO NOT RESUSCITATE (DNR)

151 Definition of Terms151a Resuscitation is a medical procedure which seeks to

restore cardiac andor respiratory function to individuals who have sustained a cardiac andor respiratory arrest

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 15

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

151b Do Not Resuscitate (DNR) is a medical order to provide no resuscitation to individuals for

whom resuscitation is not warranted151c Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) is the

common term used to refer to resuscitation However the options available to treat very sick patients are broader than CPR as literally defined Other options include intensive care antibiotic therapy hydration and nutritional support Appropriate comfort care measures should be employed for all patients especially terminally ill patients

152 DNR Protocol

1521WILL suction the airway administer oxygen position for comfort splint or immobilize control bleeding provide pain medication provide emotional support and contact other appropriate health care providers and

1521WILL NOT administer chest compressions insert an artificial airway administer resuscitative drugs defibrillate or

cardiovert provide respiratory assistance (other than suctioning the airway and administering oxygen) initiate resuscitative IV or initiate cardiac monitoring

153 Types of DNR Orders

1531a DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time the order

is given DNR Comfort Care orders permit comfort care only both before and during a cardiac or respiratory arrest Resuscitative therapies will not be

administered prior to an arrest This order is generally regarded as appropriate for patients who have a terminal illness short life expectancy little chance of surviving CPR and a desire to let nature take its course in the face of an impending arrest

1531b DNR Comfort Care-ArrestDNR Comfort Care-Arrest orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time of a cardiac or respiratory arrest A cardiac arrest occurs when there is an absence of a palpable pulse A respiratory arrest occurs when there are no spontaneous respirations or there is agonal breathing Resuscitative therapies will be administered before an arrest but not during an arrest The term DNR (without additional wording) when recorded in the medical chart shall be considered a DNR Comfort Care-Arrest order

1531c DNR Specified All other DNR orders are DNR Specified orders DNR Specified orders modify the DNR Protocol in some respect either in treatment modalities or in the timing of the protocol activation

1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 16

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart

1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order

DNR is a medical order to be given only by authorized health care practitioners DNR orders generally should be given with the informed consent of the patient or the patientrsquos surrogate decision-maker Ideally the physician should sensitively discuss the DNR option with the patient while the patient is mentally competent However DNR orders are often considered for patients who are comatose or who otherwise lack decisional capacity with whom this discussion has not occurred or cannot occur

In cases when a patient lacks decisional capacity the DNR option should be considered in conjunction with the patients advance directives if known or should be discussed with a surrogate A surrogate may be designated by a patient as the attorney-in-fact in a Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care A surrogate may also be identified as the first available person(s) from the following list in order

f Spouseg Son of or daughter of legal age h Either parent i Brother or sister of legal age or j Guardian

In all cases the primary physician should discuss the DNR option with the patient if possible and the surrogate(s) if appropriate There is no obligation to offer or initiate CPR if resuscitation would be futile ie if resuscitation would not achieve its physiological objective would offer no benefit to the patient and would violate reasonable medical standards

154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart

The words DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care-Arrest or DNR Specified should be recorded on the left-hand side of the medical chart (where advance directives are maintained) along with the date time rationale for the DNR order the names of the patient andor family members involved in the decision and a statement that the patient andor surrogate was fully informed about and consented to the DNR order If a DNR Specified order is recorded the modifications to the DNR Protocol should be specified in the medical chart as well as the desired timing of the activation of the modified Protocol

DNR decisions for inpatients should be transmitted clearly to those caring for the patients A DNR order should never result in the abandonment of a patient and steps should

155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders

The DNR order should be reassessed as part of the ongoing evaluation of an inpatient A DNR order should be affirmed modified or revoked only after a discussion between the primary physician and the patient if possible or the surrogate(s) if appropriate and the consent of the patient or surrogate DNR orders should be reassessed frequently and

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 17

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

as conditions warrant Reassessments of DNR orders should be documented in the medical chart If a DNR order is changed from one of the three types of DNR orders to a different type the patients DNR bracelet should be replaced with a new bracelet containing the revised designation If a DNR order is revoked the DNR bracelet should be removed and destroyed A physician or other health care worker who feels that he or she cannot honor a patients DNR request may not prevent or delay the transfer of the patient to a physician or facility which will honor the DNR status

156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care

The administration of anesthesia necessarily involves some practices and procedures that might be viewed as resuscitation in other settings Prior to any inpatient or outpatient invasive procedure for which the policy requires the documentation of informed consent any existing DNR order should when possible be reviewed with the patient or the patients surrogate As a result of this review the status of the DNR order during the perioperative period should be affirmed clarified or modified based on the preferences of the patient Any clarifications or modifications should be documented in the medical chart along with a notation indicating if or when the original DNR order should be reinstated Concurrence on these issues by the primary physician the surgeon and the anesthesiologist is desirable The DNR bracelet should not be removed during the perioperative period even if the DNR order has been temporarily modified

157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives

In the event of a conflict between one of the three types of DNR orders and an advance directive which has become effective because a person is unable to communicate and is terminally ill or permanently unconscious the instructions from the document (or person named as an Attorney-in-Fact) ranked higher in the following list shall prevail

a Living will of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

b Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care or an Attorney-in-Fact acting in accordance therewith of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

c DNR order d

16POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS DISCHARGE INSTRUCTION

161 The patient or his her legal guardian has the right to be informed by the physician or his her delegate ( nurse) of his her continuing health care requirements following discharge including instructions about

a Take home medicationsb Dietc Physical activityd Special instructions

- Signs to watch out for - When to bring the patient back to the physician- Instructions to follow in the event of untoward incidences

complications

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 18

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

e Follow-up Check-upf All other pertinent information to promote health and well-being

162 At the end patientrsquos confinement he she is entitled to a brief written summary of the course of his her illness which shall include at least the history physical examination diagnosis medications surgical procedure ancillary and laboratory procedures and the plan of further treatment and which shall be provided by the attending physician

17 POLICIES ON DISCLOSURE OF PATIENTrsquoS INFORMATION

171 The privacy of the patients must be assured at all stages of his her treatment Similarly the patient has the right to be free from unwarranted public exposure EXCEPT in the following cases

a When his her mental or physical condition is in controversy and the appropriate court in its discretion orders him her to submit to a physical or mental examination by a physician

b When the public health and safety so demandc When the patient waives his her rights

172 Any health care provider or practitioner involved in the treatment of the patient and all those who have legitimate access to the patientrsquos record is not authorized to divulge any information to a third party who has no concern with the care and welfare of the patient without his Her consent EXCEPT

a When such disclosure will benefit public health and safetyb When it is in the interest of justice and upon the order of a competent

courtc When patients waives in writing the confidential nature of such

information d When it is needed for continued medical treatment or advancement of

medical science subject to de-identification of patient and shared medical confidentiality for those who have access to the information

1721 Informing the spouse or the family to the first degree of the patientrsquos medical condition may be allowed Provided that the patient of legal age have the right to choose on whom to inform

1722 In case the patient is not of legal age or is mentally incapacitated such information shall be given to the parents legal guardian or his her next of kin

18 ETHICAL CONSIDERATIONS IN THE ADMINISTRATION OF BLOOD

181 The physician should obtain the patients informed consent before administering blood products This includes explaining to the patient the relative benefits and risks of receiving and not receiving the blood product as well as any reasonably viable alternatives

182 Generally in emergency situations where treatment is necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient and consent is not available (because the patient is unconscious or otherwise unable to consent) the physician may administer blood products (and any other treatment) necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient This does not apply if

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 19

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

the patient has expressly refused the treatment before becoming incompetent

183 A competent adult is entitled to refuse or cease any treatment for any reason

184 Parents ordinarily have the responsibility to provide consent on behalf of their young children however it is highly unlikely that parents can refuse life-saving treatment for their children Physicians may not simply override a parents refusal

185 Although it is legally clear that a mentally competent adult is entitled to refuse any medical treatment including a blood transfusion physicians have a responsibility to ensure that the refusal is truly informed and voluntary

186 In the case of adults who were once competent but have become temporarily or permanently incompetent substitute consent laws generally provide that their prior wishes regarding treatment decisions should be respected to the extent that they are known or can be determined

19 LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

191 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for IN-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSDoctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientStaff Nurse Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Proceed to the requesting Ward and collect

blood for the ordered examination Take specimen to the laboratoryExamine specimen Sign the resultRecord the result on its respective logbookRecord the result in PhilHealth logbookEndorse the result to the ward

Nurse On Duty Receive the result Refer the result to the Doctor on Duty

192 Specimens Received for Examination

Forms Needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatientPresent specimen with laboratory request signed by the Physician

Medical Technologist Receive specimen and laboratory requestExamine the specimen

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 20

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Sign the resultRecord the result to the respective logbook Endorse the Result to the Nurse on Duty for In- Patients and Release result to patients in OPD

193 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for OUT-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatient Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Receive the request and collect blood for the

ordered examination Examine specimen Sign the result Record the result on its respective logbook Record the result in OPD logbook Release the result

Patient Take the result to the Physician in OPD

194 Monthly Laboratory Report Census

Form Needed Monthly Report Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSMedical Technologist Record all daily results in the

logbookPrepare Monthly report based on the daily report of examinationsSign the reportGive the report to the OIC of the Laboratory for approval

OIC Laboratory Sign and approve the reportMedical Technologist Release the report

2 Laboratory Uniform

Laboratory uniform is a must on all working days except holidays but must be in laboratory gown when with patients

3 Request Slips

In-patient request slips must be completely filled -up by the nurse medical clerk

Out-patient request slips must be duly signed by the Medical Doctor on Duty assigned in OPD

Only requests from the CLSH Hospital will be honored by the laboratory

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 21

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Examination Performed

A Hematology

1 CBC (Complete Blood Count)2 Platelet Count3 Hemoglobin Test4 Clotting Time5 Bleeding Time

B Clinical Microscopy

1 Urinalysis2 Fecalysis

C Blood Banking and Serology

1 Blood Typing2 Hepatitis B Determination (Qualitative)3 Syphilis (Qualitative)

D Bacteriology

1 Acid fast Staining

E Blood Chemistry

1 Cholesterol2 Triglyceride3 Fasting Blood Sugar4 Blood Uric Acid5 Blood Urea Nitrogen6 Serum Creatinine

5 Reasons for ordering laboratory measurements examinations

a To confirm a clinical impression or establish a diagnosisb To rule out a diagnosisc To monitor therapy (management guide)d To establish prognosise To screen for or detect disease

SPECIMEN COLLECTION

2 General Procedure for Obtaining Blood

1 Skin Puncture2 Venous Puncture

Technique for Venous Puncture

1 Identify the patient2 If fasting is required confirm that fasting order has been followed3 Inform the patient of the procedure to be done

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 22

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Prepare the patient and all equipment needed5 Select a suitable vein for venipuncture Veins of the antecubital fossa in

particular the median cubital and cephalic veins are preferred Wrist ankle and hand veins may also be used If one arm has an intravenous line use the other arm to draw a blood specimen

6 Cleanse the venipuncture site with 70 isopropyl alcohol Allow the arm to dry Do not touch the swabbed area with any unsterile object

7 Apply a tourniquet several inches above the puncture site Never leave the tourniquet in place longer than one minute

8 Anchor the vein firmly both above and below the puncture site Use either the thumb and middle finger or thumb and index finger

9 Perform the venipuncture10Release the tourniquet when blood begins to flow11After all blood has been drawn have the patient relax his or her fist Do

not allow the patient to pump the hand12Place a clean sterile cotton ball lightly over the side Withdraw the needle

then apply pressure to the site13Mix tubes with anticoagulant For syringe-drawn specimens transfer blood

to appropriate tubes taking precautions to avoid hemolyzing the specimens Follow any special handling procedures

14Check condition of the patient whether patient is faint and that bleeding is under control

15Dispose of contaminated material such as needles syringes cotton etc16Deliver tubes of blood for testing to appropriate departments

An additional protocol is important in the venipuncture procedure Follow the recommended ldquoorder of drawrdquo when collecting tubes To avoid contamination draw specimens into non-additive tubes before tubes with additives

17Let the blood sample retract completely before centrifuging Separate serum from clotted blood Make sure proper labeling is observed and practiced

HEMATOLOGY

Preparation and staining of Blood Smears for Diffferential Count

Principle

The examination of the peripheral blood smear is the most important examination one can do in hematological evaluation of a patient

Materials Needed

1 Pricker or lancet2 Microscope slides3 Spreader4 Pencil5 Cotton soaked in alcohol6 Dry cotton

Procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 23

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 Puncture the skin as desired and wipe away the first drop of blood2 Touch the surface of the clean slide to a small drop of blood the drop

should be placed near one end of the slide3 Turn the slide over such that the drop of blood is now on the top side and

the other end of the slide away from the drop of the blood is held by the thumb and forefinger of the left hand The other finger serves to support the slide

4 Pick up another slide and loosely between thumb and forefinger of the right hand

5 The slide in the right hand is called the spreader slide Place the spreader in front of the drop and pull back until it touches the drop

6 As soon as the blood spreads by capillary attraction almost to the edge of the slide push the spreader forwards at an angle of approximately 30-45 degrees using a rapid even motion

Note

The weight of the slide is the only pressure applied the thickness of the spread is controlled by the size of the drop the angle at which the spreader slide is held and the speed of spreading The greater the angle the thicker and shorter is the film

7 Dry the slide in air when dried write the name of the patient and date in the thick end of the blood film using a pencil or at the other side of the slide

Staining for Differential Count

Reagents

Rapid Romanowsky staining using ldquorapi-diffrdquo

Solution A Fixing solution MethanolSolution B Acid dye EosinSolution C Basic dye Methylene blueSolution D Buffer pH 68 phosphate buffer

Procedure

1 Prepare a blood smear and air dry

2 Fix by immersing in Solution A for 30 seconds

3 Transfer without rinsing or drying to Solution B and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

4 Without rinsing transfer the slide to Solution C and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

5 Rinse briefly in buffered water pH 68 and allow to dry

Results Macroscopically

Smear in pinkish violet

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 24

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Normal Values

Neutrophils 40-60

Lymphocytes 20-40

Monocyte 4-8

Eosinophil 1-3

Basophil 0-1

Stab 0-1

Peripheral Blood Smear

Procedure in reading peripheral blood smear

1 Examine the blood smear grossly against the light and note the contour and background color

2 Examine under the low power in order to ascertain the adequacy of the staining and select the best fields for study

3 Note agglutination or rouleaux formation of erythrocytes

4 Examine the slides systematically starting at the thin end In this way reduplication of the field is avoided Fields should be avoided in which the red cells are stacked up or are in rouleaux and fields should be examined in which the red cells are well separated and the white cells thinly spread

5 Examine the erythrocytes and note variations in size shape color hemoglobin content abnormal objects in cytoplasm and number of nucleated red cells per 100 leukocytes

6 Examine the WBC and study the morphology

CLINICAL MICROSCOPY

Routine Urinalysis

I Organization of Work

Steps Multistix Test

1 Agitate the urine container Examine the urine with regards to color and transparency

2 Fill the centrifuge tube with the urine

3 Dip a multistix strip into the tube and determine the following by comparing with test chart after specific reading time

a Specific Gravity - 45 ndash 60 seconds

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 25

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

b Ph - time not criticalc Protein - read immediatelyd Glucose - 10 ndash 30 seconds

II Microscopic Examination

Procedure

1 Mix the urine well first and obtain a few cc into a test tube2 Centrifuge urine for five minutes3 Decant the supernatant liquid in a quick motion so that the

sediments are left at the bottom of the test tube4 Place in a clean slide5 Examine under the microscope (regulate lighting by adjusting the

substage diaphragm)6 Focus first at low power then shift to the high power objective

Report as follows

1 RBC and WBC ndash average cells hpf2 Casts ndash average casts per hpf3 Epithelial Cells lpf or accasional few moderate abundant4 Crystals lpf are rare few moderate abundant

Fecalysis

I Macroscopic or Physical Examination

1 Form Consistency and Size

2 Color

II Direct fecal Smear

Procedure

1 Place a drop of saline on the slide2 Using an applicator stick take a small portion of the stool

Formed ndash take the portion from well inside the sampleMucus or watery ndash take the portion from the bloodstained mucus on the surface or from the surface of the liquid

3 mix the sample with the drop of saline on the slide4 Examine the specimen under LPO then shift to HPO5 Report as follows

Normal No Parasite seenMucous Normal - a very small amount

Blood - no blood present

BACTERIOLOGY

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 26

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

SPUTUM EXAMINATION

Acid Fast Bacilli

Signs and symptoms of Asymptomatic Patient

1 Cough for 2 weeks duration or more2 Chest and upper back pains for one month duration or more3 Hemoptysis or blood streaking4 On and off afternoon fever for one month duration or more5 Regressive loss of weight

Collection of specimen

1 Identify the patient through signs and symptoms2 Instruct the patient properly3 Collect the first sputum in the morning4 The patient should be standing if possible5 He should take a very deep breath filling his lungs6 He should empty his lungs in one breath coughing as hard and deeply as

he can7 He should spit what he brings up into the jar or sputum cup8 Label the jar or sputum cup with his name and date

After Collection

Check that sufficient amount of sputum has been produced

The sputum of an infected person usually containsa thick mucus air bubblesb threads of fibrinc patches of pusd occasional brownish streaks of blood

Preparation of Sputum Smears

Materials glass slides (new if possible unscratched) inoculating loop or coconut midribs cotton wool plug on metal wire for flaming alarm clock (timer)

Procedure

1 Prepare two slides Take a purulent potion of the sputum one scrath slide using either one sterile inoculating loop or two to form tongs

2 Make the smear as thin as possible covering as large an area as possible tracing concentric circles well separated but not reaching the edges of the slide

Preparation for fixing Sputum Smear

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 27

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Materials sputum smears alcohol lamp match

Procedure of fixing

1 Dry smears in the air2 Fix the smears by passing the slides three times through the flame3 Let it cool before staining

Preparation in Staining using Ziehl-Neelsen (Hot Method)

Principle The tubercule bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis is acid-fast and stains res with Ziehl-Neelsen stain while almost all other organisms stain blue

Materials alcohol lamp match forceps sputum smears cotton wool soaked in 70 ethanol Ziehl-Neelsen reagents denatured alcohol (for burning)

Reagents1 carbol fuchsin2 acid water or acid alcohol3 aqueous methylene blue

Procedure in staining

1 Cover the slides with filtered carbol fuchsin2 Dip the cotton wool swab in the methylated spirit ignite and pass slowly

under the slides to heat them3 As soon as steam begins to rise set the timer at five minutes4 Continue to heat so that the steam is seen but without boiling for five

minutes add more fuchsin immediately to avoid drying5 Wash with tap water or distilled water6 Decolorize with acid water or acid alcohol for one minute7 Wash with tap water8 Counterstain with aqueous methylene blue for thirty seconds or one

minute9 Wash with tap water for one minute10Drain and leave to dry on a slide rack

Examine under Oil Immersion Field

Results

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 28

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 6: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0800H ndash 1100H

41-3 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their

respective dispensary41-4 Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines41-5 No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

42 REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

42-1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

42-2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 PHYSICAL THERAPY

51 PT SESSION

51-1 Requesting party will secure their request to be signed by the Medical

Officer512 PT personnel is responsible for the briefing of the requesting party

about the procedures of PT Section

51-3 PT personnel is the over-all supervisor to all patients for physical therapy

treatment51-4 PT personnel is responsible the issuance of certification to all PT

volunteers 51-5 PT personnel is responsible for the issuance of medical certificate

to the patient

51-6 PT personnel is responsible on attending the PT treatment to the patients

51-7 Civilian patient are required to pay every treatment session thru Sgt Ancheta the finance before physical therapy treatment to the

patient 51-8 PT personnel are responsible to write PT notes every Physical

Therapy Treatment to the patient

52 SCHEDULE FOR PT TREATMENT

DAY MORNING AFTERNOONMONDAY TO FRIDAY 0800H ndash 1200H NONE

6 EENT EXAMINATION

61 EENT SESSION

61-1 Requesting party will secure their request to be signed by the Medical

Officer61-2 EENT personnel is responsible and assist the EENT doctor during

EENT

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 6

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

examination61-3 EENT personnel is the over-all supervisor to all patients for EENT

examination61-4 EENT personnel is responsible the issuance of certification and

medical certificate to all patients

61-5 EENT Doctor personnel is responsible on attending for the EENT treatment to the patients

61-6 EENT personnel is responsible to write EENT Doctor notes every every

EENT Treatment to the patient61-7 EENT personnel is responsible to all in and out communications at

EENT section

61-8 EENT personnel is responsible logbooks at EENT Section

62 SCHEDULE FOR EENT TREATMENT

DAY MORNING AFTERNOONM - W - F 0800H ndash 1130H 1330H -1630HT - TH 0800H ndash 1130H 1330H- 1430H

1500H - ATHLETIC

7 OBYNE SECTION

71 OBGYNE SECTION MISSION

To provide prenatal care and proper follow up for all normal and abnormal cases

of obtestric and gynecologic pateints

72 Prenatal schedule and consultation

DAY SCHEDULE MORNING AFTERNOONMON TO FRI PRENATAL 0800H-

1200H1300H-1700H

TUE amp THUGYNE CONSULTATIONFAMILY PLANING CONSUL

0800H-1200H

1300H-1700H

WEDNESDAY IMUNIZATION 0800H-1200H

73 The following are entitled to free prenatal check-up

1ST priority - Military personnel active service2ND priority - Direct dependents3RD priority - Civilian employees4TH priority - Unmaried dependents are entitled prenatal less than

18 years old of age

74 Check ndash up provided they will secure an authority duly signed by the OBGYNE

head CO and JAGO and pay the prenatal fee as prescribed by GHQ

4 2 1 - Retirees and Veterans

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 7

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 2 2 - Authorized civilians4 2 3 - Married or Unmarried dependents 18 years and above

` 42 1 - Children of dependents whether married or unmarried dependents

75 Requirements for pre-natal and consultation

a MilitaryDependents IDb Latest payslip of Military Personnelc MDRMarriage Contractd Newborn Screening payment six hundred pesos (P60000) only to be

Collected at 29 weeks AOGe Delivery Room requirements should be endorsed to Dependents Ward DR at 32 weeks AOG

8 NEURO PSYCHO EXAMINATION

81 Psychometrician or Psychologist will administer tests prescribed only in the AFPR G165-362 dtd 29 October 1996

81-1 For enlistment and trainee1 Intelligence Tests (Note IQ will not be reported as IQ points but

in terms of range eg not as 75 but ldquoAveragerdquo)2 Personality Tests

a Sentence Completion Testb MMPI or its equivalentc NP Forms

81-2 For Annual PE (Active Duty Status)1 Guilford-Zimmerman Temperament Survey2 Those who have not taken an IQ test will be required to take the SRA 3 Verbal Forms or the Personnel Tests for Industry

81-3 For Reenlistment1 NP Screening Forms2 Sentence Completion Forms

81-4 For Retirement (Officers and EM)Psychiatric interview to include review of clinicalhealthy records

81-5 For Supply Accountable Officer1 IQ Test3 Personality Test

82 The manner in which the psychologist or psychometrician administers the tests will be guided by their training

83 The manner with which they give recommendations will be guided by the provisions stated in the AFPR G pp 79-91

84 In the absence of an authorized NP Screener the CO will sign 42and 72 in the AFP PE form

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 8

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

85 Personnel will be allowed to take NP examination upon approval of their requests from COPE personnel

86 Schedule of Examinations

MondayAM - Scheduling of ExamPM - Conduct NP Examination

TuesdayAM - EvaluationInterviewRecordingPM - Athletics

WednesdayAM ndash PM - Conduct NP Examination

ThursdayAM - EvaluationInterviewRecordingPM - Athletics

FridayAM - PM - Conduct NP Examination

87 NP Examination Results will be forwarded to PE personnel for consolidation and

record purposes

88 In instances where the expertise of a Psychiatrist is needed and none is available

in the hospital a request for augmentation has to be made to the higher headquarters addressed to a military hospital which has an in-house Psychiatrist

9 X-RAY EXAMINATIONS

97 For Physical Examinations91-1 Applicants must present form from PE section prior examination91-2 Schedule of Examinations will be from Monday to Friday from

0800H-1130H

91-3 X-Ray result will be forwarded to PE section for consolidation

98 For Out-Patient92-1 Patient must present request signed by the duty MOD922 Schedule of Examinations will be from Monday to Friday from

0800H ndash 1130H

99 For In-Patient99-1 Examinations will be done anytime upon request from the MOD

910 Wednesday is Maintenance Day no examinations except emergency cases

10 OUT-PATIENT CONSULTATION

101 Requirements for consultation

101-1 Military Personnel ndash present military ID101-2 Dependents ndash present dependents IDMDR

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 9

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

101-3 CAA ndash present CAA ID101-4 Civilian Employees ndash present ID101-5 Authorized Civilians ndash must fill-up Authorization to be signed by CO

Prior consultation

102 Schedule of Consultation

Monday amp Wednesday

AM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM ndash 1330H ndash 1430H

Tuesday amp ThursdayAM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM - Athletics

FridayAM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM - 1330H ndash 1530H

103 Patients should be taken vital signsblood pressure prior examination104 Issuance of Medical Certificate must be upon approval of the MOD and

control number should be indicated with CLSH Office Seal

11 POLICIES AND GUIDELINES IN CONDUCTING DIAGNOSTIC EXAMINATIONS

111 Radiology Section

The attending physician writes order of X-ray examination in the patientrsquos chart

The ward nurse prepares a request of X-ray examination Radiology personnel logs request in their logbook The ward man accompanies the patient to the x-ray section For special procedures appropriate SOP is followed The ward nurse documents the time date manner of moving

and condition of the patient An X-ray personnel forwards the x-ray result to the ward

concerned and asks the recipient to sign in the logbook

Ward staff refers significant result to the attending physician and attaches the result to the patientrsquos

chart

112 Laboratory Section

The ward nurse fills up a laboratory examination request and forwards it to the laboratory The request must contain the

patientrsquos complete name which includes the middle name the patientrsquos rank age unit birth date name of the exam to be performed and the date it is to be performed

The patient is instructed on the proper collection of specimen Cut-off time for all examinations is up to 1100H only except for

ldquoSTATrdquo Patients admitted beyond 1100H who require routine laboratory exams such as CBC and UA shall

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 10

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

have their examinations performed the following day

ldquoSTATrdquo laboratory examinations are coordinated and done immediately

Sputum exams and newborn screenings are coordinated first with the medical technologist-on-duty for scheduling

Repeat sputum exams are prioritized over new PTB cases for AFB smear

Newborn screening is done only after the infant is 24 hours old Infants scheduled for newborn screening will be cord dressed

but will be not bathed on the morning of the exam Blood chemistry studies are done on Tuesdays and Thursdays

only Laboratory requests for such exams must be forwarded a day prior to the exam

Examinations to be done at outside laboratories or specimens that need to be sent out must be coordinated first by the

NOD with the medical technologist-on-duty for pricing and scheduling

Payment for outside laboratories must be settled by the Supply Section Officer-in-charge with the permission of the Admin

Officer Laboratory results will be endorsed by the medical technologist-

on-duty as soon as they are available

12 POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS ADVANCE DIRECTIVES

121 Any person of legal age and of sound mind may make an advance directive for physicians to administer terminal care when he she

suffers from the terminal phase of a terminal illness PROVIDED that

a He she is informed of the medical consequences of his her choice b He she releases those involved in his her care from any

obligation relative to the consequences on his her decisionc His her decision will not prejudice health and safety d A written request must be signed by the patient himherself duly

witnessed by a relative or significant others or a hospital personnel

e In case the patient is incapable of giving the consent and a third party consent is required the following persons in the order of priority stated hereunder may give consent

a Spouseb Son of or daughter of legal age

c Either parent d Brother or sister of legal age or e Guardian

122 Consent form once signed and witnessed should be attached to patients chart for filling

13 POLICIES ON DOCTORrsquoS ROUNDS

Doctorrsquos rounds are made everyday in the morning Except for unusual cases which are made daily

Unusual observations are referred to the Medical Officer of the (MOD) after duty hours

New orders are carried out promptly and accurately Routine laboratory treatments are done after treatment

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 11

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

14 POLICIES ON DISCHARGING A PATIENT

141 Military Patients

141a Return to Duty

a Attending physician writes the discharge orderb Patientrsquos chart should be reviewed for completeness

particularly the Cover Sheet which should be signed by the Medical Officer

c Upon receipt of order for discharge Disposition Slip (Cover Sheet) is prepared and forwarded to A amp D Section for issuance of Special Order

d Discharged patients will report to their respective unit first hour of their Expected Date of Return to Duty (EDRD) No discharge will be made on the date of disposition Patients may go on pass before EDRD depending on the Ward Officerrsquos discretion or they may also stay in the hospital until their EDRD

e Prior to discharge patients are given Clearance Form to be completed

f The duty nurse writes and gives discharge instructions to the patient and significant others as well as the date of follow-up check up

g PhilHealth Form shall be properly accomplished by the patient attached with MDR Form and military ID

h Retro-evac patients when recovered these patients will be discharged accordingly following routine disposition of all patients

i The duty nurse checks all equipment items issued to patient are returned

j Discard all medicine card tags except for roster card Indicate EDRD and final diagnosis on the roster card and retained it until EDRD is due

k Locate patientrsquos name on the A amp D book and write the final diagnosis and EDRD opposite their names

l Log patientrsquos name in the discharge checklist and send to A amp D Section together with the chart which is arranged properly and have it properly received by the A amp D personnel

m Drop patient from census on the date of discharge n Document discharge time date condition of patient and

manner of leaving Nursing Unit

141b Discharge by Evacuationa Bring the chart with order final diagnosis and completed cover

sheet to the A amp D Section so that three copies of evacuation papers can be accomplished and evacuation flights can be coordinated

b Evacuation paper Letter Order Narrative Summary and pertinent diagnostic results (together with x-ray plates ECG Tracing etc) are given to the patient and checked by the NOD

c Patients are prohibited to carry firearms during the travel Firearms or deadly weapons of patients for evacuation shall remain in deposit with CLSH storeroom for safekeeping

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 12

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

d Indicate final diagnosis date of evacuation and place to be evacuated opposite the patientrsquos name in the A and D book and drop from census

e Return borrowed items in the CSR

141c Transfer of Hospital (within Cebu) a When the patient needs extensive medicalsurgical

management beyond the capability of the hospital Ward Officer is responsible for completion of all data necessary for transfer to include preparation of Narrative Summary

b Ward master ward man on duty will forward Disposition Form to A amp D Section

c Narrative summary will go with the patient chart should remain in the hospital for future use filing and safekeeping

141d Discharge by Deatha When death occurs on the ward the nurse on duty shall

immediately notify the A amp D Section personnel on duty who should prepare the death certificate The last attending Medical Officer completes the diagnosis and other clinical requirements

b Post mortem care should be done before sending the cadaver to the morgue

c All belongings of the deceased shall be properly accounted for and turned over to the relatives properly receipted

d A death certificate shall be given to the immediate relatives who will accompany the cadaver to the funeral parlor

e Log patientrsquos final diagnosis datetime of death in the A and D book and census

142 Dependents1421Discharge procedure is the same as that of the military except that

they can be discharged on the day of disposition once clearance is obtained

1422For the patientrsquos who are discharged against medical advice the patient of legal age or his her parent and or relative are made to sign a certificate to the effect that the hospital shall not be responsible for anything that would happen to the patient after he leaves the hospital after the doctorrsquos order which is also signed by two (2) witnesses

143 Civilian 1431Civilian employees retired military personnel dependents of retired

military personnel pure civilian have the same discharge procedure as dependents

1432Nurse on Duty should prepare billing prior to discharge 1433Billing of Civilian patients will be done by the Finance Sergeant1434Obligations such as hospital charges shall be settled at the

Admission and Disposition (A amp D) Section before discharge 1435Civilian employee with Phil health form must accomplish the form

in order to obtain clearance from the A amp D Section Medicines medical supplies diagnostic examinations and days of hospitalization should be listed and forwarded to the A amp D Section with the patientrsquos chart

1436Dependents of retired military personnel - same as above1437Retired Military Personnel (RMP) - only mess is charge1438Pure civilian - same as the civilian employees

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 13

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1439Patient presents a duly accomplished clearance prior to the release of discharge order and receipt of payment to the nurse on duty

15 EMERGENCY ROOM POLICIES AND GUIDELINES

1 only emergency cases are entertained in the ER General consultations are referred to the OPD After office hours and on SaturdaySunday and Holiday consultations may be entertained upon the discretion of the OPD

2 patients must be referred to the MOD

3 NOD should obtain the patientrsquos chief complaint weight vital signs get gestational data (LMP ED BP FH FHT if the patient is an OBGYNE case) and other admitting notes

4 inform patient of the existing hospital policies and guidelines upon admission (visiting schedule rights responsibilities policies and regulations

5 provide watcherrsquos id and provide the admin on duty with the list of admitted patients

6 NOD must facilitate requisition of hospital number

7 MOD attends to the patients The nurse on duty assists the MOD in performing assessments

8 for admitted patients MOD writes order for the medical treatment and the ER nurse on duty immediately executes them

9 a signed consent must be obtained from the patients In case of minor or handicapped patients guardians must fill up the consent for them

10NOD should facilitate laboratory works

11 IVF insertion is done either by the PGI on dutyMOD or NOD

12NOD starts giving the medications available Drugs that require skin testing must be performed at the ER and this should be confirmed by the physician and recorded in the patientrsquos chart

13MODNOD gives initial health teachings to the client or significant others as needed

14NOD regulates the IVF of patients before transporting to the ward

15 if patient refuses admission she must inform the MOD and sign a waiver denouncing the hospital from any liabilities A thorough explanation by the MOD shall be afforded to the patient upon signing of the waiver

16 illiterate patientscompanion must be asked to have their thumb marks on the record

17all stocks medicines used by the patient must be replaced as soon as possible on or before the patient leaves the ER This will be done by the duty ER NCO

18only emergency cases are provided with ER stocks NOD gets the prescription and have these items replaced by the pharmacy andor CSR

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 14

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

19ER NOD duty ER NCO will be held accountable for whatever lossesdeficiencies that may occur during hisher shift

20 inventory of all ER items is done every after shift by the NOD

21ER NCOIC must submit a monthly inventory report to the pharmacy and supply section for auditing purposes

22consultations are not entertained in the ER during office hours They are referred to the OPD

23communicableInfectious conditions which require isolation and cases other than OB-GYNEPedia are not accepted for admission but referred to other agencies after MOD has evaluated the patient The MOD should call and should be the one to make the call to the hospital where the patient is to be transferred to

24wounds of more than 24-hour duration are not entertained in te ER but in the OPD except on holidays Saturdays and Sundays

25 for invasive procedures a consent signed by the patient (if adult) companion andor guardian should be obtained before treatment or care is instituted

26should patient refuse she cannot be submitted to a particular treatment This should be properly documented on the patientrsquos record and have the patient sign a waiver for the refusal

27 for emergency cases where a patientrsquos life is in danger no consent is necessary However proper notation shall be made on the patientrsquos record by the physician and must be affirmed by a witness

28media is not allowed within the ER premises to avoid distortion in the management of patients

29dean on arrival (DOA) clients in ER cases are classified in the following categories

DOA Criteria0 vital signs ndash CPR done rarr failedNo death certificate shall be issuedER death ndash 0 vital signs rarr CPRrarr reviverarr died within 26 hoursHospital issue death certificateDOA and ER deaths should be marked on the patientrsquos record in bold

letters using ball pen

30all procedures performed in the ER shall be subjected to official charging which will be forwarded to the different branch of services where the patient belongs Only CENTCOM organic military personnel will be carried free of charge

15 POLICIES ON DO NOT RESUSCITATE (DNR)

151 Definition of Terms151a Resuscitation is a medical procedure which seeks to

restore cardiac andor respiratory function to individuals who have sustained a cardiac andor respiratory arrest

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 15

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

151b Do Not Resuscitate (DNR) is a medical order to provide no resuscitation to individuals for

whom resuscitation is not warranted151c Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) is the

common term used to refer to resuscitation However the options available to treat very sick patients are broader than CPR as literally defined Other options include intensive care antibiotic therapy hydration and nutritional support Appropriate comfort care measures should be employed for all patients especially terminally ill patients

152 DNR Protocol

1521WILL suction the airway administer oxygen position for comfort splint or immobilize control bleeding provide pain medication provide emotional support and contact other appropriate health care providers and

1521WILL NOT administer chest compressions insert an artificial airway administer resuscitative drugs defibrillate or

cardiovert provide respiratory assistance (other than suctioning the airway and administering oxygen) initiate resuscitative IV or initiate cardiac monitoring

153 Types of DNR Orders

1531a DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time the order

is given DNR Comfort Care orders permit comfort care only both before and during a cardiac or respiratory arrest Resuscitative therapies will not be

administered prior to an arrest This order is generally regarded as appropriate for patients who have a terminal illness short life expectancy little chance of surviving CPR and a desire to let nature take its course in the face of an impending arrest

1531b DNR Comfort Care-ArrestDNR Comfort Care-Arrest orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time of a cardiac or respiratory arrest A cardiac arrest occurs when there is an absence of a palpable pulse A respiratory arrest occurs when there are no spontaneous respirations or there is agonal breathing Resuscitative therapies will be administered before an arrest but not during an arrest The term DNR (without additional wording) when recorded in the medical chart shall be considered a DNR Comfort Care-Arrest order

1531c DNR Specified All other DNR orders are DNR Specified orders DNR Specified orders modify the DNR Protocol in some respect either in treatment modalities or in the timing of the protocol activation

1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 16

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart

1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order

DNR is a medical order to be given only by authorized health care practitioners DNR orders generally should be given with the informed consent of the patient or the patientrsquos surrogate decision-maker Ideally the physician should sensitively discuss the DNR option with the patient while the patient is mentally competent However DNR orders are often considered for patients who are comatose or who otherwise lack decisional capacity with whom this discussion has not occurred or cannot occur

In cases when a patient lacks decisional capacity the DNR option should be considered in conjunction with the patients advance directives if known or should be discussed with a surrogate A surrogate may be designated by a patient as the attorney-in-fact in a Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care A surrogate may also be identified as the first available person(s) from the following list in order

f Spouseg Son of or daughter of legal age h Either parent i Brother or sister of legal age or j Guardian

In all cases the primary physician should discuss the DNR option with the patient if possible and the surrogate(s) if appropriate There is no obligation to offer or initiate CPR if resuscitation would be futile ie if resuscitation would not achieve its physiological objective would offer no benefit to the patient and would violate reasonable medical standards

154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart

The words DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care-Arrest or DNR Specified should be recorded on the left-hand side of the medical chart (where advance directives are maintained) along with the date time rationale for the DNR order the names of the patient andor family members involved in the decision and a statement that the patient andor surrogate was fully informed about and consented to the DNR order If a DNR Specified order is recorded the modifications to the DNR Protocol should be specified in the medical chart as well as the desired timing of the activation of the modified Protocol

DNR decisions for inpatients should be transmitted clearly to those caring for the patients A DNR order should never result in the abandonment of a patient and steps should

155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders

The DNR order should be reassessed as part of the ongoing evaluation of an inpatient A DNR order should be affirmed modified or revoked only after a discussion between the primary physician and the patient if possible or the surrogate(s) if appropriate and the consent of the patient or surrogate DNR orders should be reassessed frequently and

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 17

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

as conditions warrant Reassessments of DNR orders should be documented in the medical chart If a DNR order is changed from one of the three types of DNR orders to a different type the patients DNR bracelet should be replaced with a new bracelet containing the revised designation If a DNR order is revoked the DNR bracelet should be removed and destroyed A physician or other health care worker who feels that he or she cannot honor a patients DNR request may not prevent or delay the transfer of the patient to a physician or facility which will honor the DNR status

156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care

The administration of anesthesia necessarily involves some practices and procedures that might be viewed as resuscitation in other settings Prior to any inpatient or outpatient invasive procedure for which the policy requires the documentation of informed consent any existing DNR order should when possible be reviewed with the patient or the patients surrogate As a result of this review the status of the DNR order during the perioperative period should be affirmed clarified or modified based on the preferences of the patient Any clarifications or modifications should be documented in the medical chart along with a notation indicating if or when the original DNR order should be reinstated Concurrence on these issues by the primary physician the surgeon and the anesthesiologist is desirable The DNR bracelet should not be removed during the perioperative period even if the DNR order has been temporarily modified

157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives

In the event of a conflict between one of the three types of DNR orders and an advance directive which has become effective because a person is unable to communicate and is terminally ill or permanently unconscious the instructions from the document (or person named as an Attorney-in-Fact) ranked higher in the following list shall prevail

a Living will of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

b Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care or an Attorney-in-Fact acting in accordance therewith of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

c DNR order d

16POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS DISCHARGE INSTRUCTION

161 The patient or his her legal guardian has the right to be informed by the physician or his her delegate ( nurse) of his her continuing health care requirements following discharge including instructions about

a Take home medicationsb Dietc Physical activityd Special instructions

- Signs to watch out for - When to bring the patient back to the physician- Instructions to follow in the event of untoward incidences

complications

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 18

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

e Follow-up Check-upf All other pertinent information to promote health and well-being

162 At the end patientrsquos confinement he she is entitled to a brief written summary of the course of his her illness which shall include at least the history physical examination diagnosis medications surgical procedure ancillary and laboratory procedures and the plan of further treatment and which shall be provided by the attending physician

17 POLICIES ON DISCLOSURE OF PATIENTrsquoS INFORMATION

171 The privacy of the patients must be assured at all stages of his her treatment Similarly the patient has the right to be free from unwarranted public exposure EXCEPT in the following cases

a When his her mental or physical condition is in controversy and the appropriate court in its discretion orders him her to submit to a physical or mental examination by a physician

b When the public health and safety so demandc When the patient waives his her rights

172 Any health care provider or practitioner involved in the treatment of the patient and all those who have legitimate access to the patientrsquos record is not authorized to divulge any information to a third party who has no concern with the care and welfare of the patient without his Her consent EXCEPT

a When such disclosure will benefit public health and safetyb When it is in the interest of justice and upon the order of a competent

courtc When patients waives in writing the confidential nature of such

information d When it is needed for continued medical treatment or advancement of

medical science subject to de-identification of patient and shared medical confidentiality for those who have access to the information

1721 Informing the spouse or the family to the first degree of the patientrsquos medical condition may be allowed Provided that the patient of legal age have the right to choose on whom to inform

1722 In case the patient is not of legal age or is mentally incapacitated such information shall be given to the parents legal guardian or his her next of kin

18 ETHICAL CONSIDERATIONS IN THE ADMINISTRATION OF BLOOD

181 The physician should obtain the patients informed consent before administering blood products This includes explaining to the patient the relative benefits and risks of receiving and not receiving the blood product as well as any reasonably viable alternatives

182 Generally in emergency situations where treatment is necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient and consent is not available (because the patient is unconscious or otherwise unable to consent) the physician may administer blood products (and any other treatment) necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient This does not apply if

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 19

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

the patient has expressly refused the treatment before becoming incompetent

183 A competent adult is entitled to refuse or cease any treatment for any reason

184 Parents ordinarily have the responsibility to provide consent on behalf of their young children however it is highly unlikely that parents can refuse life-saving treatment for their children Physicians may not simply override a parents refusal

185 Although it is legally clear that a mentally competent adult is entitled to refuse any medical treatment including a blood transfusion physicians have a responsibility to ensure that the refusal is truly informed and voluntary

186 In the case of adults who were once competent but have become temporarily or permanently incompetent substitute consent laws generally provide that their prior wishes regarding treatment decisions should be respected to the extent that they are known or can be determined

19 LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

191 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for IN-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSDoctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientStaff Nurse Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Proceed to the requesting Ward and collect

blood for the ordered examination Take specimen to the laboratoryExamine specimen Sign the resultRecord the result on its respective logbookRecord the result in PhilHealth logbookEndorse the result to the ward

Nurse On Duty Receive the result Refer the result to the Doctor on Duty

192 Specimens Received for Examination

Forms Needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatientPresent specimen with laboratory request signed by the Physician

Medical Technologist Receive specimen and laboratory requestExamine the specimen

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 20

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Sign the resultRecord the result to the respective logbook Endorse the Result to the Nurse on Duty for In- Patients and Release result to patients in OPD

193 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for OUT-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatient Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Receive the request and collect blood for the

ordered examination Examine specimen Sign the result Record the result on its respective logbook Record the result in OPD logbook Release the result

Patient Take the result to the Physician in OPD

194 Monthly Laboratory Report Census

Form Needed Monthly Report Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSMedical Technologist Record all daily results in the

logbookPrepare Monthly report based on the daily report of examinationsSign the reportGive the report to the OIC of the Laboratory for approval

OIC Laboratory Sign and approve the reportMedical Technologist Release the report

2 Laboratory Uniform

Laboratory uniform is a must on all working days except holidays but must be in laboratory gown when with patients

3 Request Slips

In-patient request slips must be completely filled -up by the nurse medical clerk

Out-patient request slips must be duly signed by the Medical Doctor on Duty assigned in OPD

Only requests from the CLSH Hospital will be honored by the laboratory

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 21

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Examination Performed

A Hematology

1 CBC (Complete Blood Count)2 Platelet Count3 Hemoglobin Test4 Clotting Time5 Bleeding Time

B Clinical Microscopy

1 Urinalysis2 Fecalysis

C Blood Banking and Serology

1 Blood Typing2 Hepatitis B Determination (Qualitative)3 Syphilis (Qualitative)

D Bacteriology

1 Acid fast Staining

E Blood Chemistry

1 Cholesterol2 Triglyceride3 Fasting Blood Sugar4 Blood Uric Acid5 Blood Urea Nitrogen6 Serum Creatinine

5 Reasons for ordering laboratory measurements examinations

a To confirm a clinical impression or establish a diagnosisb To rule out a diagnosisc To monitor therapy (management guide)d To establish prognosise To screen for or detect disease

SPECIMEN COLLECTION

2 General Procedure for Obtaining Blood

1 Skin Puncture2 Venous Puncture

Technique for Venous Puncture

1 Identify the patient2 If fasting is required confirm that fasting order has been followed3 Inform the patient of the procedure to be done

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 22

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Prepare the patient and all equipment needed5 Select a suitable vein for venipuncture Veins of the antecubital fossa in

particular the median cubital and cephalic veins are preferred Wrist ankle and hand veins may also be used If one arm has an intravenous line use the other arm to draw a blood specimen

6 Cleanse the venipuncture site with 70 isopropyl alcohol Allow the arm to dry Do not touch the swabbed area with any unsterile object

7 Apply a tourniquet several inches above the puncture site Never leave the tourniquet in place longer than one minute

8 Anchor the vein firmly both above and below the puncture site Use either the thumb and middle finger or thumb and index finger

9 Perform the venipuncture10Release the tourniquet when blood begins to flow11After all blood has been drawn have the patient relax his or her fist Do

not allow the patient to pump the hand12Place a clean sterile cotton ball lightly over the side Withdraw the needle

then apply pressure to the site13Mix tubes with anticoagulant For syringe-drawn specimens transfer blood

to appropriate tubes taking precautions to avoid hemolyzing the specimens Follow any special handling procedures

14Check condition of the patient whether patient is faint and that bleeding is under control

15Dispose of contaminated material such as needles syringes cotton etc16Deliver tubes of blood for testing to appropriate departments

An additional protocol is important in the venipuncture procedure Follow the recommended ldquoorder of drawrdquo when collecting tubes To avoid contamination draw specimens into non-additive tubes before tubes with additives

17Let the blood sample retract completely before centrifuging Separate serum from clotted blood Make sure proper labeling is observed and practiced

HEMATOLOGY

Preparation and staining of Blood Smears for Diffferential Count

Principle

The examination of the peripheral blood smear is the most important examination one can do in hematological evaluation of a patient

Materials Needed

1 Pricker or lancet2 Microscope slides3 Spreader4 Pencil5 Cotton soaked in alcohol6 Dry cotton

Procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 23

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 Puncture the skin as desired and wipe away the first drop of blood2 Touch the surface of the clean slide to a small drop of blood the drop

should be placed near one end of the slide3 Turn the slide over such that the drop of blood is now on the top side and

the other end of the slide away from the drop of the blood is held by the thumb and forefinger of the left hand The other finger serves to support the slide

4 Pick up another slide and loosely between thumb and forefinger of the right hand

5 The slide in the right hand is called the spreader slide Place the spreader in front of the drop and pull back until it touches the drop

6 As soon as the blood spreads by capillary attraction almost to the edge of the slide push the spreader forwards at an angle of approximately 30-45 degrees using a rapid even motion

Note

The weight of the slide is the only pressure applied the thickness of the spread is controlled by the size of the drop the angle at which the spreader slide is held and the speed of spreading The greater the angle the thicker and shorter is the film

7 Dry the slide in air when dried write the name of the patient and date in the thick end of the blood film using a pencil or at the other side of the slide

Staining for Differential Count

Reagents

Rapid Romanowsky staining using ldquorapi-diffrdquo

Solution A Fixing solution MethanolSolution B Acid dye EosinSolution C Basic dye Methylene blueSolution D Buffer pH 68 phosphate buffer

Procedure

1 Prepare a blood smear and air dry

2 Fix by immersing in Solution A for 30 seconds

3 Transfer without rinsing or drying to Solution B and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

4 Without rinsing transfer the slide to Solution C and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

5 Rinse briefly in buffered water pH 68 and allow to dry

Results Macroscopically

Smear in pinkish violet

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 24

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Normal Values

Neutrophils 40-60

Lymphocytes 20-40

Monocyte 4-8

Eosinophil 1-3

Basophil 0-1

Stab 0-1

Peripheral Blood Smear

Procedure in reading peripheral blood smear

1 Examine the blood smear grossly against the light and note the contour and background color

2 Examine under the low power in order to ascertain the adequacy of the staining and select the best fields for study

3 Note agglutination or rouleaux formation of erythrocytes

4 Examine the slides systematically starting at the thin end In this way reduplication of the field is avoided Fields should be avoided in which the red cells are stacked up or are in rouleaux and fields should be examined in which the red cells are well separated and the white cells thinly spread

5 Examine the erythrocytes and note variations in size shape color hemoglobin content abnormal objects in cytoplasm and number of nucleated red cells per 100 leukocytes

6 Examine the WBC and study the morphology

CLINICAL MICROSCOPY

Routine Urinalysis

I Organization of Work

Steps Multistix Test

1 Agitate the urine container Examine the urine with regards to color and transparency

2 Fill the centrifuge tube with the urine

3 Dip a multistix strip into the tube and determine the following by comparing with test chart after specific reading time

a Specific Gravity - 45 ndash 60 seconds

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 25

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

b Ph - time not criticalc Protein - read immediatelyd Glucose - 10 ndash 30 seconds

II Microscopic Examination

Procedure

1 Mix the urine well first and obtain a few cc into a test tube2 Centrifuge urine for five minutes3 Decant the supernatant liquid in a quick motion so that the

sediments are left at the bottom of the test tube4 Place in a clean slide5 Examine under the microscope (regulate lighting by adjusting the

substage diaphragm)6 Focus first at low power then shift to the high power objective

Report as follows

1 RBC and WBC ndash average cells hpf2 Casts ndash average casts per hpf3 Epithelial Cells lpf or accasional few moderate abundant4 Crystals lpf are rare few moderate abundant

Fecalysis

I Macroscopic or Physical Examination

1 Form Consistency and Size

2 Color

II Direct fecal Smear

Procedure

1 Place a drop of saline on the slide2 Using an applicator stick take a small portion of the stool

Formed ndash take the portion from well inside the sampleMucus or watery ndash take the portion from the bloodstained mucus on the surface or from the surface of the liquid

3 mix the sample with the drop of saline on the slide4 Examine the specimen under LPO then shift to HPO5 Report as follows

Normal No Parasite seenMucous Normal - a very small amount

Blood - no blood present

BACTERIOLOGY

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 26

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

SPUTUM EXAMINATION

Acid Fast Bacilli

Signs and symptoms of Asymptomatic Patient

1 Cough for 2 weeks duration or more2 Chest and upper back pains for one month duration or more3 Hemoptysis or blood streaking4 On and off afternoon fever for one month duration or more5 Regressive loss of weight

Collection of specimen

1 Identify the patient through signs and symptoms2 Instruct the patient properly3 Collect the first sputum in the morning4 The patient should be standing if possible5 He should take a very deep breath filling his lungs6 He should empty his lungs in one breath coughing as hard and deeply as

he can7 He should spit what he brings up into the jar or sputum cup8 Label the jar or sputum cup with his name and date

After Collection

Check that sufficient amount of sputum has been produced

The sputum of an infected person usually containsa thick mucus air bubblesb threads of fibrinc patches of pusd occasional brownish streaks of blood

Preparation of Sputum Smears

Materials glass slides (new if possible unscratched) inoculating loop or coconut midribs cotton wool plug on metal wire for flaming alarm clock (timer)

Procedure

1 Prepare two slides Take a purulent potion of the sputum one scrath slide using either one sterile inoculating loop or two to form tongs

2 Make the smear as thin as possible covering as large an area as possible tracing concentric circles well separated but not reaching the edges of the slide

Preparation for fixing Sputum Smear

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 27

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Materials sputum smears alcohol lamp match

Procedure of fixing

1 Dry smears in the air2 Fix the smears by passing the slides three times through the flame3 Let it cool before staining

Preparation in Staining using Ziehl-Neelsen (Hot Method)

Principle The tubercule bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis is acid-fast and stains res with Ziehl-Neelsen stain while almost all other organisms stain blue

Materials alcohol lamp match forceps sputum smears cotton wool soaked in 70 ethanol Ziehl-Neelsen reagents denatured alcohol (for burning)

Reagents1 carbol fuchsin2 acid water or acid alcohol3 aqueous methylene blue

Procedure in staining

1 Cover the slides with filtered carbol fuchsin2 Dip the cotton wool swab in the methylated spirit ignite and pass slowly

under the slides to heat them3 As soon as steam begins to rise set the timer at five minutes4 Continue to heat so that the steam is seen but without boiling for five

minutes add more fuchsin immediately to avoid drying5 Wash with tap water or distilled water6 Decolorize with acid water or acid alcohol for one minute7 Wash with tap water8 Counterstain with aqueous methylene blue for thirty seconds or one

minute9 Wash with tap water for one minute10Drain and leave to dry on a slide rack

Examine under Oil Immersion Field

Results

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 28

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 7: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

examination61-3 EENT personnel is the over-all supervisor to all patients for EENT

examination61-4 EENT personnel is responsible the issuance of certification and

medical certificate to all patients

61-5 EENT Doctor personnel is responsible on attending for the EENT treatment to the patients

61-6 EENT personnel is responsible to write EENT Doctor notes every every

EENT Treatment to the patient61-7 EENT personnel is responsible to all in and out communications at

EENT section

61-8 EENT personnel is responsible logbooks at EENT Section

62 SCHEDULE FOR EENT TREATMENT

DAY MORNING AFTERNOONM - W - F 0800H ndash 1130H 1330H -1630HT - TH 0800H ndash 1130H 1330H- 1430H

1500H - ATHLETIC

7 OBYNE SECTION

71 OBGYNE SECTION MISSION

To provide prenatal care and proper follow up for all normal and abnormal cases

of obtestric and gynecologic pateints

72 Prenatal schedule and consultation

DAY SCHEDULE MORNING AFTERNOONMON TO FRI PRENATAL 0800H-

1200H1300H-1700H

TUE amp THUGYNE CONSULTATIONFAMILY PLANING CONSUL

0800H-1200H

1300H-1700H

WEDNESDAY IMUNIZATION 0800H-1200H

73 The following are entitled to free prenatal check-up

1ST priority - Military personnel active service2ND priority - Direct dependents3RD priority - Civilian employees4TH priority - Unmaried dependents are entitled prenatal less than

18 years old of age

74 Check ndash up provided they will secure an authority duly signed by the OBGYNE

head CO and JAGO and pay the prenatal fee as prescribed by GHQ

4 2 1 - Retirees and Veterans

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 7

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 2 2 - Authorized civilians4 2 3 - Married or Unmarried dependents 18 years and above

` 42 1 - Children of dependents whether married or unmarried dependents

75 Requirements for pre-natal and consultation

a MilitaryDependents IDb Latest payslip of Military Personnelc MDRMarriage Contractd Newborn Screening payment six hundred pesos (P60000) only to be

Collected at 29 weeks AOGe Delivery Room requirements should be endorsed to Dependents Ward DR at 32 weeks AOG

8 NEURO PSYCHO EXAMINATION

81 Psychometrician or Psychologist will administer tests prescribed only in the AFPR G165-362 dtd 29 October 1996

81-1 For enlistment and trainee1 Intelligence Tests (Note IQ will not be reported as IQ points but

in terms of range eg not as 75 but ldquoAveragerdquo)2 Personality Tests

a Sentence Completion Testb MMPI or its equivalentc NP Forms

81-2 For Annual PE (Active Duty Status)1 Guilford-Zimmerman Temperament Survey2 Those who have not taken an IQ test will be required to take the SRA 3 Verbal Forms or the Personnel Tests for Industry

81-3 For Reenlistment1 NP Screening Forms2 Sentence Completion Forms

81-4 For Retirement (Officers and EM)Psychiatric interview to include review of clinicalhealthy records

81-5 For Supply Accountable Officer1 IQ Test3 Personality Test

82 The manner in which the psychologist or psychometrician administers the tests will be guided by their training

83 The manner with which they give recommendations will be guided by the provisions stated in the AFPR G pp 79-91

84 In the absence of an authorized NP Screener the CO will sign 42and 72 in the AFP PE form

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 8

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

85 Personnel will be allowed to take NP examination upon approval of their requests from COPE personnel

86 Schedule of Examinations

MondayAM - Scheduling of ExamPM - Conduct NP Examination

TuesdayAM - EvaluationInterviewRecordingPM - Athletics

WednesdayAM ndash PM - Conduct NP Examination

ThursdayAM - EvaluationInterviewRecordingPM - Athletics

FridayAM - PM - Conduct NP Examination

87 NP Examination Results will be forwarded to PE personnel for consolidation and

record purposes

88 In instances where the expertise of a Psychiatrist is needed and none is available

in the hospital a request for augmentation has to be made to the higher headquarters addressed to a military hospital which has an in-house Psychiatrist

9 X-RAY EXAMINATIONS

97 For Physical Examinations91-1 Applicants must present form from PE section prior examination91-2 Schedule of Examinations will be from Monday to Friday from

0800H-1130H

91-3 X-Ray result will be forwarded to PE section for consolidation

98 For Out-Patient92-1 Patient must present request signed by the duty MOD922 Schedule of Examinations will be from Monday to Friday from

0800H ndash 1130H

99 For In-Patient99-1 Examinations will be done anytime upon request from the MOD

910 Wednesday is Maintenance Day no examinations except emergency cases

10 OUT-PATIENT CONSULTATION

101 Requirements for consultation

101-1 Military Personnel ndash present military ID101-2 Dependents ndash present dependents IDMDR

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 9

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

101-3 CAA ndash present CAA ID101-4 Civilian Employees ndash present ID101-5 Authorized Civilians ndash must fill-up Authorization to be signed by CO

Prior consultation

102 Schedule of Consultation

Monday amp Wednesday

AM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM ndash 1330H ndash 1430H

Tuesday amp ThursdayAM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM - Athletics

FridayAM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM - 1330H ndash 1530H

103 Patients should be taken vital signsblood pressure prior examination104 Issuance of Medical Certificate must be upon approval of the MOD and

control number should be indicated with CLSH Office Seal

11 POLICIES AND GUIDELINES IN CONDUCTING DIAGNOSTIC EXAMINATIONS

111 Radiology Section

The attending physician writes order of X-ray examination in the patientrsquos chart

The ward nurse prepares a request of X-ray examination Radiology personnel logs request in their logbook The ward man accompanies the patient to the x-ray section For special procedures appropriate SOP is followed The ward nurse documents the time date manner of moving

and condition of the patient An X-ray personnel forwards the x-ray result to the ward

concerned and asks the recipient to sign in the logbook

Ward staff refers significant result to the attending physician and attaches the result to the patientrsquos

chart

112 Laboratory Section

The ward nurse fills up a laboratory examination request and forwards it to the laboratory The request must contain the

patientrsquos complete name which includes the middle name the patientrsquos rank age unit birth date name of the exam to be performed and the date it is to be performed

The patient is instructed on the proper collection of specimen Cut-off time for all examinations is up to 1100H only except for

ldquoSTATrdquo Patients admitted beyond 1100H who require routine laboratory exams such as CBC and UA shall

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 10

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

have their examinations performed the following day

ldquoSTATrdquo laboratory examinations are coordinated and done immediately

Sputum exams and newborn screenings are coordinated first with the medical technologist-on-duty for scheduling

Repeat sputum exams are prioritized over new PTB cases for AFB smear

Newborn screening is done only after the infant is 24 hours old Infants scheduled for newborn screening will be cord dressed

but will be not bathed on the morning of the exam Blood chemistry studies are done on Tuesdays and Thursdays

only Laboratory requests for such exams must be forwarded a day prior to the exam

Examinations to be done at outside laboratories or specimens that need to be sent out must be coordinated first by the

NOD with the medical technologist-on-duty for pricing and scheduling

Payment for outside laboratories must be settled by the Supply Section Officer-in-charge with the permission of the Admin

Officer Laboratory results will be endorsed by the medical technologist-

on-duty as soon as they are available

12 POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS ADVANCE DIRECTIVES

121 Any person of legal age and of sound mind may make an advance directive for physicians to administer terminal care when he she

suffers from the terminal phase of a terminal illness PROVIDED that

a He she is informed of the medical consequences of his her choice b He she releases those involved in his her care from any

obligation relative to the consequences on his her decisionc His her decision will not prejudice health and safety d A written request must be signed by the patient himherself duly

witnessed by a relative or significant others or a hospital personnel

e In case the patient is incapable of giving the consent and a third party consent is required the following persons in the order of priority stated hereunder may give consent

a Spouseb Son of or daughter of legal age

c Either parent d Brother or sister of legal age or e Guardian

122 Consent form once signed and witnessed should be attached to patients chart for filling

13 POLICIES ON DOCTORrsquoS ROUNDS

Doctorrsquos rounds are made everyday in the morning Except for unusual cases which are made daily

Unusual observations are referred to the Medical Officer of the (MOD) after duty hours

New orders are carried out promptly and accurately Routine laboratory treatments are done after treatment

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 11

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

14 POLICIES ON DISCHARGING A PATIENT

141 Military Patients

141a Return to Duty

a Attending physician writes the discharge orderb Patientrsquos chart should be reviewed for completeness

particularly the Cover Sheet which should be signed by the Medical Officer

c Upon receipt of order for discharge Disposition Slip (Cover Sheet) is prepared and forwarded to A amp D Section for issuance of Special Order

d Discharged patients will report to their respective unit first hour of their Expected Date of Return to Duty (EDRD) No discharge will be made on the date of disposition Patients may go on pass before EDRD depending on the Ward Officerrsquos discretion or they may also stay in the hospital until their EDRD

e Prior to discharge patients are given Clearance Form to be completed

f The duty nurse writes and gives discharge instructions to the patient and significant others as well as the date of follow-up check up

g PhilHealth Form shall be properly accomplished by the patient attached with MDR Form and military ID

h Retro-evac patients when recovered these patients will be discharged accordingly following routine disposition of all patients

i The duty nurse checks all equipment items issued to patient are returned

j Discard all medicine card tags except for roster card Indicate EDRD and final diagnosis on the roster card and retained it until EDRD is due

k Locate patientrsquos name on the A amp D book and write the final diagnosis and EDRD opposite their names

l Log patientrsquos name in the discharge checklist and send to A amp D Section together with the chart which is arranged properly and have it properly received by the A amp D personnel

m Drop patient from census on the date of discharge n Document discharge time date condition of patient and

manner of leaving Nursing Unit

141b Discharge by Evacuationa Bring the chart with order final diagnosis and completed cover

sheet to the A amp D Section so that three copies of evacuation papers can be accomplished and evacuation flights can be coordinated

b Evacuation paper Letter Order Narrative Summary and pertinent diagnostic results (together with x-ray plates ECG Tracing etc) are given to the patient and checked by the NOD

c Patients are prohibited to carry firearms during the travel Firearms or deadly weapons of patients for evacuation shall remain in deposit with CLSH storeroom for safekeeping

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 12

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

d Indicate final diagnosis date of evacuation and place to be evacuated opposite the patientrsquos name in the A and D book and drop from census

e Return borrowed items in the CSR

141c Transfer of Hospital (within Cebu) a When the patient needs extensive medicalsurgical

management beyond the capability of the hospital Ward Officer is responsible for completion of all data necessary for transfer to include preparation of Narrative Summary

b Ward master ward man on duty will forward Disposition Form to A amp D Section

c Narrative summary will go with the patient chart should remain in the hospital for future use filing and safekeeping

141d Discharge by Deatha When death occurs on the ward the nurse on duty shall

immediately notify the A amp D Section personnel on duty who should prepare the death certificate The last attending Medical Officer completes the diagnosis and other clinical requirements

b Post mortem care should be done before sending the cadaver to the morgue

c All belongings of the deceased shall be properly accounted for and turned over to the relatives properly receipted

d A death certificate shall be given to the immediate relatives who will accompany the cadaver to the funeral parlor

e Log patientrsquos final diagnosis datetime of death in the A and D book and census

142 Dependents1421Discharge procedure is the same as that of the military except that

they can be discharged on the day of disposition once clearance is obtained

1422For the patientrsquos who are discharged against medical advice the patient of legal age or his her parent and or relative are made to sign a certificate to the effect that the hospital shall not be responsible for anything that would happen to the patient after he leaves the hospital after the doctorrsquos order which is also signed by two (2) witnesses

143 Civilian 1431Civilian employees retired military personnel dependents of retired

military personnel pure civilian have the same discharge procedure as dependents

1432Nurse on Duty should prepare billing prior to discharge 1433Billing of Civilian patients will be done by the Finance Sergeant1434Obligations such as hospital charges shall be settled at the

Admission and Disposition (A amp D) Section before discharge 1435Civilian employee with Phil health form must accomplish the form

in order to obtain clearance from the A amp D Section Medicines medical supplies diagnostic examinations and days of hospitalization should be listed and forwarded to the A amp D Section with the patientrsquos chart

1436Dependents of retired military personnel - same as above1437Retired Military Personnel (RMP) - only mess is charge1438Pure civilian - same as the civilian employees

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 13

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1439Patient presents a duly accomplished clearance prior to the release of discharge order and receipt of payment to the nurse on duty

15 EMERGENCY ROOM POLICIES AND GUIDELINES

1 only emergency cases are entertained in the ER General consultations are referred to the OPD After office hours and on SaturdaySunday and Holiday consultations may be entertained upon the discretion of the OPD

2 patients must be referred to the MOD

3 NOD should obtain the patientrsquos chief complaint weight vital signs get gestational data (LMP ED BP FH FHT if the patient is an OBGYNE case) and other admitting notes

4 inform patient of the existing hospital policies and guidelines upon admission (visiting schedule rights responsibilities policies and regulations

5 provide watcherrsquos id and provide the admin on duty with the list of admitted patients

6 NOD must facilitate requisition of hospital number

7 MOD attends to the patients The nurse on duty assists the MOD in performing assessments

8 for admitted patients MOD writes order for the medical treatment and the ER nurse on duty immediately executes them

9 a signed consent must be obtained from the patients In case of minor or handicapped patients guardians must fill up the consent for them

10NOD should facilitate laboratory works

11 IVF insertion is done either by the PGI on dutyMOD or NOD

12NOD starts giving the medications available Drugs that require skin testing must be performed at the ER and this should be confirmed by the physician and recorded in the patientrsquos chart

13MODNOD gives initial health teachings to the client or significant others as needed

14NOD regulates the IVF of patients before transporting to the ward

15 if patient refuses admission she must inform the MOD and sign a waiver denouncing the hospital from any liabilities A thorough explanation by the MOD shall be afforded to the patient upon signing of the waiver

16 illiterate patientscompanion must be asked to have their thumb marks on the record

17all stocks medicines used by the patient must be replaced as soon as possible on or before the patient leaves the ER This will be done by the duty ER NCO

18only emergency cases are provided with ER stocks NOD gets the prescription and have these items replaced by the pharmacy andor CSR

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 14

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

19ER NOD duty ER NCO will be held accountable for whatever lossesdeficiencies that may occur during hisher shift

20 inventory of all ER items is done every after shift by the NOD

21ER NCOIC must submit a monthly inventory report to the pharmacy and supply section for auditing purposes

22consultations are not entertained in the ER during office hours They are referred to the OPD

23communicableInfectious conditions which require isolation and cases other than OB-GYNEPedia are not accepted for admission but referred to other agencies after MOD has evaluated the patient The MOD should call and should be the one to make the call to the hospital where the patient is to be transferred to

24wounds of more than 24-hour duration are not entertained in te ER but in the OPD except on holidays Saturdays and Sundays

25 for invasive procedures a consent signed by the patient (if adult) companion andor guardian should be obtained before treatment or care is instituted

26should patient refuse she cannot be submitted to a particular treatment This should be properly documented on the patientrsquos record and have the patient sign a waiver for the refusal

27 for emergency cases where a patientrsquos life is in danger no consent is necessary However proper notation shall be made on the patientrsquos record by the physician and must be affirmed by a witness

28media is not allowed within the ER premises to avoid distortion in the management of patients

29dean on arrival (DOA) clients in ER cases are classified in the following categories

DOA Criteria0 vital signs ndash CPR done rarr failedNo death certificate shall be issuedER death ndash 0 vital signs rarr CPRrarr reviverarr died within 26 hoursHospital issue death certificateDOA and ER deaths should be marked on the patientrsquos record in bold

letters using ball pen

30all procedures performed in the ER shall be subjected to official charging which will be forwarded to the different branch of services where the patient belongs Only CENTCOM organic military personnel will be carried free of charge

15 POLICIES ON DO NOT RESUSCITATE (DNR)

151 Definition of Terms151a Resuscitation is a medical procedure which seeks to

restore cardiac andor respiratory function to individuals who have sustained a cardiac andor respiratory arrest

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 15

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

151b Do Not Resuscitate (DNR) is a medical order to provide no resuscitation to individuals for

whom resuscitation is not warranted151c Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) is the

common term used to refer to resuscitation However the options available to treat very sick patients are broader than CPR as literally defined Other options include intensive care antibiotic therapy hydration and nutritional support Appropriate comfort care measures should be employed for all patients especially terminally ill patients

152 DNR Protocol

1521WILL suction the airway administer oxygen position for comfort splint or immobilize control bleeding provide pain medication provide emotional support and contact other appropriate health care providers and

1521WILL NOT administer chest compressions insert an artificial airway administer resuscitative drugs defibrillate or

cardiovert provide respiratory assistance (other than suctioning the airway and administering oxygen) initiate resuscitative IV or initiate cardiac monitoring

153 Types of DNR Orders

1531a DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time the order

is given DNR Comfort Care orders permit comfort care only both before and during a cardiac or respiratory arrest Resuscitative therapies will not be

administered prior to an arrest This order is generally regarded as appropriate for patients who have a terminal illness short life expectancy little chance of surviving CPR and a desire to let nature take its course in the face of an impending arrest

1531b DNR Comfort Care-ArrestDNR Comfort Care-Arrest orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time of a cardiac or respiratory arrest A cardiac arrest occurs when there is an absence of a palpable pulse A respiratory arrest occurs when there are no spontaneous respirations or there is agonal breathing Resuscitative therapies will be administered before an arrest but not during an arrest The term DNR (without additional wording) when recorded in the medical chart shall be considered a DNR Comfort Care-Arrest order

1531c DNR Specified All other DNR orders are DNR Specified orders DNR Specified orders modify the DNR Protocol in some respect either in treatment modalities or in the timing of the protocol activation

1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 16

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart

1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order

DNR is a medical order to be given only by authorized health care practitioners DNR orders generally should be given with the informed consent of the patient or the patientrsquos surrogate decision-maker Ideally the physician should sensitively discuss the DNR option with the patient while the patient is mentally competent However DNR orders are often considered for patients who are comatose or who otherwise lack decisional capacity with whom this discussion has not occurred or cannot occur

In cases when a patient lacks decisional capacity the DNR option should be considered in conjunction with the patients advance directives if known or should be discussed with a surrogate A surrogate may be designated by a patient as the attorney-in-fact in a Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care A surrogate may also be identified as the first available person(s) from the following list in order

f Spouseg Son of or daughter of legal age h Either parent i Brother or sister of legal age or j Guardian

In all cases the primary physician should discuss the DNR option with the patient if possible and the surrogate(s) if appropriate There is no obligation to offer or initiate CPR if resuscitation would be futile ie if resuscitation would not achieve its physiological objective would offer no benefit to the patient and would violate reasonable medical standards

154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart

The words DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care-Arrest or DNR Specified should be recorded on the left-hand side of the medical chart (where advance directives are maintained) along with the date time rationale for the DNR order the names of the patient andor family members involved in the decision and a statement that the patient andor surrogate was fully informed about and consented to the DNR order If a DNR Specified order is recorded the modifications to the DNR Protocol should be specified in the medical chart as well as the desired timing of the activation of the modified Protocol

DNR decisions for inpatients should be transmitted clearly to those caring for the patients A DNR order should never result in the abandonment of a patient and steps should

155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders

The DNR order should be reassessed as part of the ongoing evaluation of an inpatient A DNR order should be affirmed modified or revoked only after a discussion between the primary physician and the patient if possible or the surrogate(s) if appropriate and the consent of the patient or surrogate DNR orders should be reassessed frequently and

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 17

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

as conditions warrant Reassessments of DNR orders should be documented in the medical chart If a DNR order is changed from one of the three types of DNR orders to a different type the patients DNR bracelet should be replaced with a new bracelet containing the revised designation If a DNR order is revoked the DNR bracelet should be removed and destroyed A physician or other health care worker who feels that he or she cannot honor a patients DNR request may not prevent or delay the transfer of the patient to a physician or facility which will honor the DNR status

156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care

The administration of anesthesia necessarily involves some practices and procedures that might be viewed as resuscitation in other settings Prior to any inpatient or outpatient invasive procedure for which the policy requires the documentation of informed consent any existing DNR order should when possible be reviewed with the patient or the patients surrogate As a result of this review the status of the DNR order during the perioperative period should be affirmed clarified or modified based on the preferences of the patient Any clarifications or modifications should be documented in the medical chart along with a notation indicating if or when the original DNR order should be reinstated Concurrence on these issues by the primary physician the surgeon and the anesthesiologist is desirable The DNR bracelet should not be removed during the perioperative period even if the DNR order has been temporarily modified

157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives

In the event of a conflict between one of the three types of DNR orders and an advance directive which has become effective because a person is unable to communicate and is terminally ill or permanently unconscious the instructions from the document (or person named as an Attorney-in-Fact) ranked higher in the following list shall prevail

a Living will of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

b Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care or an Attorney-in-Fact acting in accordance therewith of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

c DNR order d

16POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS DISCHARGE INSTRUCTION

161 The patient or his her legal guardian has the right to be informed by the physician or his her delegate ( nurse) of his her continuing health care requirements following discharge including instructions about

a Take home medicationsb Dietc Physical activityd Special instructions

- Signs to watch out for - When to bring the patient back to the physician- Instructions to follow in the event of untoward incidences

complications

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 18

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

e Follow-up Check-upf All other pertinent information to promote health and well-being

162 At the end patientrsquos confinement he she is entitled to a brief written summary of the course of his her illness which shall include at least the history physical examination diagnosis medications surgical procedure ancillary and laboratory procedures and the plan of further treatment and which shall be provided by the attending physician

17 POLICIES ON DISCLOSURE OF PATIENTrsquoS INFORMATION

171 The privacy of the patients must be assured at all stages of his her treatment Similarly the patient has the right to be free from unwarranted public exposure EXCEPT in the following cases

a When his her mental or physical condition is in controversy and the appropriate court in its discretion orders him her to submit to a physical or mental examination by a physician

b When the public health and safety so demandc When the patient waives his her rights

172 Any health care provider or practitioner involved in the treatment of the patient and all those who have legitimate access to the patientrsquos record is not authorized to divulge any information to a third party who has no concern with the care and welfare of the patient without his Her consent EXCEPT

a When such disclosure will benefit public health and safetyb When it is in the interest of justice and upon the order of a competent

courtc When patients waives in writing the confidential nature of such

information d When it is needed for continued medical treatment or advancement of

medical science subject to de-identification of patient and shared medical confidentiality for those who have access to the information

1721 Informing the spouse or the family to the first degree of the patientrsquos medical condition may be allowed Provided that the patient of legal age have the right to choose on whom to inform

1722 In case the patient is not of legal age or is mentally incapacitated such information shall be given to the parents legal guardian or his her next of kin

18 ETHICAL CONSIDERATIONS IN THE ADMINISTRATION OF BLOOD

181 The physician should obtain the patients informed consent before administering blood products This includes explaining to the patient the relative benefits and risks of receiving and not receiving the blood product as well as any reasonably viable alternatives

182 Generally in emergency situations where treatment is necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient and consent is not available (because the patient is unconscious or otherwise unable to consent) the physician may administer blood products (and any other treatment) necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient This does not apply if

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 19

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

the patient has expressly refused the treatment before becoming incompetent

183 A competent adult is entitled to refuse or cease any treatment for any reason

184 Parents ordinarily have the responsibility to provide consent on behalf of their young children however it is highly unlikely that parents can refuse life-saving treatment for their children Physicians may not simply override a parents refusal

185 Although it is legally clear that a mentally competent adult is entitled to refuse any medical treatment including a blood transfusion physicians have a responsibility to ensure that the refusal is truly informed and voluntary

186 In the case of adults who were once competent but have become temporarily or permanently incompetent substitute consent laws generally provide that their prior wishes regarding treatment decisions should be respected to the extent that they are known or can be determined

19 LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

191 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for IN-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSDoctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientStaff Nurse Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Proceed to the requesting Ward and collect

blood for the ordered examination Take specimen to the laboratoryExamine specimen Sign the resultRecord the result on its respective logbookRecord the result in PhilHealth logbookEndorse the result to the ward

Nurse On Duty Receive the result Refer the result to the Doctor on Duty

192 Specimens Received for Examination

Forms Needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatientPresent specimen with laboratory request signed by the Physician

Medical Technologist Receive specimen and laboratory requestExamine the specimen

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 20

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Sign the resultRecord the result to the respective logbook Endorse the Result to the Nurse on Duty for In- Patients and Release result to patients in OPD

193 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for OUT-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatient Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Receive the request and collect blood for the

ordered examination Examine specimen Sign the result Record the result on its respective logbook Record the result in OPD logbook Release the result

Patient Take the result to the Physician in OPD

194 Monthly Laboratory Report Census

Form Needed Monthly Report Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSMedical Technologist Record all daily results in the

logbookPrepare Monthly report based on the daily report of examinationsSign the reportGive the report to the OIC of the Laboratory for approval

OIC Laboratory Sign and approve the reportMedical Technologist Release the report

2 Laboratory Uniform

Laboratory uniform is a must on all working days except holidays but must be in laboratory gown when with patients

3 Request Slips

In-patient request slips must be completely filled -up by the nurse medical clerk

Out-patient request slips must be duly signed by the Medical Doctor on Duty assigned in OPD

Only requests from the CLSH Hospital will be honored by the laboratory

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 21

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Examination Performed

A Hematology

1 CBC (Complete Blood Count)2 Platelet Count3 Hemoglobin Test4 Clotting Time5 Bleeding Time

B Clinical Microscopy

1 Urinalysis2 Fecalysis

C Blood Banking and Serology

1 Blood Typing2 Hepatitis B Determination (Qualitative)3 Syphilis (Qualitative)

D Bacteriology

1 Acid fast Staining

E Blood Chemistry

1 Cholesterol2 Triglyceride3 Fasting Blood Sugar4 Blood Uric Acid5 Blood Urea Nitrogen6 Serum Creatinine

5 Reasons for ordering laboratory measurements examinations

a To confirm a clinical impression or establish a diagnosisb To rule out a diagnosisc To monitor therapy (management guide)d To establish prognosise To screen for or detect disease

SPECIMEN COLLECTION

2 General Procedure for Obtaining Blood

1 Skin Puncture2 Venous Puncture

Technique for Venous Puncture

1 Identify the patient2 If fasting is required confirm that fasting order has been followed3 Inform the patient of the procedure to be done

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 22

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Prepare the patient and all equipment needed5 Select a suitable vein for venipuncture Veins of the antecubital fossa in

particular the median cubital and cephalic veins are preferred Wrist ankle and hand veins may also be used If one arm has an intravenous line use the other arm to draw a blood specimen

6 Cleanse the venipuncture site with 70 isopropyl alcohol Allow the arm to dry Do not touch the swabbed area with any unsterile object

7 Apply a tourniquet several inches above the puncture site Never leave the tourniquet in place longer than one minute

8 Anchor the vein firmly both above and below the puncture site Use either the thumb and middle finger or thumb and index finger

9 Perform the venipuncture10Release the tourniquet when blood begins to flow11After all blood has been drawn have the patient relax his or her fist Do

not allow the patient to pump the hand12Place a clean sterile cotton ball lightly over the side Withdraw the needle

then apply pressure to the site13Mix tubes with anticoagulant For syringe-drawn specimens transfer blood

to appropriate tubes taking precautions to avoid hemolyzing the specimens Follow any special handling procedures

14Check condition of the patient whether patient is faint and that bleeding is under control

15Dispose of contaminated material such as needles syringes cotton etc16Deliver tubes of blood for testing to appropriate departments

An additional protocol is important in the venipuncture procedure Follow the recommended ldquoorder of drawrdquo when collecting tubes To avoid contamination draw specimens into non-additive tubes before tubes with additives

17Let the blood sample retract completely before centrifuging Separate serum from clotted blood Make sure proper labeling is observed and practiced

HEMATOLOGY

Preparation and staining of Blood Smears for Diffferential Count

Principle

The examination of the peripheral blood smear is the most important examination one can do in hematological evaluation of a patient

Materials Needed

1 Pricker or lancet2 Microscope slides3 Spreader4 Pencil5 Cotton soaked in alcohol6 Dry cotton

Procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 23

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 Puncture the skin as desired and wipe away the first drop of blood2 Touch the surface of the clean slide to a small drop of blood the drop

should be placed near one end of the slide3 Turn the slide over such that the drop of blood is now on the top side and

the other end of the slide away from the drop of the blood is held by the thumb and forefinger of the left hand The other finger serves to support the slide

4 Pick up another slide and loosely between thumb and forefinger of the right hand

5 The slide in the right hand is called the spreader slide Place the spreader in front of the drop and pull back until it touches the drop

6 As soon as the blood spreads by capillary attraction almost to the edge of the slide push the spreader forwards at an angle of approximately 30-45 degrees using a rapid even motion

Note

The weight of the slide is the only pressure applied the thickness of the spread is controlled by the size of the drop the angle at which the spreader slide is held and the speed of spreading The greater the angle the thicker and shorter is the film

7 Dry the slide in air when dried write the name of the patient and date in the thick end of the blood film using a pencil or at the other side of the slide

Staining for Differential Count

Reagents

Rapid Romanowsky staining using ldquorapi-diffrdquo

Solution A Fixing solution MethanolSolution B Acid dye EosinSolution C Basic dye Methylene blueSolution D Buffer pH 68 phosphate buffer

Procedure

1 Prepare a blood smear and air dry

2 Fix by immersing in Solution A for 30 seconds

3 Transfer without rinsing or drying to Solution B and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

4 Without rinsing transfer the slide to Solution C and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

5 Rinse briefly in buffered water pH 68 and allow to dry

Results Macroscopically

Smear in pinkish violet

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 24

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Normal Values

Neutrophils 40-60

Lymphocytes 20-40

Monocyte 4-8

Eosinophil 1-3

Basophil 0-1

Stab 0-1

Peripheral Blood Smear

Procedure in reading peripheral blood smear

1 Examine the blood smear grossly against the light and note the contour and background color

2 Examine under the low power in order to ascertain the adequacy of the staining and select the best fields for study

3 Note agglutination or rouleaux formation of erythrocytes

4 Examine the slides systematically starting at the thin end In this way reduplication of the field is avoided Fields should be avoided in which the red cells are stacked up or are in rouleaux and fields should be examined in which the red cells are well separated and the white cells thinly spread

5 Examine the erythrocytes and note variations in size shape color hemoglobin content abnormal objects in cytoplasm and number of nucleated red cells per 100 leukocytes

6 Examine the WBC and study the morphology

CLINICAL MICROSCOPY

Routine Urinalysis

I Organization of Work

Steps Multistix Test

1 Agitate the urine container Examine the urine with regards to color and transparency

2 Fill the centrifuge tube with the urine

3 Dip a multistix strip into the tube and determine the following by comparing with test chart after specific reading time

a Specific Gravity - 45 ndash 60 seconds

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 25

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

b Ph - time not criticalc Protein - read immediatelyd Glucose - 10 ndash 30 seconds

II Microscopic Examination

Procedure

1 Mix the urine well first and obtain a few cc into a test tube2 Centrifuge urine for five minutes3 Decant the supernatant liquid in a quick motion so that the

sediments are left at the bottom of the test tube4 Place in a clean slide5 Examine under the microscope (regulate lighting by adjusting the

substage diaphragm)6 Focus first at low power then shift to the high power objective

Report as follows

1 RBC and WBC ndash average cells hpf2 Casts ndash average casts per hpf3 Epithelial Cells lpf or accasional few moderate abundant4 Crystals lpf are rare few moderate abundant

Fecalysis

I Macroscopic or Physical Examination

1 Form Consistency and Size

2 Color

II Direct fecal Smear

Procedure

1 Place a drop of saline on the slide2 Using an applicator stick take a small portion of the stool

Formed ndash take the portion from well inside the sampleMucus or watery ndash take the portion from the bloodstained mucus on the surface or from the surface of the liquid

3 mix the sample with the drop of saline on the slide4 Examine the specimen under LPO then shift to HPO5 Report as follows

Normal No Parasite seenMucous Normal - a very small amount

Blood - no blood present

BACTERIOLOGY

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 26

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

SPUTUM EXAMINATION

Acid Fast Bacilli

Signs and symptoms of Asymptomatic Patient

1 Cough for 2 weeks duration or more2 Chest and upper back pains for one month duration or more3 Hemoptysis or blood streaking4 On and off afternoon fever for one month duration or more5 Regressive loss of weight

Collection of specimen

1 Identify the patient through signs and symptoms2 Instruct the patient properly3 Collect the first sputum in the morning4 The patient should be standing if possible5 He should take a very deep breath filling his lungs6 He should empty his lungs in one breath coughing as hard and deeply as

he can7 He should spit what he brings up into the jar or sputum cup8 Label the jar or sputum cup with his name and date

After Collection

Check that sufficient amount of sputum has been produced

The sputum of an infected person usually containsa thick mucus air bubblesb threads of fibrinc patches of pusd occasional brownish streaks of blood

Preparation of Sputum Smears

Materials glass slides (new if possible unscratched) inoculating loop or coconut midribs cotton wool plug on metal wire for flaming alarm clock (timer)

Procedure

1 Prepare two slides Take a purulent potion of the sputum one scrath slide using either one sterile inoculating loop or two to form tongs

2 Make the smear as thin as possible covering as large an area as possible tracing concentric circles well separated but not reaching the edges of the slide

Preparation for fixing Sputum Smear

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 27

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Materials sputum smears alcohol lamp match

Procedure of fixing

1 Dry smears in the air2 Fix the smears by passing the slides three times through the flame3 Let it cool before staining

Preparation in Staining using Ziehl-Neelsen (Hot Method)

Principle The tubercule bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis is acid-fast and stains res with Ziehl-Neelsen stain while almost all other organisms stain blue

Materials alcohol lamp match forceps sputum smears cotton wool soaked in 70 ethanol Ziehl-Neelsen reagents denatured alcohol (for burning)

Reagents1 carbol fuchsin2 acid water or acid alcohol3 aqueous methylene blue

Procedure in staining

1 Cover the slides with filtered carbol fuchsin2 Dip the cotton wool swab in the methylated spirit ignite and pass slowly

under the slides to heat them3 As soon as steam begins to rise set the timer at five minutes4 Continue to heat so that the steam is seen but without boiling for five

minutes add more fuchsin immediately to avoid drying5 Wash with tap water or distilled water6 Decolorize with acid water or acid alcohol for one minute7 Wash with tap water8 Counterstain with aqueous methylene blue for thirty seconds or one

minute9 Wash with tap water for one minute10Drain and leave to dry on a slide rack

Examine under Oil Immersion Field

Results

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 28

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 8: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 2 2 - Authorized civilians4 2 3 - Married or Unmarried dependents 18 years and above

` 42 1 - Children of dependents whether married or unmarried dependents

75 Requirements for pre-natal and consultation

a MilitaryDependents IDb Latest payslip of Military Personnelc MDRMarriage Contractd Newborn Screening payment six hundred pesos (P60000) only to be

Collected at 29 weeks AOGe Delivery Room requirements should be endorsed to Dependents Ward DR at 32 weeks AOG

8 NEURO PSYCHO EXAMINATION

81 Psychometrician or Psychologist will administer tests prescribed only in the AFPR G165-362 dtd 29 October 1996

81-1 For enlistment and trainee1 Intelligence Tests (Note IQ will not be reported as IQ points but

in terms of range eg not as 75 but ldquoAveragerdquo)2 Personality Tests

a Sentence Completion Testb MMPI or its equivalentc NP Forms

81-2 For Annual PE (Active Duty Status)1 Guilford-Zimmerman Temperament Survey2 Those who have not taken an IQ test will be required to take the SRA 3 Verbal Forms or the Personnel Tests for Industry

81-3 For Reenlistment1 NP Screening Forms2 Sentence Completion Forms

81-4 For Retirement (Officers and EM)Psychiatric interview to include review of clinicalhealthy records

81-5 For Supply Accountable Officer1 IQ Test3 Personality Test

82 The manner in which the psychologist or psychometrician administers the tests will be guided by their training

83 The manner with which they give recommendations will be guided by the provisions stated in the AFPR G pp 79-91

84 In the absence of an authorized NP Screener the CO will sign 42and 72 in the AFP PE form

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 8

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

85 Personnel will be allowed to take NP examination upon approval of their requests from COPE personnel

86 Schedule of Examinations

MondayAM - Scheduling of ExamPM - Conduct NP Examination

TuesdayAM - EvaluationInterviewRecordingPM - Athletics

WednesdayAM ndash PM - Conduct NP Examination

ThursdayAM - EvaluationInterviewRecordingPM - Athletics

FridayAM - PM - Conduct NP Examination

87 NP Examination Results will be forwarded to PE personnel for consolidation and

record purposes

88 In instances where the expertise of a Psychiatrist is needed and none is available

in the hospital a request for augmentation has to be made to the higher headquarters addressed to a military hospital which has an in-house Psychiatrist

9 X-RAY EXAMINATIONS

97 For Physical Examinations91-1 Applicants must present form from PE section prior examination91-2 Schedule of Examinations will be from Monday to Friday from

0800H-1130H

91-3 X-Ray result will be forwarded to PE section for consolidation

98 For Out-Patient92-1 Patient must present request signed by the duty MOD922 Schedule of Examinations will be from Monday to Friday from

0800H ndash 1130H

99 For In-Patient99-1 Examinations will be done anytime upon request from the MOD

910 Wednesday is Maintenance Day no examinations except emergency cases

10 OUT-PATIENT CONSULTATION

101 Requirements for consultation

101-1 Military Personnel ndash present military ID101-2 Dependents ndash present dependents IDMDR

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 9

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

101-3 CAA ndash present CAA ID101-4 Civilian Employees ndash present ID101-5 Authorized Civilians ndash must fill-up Authorization to be signed by CO

Prior consultation

102 Schedule of Consultation

Monday amp Wednesday

AM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM ndash 1330H ndash 1430H

Tuesday amp ThursdayAM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM - Athletics

FridayAM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM - 1330H ndash 1530H

103 Patients should be taken vital signsblood pressure prior examination104 Issuance of Medical Certificate must be upon approval of the MOD and

control number should be indicated with CLSH Office Seal

11 POLICIES AND GUIDELINES IN CONDUCTING DIAGNOSTIC EXAMINATIONS

111 Radiology Section

The attending physician writes order of X-ray examination in the patientrsquos chart

The ward nurse prepares a request of X-ray examination Radiology personnel logs request in their logbook The ward man accompanies the patient to the x-ray section For special procedures appropriate SOP is followed The ward nurse documents the time date manner of moving

and condition of the patient An X-ray personnel forwards the x-ray result to the ward

concerned and asks the recipient to sign in the logbook

Ward staff refers significant result to the attending physician and attaches the result to the patientrsquos

chart

112 Laboratory Section

The ward nurse fills up a laboratory examination request and forwards it to the laboratory The request must contain the

patientrsquos complete name which includes the middle name the patientrsquos rank age unit birth date name of the exam to be performed and the date it is to be performed

The patient is instructed on the proper collection of specimen Cut-off time for all examinations is up to 1100H only except for

ldquoSTATrdquo Patients admitted beyond 1100H who require routine laboratory exams such as CBC and UA shall

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 10

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

have their examinations performed the following day

ldquoSTATrdquo laboratory examinations are coordinated and done immediately

Sputum exams and newborn screenings are coordinated first with the medical technologist-on-duty for scheduling

Repeat sputum exams are prioritized over new PTB cases for AFB smear

Newborn screening is done only after the infant is 24 hours old Infants scheduled for newborn screening will be cord dressed

but will be not bathed on the morning of the exam Blood chemistry studies are done on Tuesdays and Thursdays

only Laboratory requests for such exams must be forwarded a day prior to the exam

Examinations to be done at outside laboratories or specimens that need to be sent out must be coordinated first by the

NOD with the medical technologist-on-duty for pricing and scheduling

Payment for outside laboratories must be settled by the Supply Section Officer-in-charge with the permission of the Admin

Officer Laboratory results will be endorsed by the medical technologist-

on-duty as soon as they are available

12 POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS ADVANCE DIRECTIVES

121 Any person of legal age and of sound mind may make an advance directive for physicians to administer terminal care when he she

suffers from the terminal phase of a terminal illness PROVIDED that

a He she is informed of the medical consequences of his her choice b He she releases those involved in his her care from any

obligation relative to the consequences on his her decisionc His her decision will not prejudice health and safety d A written request must be signed by the patient himherself duly

witnessed by a relative or significant others or a hospital personnel

e In case the patient is incapable of giving the consent and a third party consent is required the following persons in the order of priority stated hereunder may give consent

a Spouseb Son of or daughter of legal age

c Either parent d Brother or sister of legal age or e Guardian

122 Consent form once signed and witnessed should be attached to patients chart for filling

13 POLICIES ON DOCTORrsquoS ROUNDS

Doctorrsquos rounds are made everyday in the morning Except for unusual cases which are made daily

Unusual observations are referred to the Medical Officer of the (MOD) after duty hours

New orders are carried out promptly and accurately Routine laboratory treatments are done after treatment

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 11

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

14 POLICIES ON DISCHARGING A PATIENT

141 Military Patients

141a Return to Duty

a Attending physician writes the discharge orderb Patientrsquos chart should be reviewed for completeness

particularly the Cover Sheet which should be signed by the Medical Officer

c Upon receipt of order for discharge Disposition Slip (Cover Sheet) is prepared and forwarded to A amp D Section for issuance of Special Order

d Discharged patients will report to their respective unit first hour of their Expected Date of Return to Duty (EDRD) No discharge will be made on the date of disposition Patients may go on pass before EDRD depending on the Ward Officerrsquos discretion or they may also stay in the hospital until their EDRD

e Prior to discharge patients are given Clearance Form to be completed

f The duty nurse writes and gives discharge instructions to the patient and significant others as well as the date of follow-up check up

g PhilHealth Form shall be properly accomplished by the patient attached with MDR Form and military ID

h Retro-evac patients when recovered these patients will be discharged accordingly following routine disposition of all patients

i The duty nurse checks all equipment items issued to patient are returned

j Discard all medicine card tags except for roster card Indicate EDRD and final diagnosis on the roster card and retained it until EDRD is due

k Locate patientrsquos name on the A amp D book and write the final diagnosis and EDRD opposite their names

l Log patientrsquos name in the discharge checklist and send to A amp D Section together with the chart which is arranged properly and have it properly received by the A amp D personnel

m Drop patient from census on the date of discharge n Document discharge time date condition of patient and

manner of leaving Nursing Unit

141b Discharge by Evacuationa Bring the chart with order final diagnosis and completed cover

sheet to the A amp D Section so that three copies of evacuation papers can be accomplished and evacuation flights can be coordinated

b Evacuation paper Letter Order Narrative Summary and pertinent diagnostic results (together with x-ray plates ECG Tracing etc) are given to the patient and checked by the NOD

c Patients are prohibited to carry firearms during the travel Firearms or deadly weapons of patients for evacuation shall remain in deposit with CLSH storeroom for safekeeping

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 12

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

d Indicate final diagnosis date of evacuation and place to be evacuated opposite the patientrsquos name in the A and D book and drop from census

e Return borrowed items in the CSR

141c Transfer of Hospital (within Cebu) a When the patient needs extensive medicalsurgical

management beyond the capability of the hospital Ward Officer is responsible for completion of all data necessary for transfer to include preparation of Narrative Summary

b Ward master ward man on duty will forward Disposition Form to A amp D Section

c Narrative summary will go with the patient chart should remain in the hospital for future use filing and safekeeping

141d Discharge by Deatha When death occurs on the ward the nurse on duty shall

immediately notify the A amp D Section personnel on duty who should prepare the death certificate The last attending Medical Officer completes the diagnosis and other clinical requirements

b Post mortem care should be done before sending the cadaver to the morgue

c All belongings of the deceased shall be properly accounted for and turned over to the relatives properly receipted

d A death certificate shall be given to the immediate relatives who will accompany the cadaver to the funeral parlor

e Log patientrsquos final diagnosis datetime of death in the A and D book and census

142 Dependents1421Discharge procedure is the same as that of the military except that

they can be discharged on the day of disposition once clearance is obtained

1422For the patientrsquos who are discharged against medical advice the patient of legal age or his her parent and or relative are made to sign a certificate to the effect that the hospital shall not be responsible for anything that would happen to the patient after he leaves the hospital after the doctorrsquos order which is also signed by two (2) witnesses

143 Civilian 1431Civilian employees retired military personnel dependents of retired

military personnel pure civilian have the same discharge procedure as dependents

1432Nurse on Duty should prepare billing prior to discharge 1433Billing of Civilian patients will be done by the Finance Sergeant1434Obligations such as hospital charges shall be settled at the

Admission and Disposition (A amp D) Section before discharge 1435Civilian employee with Phil health form must accomplish the form

in order to obtain clearance from the A amp D Section Medicines medical supplies diagnostic examinations and days of hospitalization should be listed and forwarded to the A amp D Section with the patientrsquos chart

1436Dependents of retired military personnel - same as above1437Retired Military Personnel (RMP) - only mess is charge1438Pure civilian - same as the civilian employees

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 13

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1439Patient presents a duly accomplished clearance prior to the release of discharge order and receipt of payment to the nurse on duty

15 EMERGENCY ROOM POLICIES AND GUIDELINES

1 only emergency cases are entertained in the ER General consultations are referred to the OPD After office hours and on SaturdaySunday and Holiday consultations may be entertained upon the discretion of the OPD

2 patients must be referred to the MOD

3 NOD should obtain the patientrsquos chief complaint weight vital signs get gestational data (LMP ED BP FH FHT if the patient is an OBGYNE case) and other admitting notes

4 inform patient of the existing hospital policies and guidelines upon admission (visiting schedule rights responsibilities policies and regulations

5 provide watcherrsquos id and provide the admin on duty with the list of admitted patients

6 NOD must facilitate requisition of hospital number

7 MOD attends to the patients The nurse on duty assists the MOD in performing assessments

8 for admitted patients MOD writes order for the medical treatment and the ER nurse on duty immediately executes them

9 a signed consent must be obtained from the patients In case of minor or handicapped patients guardians must fill up the consent for them

10NOD should facilitate laboratory works

11 IVF insertion is done either by the PGI on dutyMOD or NOD

12NOD starts giving the medications available Drugs that require skin testing must be performed at the ER and this should be confirmed by the physician and recorded in the patientrsquos chart

13MODNOD gives initial health teachings to the client or significant others as needed

14NOD regulates the IVF of patients before transporting to the ward

15 if patient refuses admission she must inform the MOD and sign a waiver denouncing the hospital from any liabilities A thorough explanation by the MOD shall be afforded to the patient upon signing of the waiver

16 illiterate patientscompanion must be asked to have their thumb marks on the record

17all stocks medicines used by the patient must be replaced as soon as possible on or before the patient leaves the ER This will be done by the duty ER NCO

18only emergency cases are provided with ER stocks NOD gets the prescription and have these items replaced by the pharmacy andor CSR

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 14

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

19ER NOD duty ER NCO will be held accountable for whatever lossesdeficiencies that may occur during hisher shift

20 inventory of all ER items is done every after shift by the NOD

21ER NCOIC must submit a monthly inventory report to the pharmacy and supply section for auditing purposes

22consultations are not entertained in the ER during office hours They are referred to the OPD

23communicableInfectious conditions which require isolation and cases other than OB-GYNEPedia are not accepted for admission but referred to other agencies after MOD has evaluated the patient The MOD should call and should be the one to make the call to the hospital where the patient is to be transferred to

24wounds of more than 24-hour duration are not entertained in te ER but in the OPD except on holidays Saturdays and Sundays

25 for invasive procedures a consent signed by the patient (if adult) companion andor guardian should be obtained before treatment or care is instituted

26should patient refuse she cannot be submitted to a particular treatment This should be properly documented on the patientrsquos record and have the patient sign a waiver for the refusal

27 for emergency cases where a patientrsquos life is in danger no consent is necessary However proper notation shall be made on the patientrsquos record by the physician and must be affirmed by a witness

28media is not allowed within the ER premises to avoid distortion in the management of patients

29dean on arrival (DOA) clients in ER cases are classified in the following categories

DOA Criteria0 vital signs ndash CPR done rarr failedNo death certificate shall be issuedER death ndash 0 vital signs rarr CPRrarr reviverarr died within 26 hoursHospital issue death certificateDOA and ER deaths should be marked on the patientrsquos record in bold

letters using ball pen

30all procedures performed in the ER shall be subjected to official charging which will be forwarded to the different branch of services where the patient belongs Only CENTCOM organic military personnel will be carried free of charge

15 POLICIES ON DO NOT RESUSCITATE (DNR)

151 Definition of Terms151a Resuscitation is a medical procedure which seeks to

restore cardiac andor respiratory function to individuals who have sustained a cardiac andor respiratory arrest

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 15

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

151b Do Not Resuscitate (DNR) is a medical order to provide no resuscitation to individuals for

whom resuscitation is not warranted151c Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) is the

common term used to refer to resuscitation However the options available to treat very sick patients are broader than CPR as literally defined Other options include intensive care antibiotic therapy hydration and nutritional support Appropriate comfort care measures should be employed for all patients especially terminally ill patients

152 DNR Protocol

1521WILL suction the airway administer oxygen position for comfort splint or immobilize control bleeding provide pain medication provide emotional support and contact other appropriate health care providers and

1521WILL NOT administer chest compressions insert an artificial airway administer resuscitative drugs defibrillate or

cardiovert provide respiratory assistance (other than suctioning the airway and administering oxygen) initiate resuscitative IV or initiate cardiac monitoring

153 Types of DNR Orders

1531a DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time the order

is given DNR Comfort Care orders permit comfort care only both before and during a cardiac or respiratory arrest Resuscitative therapies will not be

administered prior to an arrest This order is generally regarded as appropriate for patients who have a terminal illness short life expectancy little chance of surviving CPR and a desire to let nature take its course in the face of an impending arrest

1531b DNR Comfort Care-ArrestDNR Comfort Care-Arrest orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time of a cardiac or respiratory arrest A cardiac arrest occurs when there is an absence of a palpable pulse A respiratory arrest occurs when there are no spontaneous respirations or there is agonal breathing Resuscitative therapies will be administered before an arrest but not during an arrest The term DNR (without additional wording) when recorded in the medical chart shall be considered a DNR Comfort Care-Arrest order

1531c DNR Specified All other DNR orders are DNR Specified orders DNR Specified orders modify the DNR Protocol in some respect either in treatment modalities or in the timing of the protocol activation

1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 16

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart

1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order

DNR is a medical order to be given only by authorized health care practitioners DNR orders generally should be given with the informed consent of the patient or the patientrsquos surrogate decision-maker Ideally the physician should sensitively discuss the DNR option with the patient while the patient is mentally competent However DNR orders are often considered for patients who are comatose or who otherwise lack decisional capacity with whom this discussion has not occurred or cannot occur

In cases when a patient lacks decisional capacity the DNR option should be considered in conjunction with the patients advance directives if known or should be discussed with a surrogate A surrogate may be designated by a patient as the attorney-in-fact in a Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care A surrogate may also be identified as the first available person(s) from the following list in order

f Spouseg Son of or daughter of legal age h Either parent i Brother or sister of legal age or j Guardian

In all cases the primary physician should discuss the DNR option with the patient if possible and the surrogate(s) if appropriate There is no obligation to offer or initiate CPR if resuscitation would be futile ie if resuscitation would not achieve its physiological objective would offer no benefit to the patient and would violate reasonable medical standards

154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart

The words DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care-Arrest or DNR Specified should be recorded on the left-hand side of the medical chart (where advance directives are maintained) along with the date time rationale for the DNR order the names of the patient andor family members involved in the decision and a statement that the patient andor surrogate was fully informed about and consented to the DNR order If a DNR Specified order is recorded the modifications to the DNR Protocol should be specified in the medical chart as well as the desired timing of the activation of the modified Protocol

DNR decisions for inpatients should be transmitted clearly to those caring for the patients A DNR order should never result in the abandonment of a patient and steps should

155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders

The DNR order should be reassessed as part of the ongoing evaluation of an inpatient A DNR order should be affirmed modified or revoked only after a discussion between the primary physician and the patient if possible or the surrogate(s) if appropriate and the consent of the patient or surrogate DNR orders should be reassessed frequently and

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 17

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

as conditions warrant Reassessments of DNR orders should be documented in the medical chart If a DNR order is changed from one of the three types of DNR orders to a different type the patients DNR bracelet should be replaced with a new bracelet containing the revised designation If a DNR order is revoked the DNR bracelet should be removed and destroyed A physician or other health care worker who feels that he or she cannot honor a patients DNR request may not prevent or delay the transfer of the patient to a physician or facility which will honor the DNR status

156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care

The administration of anesthesia necessarily involves some practices and procedures that might be viewed as resuscitation in other settings Prior to any inpatient or outpatient invasive procedure for which the policy requires the documentation of informed consent any existing DNR order should when possible be reviewed with the patient or the patients surrogate As a result of this review the status of the DNR order during the perioperative period should be affirmed clarified or modified based on the preferences of the patient Any clarifications or modifications should be documented in the medical chart along with a notation indicating if or when the original DNR order should be reinstated Concurrence on these issues by the primary physician the surgeon and the anesthesiologist is desirable The DNR bracelet should not be removed during the perioperative period even if the DNR order has been temporarily modified

157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives

In the event of a conflict between one of the three types of DNR orders and an advance directive which has become effective because a person is unable to communicate and is terminally ill or permanently unconscious the instructions from the document (or person named as an Attorney-in-Fact) ranked higher in the following list shall prevail

a Living will of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

b Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care or an Attorney-in-Fact acting in accordance therewith of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

c DNR order d

16POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS DISCHARGE INSTRUCTION

161 The patient or his her legal guardian has the right to be informed by the physician or his her delegate ( nurse) of his her continuing health care requirements following discharge including instructions about

a Take home medicationsb Dietc Physical activityd Special instructions

- Signs to watch out for - When to bring the patient back to the physician- Instructions to follow in the event of untoward incidences

complications

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 18

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

e Follow-up Check-upf All other pertinent information to promote health and well-being

162 At the end patientrsquos confinement he she is entitled to a brief written summary of the course of his her illness which shall include at least the history physical examination diagnosis medications surgical procedure ancillary and laboratory procedures and the plan of further treatment and which shall be provided by the attending physician

17 POLICIES ON DISCLOSURE OF PATIENTrsquoS INFORMATION

171 The privacy of the patients must be assured at all stages of his her treatment Similarly the patient has the right to be free from unwarranted public exposure EXCEPT in the following cases

a When his her mental or physical condition is in controversy and the appropriate court in its discretion orders him her to submit to a physical or mental examination by a physician

b When the public health and safety so demandc When the patient waives his her rights

172 Any health care provider or practitioner involved in the treatment of the patient and all those who have legitimate access to the patientrsquos record is not authorized to divulge any information to a third party who has no concern with the care and welfare of the patient without his Her consent EXCEPT

a When such disclosure will benefit public health and safetyb When it is in the interest of justice and upon the order of a competent

courtc When patients waives in writing the confidential nature of such

information d When it is needed for continued medical treatment or advancement of

medical science subject to de-identification of patient and shared medical confidentiality for those who have access to the information

1721 Informing the spouse or the family to the first degree of the patientrsquos medical condition may be allowed Provided that the patient of legal age have the right to choose on whom to inform

1722 In case the patient is not of legal age or is mentally incapacitated such information shall be given to the parents legal guardian or his her next of kin

18 ETHICAL CONSIDERATIONS IN THE ADMINISTRATION OF BLOOD

181 The physician should obtain the patients informed consent before administering blood products This includes explaining to the patient the relative benefits and risks of receiving and not receiving the blood product as well as any reasonably viable alternatives

182 Generally in emergency situations where treatment is necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient and consent is not available (because the patient is unconscious or otherwise unable to consent) the physician may administer blood products (and any other treatment) necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient This does not apply if

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 19

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

the patient has expressly refused the treatment before becoming incompetent

183 A competent adult is entitled to refuse or cease any treatment for any reason

184 Parents ordinarily have the responsibility to provide consent on behalf of their young children however it is highly unlikely that parents can refuse life-saving treatment for their children Physicians may not simply override a parents refusal

185 Although it is legally clear that a mentally competent adult is entitled to refuse any medical treatment including a blood transfusion physicians have a responsibility to ensure that the refusal is truly informed and voluntary

186 In the case of adults who were once competent but have become temporarily or permanently incompetent substitute consent laws generally provide that their prior wishes regarding treatment decisions should be respected to the extent that they are known or can be determined

19 LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

191 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for IN-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSDoctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientStaff Nurse Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Proceed to the requesting Ward and collect

blood for the ordered examination Take specimen to the laboratoryExamine specimen Sign the resultRecord the result on its respective logbookRecord the result in PhilHealth logbookEndorse the result to the ward

Nurse On Duty Receive the result Refer the result to the Doctor on Duty

192 Specimens Received for Examination

Forms Needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatientPresent specimen with laboratory request signed by the Physician

Medical Technologist Receive specimen and laboratory requestExamine the specimen

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 20

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Sign the resultRecord the result to the respective logbook Endorse the Result to the Nurse on Duty for In- Patients and Release result to patients in OPD

193 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for OUT-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatient Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Receive the request and collect blood for the

ordered examination Examine specimen Sign the result Record the result on its respective logbook Record the result in OPD logbook Release the result

Patient Take the result to the Physician in OPD

194 Monthly Laboratory Report Census

Form Needed Monthly Report Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSMedical Technologist Record all daily results in the

logbookPrepare Monthly report based on the daily report of examinationsSign the reportGive the report to the OIC of the Laboratory for approval

OIC Laboratory Sign and approve the reportMedical Technologist Release the report

2 Laboratory Uniform

Laboratory uniform is a must on all working days except holidays but must be in laboratory gown when with patients

3 Request Slips

In-patient request slips must be completely filled -up by the nurse medical clerk

Out-patient request slips must be duly signed by the Medical Doctor on Duty assigned in OPD

Only requests from the CLSH Hospital will be honored by the laboratory

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 21

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Examination Performed

A Hematology

1 CBC (Complete Blood Count)2 Platelet Count3 Hemoglobin Test4 Clotting Time5 Bleeding Time

B Clinical Microscopy

1 Urinalysis2 Fecalysis

C Blood Banking and Serology

1 Blood Typing2 Hepatitis B Determination (Qualitative)3 Syphilis (Qualitative)

D Bacteriology

1 Acid fast Staining

E Blood Chemistry

1 Cholesterol2 Triglyceride3 Fasting Blood Sugar4 Blood Uric Acid5 Blood Urea Nitrogen6 Serum Creatinine

5 Reasons for ordering laboratory measurements examinations

a To confirm a clinical impression or establish a diagnosisb To rule out a diagnosisc To monitor therapy (management guide)d To establish prognosise To screen for or detect disease

SPECIMEN COLLECTION

2 General Procedure for Obtaining Blood

1 Skin Puncture2 Venous Puncture

Technique for Venous Puncture

1 Identify the patient2 If fasting is required confirm that fasting order has been followed3 Inform the patient of the procedure to be done

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 22

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Prepare the patient and all equipment needed5 Select a suitable vein for venipuncture Veins of the antecubital fossa in

particular the median cubital and cephalic veins are preferred Wrist ankle and hand veins may also be used If one arm has an intravenous line use the other arm to draw a blood specimen

6 Cleanse the venipuncture site with 70 isopropyl alcohol Allow the arm to dry Do not touch the swabbed area with any unsterile object

7 Apply a tourniquet several inches above the puncture site Never leave the tourniquet in place longer than one minute

8 Anchor the vein firmly both above and below the puncture site Use either the thumb and middle finger or thumb and index finger

9 Perform the venipuncture10Release the tourniquet when blood begins to flow11After all blood has been drawn have the patient relax his or her fist Do

not allow the patient to pump the hand12Place a clean sterile cotton ball lightly over the side Withdraw the needle

then apply pressure to the site13Mix tubes with anticoagulant For syringe-drawn specimens transfer blood

to appropriate tubes taking precautions to avoid hemolyzing the specimens Follow any special handling procedures

14Check condition of the patient whether patient is faint and that bleeding is under control

15Dispose of contaminated material such as needles syringes cotton etc16Deliver tubes of blood for testing to appropriate departments

An additional protocol is important in the venipuncture procedure Follow the recommended ldquoorder of drawrdquo when collecting tubes To avoid contamination draw specimens into non-additive tubes before tubes with additives

17Let the blood sample retract completely before centrifuging Separate serum from clotted blood Make sure proper labeling is observed and practiced

HEMATOLOGY

Preparation and staining of Blood Smears for Diffferential Count

Principle

The examination of the peripheral blood smear is the most important examination one can do in hematological evaluation of a patient

Materials Needed

1 Pricker or lancet2 Microscope slides3 Spreader4 Pencil5 Cotton soaked in alcohol6 Dry cotton

Procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 23

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 Puncture the skin as desired and wipe away the first drop of blood2 Touch the surface of the clean slide to a small drop of blood the drop

should be placed near one end of the slide3 Turn the slide over such that the drop of blood is now on the top side and

the other end of the slide away from the drop of the blood is held by the thumb and forefinger of the left hand The other finger serves to support the slide

4 Pick up another slide and loosely between thumb and forefinger of the right hand

5 The slide in the right hand is called the spreader slide Place the spreader in front of the drop and pull back until it touches the drop

6 As soon as the blood spreads by capillary attraction almost to the edge of the slide push the spreader forwards at an angle of approximately 30-45 degrees using a rapid even motion

Note

The weight of the slide is the only pressure applied the thickness of the spread is controlled by the size of the drop the angle at which the spreader slide is held and the speed of spreading The greater the angle the thicker and shorter is the film

7 Dry the slide in air when dried write the name of the patient and date in the thick end of the blood film using a pencil or at the other side of the slide

Staining for Differential Count

Reagents

Rapid Romanowsky staining using ldquorapi-diffrdquo

Solution A Fixing solution MethanolSolution B Acid dye EosinSolution C Basic dye Methylene blueSolution D Buffer pH 68 phosphate buffer

Procedure

1 Prepare a blood smear and air dry

2 Fix by immersing in Solution A for 30 seconds

3 Transfer without rinsing or drying to Solution B and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

4 Without rinsing transfer the slide to Solution C and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

5 Rinse briefly in buffered water pH 68 and allow to dry

Results Macroscopically

Smear in pinkish violet

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 24

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Normal Values

Neutrophils 40-60

Lymphocytes 20-40

Monocyte 4-8

Eosinophil 1-3

Basophil 0-1

Stab 0-1

Peripheral Blood Smear

Procedure in reading peripheral blood smear

1 Examine the blood smear grossly against the light and note the contour and background color

2 Examine under the low power in order to ascertain the adequacy of the staining and select the best fields for study

3 Note agglutination or rouleaux formation of erythrocytes

4 Examine the slides systematically starting at the thin end In this way reduplication of the field is avoided Fields should be avoided in which the red cells are stacked up or are in rouleaux and fields should be examined in which the red cells are well separated and the white cells thinly spread

5 Examine the erythrocytes and note variations in size shape color hemoglobin content abnormal objects in cytoplasm and number of nucleated red cells per 100 leukocytes

6 Examine the WBC and study the morphology

CLINICAL MICROSCOPY

Routine Urinalysis

I Organization of Work

Steps Multistix Test

1 Agitate the urine container Examine the urine with regards to color and transparency

2 Fill the centrifuge tube with the urine

3 Dip a multistix strip into the tube and determine the following by comparing with test chart after specific reading time

a Specific Gravity - 45 ndash 60 seconds

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 25

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

b Ph - time not criticalc Protein - read immediatelyd Glucose - 10 ndash 30 seconds

II Microscopic Examination

Procedure

1 Mix the urine well first and obtain a few cc into a test tube2 Centrifuge urine for five minutes3 Decant the supernatant liquid in a quick motion so that the

sediments are left at the bottom of the test tube4 Place in a clean slide5 Examine under the microscope (regulate lighting by adjusting the

substage diaphragm)6 Focus first at low power then shift to the high power objective

Report as follows

1 RBC and WBC ndash average cells hpf2 Casts ndash average casts per hpf3 Epithelial Cells lpf or accasional few moderate abundant4 Crystals lpf are rare few moderate abundant

Fecalysis

I Macroscopic or Physical Examination

1 Form Consistency and Size

2 Color

II Direct fecal Smear

Procedure

1 Place a drop of saline on the slide2 Using an applicator stick take a small portion of the stool

Formed ndash take the portion from well inside the sampleMucus or watery ndash take the portion from the bloodstained mucus on the surface or from the surface of the liquid

3 mix the sample with the drop of saline on the slide4 Examine the specimen under LPO then shift to HPO5 Report as follows

Normal No Parasite seenMucous Normal - a very small amount

Blood - no blood present

BACTERIOLOGY

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 26

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

SPUTUM EXAMINATION

Acid Fast Bacilli

Signs and symptoms of Asymptomatic Patient

1 Cough for 2 weeks duration or more2 Chest and upper back pains for one month duration or more3 Hemoptysis or blood streaking4 On and off afternoon fever for one month duration or more5 Regressive loss of weight

Collection of specimen

1 Identify the patient through signs and symptoms2 Instruct the patient properly3 Collect the first sputum in the morning4 The patient should be standing if possible5 He should take a very deep breath filling his lungs6 He should empty his lungs in one breath coughing as hard and deeply as

he can7 He should spit what he brings up into the jar or sputum cup8 Label the jar or sputum cup with his name and date

After Collection

Check that sufficient amount of sputum has been produced

The sputum of an infected person usually containsa thick mucus air bubblesb threads of fibrinc patches of pusd occasional brownish streaks of blood

Preparation of Sputum Smears

Materials glass slides (new if possible unscratched) inoculating loop or coconut midribs cotton wool plug on metal wire for flaming alarm clock (timer)

Procedure

1 Prepare two slides Take a purulent potion of the sputum one scrath slide using either one sterile inoculating loop or two to form tongs

2 Make the smear as thin as possible covering as large an area as possible tracing concentric circles well separated but not reaching the edges of the slide

Preparation for fixing Sputum Smear

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 27

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Materials sputum smears alcohol lamp match

Procedure of fixing

1 Dry smears in the air2 Fix the smears by passing the slides three times through the flame3 Let it cool before staining

Preparation in Staining using Ziehl-Neelsen (Hot Method)

Principle The tubercule bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis is acid-fast and stains res with Ziehl-Neelsen stain while almost all other organisms stain blue

Materials alcohol lamp match forceps sputum smears cotton wool soaked in 70 ethanol Ziehl-Neelsen reagents denatured alcohol (for burning)

Reagents1 carbol fuchsin2 acid water or acid alcohol3 aqueous methylene blue

Procedure in staining

1 Cover the slides with filtered carbol fuchsin2 Dip the cotton wool swab in the methylated spirit ignite and pass slowly

under the slides to heat them3 As soon as steam begins to rise set the timer at five minutes4 Continue to heat so that the steam is seen but without boiling for five

minutes add more fuchsin immediately to avoid drying5 Wash with tap water or distilled water6 Decolorize with acid water or acid alcohol for one minute7 Wash with tap water8 Counterstain with aqueous methylene blue for thirty seconds or one

minute9 Wash with tap water for one minute10Drain and leave to dry on a slide rack

Examine under Oil Immersion Field

Results

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 28

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 9: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

85 Personnel will be allowed to take NP examination upon approval of their requests from COPE personnel

86 Schedule of Examinations

MondayAM - Scheduling of ExamPM - Conduct NP Examination

TuesdayAM - EvaluationInterviewRecordingPM - Athletics

WednesdayAM ndash PM - Conduct NP Examination

ThursdayAM - EvaluationInterviewRecordingPM - Athletics

FridayAM - PM - Conduct NP Examination

87 NP Examination Results will be forwarded to PE personnel for consolidation and

record purposes

88 In instances where the expertise of a Psychiatrist is needed and none is available

in the hospital a request for augmentation has to be made to the higher headquarters addressed to a military hospital which has an in-house Psychiatrist

9 X-RAY EXAMINATIONS

97 For Physical Examinations91-1 Applicants must present form from PE section prior examination91-2 Schedule of Examinations will be from Monday to Friday from

0800H-1130H

91-3 X-Ray result will be forwarded to PE section for consolidation

98 For Out-Patient92-1 Patient must present request signed by the duty MOD922 Schedule of Examinations will be from Monday to Friday from

0800H ndash 1130H

99 For In-Patient99-1 Examinations will be done anytime upon request from the MOD

910 Wednesday is Maintenance Day no examinations except emergency cases

10 OUT-PATIENT CONSULTATION

101 Requirements for consultation

101-1 Military Personnel ndash present military ID101-2 Dependents ndash present dependents IDMDR

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 9

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

101-3 CAA ndash present CAA ID101-4 Civilian Employees ndash present ID101-5 Authorized Civilians ndash must fill-up Authorization to be signed by CO

Prior consultation

102 Schedule of Consultation

Monday amp Wednesday

AM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM ndash 1330H ndash 1430H

Tuesday amp ThursdayAM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM - Athletics

FridayAM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM - 1330H ndash 1530H

103 Patients should be taken vital signsblood pressure prior examination104 Issuance of Medical Certificate must be upon approval of the MOD and

control number should be indicated with CLSH Office Seal

11 POLICIES AND GUIDELINES IN CONDUCTING DIAGNOSTIC EXAMINATIONS

111 Radiology Section

The attending physician writes order of X-ray examination in the patientrsquos chart

The ward nurse prepares a request of X-ray examination Radiology personnel logs request in their logbook The ward man accompanies the patient to the x-ray section For special procedures appropriate SOP is followed The ward nurse documents the time date manner of moving

and condition of the patient An X-ray personnel forwards the x-ray result to the ward

concerned and asks the recipient to sign in the logbook

Ward staff refers significant result to the attending physician and attaches the result to the patientrsquos

chart

112 Laboratory Section

The ward nurse fills up a laboratory examination request and forwards it to the laboratory The request must contain the

patientrsquos complete name which includes the middle name the patientrsquos rank age unit birth date name of the exam to be performed and the date it is to be performed

The patient is instructed on the proper collection of specimen Cut-off time for all examinations is up to 1100H only except for

ldquoSTATrdquo Patients admitted beyond 1100H who require routine laboratory exams such as CBC and UA shall

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 10

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

have their examinations performed the following day

ldquoSTATrdquo laboratory examinations are coordinated and done immediately

Sputum exams and newborn screenings are coordinated first with the medical technologist-on-duty for scheduling

Repeat sputum exams are prioritized over new PTB cases for AFB smear

Newborn screening is done only after the infant is 24 hours old Infants scheduled for newborn screening will be cord dressed

but will be not bathed on the morning of the exam Blood chemistry studies are done on Tuesdays and Thursdays

only Laboratory requests for such exams must be forwarded a day prior to the exam

Examinations to be done at outside laboratories or specimens that need to be sent out must be coordinated first by the

NOD with the medical technologist-on-duty for pricing and scheduling

Payment for outside laboratories must be settled by the Supply Section Officer-in-charge with the permission of the Admin

Officer Laboratory results will be endorsed by the medical technologist-

on-duty as soon as they are available

12 POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS ADVANCE DIRECTIVES

121 Any person of legal age and of sound mind may make an advance directive for physicians to administer terminal care when he she

suffers from the terminal phase of a terminal illness PROVIDED that

a He she is informed of the medical consequences of his her choice b He she releases those involved in his her care from any

obligation relative to the consequences on his her decisionc His her decision will not prejudice health and safety d A written request must be signed by the patient himherself duly

witnessed by a relative or significant others or a hospital personnel

e In case the patient is incapable of giving the consent and a third party consent is required the following persons in the order of priority stated hereunder may give consent

a Spouseb Son of or daughter of legal age

c Either parent d Brother or sister of legal age or e Guardian

122 Consent form once signed and witnessed should be attached to patients chart for filling

13 POLICIES ON DOCTORrsquoS ROUNDS

Doctorrsquos rounds are made everyday in the morning Except for unusual cases which are made daily

Unusual observations are referred to the Medical Officer of the (MOD) after duty hours

New orders are carried out promptly and accurately Routine laboratory treatments are done after treatment

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 11

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

14 POLICIES ON DISCHARGING A PATIENT

141 Military Patients

141a Return to Duty

a Attending physician writes the discharge orderb Patientrsquos chart should be reviewed for completeness

particularly the Cover Sheet which should be signed by the Medical Officer

c Upon receipt of order for discharge Disposition Slip (Cover Sheet) is prepared and forwarded to A amp D Section for issuance of Special Order

d Discharged patients will report to their respective unit first hour of their Expected Date of Return to Duty (EDRD) No discharge will be made on the date of disposition Patients may go on pass before EDRD depending on the Ward Officerrsquos discretion or they may also stay in the hospital until their EDRD

e Prior to discharge patients are given Clearance Form to be completed

f The duty nurse writes and gives discharge instructions to the patient and significant others as well as the date of follow-up check up

g PhilHealth Form shall be properly accomplished by the patient attached with MDR Form and military ID

h Retro-evac patients when recovered these patients will be discharged accordingly following routine disposition of all patients

i The duty nurse checks all equipment items issued to patient are returned

j Discard all medicine card tags except for roster card Indicate EDRD and final diagnosis on the roster card and retained it until EDRD is due

k Locate patientrsquos name on the A amp D book and write the final diagnosis and EDRD opposite their names

l Log patientrsquos name in the discharge checklist and send to A amp D Section together with the chart which is arranged properly and have it properly received by the A amp D personnel

m Drop patient from census on the date of discharge n Document discharge time date condition of patient and

manner of leaving Nursing Unit

141b Discharge by Evacuationa Bring the chart with order final diagnosis and completed cover

sheet to the A amp D Section so that three copies of evacuation papers can be accomplished and evacuation flights can be coordinated

b Evacuation paper Letter Order Narrative Summary and pertinent diagnostic results (together with x-ray plates ECG Tracing etc) are given to the patient and checked by the NOD

c Patients are prohibited to carry firearms during the travel Firearms or deadly weapons of patients for evacuation shall remain in deposit with CLSH storeroom for safekeeping

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 12

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

d Indicate final diagnosis date of evacuation and place to be evacuated opposite the patientrsquos name in the A and D book and drop from census

e Return borrowed items in the CSR

141c Transfer of Hospital (within Cebu) a When the patient needs extensive medicalsurgical

management beyond the capability of the hospital Ward Officer is responsible for completion of all data necessary for transfer to include preparation of Narrative Summary

b Ward master ward man on duty will forward Disposition Form to A amp D Section

c Narrative summary will go with the patient chart should remain in the hospital for future use filing and safekeeping

141d Discharge by Deatha When death occurs on the ward the nurse on duty shall

immediately notify the A amp D Section personnel on duty who should prepare the death certificate The last attending Medical Officer completes the diagnosis and other clinical requirements

b Post mortem care should be done before sending the cadaver to the morgue

c All belongings of the deceased shall be properly accounted for and turned over to the relatives properly receipted

d A death certificate shall be given to the immediate relatives who will accompany the cadaver to the funeral parlor

e Log patientrsquos final diagnosis datetime of death in the A and D book and census

142 Dependents1421Discharge procedure is the same as that of the military except that

they can be discharged on the day of disposition once clearance is obtained

1422For the patientrsquos who are discharged against medical advice the patient of legal age or his her parent and or relative are made to sign a certificate to the effect that the hospital shall not be responsible for anything that would happen to the patient after he leaves the hospital after the doctorrsquos order which is also signed by two (2) witnesses

143 Civilian 1431Civilian employees retired military personnel dependents of retired

military personnel pure civilian have the same discharge procedure as dependents

1432Nurse on Duty should prepare billing prior to discharge 1433Billing of Civilian patients will be done by the Finance Sergeant1434Obligations such as hospital charges shall be settled at the

Admission and Disposition (A amp D) Section before discharge 1435Civilian employee with Phil health form must accomplish the form

in order to obtain clearance from the A amp D Section Medicines medical supplies diagnostic examinations and days of hospitalization should be listed and forwarded to the A amp D Section with the patientrsquos chart

1436Dependents of retired military personnel - same as above1437Retired Military Personnel (RMP) - only mess is charge1438Pure civilian - same as the civilian employees

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 13

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1439Patient presents a duly accomplished clearance prior to the release of discharge order and receipt of payment to the nurse on duty

15 EMERGENCY ROOM POLICIES AND GUIDELINES

1 only emergency cases are entertained in the ER General consultations are referred to the OPD After office hours and on SaturdaySunday and Holiday consultations may be entertained upon the discretion of the OPD

2 patients must be referred to the MOD

3 NOD should obtain the patientrsquos chief complaint weight vital signs get gestational data (LMP ED BP FH FHT if the patient is an OBGYNE case) and other admitting notes

4 inform patient of the existing hospital policies and guidelines upon admission (visiting schedule rights responsibilities policies and regulations

5 provide watcherrsquos id and provide the admin on duty with the list of admitted patients

6 NOD must facilitate requisition of hospital number

7 MOD attends to the patients The nurse on duty assists the MOD in performing assessments

8 for admitted patients MOD writes order for the medical treatment and the ER nurse on duty immediately executes them

9 a signed consent must be obtained from the patients In case of minor or handicapped patients guardians must fill up the consent for them

10NOD should facilitate laboratory works

11 IVF insertion is done either by the PGI on dutyMOD or NOD

12NOD starts giving the medications available Drugs that require skin testing must be performed at the ER and this should be confirmed by the physician and recorded in the patientrsquos chart

13MODNOD gives initial health teachings to the client or significant others as needed

14NOD regulates the IVF of patients before transporting to the ward

15 if patient refuses admission she must inform the MOD and sign a waiver denouncing the hospital from any liabilities A thorough explanation by the MOD shall be afforded to the patient upon signing of the waiver

16 illiterate patientscompanion must be asked to have their thumb marks on the record

17all stocks medicines used by the patient must be replaced as soon as possible on or before the patient leaves the ER This will be done by the duty ER NCO

18only emergency cases are provided with ER stocks NOD gets the prescription and have these items replaced by the pharmacy andor CSR

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 14

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

19ER NOD duty ER NCO will be held accountable for whatever lossesdeficiencies that may occur during hisher shift

20 inventory of all ER items is done every after shift by the NOD

21ER NCOIC must submit a monthly inventory report to the pharmacy and supply section for auditing purposes

22consultations are not entertained in the ER during office hours They are referred to the OPD

23communicableInfectious conditions which require isolation and cases other than OB-GYNEPedia are not accepted for admission but referred to other agencies after MOD has evaluated the patient The MOD should call and should be the one to make the call to the hospital where the patient is to be transferred to

24wounds of more than 24-hour duration are not entertained in te ER but in the OPD except on holidays Saturdays and Sundays

25 for invasive procedures a consent signed by the patient (if adult) companion andor guardian should be obtained before treatment or care is instituted

26should patient refuse she cannot be submitted to a particular treatment This should be properly documented on the patientrsquos record and have the patient sign a waiver for the refusal

27 for emergency cases where a patientrsquos life is in danger no consent is necessary However proper notation shall be made on the patientrsquos record by the physician and must be affirmed by a witness

28media is not allowed within the ER premises to avoid distortion in the management of patients

29dean on arrival (DOA) clients in ER cases are classified in the following categories

DOA Criteria0 vital signs ndash CPR done rarr failedNo death certificate shall be issuedER death ndash 0 vital signs rarr CPRrarr reviverarr died within 26 hoursHospital issue death certificateDOA and ER deaths should be marked on the patientrsquos record in bold

letters using ball pen

30all procedures performed in the ER shall be subjected to official charging which will be forwarded to the different branch of services where the patient belongs Only CENTCOM organic military personnel will be carried free of charge

15 POLICIES ON DO NOT RESUSCITATE (DNR)

151 Definition of Terms151a Resuscitation is a medical procedure which seeks to

restore cardiac andor respiratory function to individuals who have sustained a cardiac andor respiratory arrest

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 15

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

151b Do Not Resuscitate (DNR) is a medical order to provide no resuscitation to individuals for

whom resuscitation is not warranted151c Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) is the

common term used to refer to resuscitation However the options available to treat very sick patients are broader than CPR as literally defined Other options include intensive care antibiotic therapy hydration and nutritional support Appropriate comfort care measures should be employed for all patients especially terminally ill patients

152 DNR Protocol

1521WILL suction the airway administer oxygen position for comfort splint or immobilize control bleeding provide pain medication provide emotional support and contact other appropriate health care providers and

1521WILL NOT administer chest compressions insert an artificial airway administer resuscitative drugs defibrillate or

cardiovert provide respiratory assistance (other than suctioning the airway and administering oxygen) initiate resuscitative IV or initiate cardiac monitoring

153 Types of DNR Orders

1531a DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time the order

is given DNR Comfort Care orders permit comfort care only both before and during a cardiac or respiratory arrest Resuscitative therapies will not be

administered prior to an arrest This order is generally regarded as appropriate for patients who have a terminal illness short life expectancy little chance of surviving CPR and a desire to let nature take its course in the face of an impending arrest

1531b DNR Comfort Care-ArrestDNR Comfort Care-Arrest orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time of a cardiac or respiratory arrest A cardiac arrest occurs when there is an absence of a palpable pulse A respiratory arrest occurs when there are no spontaneous respirations or there is agonal breathing Resuscitative therapies will be administered before an arrest but not during an arrest The term DNR (without additional wording) when recorded in the medical chart shall be considered a DNR Comfort Care-Arrest order

1531c DNR Specified All other DNR orders are DNR Specified orders DNR Specified orders modify the DNR Protocol in some respect either in treatment modalities or in the timing of the protocol activation

1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 16

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart

1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order

DNR is a medical order to be given only by authorized health care practitioners DNR orders generally should be given with the informed consent of the patient or the patientrsquos surrogate decision-maker Ideally the physician should sensitively discuss the DNR option with the patient while the patient is mentally competent However DNR orders are often considered for patients who are comatose or who otherwise lack decisional capacity with whom this discussion has not occurred or cannot occur

In cases when a patient lacks decisional capacity the DNR option should be considered in conjunction with the patients advance directives if known or should be discussed with a surrogate A surrogate may be designated by a patient as the attorney-in-fact in a Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care A surrogate may also be identified as the first available person(s) from the following list in order

f Spouseg Son of or daughter of legal age h Either parent i Brother or sister of legal age or j Guardian

In all cases the primary physician should discuss the DNR option with the patient if possible and the surrogate(s) if appropriate There is no obligation to offer or initiate CPR if resuscitation would be futile ie if resuscitation would not achieve its physiological objective would offer no benefit to the patient and would violate reasonable medical standards

154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart

The words DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care-Arrest or DNR Specified should be recorded on the left-hand side of the medical chart (where advance directives are maintained) along with the date time rationale for the DNR order the names of the patient andor family members involved in the decision and a statement that the patient andor surrogate was fully informed about and consented to the DNR order If a DNR Specified order is recorded the modifications to the DNR Protocol should be specified in the medical chart as well as the desired timing of the activation of the modified Protocol

DNR decisions for inpatients should be transmitted clearly to those caring for the patients A DNR order should never result in the abandonment of a patient and steps should

155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders

The DNR order should be reassessed as part of the ongoing evaluation of an inpatient A DNR order should be affirmed modified or revoked only after a discussion between the primary physician and the patient if possible or the surrogate(s) if appropriate and the consent of the patient or surrogate DNR orders should be reassessed frequently and

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 17

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

as conditions warrant Reassessments of DNR orders should be documented in the medical chart If a DNR order is changed from one of the three types of DNR orders to a different type the patients DNR bracelet should be replaced with a new bracelet containing the revised designation If a DNR order is revoked the DNR bracelet should be removed and destroyed A physician or other health care worker who feels that he or she cannot honor a patients DNR request may not prevent or delay the transfer of the patient to a physician or facility which will honor the DNR status

156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care

The administration of anesthesia necessarily involves some practices and procedures that might be viewed as resuscitation in other settings Prior to any inpatient or outpatient invasive procedure for which the policy requires the documentation of informed consent any existing DNR order should when possible be reviewed with the patient or the patients surrogate As a result of this review the status of the DNR order during the perioperative period should be affirmed clarified or modified based on the preferences of the patient Any clarifications or modifications should be documented in the medical chart along with a notation indicating if or when the original DNR order should be reinstated Concurrence on these issues by the primary physician the surgeon and the anesthesiologist is desirable The DNR bracelet should not be removed during the perioperative period even if the DNR order has been temporarily modified

157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives

In the event of a conflict between one of the three types of DNR orders and an advance directive which has become effective because a person is unable to communicate and is terminally ill or permanently unconscious the instructions from the document (or person named as an Attorney-in-Fact) ranked higher in the following list shall prevail

a Living will of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

b Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care or an Attorney-in-Fact acting in accordance therewith of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

c DNR order d

16POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS DISCHARGE INSTRUCTION

161 The patient or his her legal guardian has the right to be informed by the physician or his her delegate ( nurse) of his her continuing health care requirements following discharge including instructions about

a Take home medicationsb Dietc Physical activityd Special instructions

- Signs to watch out for - When to bring the patient back to the physician- Instructions to follow in the event of untoward incidences

complications

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 18

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

e Follow-up Check-upf All other pertinent information to promote health and well-being

162 At the end patientrsquos confinement he she is entitled to a brief written summary of the course of his her illness which shall include at least the history physical examination diagnosis medications surgical procedure ancillary and laboratory procedures and the plan of further treatment and which shall be provided by the attending physician

17 POLICIES ON DISCLOSURE OF PATIENTrsquoS INFORMATION

171 The privacy of the patients must be assured at all stages of his her treatment Similarly the patient has the right to be free from unwarranted public exposure EXCEPT in the following cases

a When his her mental or physical condition is in controversy and the appropriate court in its discretion orders him her to submit to a physical or mental examination by a physician

b When the public health and safety so demandc When the patient waives his her rights

172 Any health care provider or practitioner involved in the treatment of the patient and all those who have legitimate access to the patientrsquos record is not authorized to divulge any information to a third party who has no concern with the care and welfare of the patient without his Her consent EXCEPT

a When such disclosure will benefit public health and safetyb When it is in the interest of justice and upon the order of a competent

courtc When patients waives in writing the confidential nature of such

information d When it is needed for continued medical treatment or advancement of

medical science subject to de-identification of patient and shared medical confidentiality for those who have access to the information

1721 Informing the spouse or the family to the first degree of the patientrsquos medical condition may be allowed Provided that the patient of legal age have the right to choose on whom to inform

1722 In case the patient is not of legal age or is mentally incapacitated such information shall be given to the parents legal guardian or his her next of kin

18 ETHICAL CONSIDERATIONS IN THE ADMINISTRATION OF BLOOD

181 The physician should obtain the patients informed consent before administering blood products This includes explaining to the patient the relative benefits and risks of receiving and not receiving the blood product as well as any reasonably viable alternatives

182 Generally in emergency situations where treatment is necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient and consent is not available (because the patient is unconscious or otherwise unable to consent) the physician may administer blood products (and any other treatment) necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient This does not apply if

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 19

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

the patient has expressly refused the treatment before becoming incompetent

183 A competent adult is entitled to refuse or cease any treatment for any reason

184 Parents ordinarily have the responsibility to provide consent on behalf of their young children however it is highly unlikely that parents can refuse life-saving treatment for their children Physicians may not simply override a parents refusal

185 Although it is legally clear that a mentally competent adult is entitled to refuse any medical treatment including a blood transfusion physicians have a responsibility to ensure that the refusal is truly informed and voluntary

186 In the case of adults who were once competent but have become temporarily or permanently incompetent substitute consent laws generally provide that their prior wishes regarding treatment decisions should be respected to the extent that they are known or can be determined

19 LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

191 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for IN-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSDoctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientStaff Nurse Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Proceed to the requesting Ward and collect

blood for the ordered examination Take specimen to the laboratoryExamine specimen Sign the resultRecord the result on its respective logbookRecord the result in PhilHealth logbookEndorse the result to the ward

Nurse On Duty Receive the result Refer the result to the Doctor on Duty

192 Specimens Received for Examination

Forms Needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatientPresent specimen with laboratory request signed by the Physician

Medical Technologist Receive specimen and laboratory requestExamine the specimen

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 20

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Sign the resultRecord the result to the respective logbook Endorse the Result to the Nurse on Duty for In- Patients and Release result to patients in OPD

193 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for OUT-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatient Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Receive the request and collect blood for the

ordered examination Examine specimen Sign the result Record the result on its respective logbook Record the result in OPD logbook Release the result

Patient Take the result to the Physician in OPD

194 Monthly Laboratory Report Census

Form Needed Monthly Report Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSMedical Technologist Record all daily results in the

logbookPrepare Monthly report based on the daily report of examinationsSign the reportGive the report to the OIC of the Laboratory for approval

OIC Laboratory Sign and approve the reportMedical Technologist Release the report

2 Laboratory Uniform

Laboratory uniform is a must on all working days except holidays but must be in laboratory gown when with patients

3 Request Slips

In-patient request slips must be completely filled -up by the nurse medical clerk

Out-patient request slips must be duly signed by the Medical Doctor on Duty assigned in OPD

Only requests from the CLSH Hospital will be honored by the laboratory

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 21

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Examination Performed

A Hematology

1 CBC (Complete Blood Count)2 Platelet Count3 Hemoglobin Test4 Clotting Time5 Bleeding Time

B Clinical Microscopy

1 Urinalysis2 Fecalysis

C Blood Banking and Serology

1 Blood Typing2 Hepatitis B Determination (Qualitative)3 Syphilis (Qualitative)

D Bacteriology

1 Acid fast Staining

E Blood Chemistry

1 Cholesterol2 Triglyceride3 Fasting Blood Sugar4 Blood Uric Acid5 Blood Urea Nitrogen6 Serum Creatinine

5 Reasons for ordering laboratory measurements examinations

a To confirm a clinical impression or establish a diagnosisb To rule out a diagnosisc To monitor therapy (management guide)d To establish prognosise To screen for or detect disease

SPECIMEN COLLECTION

2 General Procedure for Obtaining Blood

1 Skin Puncture2 Venous Puncture

Technique for Venous Puncture

1 Identify the patient2 If fasting is required confirm that fasting order has been followed3 Inform the patient of the procedure to be done

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 22

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Prepare the patient and all equipment needed5 Select a suitable vein for venipuncture Veins of the antecubital fossa in

particular the median cubital and cephalic veins are preferred Wrist ankle and hand veins may also be used If one arm has an intravenous line use the other arm to draw a blood specimen

6 Cleanse the venipuncture site with 70 isopropyl alcohol Allow the arm to dry Do not touch the swabbed area with any unsterile object

7 Apply a tourniquet several inches above the puncture site Never leave the tourniquet in place longer than one minute

8 Anchor the vein firmly both above and below the puncture site Use either the thumb and middle finger or thumb and index finger

9 Perform the venipuncture10Release the tourniquet when blood begins to flow11After all blood has been drawn have the patient relax his or her fist Do

not allow the patient to pump the hand12Place a clean sterile cotton ball lightly over the side Withdraw the needle

then apply pressure to the site13Mix tubes with anticoagulant For syringe-drawn specimens transfer blood

to appropriate tubes taking precautions to avoid hemolyzing the specimens Follow any special handling procedures

14Check condition of the patient whether patient is faint and that bleeding is under control

15Dispose of contaminated material such as needles syringes cotton etc16Deliver tubes of blood for testing to appropriate departments

An additional protocol is important in the venipuncture procedure Follow the recommended ldquoorder of drawrdquo when collecting tubes To avoid contamination draw specimens into non-additive tubes before tubes with additives

17Let the blood sample retract completely before centrifuging Separate serum from clotted blood Make sure proper labeling is observed and practiced

HEMATOLOGY

Preparation and staining of Blood Smears for Diffferential Count

Principle

The examination of the peripheral blood smear is the most important examination one can do in hematological evaluation of a patient

Materials Needed

1 Pricker or lancet2 Microscope slides3 Spreader4 Pencil5 Cotton soaked in alcohol6 Dry cotton

Procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 23

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 Puncture the skin as desired and wipe away the first drop of blood2 Touch the surface of the clean slide to a small drop of blood the drop

should be placed near one end of the slide3 Turn the slide over such that the drop of blood is now on the top side and

the other end of the slide away from the drop of the blood is held by the thumb and forefinger of the left hand The other finger serves to support the slide

4 Pick up another slide and loosely between thumb and forefinger of the right hand

5 The slide in the right hand is called the spreader slide Place the spreader in front of the drop and pull back until it touches the drop

6 As soon as the blood spreads by capillary attraction almost to the edge of the slide push the spreader forwards at an angle of approximately 30-45 degrees using a rapid even motion

Note

The weight of the slide is the only pressure applied the thickness of the spread is controlled by the size of the drop the angle at which the spreader slide is held and the speed of spreading The greater the angle the thicker and shorter is the film

7 Dry the slide in air when dried write the name of the patient and date in the thick end of the blood film using a pencil or at the other side of the slide

Staining for Differential Count

Reagents

Rapid Romanowsky staining using ldquorapi-diffrdquo

Solution A Fixing solution MethanolSolution B Acid dye EosinSolution C Basic dye Methylene blueSolution D Buffer pH 68 phosphate buffer

Procedure

1 Prepare a blood smear and air dry

2 Fix by immersing in Solution A for 30 seconds

3 Transfer without rinsing or drying to Solution B and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

4 Without rinsing transfer the slide to Solution C and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

5 Rinse briefly in buffered water pH 68 and allow to dry

Results Macroscopically

Smear in pinkish violet

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 24

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Normal Values

Neutrophils 40-60

Lymphocytes 20-40

Monocyte 4-8

Eosinophil 1-3

Basophil 0-1

Stab 0-1

Peripheral Blood Smear

Procedure in reading peripheral blood smear

1 Examine the blood smear grossly against the light and note the contour and background color

2 Examine under the low power in order to ascertain the adequacy of the staining and select the best fields for study

3 Note agglutination or rouleaux formation of erythrocytes

4 Examine the slides systematically starting at the thin end In this way reduplication of the field is avoided Fields should be avoided in which the red cells are stacked up or are in rouleaux and fields should be examined in which the red cells are well separated and the white cells thinly spread

5 Examine the erythrocytes and note variations in size shape color hemoglobin content abnormal objects in cytoplasm and number of nucleated red cells per 100 leukocytes

6 Examine the WBC and study the morphology

CLINICAL MICROSCOPY

Routine Urinalysis

I Organization of Work

Steps Multistix Test

1 Agitate the urine container Examine the urine with regards to color and transparency

2 Fill the centrifuge tube with the urine

3 Dip a multistix strip into the tube and determine the following by comparing with test chart after specific reading time

a Specific Gravity - 45 ndash 60 seconds

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 25

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

b Ph - time not criticalc Protein - read immediatelyd Glucose - 10 ndash 30 seconds

II Microscopic Examination

Procedure

1 Mix the urine well first and obtain a few cc into a test tube2 Centrifuge urine for five minutes3 Decant the supernatant liquid in a quick motion so that the

sediments are left at the bottom of the test tube4 Place in a clean slide5 Examine under the microscope (regulate lighting by adjusting the

substage diaphragm)6 Focus first at low power then shift to the high power objective

Report as follows

1 RBC and WBC ndash average cells hpf2 Casts ndash average casts per hpf3 Epithelial Cells lpf or accasional few moderate abundant4 Crystals lpf are rare few moderate abundant

Fecalysis

I Macroscopic or Physical Examination

1 Form Consistency and Size

2 Color

II Direct fecal Smear

Procedure

1 Place a drop of saline on the slide2 Using an applicator stick take a small portion of the stool

Formed ndash take the portion from well inside the sampleMucus or watery ndash take the portion from the bloodstained mucus on the surface or from the surface of the liquid

3 mix the sample with the drop of saline on the slide4 Examine the specimen under LPO then shift to HPO5 Report as follows

Normal No Parasite seenMucous Normal - a very small amount

Blood - no blood present

BACTERIOLOGY

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 26

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

SPUTUM EXAMINATION

Acid Fast Bacilli

Signs and symptoms of Asymptomatic Patient

1 Cough for 2 weeks duration or more2 Chest and upper back pains for one month duration or more3 Hemoptysis or blood streaking4 On and off afternoon fever for one month duration or more5 Regressive loss of weight

Collection of specimen

1 Identify the patient through signs and symptoms2 Instruct the patient properly3 Collect the first sputum in the morning4 The patient should be standing if possible5 He should take a very deep breath filling his lungs6 He should empty his lungs in one breath coughing as hard and deeply as

he can7 He should spit what he brings up into the jar or sputum cup8 Label the jar or sputum cup with his name and date

After Collection

Check that sufficient amount of sputum has been produced

The sputum of an infected person usually containsa thick mucus air bubblesb threads of fibrinc patches of pusd occasional brownish streaks of blood

Preparation of Sputum Smears

Materials glass slides (new if possible unscratched) inoculating loop or coconut midribs cotton wool plug on metal wire for flaming alarm clock (timer)

Procedure

1 Prepare two slides Take a purulent potion of the sputum one scrath slide using either one sterile inoculating loop or two to form tongs

2 Make the smear as thin as possible covering as large an area as possible tracing concentric circles well separated but not reaching the edges of the slide

Preparation for fixing Sputum Smear

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 27

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Materials sputum smears alcohol lamp match

Procedure of fixing

1 Dry smears in the air2 Fix the smears by passing the slides three times through the flame3 Let it cool before staining

Preparation in Staining using Ziehl-Neelsen (Hot Method)

Principle The tubercule bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis is acid-fast and stains res with Ziehl-Neelsen stain while almost all other organisms stain blue

Materials alcohol lamp match forceps sputum smears cotton wool soaked in 70 ethanol Ziehl-Neelsen reagents denatured alcohol (for burning)

Reagents1 carbol fuchsin2 acid water or acid alcohol3 aqueous methylene blue

Procedure in staining

1 Cover the slides with filtered carbol fuchsin2 Dip the cotton wool swab in the methylated spirit ignite and pass slowly

under the slides to heat them3 As soon as steam begins to rise set the timer at five minutes4 Continue to heat so that the steam is seen but without boiling for five

minutes add more fuchsin immediately to avoid drying5 Wash with tap water or distilled water6 Decolorize with acid water or acid alcohol for one minute7 Wash with tap water8 Counterstain with aqueous methylene blue for thirty seconds or one

minute9 Wash with tap water for one minute10Drain and leave to dry on a slide rack

Examine under Oil Immersion Field

Results

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 28

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 10: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

101-3 CAA ndash present CAA ID101-4 Civilian Employees ndash present ID101-5 Authorized Civilians ndash must fill-up Authorization to be signed by CO

Prior consultation

102 Schedule of Consultation

Monday amp Wednesday

AM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM ndash 1330H ndash 1430H

Tuesday amp ThursdayAM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM - Athletics

FridayAM - 0800H ndash 1130HPM - 1330H ndash 1530H

103 Patients should be taken vital signsblood pressure prior examination104 Issuance of Medical Certificate must be upon approval of the MOD and

control number should be indicated with CLSH Office Seal

11 POLICIES AND GUIDELINES IN CONDUCTING DIAGNOSTIC EXAMINATIONS

111 Radiology Section

The attending physician writes order of X-ray examination in the patientrsquos chart

The ward nurse prepares a request of X-ray examination Radiology personnel logs request in their logbook The ward man accompanies the patient to the x-ray section For special procedures appropriate SOP is followed The ward nurse documents the time date manner of moving

and condition of the patient An X-ray personnel forwards the x-ray result to the ward

concerned and asks the recipient to sign in the logbook

Ward staff refers significant result to the attending physician and attaches the result to the patientrsquos

chart

112 Laboratory Section

The ward nurse fills up a laboratory examination request and forwards it to the laboratory The request must contain the

patientrsquos complete name which includes the middle name the patientrsquos rank age unit birth date name of the exam to be performed and the date it is to be performed

The patient is instructed on the proper collection of specimen Cut-off time for all examinations is up to 1100H only except for

ldquoSTATrdquo Patients admitted beyond 1100H who require routine laboratory exams such as CBC and UA shall

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 10

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

have their examinations performed the following day

ldquoSTATrdquo laboratory examinations are coordinated and done immediately

Sputum exams and newborn screenings are coordinated first with the medical technologist-on-duty for scheduling

Repeat sputum exams are prioritized over new PTB cases for AFB smear

Newborn screening is done only after the infant is 24 hours old Infants scheduled for newborn screening will be cord dressed

but will be not bathed on the morning of the exam Blood chemistry studies are done on Tuesdays and Thursdays

only Laboratory requests for such exams must be forwarded a day prior to the exam

Examinations to be done at outside laboratories or specimens that need to be sent out must be coordinated first by the

NOD with the medical technologist-on-duty for pricing and scheduling

Payment for outside laboratories must be settled by the Supply Section Officer-in-charge with the permission of the Admin

Officer Laboratory results will be endorsed by the medical technologist-

on-duty as soon as they are available

12 POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS ADVANCE DIRECTIVES

121 Any person of legal age and of sound mind may make an advance directive for physicians to administer terminal care when he she

suffers from the terminal phase of a terminal illness PROVIDED that

a He she is informed of the medical consequences of his her choice b He she releases those involved in his her care from any

obligation relative to the consequences on his her decisionc His her decision will not prejudice health and safety d A written request must be signed by the patient himherself duly

witnessed by a relative or significant others or a hospital personnel

e In case the patient is incapable of giving the consent and a third party consent is required the following persons in the order of priority stated hereunder may give consent

a Spouseb Son of or daughter of legal age

c Either parent d Brother or sister of legal age or e Guardian

122 Consent form once signed and witnessed should be attached to patients chart for filling

13 POLICIES ON DOCTORrsquoS ROUNDS

Doctorrsquos rounds are made everyday in the morning Except for unusual cases which are made daily

Unusual observations are referred to the Medical Officer of the (MOD) after duty hours

New orders are carried out promptly and accurately Routine laboratory treatments are done after treatment

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 11

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

14 POLICIES ON DISCHARGING A PATIENT

141 Military Patients

141a Return to Duty

a Attending physician writes the discharge orderb Patientrsquos chart should be reviewed for completeness

particularly the Cover Sheet which should be signed by the Medical Officer

c Upon receipt of order for discharge Disposition Slip (Cover Sheet) is prepared and forwarded to A amp D Section for issuance of Special Order

d Discharged patients will report to their respective unit first hour of their Expected Date of Return to Duty (EDRD) No discharge will be made on the date of disposition Patients may go on pass before EDRD depending on the Ward Officerrsquos discretion or they may also stay in the hospital until their EDRD

e Prior to discharge patients are given Clearance Form to be completed

f The duty nurse writes and gives discharge instructions to the patient and significant others as well as the date of follow-up check up

g PhilHealth Form shall be properly accomplished by the patient attached with MDR Form and military ID

h Retro-evac patients when recovered these patients will be discharged accordingly following routine disposition of all patients

i The duty nurse checks all equipment items issued to patient are returned

j Discard all medicine card tags except for roster card Indicate EDRD and final diagnosis on the roster card and retained it until EDRD is due

k Locate patientrsquos name on the A amp D book and write the final diagnosis and EDRD opposite their names

l Log patientrsquos name in the discharge checklist and send to A amp D Section together with the chart which is arranged properly and have it properly received by the A amp D personnel

m Drop patient from census on the date of discharge n Document discharge time date condition of patient and

manner of leaving Nursing Unit

141b Discharge by Evacuationa Bring the chart with order final diagnosis and completed cover

sheet to the A amp D Section so that three copies of evacuation papers can be accomplished and evacuation flights can be coordinated

b Evacuation paper Letter Order Narrative Summary and pertinent diagnostic results (together with x-ray plates ECG Tracing etc) are given to the patient and checked by the NOD

c Patients are prohibited to carry firearms during the travel Firearms or deadly weapons of patients for evacuation shall remain in deposit with CLSH storeroom for safekeeping

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 12

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

d Indicate final diagnosis date of evacuation and place to be evacuated opposite the patientrsquos name in the A and D book and drop from census

e Return borrowed items in the CSR

141c Transfer of Hospital (within Cebu) a When the patient needs extensive medicalsurgical

management beyond the capability of the hospital Ward Officer is responsible for completion of all data necessary for transfer to include preparation of Narrative Summary

b Ward master ward man on duty will forward Disposition Form to A amp D Section

c Narrative summary will go with the patient chart should remain in the hospital for future use filing and safekeeping

141d Discharge by Deatha When death occurs on the ward the nurse on duty shall

immediately notify the A amp D Section personnel on duty who should prepare the death certificate The last attending Medical Officer completes the diagnosis and other clinical requirements

b Post mortem care should be done before sending the cadaver to the morgue

c All belongings of the deceased shall be properly accounted for and turned over to the relatives properly receipted

d A death certificate shall be given to the immediate relatives who will accompany the cadaver to the funeral parlor

e Log patientrsquos final diagnosis datetime of death in the A and D book and census

142 Dependents1421Discharge procedure is the same as that of the military except that

they can be discharged on the day of disposition once clearance is obtained

1422For the patientrsquos who are discharged against medical advice the patient of legal age or his her parent and or relative are made to sign a certificate to the effect that the hospital shall not be responsible for anything that would happen to the patient after he leaves the hospital after the doctorrsquos order which is also signed by two (2) witnesses

143 Civilian 1431Civilian employees retired military personnel dependents of retired

military personnel pure civilian have the same discharge procedure as dependents

1432Nurse on Duty should prepare billing prior to discharge 1433Billing of Civilian patients will be done by the Finance Sergeant1434Obligations such as hospital charges shall be settled at the

Admission and Disposition (A amp D) Section before discharge 1435Civilian employee with Phil health form must accomplish the form

in order to obtain clearance from the A amp D Section Medicines medical supplies diagnostic examinations and days of hospitalization should be listed and forwarded to the A amp D Section with the patientrsquos chart

1436Dependents of retired military personnel - same as above1437Retired Military Personnel (RMP) - only mess is charge1438Pure civilian - same as the civilian employees

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 13

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1439Patient presents a duly accomplished clearance prior to the release of discharge order and receipt of payment to the nurse on duty

15 EMERGENCY ROOM POLICIES AND GUIDELINES

1 only emergency cases are entertained in the ER General consultations are referred to the OPD After office hours and on SaturdaySunday and Holiday consultations may be entertained upon the discretion of the OPD

2 patients must be referred to the MOD

3 NOD should obtain the patientrsquos chief complaint weight vital signs get gestational data (LMP ED BP FH FHT if the patient is an OBGYNE case) and other admitting notes

4 inform patient of the existing hospital policies and guidelines upon admission (visiting schedule rights responsibilities policies and regulations

5 provide watcherrsquos id and provide the admin on duty with the list of admitted patients

6 NOD must facilitate requisition of hospital number

7 MOD attends to the patients The nurse on duty assists the MOD in performing assessments

8 for admitted patients MOD writes order for the medical treatment and the ER nurse on duty immediately executes them

9 a signed consent must be obtained from the patients In case of minor or handicapped patients guardians must fill up the consent for them

10NOD should facilitate laboratory works

11 IVF insertion is done either by the PGI on dutyMOD or NOD

12NOD starts giving the medications available Drugs that require skin testing must be performed at the ER and this should be confirmed by the physician and recorded in the patientrsquos chart

13MODNOD gives initial health teachings to the client or significant others as needed

14NOD regulates the IVF of patients before transporting to the ward

15 if patient refuses admission she must inform the MOD and sign a waiver denouncing the hospital from any liabilities A thorough explanation by the MOD shall be afforded to the patient upon signing of the waiver

16 illiterate patientscompanion must be asked to have their thumb marks on the record

17all stocks medicines used by the patient must be replaced as soon as possible on or before the patient leaves the ER This will be done by the duty ER NCO

18only emergency cases are provided with ER stocks NOD gets the prescription and have these items replaced by the pharmacy andor CSR

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 14

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

19ER NOD duty ER NCO will be held accountable for whatever lossesdeficiencies that may occur during hisher shift

20 inventory of all ER items is done every after shift by the NOD

21ER NCOIC must submit a monthly inventory report to the pharmacy and supply section for auditing purposes

22consultations are not entertained in the ER during office hours They are referred to the OPD

23communicableInfectious conditions which require isolation and cases other than OB-GYNEPedia are not accepted for admission but referred to other agencies after MOD has evaluated the patient The MOD should call and should be the one to make the call to the hospital where the patient is to be transferred to

24wounds of more than 24-hour duration are not entertained in te ER but in the OPD except on holidays Saturdays and Sundays

25 for invasive procedures a consent signed by the patient (if adult) companion andor guardian should be obtained before treatment or care is instituted

26should patient refuse she cannot be submitted to a particular treatment This should be properly documented on the patientrsquos record and have the patient sign a waiver for the refusal

27 for emergency cases where a patientrsquos life is in danger no consent is necessary However proper notation shall be made on the patientrsquos record by the physician and must be affirmed by a witness

28media is not allowed within the ER premises to avoid distortion in the management of patients

29dean on arrival (DOA) clients in ER cases are classified in the following categories

DOA Criteria0 vital signs ndash CPR done rarr failedNo death certificate shall be issuedER death ndash 0 vital signs rarr CPRrarr reviverarr died within 26 hoursHospital issue death certificateDOA and ER deaths should be marked on the patientrsquos record in bold

letters using ball pen

30all procedures performed in the ER shall be subjected to official charging which will be forwarded to the different branch of services where the patient belongs Only CENTCOM organic military personnel will be carried free of charge

15 POLICIES ON DO NOT RESUSCITATE (DNR)

151 Definition of Terms151a Resuscitation is a medical procedure which seeks to

restore cardiac andor respiratory function to individuals who have sustained a cardiac andor respiratory arrest

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 15

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

151b Do Not Resuscitate (DNR) is a medical order to provide no resuscitation to individuals for

whom resuscitation is not warranted151c Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) is the

common term used to refer to resuscitation However the options available to treat very sick patients are broader than CPR as literally defined Other options include intensive care antibiotic therapy hydration and nutritional support Appropriate comfort care measures should be employed for all patients especially terminally ill patients

152 DNR Protocol

1521WILL suction the airway administer oxygen position for comfort splint or immobilize control bleeding provide pain medication provide emotional support and contact other appropriate health care providers and

1521WILL NOT administer chest compressions insert an artificial airway administer resuscitative drugs defibrillate or

cardiovert provide respiratory assistance (other than suctioning the airway and administering oxygen) initiate resuscitative IV or initiate cardiac monitoring

153 Types of DNR Orders

1531a DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time the order

is given DNR Comfort Care orders permit comfort care only both before and during a cardiac or respiratory arrest Resuscitative therapies will not be

administered prior to an arrest This order is generally regarded as appropriate for patients who have a terminal illness short life expectancy little chance of surviving CPR and a desire to let nature take its course in the face of an impending arrest

1531b DNR Comfort Care-ArrestDNR Comfort Care-Arrest orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time of a cardiac or respiratory arrest A cardiac arrest occurs when there is an absence of a palpable pulse A respiratory arrest occurs when there are no spontaneous respirations or there is agonal breathing Resuscitative therapies will be administered before an arrest but not during an arrest The term DNR (without additional wording) when recorded in the medical chart shall be considered a DNR Comfort Care-Arrest order

1531c DNR Specified All other DNR orders are DNR Specified orders DNR Specified orders modify the DNR Protocol in some respect either in treatment modalities or in the timing of the protocol activation

1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 16

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart

1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order

DNR is a medical order to be given only by authorized health care practitioners DNR orders generally should be given with the informed consent of the patient or the patientrsquos surrogate decision-maker Ideally the physician should sensitively discuss the DNR option with the patient while the patient is mentally competent However DNR orders are often considered for patients who are comatose or who otherwise lack decisional capacity with whom this discussion has not occurred or cannot occur

In cases when a patient lacks decisional capacity the DNR option should be considered in conjunction with the patients advance directives if known or should be discussed with a surrogate A surrogate may be designated by a patient as the attorney-in-fact in a Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care A surrogate may also be identified as the first available person(s) from the following list in order

f Spouseg Son of or daughter of legal age h Either parent i Brother or sister of legal age or j Guardian

In all cases the primary physician should discuss the DNR option with the patient if possible and the surrogate(s) if appropriate There is no obligation to offer or initiate CPR if resuscitation would be futile ie if resuscitation would not achieve its physiological objective would offer no benefit to the patient and would violate reasonable medical standards

154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart

The words DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care-Arrest or DNR Specified should be recorded on the left-hand side of the medical chart (where advance directives are maintained) along with the date time rationale for the DNR order the names of the patient andor family members involved in the decision and a statement that the patient andor surrogate was fully informed about and consented to the DNR order If a DNR Specified order is recorded the modifications to the DNR Protocol should be specified in the medical chart as well as the desired timing of the activation of the modified Protocol

DNR decisions for inpatients should be transmitted clearly to those caring for the patients A DNR order should never result in the abandonment of a patient and steps should

155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders

The DNR order should be reassessed as part of the ongoing evaluation of an inpatient A DNR order should be affirmed modified or revoked only after a discussion between the primary physician and the patient if possible or the surrogate(s) if appropriate and the consent of the patient or surrogate DNR orders should be reassessed frequently and

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 17

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

as conditions warrant Reassessments of DNR orders should be documented in the medical chart If a DNR order is changed from one of the three types of DNR orders to a different type the patients DNR bracelet should be replaced with a new bracelet containing the revised designation If a DNR order is revoked the DNR bracelet should be removed and destroyed A physician or other health care worker who feels that he or she cannot honor a patients DNR request may not prevent or delay the transfer of the patient to a physician or facility which will honor the DNR status

156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care

The administration of anesthesia necessarily involves some practices and procedures that might be viewed as resuscitation in other settings Prior to any inpatient or outpatient invasive procedure for which the policy requires the documentation of informed consent any existing DNR order should when possible be reviewed with the patient or the patients surrogate As a result of this review the status of the DNR order during the perioperative period should be affirmed clarified or modified based on the preferences of the patient Any clarifications or modifications should be documented in the medical chart along with a notation indicating if or when the original DNR order should be reinstated Concurrence on these issues by the primary physician the surgeon and the anesthesiologist is desirable The DNR bracelet should not be removed during the perioperative period even if the DNR order has been temporarily modified

157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives

In the event of a conflict between one of the three types of DNR orders and an advance directive which has become effective because a person is unable to communicate and is terminally ill or permanently unconscious the instructions from the document (or person named as an Attorney-in-Fact) ranked higher in the following list shall prevail

a Living will of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

b Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care or an Attorney-in-Fact acting in accordance therewith of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

c DNR order d

16POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS DISCHARGE INSTRUCTION

161 The patient or his her legal guardian has the right to be informed by the physician or his her delegate ( nurse) of his her continuing health care requirements following discharge including instructions about

a Take home medicationsb Dietc Physical activityd Special instructions

- Signs to watch out for - When to bring the patient back to the physician- Instructions to follow in the event of untoward incidences

complications

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 18

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

e Follow-up Check-upf All other pertinent information to promote health and well-being

162 At the end patientrsquos confinement he she is entitled to a brief written summary of the course of his her illness which shall include at least the history physical examination diagnosis medications surgical procedure ancillary and laboratory procedures and the plan of further treatment and which shall be provided by the attending physician

17 POLICIES ON DISCLOSURE OF PATIENTrsquoS INFORMATION

171 The privacy of the patients must be assured at all stages of his her treatment Similarly the patient has the right to be free from unwarranted public exposure EXCEPT in the following cases

a When his her mental or physical condition is in controversy and the appropriate court in its discretion orders him her to submit to a physical or mental examination by a physician

b When the public health and safety so demandc When the patient waives his her rights

172 Any health care provider or practitioner involved in the treatment of the patient and all those who have legitimate access to the patientrsquos record is not authorized to divulge any information to a third party who has no concern with the care and welfare of the patient without his Her consent EXCEPT

a When such disclosure will benefit public health and safetyb When it is in the interest of justice and upon the order of a competent

courtc When patients waives in writing the confidential nature of such

information d When it is needed for continued medical treatment or advancement of

medical science subject to de-identification of patient and shared medical confidentiality for those who have access to the information

1721 Informing the spouse or the family to the first degree of the patientrsquos medical condition may be allowed Provided that the patient of legal age have the right to choose on whom to inform

1722 In case the patient is not of legal age or is mentally incapacitated such information shall be given to the parents legal guardian or his her next of kin

18 ETHICAL CONSIDERATIONS IN THE ADMINISTRATION OF BLOOD

181 The physician should obtain the patients informed consent before administering blood products This includes explaining to the patient the relative benefits and risks of receiving and not receiving the blood product as well as any reasonably viable alternatives

182 Generally in emergency situations where treatment is necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient and consent is not available (because the patient is unconscious or otherwise unable to consent) the physician may administer blood products (and any other treatment) necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient This does not apply if

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 19

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

the patient has expressly refused the treatment before becoming incompetent

183 A competent adult is entitled to refuse or cease any treatment for any reason

184 Parents ordinarily have the responsibility to provide consent on behalf of their young children however it is highly unlikely that parents can refuse life-saving treatment for their children Physicians may not simply override a parents refusal

185 Although it is legally clear that a mentally competent adult is entitled to refuse any medical treatment including a blood transfusion physicians have a responsibility to ensure that the refusal is truly informed and voluntary

186 In the case of adults who were once competent but have become temporarily or permanently incompetent substitute consent laws generally provide that their prior wishes regarding treatment decisions should be respected to the extent that they are known or can be determined

19 LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

191 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for IN-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSDoctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientStaff Nurse Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Proceed to the requesting Ward and collect

blood for the ordered examination Take specimen to the laboratoryExamine specimen Sign the resultRecord the result on its respective logbookRecord the result in PhilHealth logbookEndorse the result to the ward

Nurse On Duty Receive the result Refer the result to the Doctor on Duty

192 Specimens Received for Examination

Forms Needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatientPresent specimen with laboratory request signed by the Physician

Medical Technologist Receive specimen and laboratory requestExamine the specimen

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 20

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Sign the resultRecord the result to the respective logbook Endorse the Result to the Nurse on Duty for In- Patients and Release result to patients in OPD

193 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for OUT-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatient Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Receive the request and collect blood for the

ordered examination Examine specimen Sign the result Record the result on its respective logbook Record the result in OPD logbook Release the result

Patient Take the result to the Physician in OPD

194 Monthly Laboratory Report Census

Form Needed Monthly Report Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSMedical Technologist Record all daily results in the

logbookPrepare Monthly report based on the daily report of examinationsSign the reportGive the report to the OIC of the Laboratory for approval

OIC Laboratory Sign and approve the reportMedical Technologist Release the report

2 Laboratory Uniform

Laboratory uniform is a must on all working days except holidays but must be in laboratory gown when with patients

3 Request Slips

In-patient request slips must be completely filled -up by the nurse medical clerk

Out-patient request slips must be duly signed by the Medical Doctor on Duty assigned in OPD

Only requests from the CLSH Hospital will be honored by the laboratory

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 21

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Examination Performed

A Hematology

1 CBC (Complete Blood Count)2 Platelet Count3 Hemoglobin Test4 Clotting Time5 Bleeding Time

B Clinical Microscopy

1 Urinalysis2 Fecalysis

C Blood Banking and Serology

1 Blood Typing2 Hepatitis B Determination (Qualitative)3 Syphilis (Qualitative)

D Bacteriology

1 Acid fast Staining

E Blood Chemistry

1 Cholesterol2 Triglyceride3 Fasting Blood Sugar4 Blood Uric Acid5 Blood Urea Nitrogen6 Serum Creatinine

5 Reasons for ordering laboratory measurements examinations

a To confirm a clinical impression or establish a diagnosisb To rule out a diagnosisc To monitor therapy (management guide)d To establish prognosise To screen for or detect disease

SPECIMEN COLLECTION

2 General Procedure for Obtaining Blood

1 Skin Puncture2 Venous Puncture

Technique for Venous Puncture

1 Identify the patient2 If fasting is required confirm that fasting order has been followed3 Inform the patient of the procedure to be done

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 22

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Prepare the patient and all equipment needed5 Select a suitable vein for venipuncture Veins of the antecubital fossa in

particular the median cubital and cephalic veins are preferred Wrist ankle and hand veins may also be used If one arm has an intravenous line use the other arm to draw a blood specimen

6 Cleanse the venipuncture site with 70 isopropyl alcohol Allow the arm to dry Do not touch the swabbed area with any unsterile object

7 Apply a tourniquet several inches above the puncture site Never leave the tourniquet in place longer than one minute

8 Anchor the vein firmly both above and below the puncture site Use either the thumb and middle finger or thumb and index finger

9 Perform the venipuncture10Release the tourniquet when blood begins to flow11After all blood has been drawn have the patient relax his or her fist Do

not allow the patient to pump the hand12Place a clean sterile cotton ball lightly over the side Withdraw the needle

then apply pressure to the site13Mix tubes with anticoagulant For syringe-drawn specimens transfer blood

to appropriate tubes taking precautions to avoid hemolyzing the specimens Follow any special handling procedures

14Check condition of the patient whether patient is faint and that bleeding is under control

15Dispose of contaminated material such as needles syringes cotton etc16Deliver tubes of blood for testing to appropriate departments

An additional protocol is important in the venipuncture procedure Follow the recommended ldquoorder of drawrdquo when collecting tubes To avoid contamination draw specimens into non-additive tubes before tubes with additives

17Let the blood sample retract completely before centrifuging Separate serum from clotted blood Make sure proper labeling is observed and practiced

HEMATOLOGY

Preparation and staining of Blood Smears for Diffferential Count

Principle

The examination of the peripheral blood smear is the most important examination one can do in hematological evaluation of a patient

Materials Needed

1 Pricker or lancet2 Microscope slides3 Spreader4 Pencil5 Cotton soaked in alcohol6 Dry cotton

Procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 23

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 Puncture the skin as desired and wipe away the first drop of blood2 Touch the surface of the clean slide to a small drop of blood the drop

should be placed near one end of the slide3 Turn the slide over such that the drop of blood is now on the top side and

the other end of the slide away from the drop of the blood is held by the thumb and forefinger of the left hand The other finger serves to support the slide

4 Pick up another slide and loosely between thumb and forefinger of the right hand

5 The slide in the right hand is called the spreader slide Place the spreader in front of the drop and pull back until it touches the drop

6 As soon as the blood spreads by capillary attraction almost to the edge of the slide push the spreader forwards at an angle of approximately 30-45 degrees using a rapid even motion

Note

The weight of the slide is the only pressure applied the thickness of the spread is controlled by the size of the drop the angle at which the spreader slide is held and the speed of spreading The greater the angle the thicker and shorter is the film

7 Dry the slide in air when dried write the name of the patient and date in the thick end of the blood film using a pencil or at the other side of the slide

Staining for Differential Count

Reagents

Rapid Romanowsky staining using ldquorapi-diffrdquo

Solution A Fixing solution MethanolSolution B Acid dye EosinSolution C Basic dye Methylene blueSolution D Buffer pH 68 phosphate buffer

Procedure

1 Prepare a blood smear and air dry

2 Fix by immersing in Solution A for 30 seconds

3 Transfer without rinsing or drying to Solution B and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

4 Without rinsing transfer the slide to Solution C and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

5 Rinse briefly in buffered water pH 68 and allow to dry

Results Macroscopically

Smear in pinkish violet

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 24

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Normal Values

Neutrophils 40-60

Lymphocytes 20-40

Monocyte 4-8

Eosinophil 1-3

Basophil 0-1

Stab 0-1

Peripheral Blood Smear

Procedure in reading peripheral blood smear

1 Examine the blood smear grossly against the light and note the contour and background color

2 Examine under the low power in order to ascertain the adequacy of the staining and select the best fields for study

3 Note agglutination or rouleaux formation of erythrocytes

4 Examine the slides systematically starting at the thin end In this way reduplication of the field is avoided Fields should be avoided in which the red cells are stacked up or are in rouleaux and fields should be examined in which the red cells are well separated and the white cells thinly spread

5 Examine the erythrocytes and note variations in size shape color hemoglobin content abnormal objects in cytoplasm and number of nucleated red cells per 100 leukocytes

6 Examine the WBC and study the morphology

CLINICAL MICROSCOPY

Routine Urinalysis

I Organization of Work

Steps Multistix Test

1 Agitate the urine container Examine the urine with regards to color and transparency

2 Fill the centrifuge tube with the urine

3 Dip a multistix strip into the tube and determine the following by comparing with test chart after specific reading time

a Specific Gravity - 45 ndash 60 seconds

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 25

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

b Ph - time not criticalc Protein - read immediatelyd Glucose - 10 ndash 30 seconds

II Microscopic Examination

Procedure

1 Mix the urine well first and obtain a few cc into a test tube2 Centrifuge urine for five minutes3 Decant the supernatant liquid in a quick motion so that the

sediments are left at the bottom of the test tube4 Place in a clean slide5 Examine under the microscope (regulate lighting by adjusting the

substage diaphragm)6 Focus first at low power then shift to the high power objective

Report as follows

1 RBC and WBC ndash average cells hpf2 Casts ndash average casts per hpf3 Epithelial Cells lpf or accasional few moderate abundant4 Crystals lpf are rare few moderate abundant

Fecalysis

I Macroscopic or Physical Examination

1 Form Consistency and Size

2 Color

II Direct fecal Smear

Procedure

1 Place a drop of saline on the slide2 Using an applicator stick take a small portion of the stool

Formed ndash take the portion from well inside the sampleMucus or watery ndash take the portion from the bloodstained mucus on the surface or from the surface of the liquid

3 mix the sample with the drop of saline on the slide4 Examine the specimen under LPO then shift to HPO5 Report as follows

Normal No Parasite seenMucous Normal - a very small amount

Blood - no blood present

BACTERIOLOGY

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 26

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

SPUTUM EXAMINATION

Acid Fast Bacilli

Signs and symptoms of Asymptomatic Patient

1 Cough for 2 weeks duration or more2 Chest and upper back pains for one month duration or more3 Hemoptysis or blood streaking4 On and off afternoon fever for one month duration or more5 Regressive loss of weight

Collection of specimen

1 Identify the patient through signs and symptoms2 Instruct the patient properly3 Collect the first sputum in the morning4 The patient should be standing if possible5 He should take a very deep breath filling his lungs6 He should empty his lungs in one breath coughing as hard and deeply as

he can7 He should spit what he brings up into the jar or sputum cup8 Label the jar or sputum cup with his name and date

After Collection

Check that sufficient amount of sputum has been produced

The sputum of an infected person usually containsa thick mucus air bubblesb threads of fibrinc patches of pusd occasional brownish streaks of blood

Preparation of Sputum Smears

Materials glass slides (new if possible unscratched) inoculating loop or coconut midribs cotton wool plug on metal wire for flaming alarm clock (timer)

Procedure

1 Prepare two slides Take a purulent potion of the sputum one scrath slide using either one sterile inoculating loop or two to form tongs

2 Make the smear as thin as possible covering as large an area as possible tracing concentric circles well separated but not reaching the edges of the slide

Preparation for fixing Sputum Smear

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 27

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Materials sputum smears alcohol lamp match

Procedure of fixing

1 Dry smears in the air2 Fix the smears by passing the slides three times through the flame3 Let it cool before staining

Preparation in Staining using Ziehl-Neelsen (Hot Method)

Principle The tubercule bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis is acid-fast and stains res with Ziehl-Neelsen stain while almost all other organisms stain blue

Materials alcohol lamp match forceps sputum smears cotton wool soaked in 70 ethanol Ziehl-Neelsen reagents denatured alcohol (for burning)

Reagents1 carbol fuchsin2 acid water or acid alcohol3 aqueous methylene blue

Procedure in staining

1 Cover the slides with filtered carbol fuchsin2 Dip the cotton wool swab in the methylated spirit ignite and pass slowly

under the slides to heat them3 As soon as steam begins to rise set the timer at five minutes4 Continue to heat so that the steam is seen but without boiling for five

minutes add more fuchsin immediately to avoid drying5 Wash with tap water or distilled water6 Decolorize with acid water or acid alcohol for one minute7 Wash with tap water8 Counterstain with aqueous methylene blue for thirty seconds or one

minute9 Wash with tap water for one minute10Drain and leave to dry on a slide rack

Examine under Oil Immersion Field

Results

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 28

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 11: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

have their examinations performed the following day

ldquoSTATrdquo laboratory examinations are coordinated and done immediately

Sputum exams and newborn screenings are coordinated first with the medical technologist-on-duty for scheduling

Repeat sputum exams are prioritized over new PTB cases for AFB smear

Newborn screening is done only after the infant is 24 hours old Infants scheduled for newborn screening will be cord dressed

but will be not bathed on the morning of the exam Blood chemistry studies are done on Tuesdays and Thursdays

only Laboratory requests for such exams must be forwarded a day prior to the exam

Examinations to be done at outside laboratories or specimens that need to be sent out must be coordinated first by the

NOD with the medical technologist-on-duty for pricing and scheduling

Payment for outside laboratories must be settled by the Supply Section Officer-in-charge with the permission of the Admin

Officer Laboratory results will be endorsed by the medical technologist-

on-duty as soon as they are available

12 POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS ADVANCE DIRECTIVES

121 Any person of legal age and of sound mind may make an advance directive for physicians to administer terminal care when he she

suffers from the terminal phase of a terminal illness PROVIDED that

a He she is informed of the medical consequences of his her choice b He she releases those involved in his her care from any

obligation relative to the consequences on his her decisionc His her decision will not prejudice health and safety d A written request must be signed by the patient himherself duly

witnessed by a relative or significant others or a hospital personnel

e In case the patient is incapable of giving the consent and a third party consent is required the following persons in the order of priority stated hereunder may give consent

a Spouseb Son of or daughter of legal age

c Either parent d Brother or sister of legal age or e Guardian

122 Consent form once signed and witnessed should be attached to patients chart for filling

13 POLICIES ON DOCTORrsquoS ROUNDS

Doctorrsquos rounds are made everyday in the morning Except for unusual cases which are made daily

Unusual observations are referred to the Medical Officer of the (MOD) after duty hours

New orders are carried out promptly and accurately Routine laboratory treatments are done after treatment

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 11

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

14 POLICIES ON DISCHARGING A PATIENT

141 Military Patients

141a Return to Duty

a Attending physician writes the discharge orderb Patientrsquos chart should be reviewed for completeness

particularly the Cover Sheet which should be signed by the Medical Officer

c Upon receipt of order for discharge Disposition Slip (Cover Sheet) is prepared and forwarded to A amp D Section for issuance of Special Order

d Discharged patients will report to their respective unit first hour of their Expected Date of Return to Duty (EDRD) No discharge will be made on the date of disposition Patients may go on pass before EDRD depending on the Ward Officerrsquos discretion or they may also stay in the hospital until their EDRD

e Prior to discharge patients are given Clearance Form to be completed

f The duty nurse writes and gives discharge instructions to the patient and significant others as well as the date of follow-up check up

g PhilHealth Form shall be properly accomplished by the patient attached with MDR Form and military ID

h Retro-evac patients when recovered these patients will be discharged accordingly following routine disposition of all patients

i The duty nurse checks all equipment items issued to patient are returned

j Discard all medicine card tags except for roster card Indicate EDRD and final diagnosis on the roster card and retained it until EDRD is due

k Locate patientrsquos name on the A amp D book and write the final diagnosis and EDRD opposite their names

l Log patientrsquos name in the discharge checklist and send to A amp D Section together with the chart which is arranged properly and have it properly received by the A amp D personnel

m Drop patient from census on the date of discharge n Document discharge time date condition of patient and

manner of leaving Nursing Unit

141b Discharge by Evacuationa Bring the chart with order final diagnosis and completed cover

sheet to the A amp D Section so that three copies of evacuation papers can be accomplished and evacuation flights can be coordinated

b Evacuation paper Letter Order Narrative Summary and pertinent diagnostic results (together with x-ray plates ECG Tracing etc) are given to the patient and checked by the NOD

c Patients are prohibited to carry firearms during the travel Firearms or deadly weapons of patients for evacuation shall remain in deposit with CLSH storeroom for safekeeping

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 12

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

d Indicate final diagnosis date of evacuation and place to be evacuated opposite the patientrsquos name in the A and D book and drop from census

e Return borrowed items in the CSR

141c Transfer of Hospital (within Cebu) a When the patient needs extensive medicalsurgical

management beyond the capability of the hospital Ward Officer is responsible for completion of all data necessary for transfer to include preparation of Narrative Summary

b Ward master ward man on duty will forward Disposition Form to A amp D Section

c Narrative summary will go with the patient chart should remain in the hospital for future use filing and safekeeping

141d Discharge by Deatha When death occurs on the ward the nurse on duty shall

immediately notify the A amp D Section personnel on duty who should prepare the death certificate The last attending Medical Officer completes the diagnosis and other clinical requirements

b Post mortem care should be done before sending the cadaver to the morgue

c All belongings of the deceased shall be properly accounted for and turned over to the relatives properly receipted

d A death certificate shall be given to the immediate relatives who will accompany the cadaver to the funeral parlor

e Log patientrsquos final diagnosis datetime of death in the A and D book and census

142 Dependents1421Discharge procedure is the same as that of the military except that

they can be discharged on the day of disposition once clearance is obtained

1422For the patientrsquos who are discharged against medical advice the patient of legal age or his her parent and or relative are made to sign a certificate to the effect that the hospital shall not be responsible for anything that would happen to the patient after he leaves the hospital after the doctorrsquos order which is also signed by two (2) witnesses

143 Civilian 1431Civilian employees retired military personnel dependents of retired

military personnel pure civilian have the same discharge procedure as dependents

1432Nurse on Duty should prepare billing prior to discharge 1433Billing of Civilian patients will be done by the Finance Sergeant1434Obligations such as hospital charges shall be settled at the

Admission and Disposition (A amp D) Section before discharge 1435Civilian employee with Phil health form must accomplish the form

in order to obtain clearance from the A amp D Section Medicines medical supplies diagnostic examinations and days of hospitalization should be listed and forwarded to the A amp D Section with the patientrsquos chart

1436Dependents of retired military personnel - same as above1437Retired Military Personnel (RMP) - only mess is charge1438Pure civilian - same as the civilian employees

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 13

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1439Patient presents a duly accomplished clearance prior to the release of discharge order and receipt of payment to the nurse on duty

15 EMERGENCY ROOM POLICIES AND GUIDELINES

1 only emergency cases are entertained in the ER General consultations are referred to the OPD After office hours and on SaturdaySunday and Holiday consultations may be entertained upon the discretion of the OPD

2 patients must be referred to the MOD

3 NOD should obtain the patientrsquos chief complaint weight vital signs get gestational data (LMP ED BP FH FHT if the patient is an OBGYNE case) and other admitting notes

4 inform patient of the existing hospital policies and guidelines upon admission (visiting schedule rights responsibilities policies and regulations

5 provide watcherrsquos id and provide the admin on duty with the list of admitted patients

6 NOD must facilitate requisition of hospital number

7 MOD attends to the patients The nurse on duty assists the MOD in performing assessments

8 for admitted patients MOD writes order for the medical treatment and the ER nurse on duty immediately executes them

9 a signed consent must be obtained from the patients In case of minor or handicapped patients guardians must fill up the consent for them

10NOD should facilitate laboratory works

11 IVF insertion is done either by the PGI on dutyMOD or NOD

12NOD starts giving the medications available Drugs that require skin testing must be performed at the ER and this should be confirmed by the physician and recorded in the patientrsquos chart

13MODNOD gives initial health teachings to the client or significant others as needed

14NOD regulates the IVF of patients before transporting to the ward

15 if patient refuses admission she must inform the MOD and sign a waiver denouncing the hospital from any liabilities A thorough explanation by the MOD shall be afforded to the patient upon signing of the waiver

16 illiterate patientscompanion must be asked to have their thumb marks on the record

17all stocks medicines used by the patient must be replaced as soon as possible on or before the patient leaves the ER This will be done by the duty ER NCO

18only emergency cases are provided with ER stocks NOD gets the prescription and have these items replaced by the pharmacy andor CSR

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 14

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

19ER NOD duty ER NCO will be held accountable for whatever lossesdeficiencies that may occur during hisher shift

20 inventory of all ER items is done every after shift by the NOD

21ER NCOIC must submit a monthly inventory report to the pharmacy and supply section for auditing purposes

22consultations are not entertained in the ER during office hours They are referred to the OPD

23communicableInfectious conditions which require isolation and cases other than OB-GYNEPedia are not accepted for admission but referred to other agencies after MOD has evaluated the patient The MOD should call and should be the one to make the call to the hospital where the patient is to be transferred to

24wounds of more than 24-hour duration are not entertained in te ER but in the OPD except on holidays Saturdays and Sundays

25 for invasive procedures a consent signed by the patient (if adult) companion andor guardian should be obtained before treatment or care is instituted

26should patient refuse she cannot be submitted to a particular treatment This should be properly documented on the patientrsquos record and have the patient sign a waiver for the refusal

27 for emergency cases where a patientrsquos life is in danger no consent is necessary However proper notation shall be made on the patientrsquos record by the physician and must be affirmed by a witness

28media is not allowed within the ER premises to avoid distortion in the management of patients

29dean on arrival (DOA) clients in ER cases are classified in the following categories

DOA Criteria0 vital signs ndash CPR done rarr failedNo death certificate shall be issuedER death ndash 0 vital signs rarr CPRrarr reviverarr died within 26 hoursHospital issue death certificateDOA and ER deaths should be marked on the patientrsquos record in bold

letters using ball pen

30all procedures performed in the ER shall be subjected to official charging which will be forwarded to the different branch of services where the patient belongs Only CENTCOM organic military personnel will be carried free of charge

15 POLICIES ON DO NOT RESUSCITATE (DNR)

151 Definition of Terms151a Resuscitation is a medical procedure which seeks to

restore cardiac andor respiratory function to individuals who have sustained a cardiac andor respiratory arrest

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 15

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

151b Do Not Resuscitate (DNR) is a medical order to provide no resuscitation to individuals for

whom resuscitation is not warranted151c Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) is the

common term used to refer to resuscitation However the options available to treat very sick patients are broader than CPR as literally defined Other options include intensive care antibiotic therapy hydration and nutritional support Appropriate comfort care measures should be employed for all patients especially terminally ill patients

152 DNR Protocol

1521WILL suction the airway administer oxygen position for comfort splint or immobilize control bleeding provide pain medication provide emotional support and contact other appropriate health care providers and

1521WILL NOT administer chest compressions insert an artificial airway administer resuscitative drugs defibrillate or

cardiovert provide respiratory assistance (other than suctioning the airway and administering oxygen) initiate resuscitative IV or initiate cardiac monitoring

153 Types of DNR Orders

1531a DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time the order

is given DNR Comfort Care orders permit comfort care only both before and during a cardiac or respiratory arrest Resuscitative therapies will not be

administered prior to an arrest This order is generally regarded as appropriate for patients who have a terminal illness short life expectancy little chance of surviving CPR and a desire to let nature take its course in the face of an impending arrest

1531b DNR Comfort Care-ArrestDNR Comfort Care-Arrest orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time of a cardiac or respiratory arrest A cardiac arrest occurs when there is an absence of a palpable pulse A respiratory arrest occurs when there are no spontaneous respirations or there is agonal breathing Resuscitative therapies will be administered before an arrest but not during an arrest The term DNR (without additional wording) when recorded in the medical chart shall be considered a DNR Comfort Care-Arrest order

1531c DNR Specified All other DNR orders are DNR Specified orders DNR Specified orders modify the DNR Protocol in some respect either in treatment modalities or in the timing of the protocol activation

1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 16

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart

1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order

DNR is a medical order to be given only by authorized health care practitioners DNR orders generally should be given with the informed consent of the patient or the patientrsquos surrogate decision-maker Ideally the physician should sensitively discuss the DNR option with the patient while the patient is mentally competent However DNR orders are often considered for patients who are comatose or who otherwise lack decisional capacity with whom this discussion has not occurred or cannot occur

In cases when a patient lacks decisional capacity the DNR option should be considered in conjunction with the patients advance directives if known or should be discussed with a surrogate A surrogate may be designated by a patient as the attorney-in-fact in a Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care A surrogate may also be identified as the first available person(s) from the following list in order

f Spouseg Son of or daughter of legal age h Either parent i Brother or sister of legal age or j Guardian

In all cases the primary physician should discuss the DNR option with the patient if possible and the surrogate(s) if appropriate There is no obligation to offer or initiate CPR if resuscitation would be futile ie if resuscitation would not achieve its physiological objective would offer no benefit to the patient and would violate reasonable medical standards

154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart

The words DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care-Arrest or DNR Specified should be recorded on the left-hand side of the medical chart (where advance directives are maintained) along with the date time rationale for the DNR order the names of the patient andor family members involved in the decision and a statement that the patient andor surrogate was fully informed about and consented to the DNR order If a DNR Specified order is recorded the modifications to the DNR Protocol should be specified in the medical chart as well as the desired timing of the activation of the modified Protocol

DNR decisions for inpatients should be transmitted clearly to those caring for the patients A DNR order should never result in the abandonment of a patient and steps should

155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders

The DNR order should be reassessed as part of the ongoing evaluation of an inpatient A DNR order should be affirmed modified or revoked only after a discussion between the primary physician and the patient if possible or the surrogate(s) if appropriate and the consent of the patient or surrogate DNR orders should be reassessed frequently and

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 17

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

as conditions warrant Reassessments of DNR orders should be documented in the medical chart If a DNR order is changed from one of the three types of DNR orders to a different type the patients DNR bracelet should be replaced with a new bracelet containing the revised designation If a DNR order is revoked the DNR bracelet should be removed and destroyed A physician or other health care worker who feels that he or she cannot honor a patients DNR request may not prevent or delay the transfer of the patient to a physician or facility which will honor the DNR status

156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care

The administration of anesthesia necessarily involves some practices and procedures that might be viewed as resuscitation in other settings Prior to any inpatient or outpatient invasive procedure for which the policy requires the documentation of informed consent any existing DNR order should when possible be reviewed with the patient or the patients surrogate As a result of this review the status of the DNR order during the perioperative period should be affirmed clarified or modified based on the preferences of the patient Any clarifications or modifications should be documented in the medical chart along with a notation indicating if or when the original DNR order should be reinstated Concurrence on these issues by the primary physician the surgeon and the anesthesiologist is desirable The DNR bracelet should not be removed during the perioperative period even if the DNR order has been temporarily modified

157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives

In the event of a conflict between one of the three types of DNR orders and an advance directive which has become effective because a person is unable to communicate and is terminally ill or permanently unconscious the instructions from the document (or person named as an Attorney-in-Fact) ranked higher in the following list shall prevail

a Living will of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

b Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care or an Attorney-in-Fact acting in accordance therewith of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

c DNR order d

16POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS DISCHARGE INSTRUCTION

161 The patient or his her legal guardian has the right to be informed by the physician or his her delegate ( nurse) of his her continuing health care requirements following discharge including instructions about

a Take home medicationsb Dietc Physical activityd Special instructions

- Signs to watch out for - When to bring the patient back to the physician- Instructions to follow in the event of untoward incidences

complications

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 18

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

e Follow-up Check-upf All other pertinent information to promote health and well-being

162 At the end patientrsquos confinement he she is entitled to a brief written summary of the course of his her illness which shall include at least the history physical examination diagnosis medications surgical procedure ancillary and laboratory procedures and the plan of further treatment and which shall be provided by the attending physician

17 POLICIES ON DISCLOSURE OF PATIENTrsquoS INFORMATION

171 The privacy of the patients must be assured at all stages of his her treatment Similarly the patient has the right to be free from unwarranted public exposure EXCEPT in the following cases

a When his her mental or physical condition is in controversy and the appropriate court in its discretion orders him her to submit to a physical or mental examination by a physician

b When the public health and safety so demandc When the patient waives his her rights

172 Any health care provider or practitioner involved in the treatment of the patient and all those who have legitimate access to the patientrsquos record is not authorized to divulge any information to a third party who has no concern with the care and welfare of the patient without his Her consent EXCEPT

a When such disclosure will benefit public health and safetyb When it is in the interest of justice and upon the order of a competent

courtc When patients waives in writing the confidential nature of such

information d When it is needed for continued medical treatment or advancement of

medical science subject to de-identification of patient and shared medical confidentiality for those who have access to the information

1721 Informing the spouse or the family to the first degree of the patientrsquos medical condition may be allowed Provided that the patient of legal age have the right to choose on whom to inform

1722 In case the patient is not of legal age or is mentally incapacitated such information shall be given to the parents legal guardian or his her next of kin

18 ETHICAL CONSIDERATIONS IN THE ADMINISTRATION OF BLOOD

181 The physician should obtain the patients informed consent before administering blood products This includes explaining to the patient the relative benefits and risks of receiving and not receiving the blood product as well as any reasonably viable alternatives

182 Generally in emergency situations where treatment is necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient and consent is not available (because the patient is unconscious or otherwise unable to consent) the physician may administer blood products (and any other treatment) necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient This does not apply if

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 19

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

the patient has expressly refused the treatment before becoming incompetent

183 A competent adult is entitled to refuse or cease any treatment for any reason

184 Parents ordinarily have the responsibility to provide consent on behalf of their young children however it is highly unlikely that parents can refuse life-saving treatment for their children Physicians may not simply override a parents refusal

185 Although it is legally clear that a mentally competent adult is entitled to refuse any medical treatment including a blood transfusion physicians have a responsibility to ensure that the refusal is truly informed and voluntary

186 In the case of adults who were once competent but have become temporarily or permanently incompetent substitute consent laws generally provide that their prior wishes regarding treatment decisions should be respected to the extent that they are known or can be determined

19 LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

191 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for IN-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSDoctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientStaff Nurse Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Proceed to the requesting Ward and collect

blood for the ordered examination Take specimen to the laboratoryExamine specimen Sign the resultRecord the result on its respective logbookRecord the result in PhilHealth logbookEndorse the result to the ward

Nurse On Duty Receive the result Refer the result to the Doctor on Duty

192 Specimens Received for Examination

Forms Needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatientPresent specimen with laboratory request signed by the Physician

Medical Technologist Receive specimen and laboratory requestExamine the specimen

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 20

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Sign the resultRecord the result to the respective logbook Endorse the Result to the Nurse on Duty for In- Patients and Release result to patients in OPD

193 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for OUT-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatient Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Receive the request and collect blood for the

ordered examination Examine specimen Sign the result Record the result on its respective logbook Record the result in OPD logbook Release the result

Patient Take the result to the Physician in OPD

194 Monthly Laboratory Report Census

Form Needed Monthly Report Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSMedical Technologist Record all daily results in the

logbookPrepare Monthly report based on the daily report of examinationsSign the reportGive the report to the OIC of the Laboratory for approval

OIC Laboratory Sign and approve the reportMedical Technologist Release the report

2 Laboratory Uniform

Laboratory uniform is a must on all working days except holidays but must be in laboratory gown when with patients

3 Request Slips

In-patient request slips must be completely filled -up by the nurse medical clerk

Out-patient request slips must be duly signed by the Medical Doctor on Duty assigned in OPD

Only requests from the CLSH Hospital will be honored by the laboratory

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 21

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Examination Performed

A Hematology

1 CBC (Complete Blood Count)2 Platelet Count3 Hemoglobin Test4 Clotting Time5 Bleeding Time

B Clinical Microscopy

1 Urinalysis2 Fecalysis

C Blood Banking and Serology

1 Blood Typing2 Hepatitis B Determination (Qualitative)3 Syphilis (Qualitative)

D Bacteriology

1 Acid fast Staining

E Blood Chemistry

1 Cholesterol2 Triglyceride3 Fasting Blood Sugar4 Blood Uric Acid5 Blood Urea Nitrogen6 Serum Creatinine

5 Reasons for ordering laboratory measurements examinations

a To confirm a clinical impression or establish a diagnosisb To rule out a diagnosisc To monitor therapy (management guide)d To establish prognosise To screen for or detect disease

SPECIMEN COLLECTION

2 General Procedure for Obtaining Blood

1 Skin Puncture2 Venous Puncture

Technique for Venous Puncture

1 Identify the patient2 If fasting is required confirm that fasting order has been followed3 Inform the patient of the procedure to be done

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 22

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Prepare the patient and all equipment needed5 Select a suitable vein for venipuncture Veins of the antecubital fossa in

particular the median cubital and cephalic veins are preferred Wrist ankle and hand veins may also be used If one arm has an intravenous line use the other arm to draw a blood specimen

6 Cleanse the venipuncture site with 70 isopropyl alcohol Allow the arm to dry Do not touch the swabbed area with any unsterile object

7 Apply a tourniquet several inches above the puncture site Never leave the tourniquet in place longer than one minute

8 Anchor the vein firmly both above and below the puncture site Use either the thumb and middle finger or thumb and index finger

9 Perform the venipuncture10Release the tourniquet when blood begins to flow11After all blood has been drawn have the patient relax his or her fist Do

not allow the patient to pump the hand12Place a clean sterile cotton ball lightly over the side Withdraw the needle

then apply pressure to the site13Mix tubes with anticoagulant For syringe-drawn specimens transfer blood

to appropriate tubes taking precautions to avoid hemolyzing the specimens Follow any special handling procedures

14Check condition of the patient whether patient is faint and that bleeding is under control

15Dispose of contaminated material such as needles syringes cotton etc16Deliver tubes of blood for testing to appropriate departments

An additional protocol is important in the venipuncture procedure Follow the recommended ldquoorder of drawrdquo when collecting tubes To avoid contamination draw specimens into non-additive tubes before tubes with additives

17Let the blood sample retract completely before centrifuging Separate serum from clotted blood Make sure proper labeling is observed and practiced

HEMATOLOGY

Preparation and staining of Blood Smears for Diffferential Count

Principle

The examination of the peripheral blood smear is the most important examination one can do in hematological evaluation of a patient

Materials Needed

1 Pricker or lancet2 Microscope slides3 Spreader4 Pencil5 Cotton soaked in alcohol6 Dry cotton

Procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 23

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 Puncture the skin as desired and wipe away the first drop of blood2 Touch the surface of the clean slide to a small drop of blood the drop

should be placed near one end of the slide3 Turn the slide over such that the drop of blood is now on the top side and

the other end of the slide away from the drop of the blood is held by the thumb and forefinger of the left hand The other finger serves to support the slide

4 Pick up another slide and loosely between thumb and forefinger of the right hand

5 The slide in the right hand is called the spreader slide Place the spreader in front of the drop and pull back until it touches the drop

6 As soon as the blood spreads by capillary attraction almost to the edge of the slide push the spreader forwards at an angle of approximately 30-45 degrees using a rapid even motion

Note

The weight of the slide is the only pressure applied the thickness of the spread is controlled by the size of the drop the angle at which the spreader slide is held and the speed of spreading The greater the angle the thicker and shorter is the film

7 Dry the slide in air when dried write the name of the patient and date in the thick end of the blood film using a pencil or at the other side of the slide

Staining for Differential Count

Reagents

Rapid Romanowsky staining using ldquorapi-diffrdquo

Solution A Fixing solution MethanolSolution B Acid dye EosinSolution C Basic dye Methylene blueSolution D Buffer pH 68 phosphate buffer

Procedure

1 Prepare a blood smear and air dry

2 Fix by immersing in Solution A for 30 seconds

3 Transfer without rinsing or drying to Solution B and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

4 Without rinsing transfer the slide to Solution C and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

5 Rinse briefly in buffered water pH 68 and allow to dry

Results Macroscopically

Smear in pinkish violet

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 24

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Normal Values

Neutrophils 40-60

Lymphocytes 20-40

Monocyte 4-8

Eosinophil 1-3

Basophil 0-1

Stab 0-1

Peripheral Blood Smear

Procedure in reading peripheral blood smear

1 Examine the blood smear grossly against the light and note the contour and background color

2 Examine under the low power in order to ascertain the adequacy of the staining and select the best fields for study

3 Note agglutination or rouleaux formation of erythrocytes

4 Examine the slides systematically starting at the thin end In this way reduplication of the field is avoided Fields should be avoided in which the red cells are stacked up or are in rouleaux and fields should be examined in which the red cells are well separated and the white cells thinly spread

5 Examine the erythrocytes and note variations in size shape color hemoglobin content abnormal objects in cytoplasm and number of nucleated red cells per 100 leukocytes

6 Examine the WBC and study the morphology

CLINICAL MICROSCOPY

Routine Urinalysis

I Organization of Work

Steps Multistix Test

1 Agitate the urine container Examine the urine with regards to color and transparency

2 Fill the centrifuge tube with the urine

3 Dip a multistix strip into the tube and determine the following by comparing with test chart after specific reading time

a Specific Gravity - 45 ndash 60 seconds

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 25

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

b Ph - time not criticalc Protein - read immediatelyd Glucose - 10 ndash 30 seconds

II Microscopic Examination

Procedure

1 Mix the urine well first and obtain a few cc into a test tube2 Centrifuge urine for five minutes3 Decant the supernatant liquid in a quick motion so that the

sediments are left at the bottom of the test tube4 Place in a clean slide5 Examine under the microscope (regulate lighting by adjusting the

substage diaphragm)6 Focus first at low power then shift to the high power objective

Report as follows

1 RBC and WBC ndash average cells hpf2 Casts ndash average casts per hpf3 Epithelial Cells lpf or accasional few moderate abundant4 Crystals lpf are rare few moderate abundant

Fecalysis

I Macroscopic or Physical Examination

1 Form Consistency and Size

2 Color

II Direct fecal Smear

Procedure

1 Place a drop of saline on the slide2 Using an applicator stick take a small portion of the stool

Formed ndash take the portion from well inside the sampleMucus or watery ndash take the portion from the bloodstained mucus on the surface or from the surface of the liquid

3 mix the sample with the drop of saline on the slide4 Examine the specimen under LPO then shift to HPO5 Report as follows

Normal No Parasite seenMucous Normal - a very small amount

Blood - no blood present

BACTERIOLOGY

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 26

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

SPUTUM EXAMINATION

Acid Fast Bacilli

Signs and symptoms of Asymptomatic Patient

1 Cough for 2 weeks duration or more2 Chest and upper back pains for one month duration or more3 Hemoptysis or blood streaking4 On and off afternoon fever for one month duration or more5 Regressive loss of weight

Collection of specimen

1 Identify the patient through signs and symptoms2 Instruct the patient properly3 Collect the first sputum in the morning4 The patient should be standing if possible5 He should take a very deep breath filling his lungs6 He should empty his lungs in one breath coughing as hard and deeply as

he can7 He should spit what he brings up into the jar or sputum cup8 Label the jar or sputum cup with his name and date

After Collection

Check that sufficient amount of sputum has been produced

The sputum of an infected person usually containsa thick mucus air bubblesb threads of fibrinc patches of pusd occasional brownish streaks of blood

Preparation of Sputum Smears

Materials glass slides (new if possible unscratched) inoculating loop or coconut midribs cotton wool plug on metal wire for flaming alarm clock (timer)

Procedure

1 Prepare two slides Take a purulent potion of the sputum one scrath slide using either one sterile inoculating loop or two to form tongs

2 Make the smear as thin as possible covering as large an area as possible tracing concentric circles well separated but not reaching the edges of the slide

Preparation for fixing Sputum Smear

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 27

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Materials sputum smears alcohol lamp match

Procedure of fixing

1 Dry smears in the air2 Fix the smears by passing the slides three times through the flame3 Let it cool before staining

Preparation in Staining using Ziehl-Neelsen (Hot Method)

Principle The tubercule bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis is acid-fast and stains res with Ziehl-Neelsen stain while almost all other organisms stain blue

Materials alcohol lamp match forceps sputum smears cotton wool soaked in 70 ethanol Ziehl-Neelsen reagents denatured alcohol (for burning)

Reagents1 carbol fuchsin2 acid water or acid alcohol3 aqueous methylene blue

Procedure in staining

1 Cover the slides with filtered carbol fuchsin2 Dip the cotton wool swab in the methylated spirit ignite and pass slowly

under the slides to heat them3 As soon as steam begins to rise set the timer at five minutes4 Continue to heat so that the steam is seen but without boiling for five

minutes add more fuchsin immediately to avoid drying5 Wash with tap water or distilled water6 Decolorize with acid water or acid alcohol for one minute7 Wash with tap water8 Counterstain with aqueous methylene blue for thirty seconds or one

minute9 Wash with tap water for one minute10Drain and leave to dry on a slide rack

Examine under Oil Immersion Field

Results

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 28

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 12: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

14 POLICIES ON DISCHARGING A PATIENT

141 Military Patients

141a Return to Duty

a Attending physician writes the discharge orderb Patientrsquos chart should be reviewed for completeness

particularly the Cover Sheet which should be signed by the Medical Officer

c Upon receipt of order for discharge Disposition Slip (Cover Sheet) is prepared and forwarded to A amp D Section for issuance of Special Order

d Discharged patients will report to their respective unit first hour of their Expected Date of Return to Duty (EDRD) No discharge will be made on the date of disposition Patients may go on pass before EDRD depending on the Ward Officerrsquos discretion or they may also stay in the hospital until their EDRD

e Prior to discharge patients are given Clearance Form to be completed

f The duty nurse writes and gives discharge instructions to the patient and significant others as well as the date of follow-up check up

g PhilHealth Form shall be properly accomplished by the patient attached with MDR Form and military ID

h Retro-evac patients when recovered these patients will be discharged accordingly following routine disposition of all patients

i The duty nurse checks all equipment items issued to patient are returned

j Discard all medicine card tags except for roster card Indicate EDRD and final diagnosis on the roster card and retained it until EDRD is due

k Locate patientrsquos name on the A amp D book and write the final diagnosis and EDRD opposite their names

l Log patientrsquos name in the discharge checklist and send to A amp D Section together with the chart which is arranged properly and have it properly received by the A amp D personnel

m Drop patient from census on the date of discharge n Document discharge time date condition of patient and

manner of leaving Nursing Unit

141b Discharge by Evacuationa Bring the chart with order final diagnosis and completed cover

sheet to the A amp D Section so that three copies of evacuation papers can be accomplished and evacuation flights can be coordinated

b Evacuation paper Letter Order Narrative Summary and pertinent diagnostic results (together with x-ray plates ECG Tracing etc) are given to the patient and checked by the NOD

c Patients are prohibited to carry firearms during the travel Firearms or deadly weapons of patients for evacuation shall remain in deposit with CLSH storeroom for safekeeping

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 12

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

d Indicate final diagnosis date of evacuation and place to be evacuated opposite the patientrsquos name in the A and D book and drop from census

e Return borrowed items in the CSR

141c Transfer of Hospital (within Cebu) a When the patient needs extensive medicalsurgical

management beyond the capability of the hospital Ward Officer is responsible for completion of all data necessary for transfer to include preparation of Narrative Summary

b Ward master ward man on duty will forward Disposition Form to A amp D Section

c Narrative summary will go with the patient chart should remain in the hospital for future use filing and safekeeping

141d Discharge by Deatha When death occurs on the ward the nurse on duty shall

immediately notify the A amp D Section personnel on duty who should prepare the death certificate The last attending Medical Officer completes the diagnosis and other clinical requirements

b Post mortem care should be done before sending the cadaver to the morgue

c All belongings of the deceased shall be properly accounted for and turned over to the relatives properly receipted

d A death certificate shall be given to the immediate relatives who will accompany the cadaver to the funeral parlor

e Log patientrsquos final diagnosis datetime of death in the A and D book and census

142 Dependents1421Discharge procedure is the same as that of the military except that

they can be discharged on the day of disposition once clearance is obtained

1422For the patientrsquos who are discharged against medical advice the patient of legal age or his her parent and or relative are made to sign a certificate to the effect that the hospital shall not be responsible for anything that would happen to the patient after he leaves the hospital after the doctorrsquos order which is also signed by two (2) witnesses

143 Civilian 1431Civilian employees retired military personnel dependents of retired

military personnel pure civilian have the same discharge procedure as dependents

1432Nurse on Duty should prepare billing prior to discharge 1433Billing of Civilian patients will be done by the Finance Sergeant1434Obligations such as hospital charges shall be settled at the

Admission and Disposition (A amp D) Section before discharge 1435Civilian employee with Phil health form must accomplish the form

in order to obtain clearance from the A amp D Section Medicines medical supplies diagnostic examinations and days of hospitalization should be listed and forwarded to the A amp D Section with the patientrsquos chart

1436Dependents of retired military personnel - same as above1437Retired Military Personnel (RMP) - only mess is charge1438Pure civilian - same as the civilian employees

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 13

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1439Patient presents a duly accomplished clearance prior to the release of discharge order and receipt of payment to the nurse on duty

15 EMERGENCY ROOM POLICIES AND GUIDELINES

1 only emergency cases are entertained in the ER General consultations are referred to the OPD After office hours and on SaturdaySunday and Holiday consultations may be entertained upon the discretion of the OPD

2 patients must be referred to the MOD

3 NOD should obtain the patientrsquos chief complaint weight vital signs get gestational data (LMP ED BP FH FHT if the patient is an OBGYNE case) and other admitting notes

4 inform patient of the existing hospital policies and guidelines upon admission (visiting schedule rights responsibilities policies and regulations

5 provide watcherrsquos id and provide the admin on duty with the list of admitted patients

6 NOD must facilitate requisition of hospital number

7 MOD attends to the patients The nurse on duty assists the MOD in performing assessments

8 for admitted patients MOD writes order for the medical treatment and the ER nurse on duty immediately executes them

9 a signed consent must be obtained from the patients In case of minor or handicapped patients guardians must fill up the consent for them

10NOD should facilitate laboratory works

11 IVF insertion is done either by the PGI on dutyMOD or NOD

12NOD starts giving the medications available Drugs that require skin testing must be performed at the ER and this should be confirmed by the physician and recorded in the patientrsquos chart

13MODNOD gives initial health teachings to the client or significant others as needed

14NOD regulates the IVF of patients before transporting to the ward

15 if patient refuses admission she must inform the MOD and sign a waiver denouncing the hospital from any liabilities A thorough explanation by the MOD shall be afforded to the patient upon signing of the waiver

16 illiterate patientscompanion must be asked to have their thumb marks on the record

17all stocks medicines used by the patient must be replaced as soon as possible on or before the patient leaves the ER This will be done by the duty ER NCO

18only emergency cases are provided with ER stocks NOD gets the prescription and have these items replaced by the pharmacy andor CSR

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 14

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

19ER NOD duty ER NCO will be held accountable for whatever lossesdeficiencies that may occur during hisher shift

20 inventory of all ER items is done every after shift by the NOD

21ER NCOIC must submit a monthly inventory report to the pharmacy and supply section for auditing purposes

22consultations are not entertained in the ER during office hours They are referred to the OPD

23communicableInfectious conditions which require isolation and cases other than OB-GYNEPedia are not accepted for admission but referred to other agencies after MOD has evaluated the patient The MOD should call and should be the one to make the call to the hospital where the patient is to be transferred to

24wounds of more than 24-hour duration are not entertained in te ER but in the OPD except on holidays Saturdays and Sundays

25 for invasive procedures a consent signed by the patient (if adult) companion andor guardian should be obtained before treatment or care is instituted

26should patient refuse she cannot be submitted to a particular treatment This should be properly documented on the patientrsquos record and have the patient sign a waiver for the refusal

27 for emergency cases where a patientrsquos life is in danger no consent is necessary However proper notation shall be made on the patientrsquos record by the physician and must be affirmed by a witness

28media is not allowed within the ER premises to avoid distortion in the management of patients

29dean on arrival (DOA) clients in ER cases are classified in the following categories

DOA Criteria0 vital signs ndash CPR done rarr failedNo death certificate shall be issuedER death ndash 0 vital signs rarr CPRrarr reviverarr died within 26 hoursHospital issue death certificateDOA and ER deaths should be marked on the patientrsquos record in bold

letters using ball pen

30all procedures performed in the ER shall be subjected to official charging which will be forwarded to the different branch of services where the patient belongs Only CENTCOM organic military personnel will be carried free of charge

15 POLICIES ON DO NOT RESUSCITATE (DNR)

151 Definition of Terms151a Resuscitation is a medical procedure which seeks to

restore cardiac andor respiratory function to individuals who have sustained a cardiac andor respiratory arrest

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 15

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

151b Do Not Resuscitate (DNR) is a medical order to provide no resuscitation to individuals for

whom resuscitation is not warranted151c Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) is the

common term used to refer to resuscitation However the options available to treat very sick patients are broader than CPR as literally defined Other options include intensive care antibiotic therapy hydration and nutritional support Appropriate comfort care measures should be employed for all patients especially terminally ill patients

152 DNR Protocol

1521WILL suction the airway administer oxygen position for comfort splint or immobilize control bleeding provide pain medication provide emotional support and contact other appropriate health care providers and

1521WILL NOT administer chest compressions insert an artificial airway administer resuscitative drugs defibrillate or

cardiovert provide respiratory assistance (other than suctioning the airway and administering oxygen) initiate resuscitative IV or initiate cardiac monitoring

153 Types of DNR Orders

1531a DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time the order

is given DNR Comfort Care orders permit comfort care only both before and during a cardiac or respiratory arrest Resuscitative therapies will not be

administered prior to an arrest This order is generally regarded as appropriate for patients who have a terminal illness short life expectancy little chance of surviving CPR and a desire to let nature take its course in the face of an impending arrest

1531b DNR Comfort Care-ArrestDNR Comfort Care-Arrest orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time of a cardiac or respiratory arrest A cardiac arrest occurs when there is an absence of a palpable pulse A respiratory arrest occurs when there are no spontaneous respirations or there is agonal breathing Resuscitative therapies will be administered before an arrest but not during an arrest The term DNR (without additional wording) when recorded in the medical chart shall be considered a DNR Comfort Care-Arrest order

1531c DNR Specified All other DNR orders are DNR Specified orders DNR Specified orders modify the DNR Protocol in some respect either in treatment modalities or in the timing of the protocol activation

1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 16

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart

1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order

DNR is a medical order to be given only by authorized health care practitioners DNR orders generally should be given with the informed consent of the patient or the patientrsquos surrogate decision-maker Ideally the physician should sensitively discuss the DNR option with the patient while the patient is mentally competent However DNR orders are often considered for patients who are comatose or who otherwise lack decisional capacity with whom this discussion has not occurred or cannot occur

In cases when a patient lacks decisional capacity the DNR option should be considered in conjunction with the patients advance directives if known or should be discussed with a surrogate A surrogate may be designated by a patient as the attorney-in-fact in a Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care A surrogate may also be identified as the first available person(s) from the following list in order

f Spouseg Son of or daughter of legal age h Either parent i Brother or sister of legal age or j Guardian

In all cases the primary physician should discuss the DNR option with the patient if possible and the surrogate(s) if appropriate There is no obligation to offer or initiate CPR if resuscitation would be futile ie if resuscitation would not achieve its physiological objective would offer no benefit to the patient and would violate reasonable medical standards

154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart

The words DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care-Arrest or DNR Specified should be recorded on the left-hand side of the medical chart (where advance directives are maintained) along with the date time rationale for the DNR order the names of the patient andor family members involved in the decision and a statement that the patient andor surrogate was fully informed about and consented to the DNR order If a DNR Specified order is recorded the modifications to the DNR Protocol should be specified in the medical chart as well as the desired timing of the activation of the modified Protocol

DNR decisions for inpatients should be transmitted clearly to those caring for the patients A DNR order should never result in the abandonment of a patient and steps should

155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders

The DNR order should be reassessed as part of the ongoing evaluation of an inpatient A DNR order should be affirmed modified or revoked only after a discussion between the primary physician and the patient if possible or the surrogate(s) if appropriate and the consent of the patient or surrogate DNR orders should be reassessed frequently and

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 17

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

as conditions warrant Reassessments of DNR orders should be documented in the medical chart If a DNR order is changed from one of the three types of DNR orders to a different type the patients DNR bracelet should be replaced with a new bracelet containing the revised designation If a DNR order is revoked the DNR bracelet should be removed and destroyed A physician or other health care worker who feels that he or she cannot honor a patients DNR request may not prevent or delay the transfer of the patient to a physician or facility which will honor the DNR status

156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care

The administration of anesthesia necessarily involves some practices and procedures that might be viewed as resuscitation in other settings Prior to any inpatient or outpatient invasive procedure for which the policy requires the documentation of informed consent any existing DNR order should when possible be reviewed with the patient or the patients surrogate As a result of this review the status of the DNR order during the perioperative period should be affirmed clarified or modified based on the preferences of the patient Any clarifications or modifications should be documented in the medical chart along with a notation indicating if or when the original DNR order should be reinstated Concurrence on these issues by the primary physician the surgeon and the anesthesiologist is desirable The DNR bracelet should not be removed during the perioperative period even if the DNR order has been temporarily modified

157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives

In the event of a conflict between one of the three types of DNR orders and an advance directive which has become effective because a person is unable to communicate and is terminally ill or permanently unconscious the instructions from the document (or person named as an Attorney-in-Fact) ranked higher in the following list shall prevail

a Living will of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

b Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care or an Attorney-in-Fact acting in accordance therewith of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

c DNR order d

16POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS DISCHARGE INSTRUCTION

161 The patient or his her legal guardian has the right to be informed by the physician or his her delegate ( nurse) of his her continuing health care requirements following discharge including instructions about

a Take home medicationsb Dietc Physical activityd Special instructions

- Signs to watch out for - When to bring the patient back to the physician- Instructions to follow in the event of untoward incidences

complications

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 18

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

e Follow-up Check-upf All other pertinent information to promote health and well-being

162 At the end patientrsquos confinement he she is entitled to a brief written summary of the course of his her illness which shall include at least the history physical examination diagnosis medications surgical procedure ancillary and laboratory procedures and the plan of further treatment and which shall be provided by the attending physician

17 POLICIES ON DISCLOSURE OF PATIENTrsquoS INFORMATION

171 The privacy of the patients must be assured at all stages of his her treatment Similarly the patient has the right to be free from unwarranted public exposure EXCEPT in the following cases

a When his her mental or physical condition is in controversy and the appropriate court in its discretion orders him her to submit to a physical or mental examination by a physician

b When the public health and safety so demandc When the patient waives his her rights

172 Any health care provider or practitioner involved in the treatment of the patient and all those who have legitimate access to the patientrsquos record is not authorized to divulge any information to a third party who has no concern with the care and welfare of the patient without his Her consent EXCEPT

a When such disclosure will benefit public health and safetyb When it is in the interest of justice and upon the order of a competent

courtc When patients waives in writing the confidential nature of such

information d When it is needed for continued medical treatment or advancement of

medical science subject to de-identification of patient and shared medical confidentiality for those who have access to the information

1721 Informing the spouse or the family to the first degree of the patientrsquos medical condition may be allowed Provided that the patient of legal age have the right to choose on whom to inform

1722 In case the patient is not of legal age or is mentally incapacitated such information shall be given to the parents legal guardian or his her next of kin

18 ETHICAL CONSIDERATIONS IN THE ADMINISTRATION OF BLOOD

181 The physician should obtain the patients informed consent before administering blood products This includes explaining to the patient the relative benefits and risks of receiving and not receiving the blood product as well as any reasonably viable alternatives

182 Generally in emergency situations where treatment is necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient and consent is not available (because the patient is unconscious or otherwise unable to consent) the physician may administer blood products (and any other treatment) necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient This does not apply if

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 19

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

the patient has expressly refused the treatment before becoming incompetent

183 A competent adult is entitled to refuse or cease any treatment for any reason

184 Parents ordinarily have the responsibility to provide consent on behalf of their young children however it is highly unlikely that parents can refuse life-saving treatment for their children Physicians may not simply override a parents refusal

185 Although it is legally clear that a mentally competent adult is entitled to refuse any medical treatment including a blood transfusion physicians have a responsibility to ensure that the refusal is truly informed and voluntary

186 In the case of adults who were once competent but have become temporarily or permanently incompetent substitute consent laws generally provide that their prior wishes regarding treatment decisions should be respected to the extent that they are known or can be determined

19 LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

191 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for IN-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSDoctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientStaff Nurse Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Proceed to the requesting Ward and collect

blood for the ordered examination Take specimen to the laboratoryExamine specimen Sign the resultRecord the result on its respective logbookRecord the result in PhilHealth logbookEndorse the result to the ward

Nurse On Duty Receive the result Refer the result to the Doctor on Duty

192 Specimens Received for Examination

Forms Needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatientPresent specimen with laboratory request signed by the Physician

Medical Technologist Receive specimen and laboratory requestExamine the specimen

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 20

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Sign the resultRecord the result to the respective logbook Endorse the Result to the Nurse on Duty for In- Patients and Release result to patients in OPD

193 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for OUT-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatient Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Receive the request and collect blood for the

ordered examination Examine specimen Sign the result Record the result on its respective logbook Record the result in OPD logbook Release the result

Patient Take the result to the Physician in OPD

194 Monthly Laboratory Report Census

Form Needed Monthly Report Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSMedical Technologist Record all daily results in the

logbookPrepare Monthly report based on the daily report of examinationsSign the reportGive the report to the OIC of the Laboratory for approval

OIC Laboratory Sign and approve the reportMedical Technologist Release the report

2 Laboratory Uniform

Laboratory uniform is a must on all working days except holidays but must be in laboratory gown when with patients

3 Request Slips

In-patient request slips must be completely filled -up by the nurse medical clerk

Out-patient request slips must be duly signed by the Medical Doctor on Duty assigned in OPD

Only requests from the CLSH Hospital will be honored by the laboratory

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 21

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Examination Performed

A Hematology

1 CBC (Complete Blood Count)2 Platelet Count3 Hemoglobin Test4 Clotting Time5 Bleeding Time

B Clinical Microscopy

1 Urinalysis2 Fecalysis

C Blood Banking and Serology

1 Blood Typing2 Hepatitis B Determination (Qualitative)3 Syphilis (Qualitative)

D Bacteriology

1 Acid fast Staining

E Blood Chemistry

1 Cholesterol2 Triglyceride3 Fasting Blood Sugar4 Blood Uric Acid5 Blood Urea Nitrogen6 Serum Creatinine

5 Reasons for ordering laboratory measurements examinations

a To confirm a clinical impression or establish a diagnosisb To rule out a diagnosisc To monitor therapy (management guide)d To establish prognosise To screen for or detect disease

SPECIMEN COLLECTION

2 General Procedure for Obtaining Blood

1 Skin Puncture2 Venous Puncture

Technique for Venous Puncture

1 Identify the patient2 If fasting is required confirm that fasting order has been followed3 Inform the patient of the procedure to be done

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 22

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Prepare the patient and all equipment needed5 Select a suitable vein for venipuncture Veins of the antecubital fossa in

particular the median cubital and cephalic veins are preferred Wrist ankle and hand veins may also be used If one arm has an intravenous line use the other arm to draw a blood specimen

6 Cleanse the venipuncture site with 70 isopropyl alcohol Allow the arm to dry Do not touch the swabbed area with any unsterile object

7 Apply a tourniquet several inches above the puncture site Never leave the tourniquet in place longer than one minute

8 Anchor the vein firmly both above and below the puncture site Use either the thumb and middle finger or thumb and index finger

9 Perform the venipuncture10Release the tourniquet when blood begins to flow11After all blood has been drawn have the patient relax his or her fist Do

not allow the patient to pump the hand12Place a clean sterile cotton ball lightly over the side Withdraw the needle

then apply pressure to the site13Mix tubes with anticoagulant For syringe-drawn specimens transfer blood

to appropriate tubes taking precautions to avoid hemolyzing the specimens Follow any special handling procedures

14Check condition of the patient whether patient is faint and that bleeding is under control

15Dispose of contaminated material such as needles syringes cotton etc16Deliver tubes of blood for testing to appropriate departments

An additional protocol is important in the venipuncture procedure Follow the recommended ldquoorder of drawrdquo when collecting tubes To avoid contamination draw specimens into non-additive tubes before tubes with additives

17Let the blood sample retract completely before centrifuging Separate serum from clotted blood Make sure proper labeling is observed and practiced

HEMATOLOGY

Preparation and staining of Blood Smears for Diffferential Count

Principle

The examination of the peripheral blood smear is the most important examination one can do in hematological evaluation of a patient

Materials Needed

1 Pricker or lancet2 Microscope slides3 Spreader4 Pencil5 Cotton soaked in alcohol6 Dry cotton

Procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 23

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 Puncture the skin as desired and wipe away the first drop of blood2 Touch the surface of the clean slide to a small drop of blood the drop

should be placed near one end of the slide3 Turn the slide over such that the drop of blood is now on the top side and

the other end of the slide away from the drop of the blood is held by the thumb and forefinger of the left hand The other finger serves to support the slide

4 Pick up another slide and loosely between thumb and forefinger of the right hand

5 The slide in the right hand is called the spreader slide Place the spreader in front of the drop and pull back until it touches the drop

6 As soon as the blood spreads by capillary attraction almost to the edge of the slide push the spreader forwards at an angle of approximately 30-45 degrees using a rapid even motion

Note

The weight of the slide is the only pressure applied the thickness of the spread is controlled by the size of the drop the angle at which the spreader slide is held and the speed of spreading The greater the angle the thicker and shorter is the film

7 Dry the slide in air when dried write the name of the patient and date in the thick end of the blood film using a pencil or at the other side of the slide

Staining for Differential Count

Reagents

Rapid Romanowsky staining using ldquorapi-diffrdquo

Solution A Fixing solution MethanolSolution B Acid dye EosinSolution C Basic dye Methylene blueSolution D Buffer pH 68 phosphate buffer

Procedure

1 Prepare a blood smear and air dry

2 Fix by immersing in Solution A for 30 seconds

3 Transfer without rinsing or drying to Solution B and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

4 Without rinsing transfer the slide to Solution C and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

5 Rinse briefly in buffered water pH 68 and allow to dry

Results Macroscopically

Smear in pinkish violet

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 24

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Normal Values

Neutrophils 40-60

Lymphocytes 20-40

Monocyte 4-8

Eosinophil 1-3

Basophil 0-1

Stab 0-1

Peripheral Blood Smear

Procedure in reading peripheral blood smear

1 Examine the blood smear grossly against the light and note the contour and background color

2 Examine under the low power in order to ascertain the adequacy of the staining and select the best fields for study

3 Note agglutination or rouleaux formation of erythrocytes

4 Examine the slides systematically starting at the thin end In this way reduplication of the field is avoided Fields should be avoided in which the red cells are stacked up or are in rouleaux and fields should be examined in which the red cells are well separated and the white cells thinly spread

5 Examine the erythrocytes and note variations in size shape color hemoglobin content abnormal objects in cytoplasm and number of nucleated red cells per 100 leukocytes

6 Examine the WBC and study the morphology

CLINICAL MICROSCOPY

Routine Urinalysis

I Organization of Work

Steps Multistix Test

1 Agitate the urine container Examine the urine with regards to color and transparency

2 Fill the centrifuge tube with the urine

3 Dip a multistix strip into the tube and determine the following by comparing with test chart after specific reading time

a Specific Gravity - 45 ndash 60 seconds

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 25

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

b Ph - time not criticalc Protein - read immediatelyd Glucose - 10 ndash 30 seconds

II Microscopic Examination

Procedure

1 Mix the urine well first and obtain a few cc into a test tube2 Centrifuge urine for five minutes3 Decant the supernatant liquid in a quick motion so that the

sediments are left at the bottom of the test tube4 Place in a clean slide5 Examine under the microscope (regulate lighting by adjusting the

substage diaphragm)6 Focus first at low power then shift to the high power objective

Report as follows

1 RBC and WBC ndash average cells hpf2 Casts ndash average casts per hpf3 Epithelial Cells lpf or accasional few moderate abundant4 Crystals lpf are rare few moderate abundant

Fecalysis

I Macroscopic or Physical Examination

1 Form Consistency and Size

2 Color

II Direct fecal Smear

Procedure

1 Place a drop of saline on the slide2 Using an applicator stick take a small portion of the stool

Formed ndash take the portion from well inside the sampleMucus or watery ndash take the portion from the bloodstained mucus on the surface or from the surface of the liquid

3 mix the sample with the drop of saline on the slide4 Examine the specimen under LPO then shift to HPO5 Report as follows

Normal No Parasite seenMucous Normal - a very small amount

Blood - no blood present

BACTERIOLOGY

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 26

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

SPUTUM EXAMINATION

Acid Fast Bacilli

Signs and symptoms of Asymptomatic Patient

1 Cough for 2 weeks duration or more2 Chest and upper back pains for one month duration or more3 Hemoptysis or blood streaking4 On and off afternoon fever for one month duration or more5 Regressive loss of weight

Collection of specimen

1 Identify the patient through signs and symptoms2 Instruct the patient properly3 Collect the first sputum in the morning4 The patient should be standing if possible5 He should take a very deep breath filling his lungs6 He should empty his lungs in one breath coughing as hard and deeply as

he can7 He should spit what he brings up into the jar or sputum cup8 Label the jar or sputum cup with his name and date

After Collection

Check that sufficient amount of sputum has been produced

The sputum of an infected person usually containsa thick mucus air bubblesb threads of fibrinc patches of pusd occasional brownish streaks of blood

Preparation of Sputum Smears

Materials glass slides (new if possible unscratched) inoculating loop or coconut midribs cotton wool plug on metal wire for flaming alarm clock (timer)

Procedure

1 Prepare two slides Take a purulent potion of the sputum one scrath slide using either one sterile inoculating loop or two to form tongs

2 Make the smear as thin as possible covering as large an area as possible tracing concentric circles well separated but not reaching the edges of the slide

Preparation for fixing Sputum Smear

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 27

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Materials sputum smears alcohol lamp match

Procedure of fixing

1 Dry smears in the air2 Fix the smears by passing the slides three times through the flame3 Let it cool before staining

Preparation in Staining using Ziehl-Neelsen (Hot Method)

Principle The tubercule bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis is acid-fast and stains res with Ziehl-Neelsen stain while almost all other organisms stain blue

Materials alcohol lamp match forceps sputum smears cotton wool soaked in 70 ethanol Ziehl-Neelsen reagents denatured alcohol (for burning)

Reagents1 carbol fuchsin2 acid water or acid alcohol3 aqueous methylene blue

Procedure in staining

1 Cover the slides with filtered carbol fuchsin2 Dip the cotton wool swab in the methylated spirit ignite and pass slowly

under the slides to heat them3 As soon as steam begins to rise set the timer at five minutes4 Continue to heat so that the steam is seen but without boiling for five

minutes add more fuchsin immediately to avoid drying5 Wash with tap water or distilled water6 Decolorize with acid water or acid alcohol for one minute7 Wash with tap water8 Counterstain with aqueous methylene blue for thirty seconds or one

minute9 Wash with tap water for one minute10Drain and leave to dry on a slide rack

Examine under Oil Immersion Field

Results

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 28

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 13: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

d Indicate final diagnosis date of evacuation and place to be evacuated opposite the patientrsquos name in the A and D book and drop from census

e Return borrowed items in the CSR

141c Transfer of Hospital (within Cebu) a When the patient needs extensive medicalsurgical

management beyond the capability of the hospital Ward Officer is responsible for completion of all data necessary for transfer to include preparation of Narrative Summary

b Ward master ward man on duty will forward Disposition Form to A amp D Section

c Narrative summary will go with the patient chart should remain in the hospital for future use filing and safekeeping

141d Discharge by Deatha When death occurs on the ward the nurse on duty shall

immediately notify the A amp D Section personnel on duty who should prepare the death certificate The last attending Medical Officer completes the diagnosis and other clinical requirements

b Post mortem care should be done before sending the cadaver to the morgue

c All belongings of the deceased shall be properly accounted for and turned over to the relatives properly receipted

d A death certificate shall be given to the immediate relatives who will accompany the cadaver to the funeral parlor

e Log patientrsquos final diagnosis datetime of death in the A and D book and census

142 Dependents1421Discharge procedure is the same as that of the military except that

they can be discharged on the day of disposition once clearance is obtained

1422For the patientrsquos who are discharged against medical advice the patient of legal age or his her parent and or relative are made to sign a certificate to the effect that the hospital shall not be responsible for anything that would happen to the patient after he leaves the hospital after the doctorrsquos order which is also signed by two (2) witnesses

143 Civilian 1431Civilian employees retired military personnel dependents of retired

military personnel pure civilian have the same discharge procedure as dependents

1432Nurse on Duty should prepare billing prior to discharge 1433Billing of Civilian patients will be done by the Finance Sergeant1434Obligations such as hospital charges shall be settled at the

Admission and Disposition (A amp D) Section before discharge 1435Civilian employee with Phil health form must accomplish the form

in order to obtain clearance from the A amp D Section Medicines medical supplies diagnostic examinations and days of hospitalization should be listed and forwarded to the A amp D Section with the patientrsquos chart

1436Dependents of retired military personnel - same as above1437Retired Military Personnel (RMP) - only mess is charge1438Pure civilian - same as the civilian employees

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 13

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1439Patient presents a duly accomplished clearance prior to the release of discharge order and receipt of payment to the nurse on duty

15 EMERGENCY ROOM POLICIES AND GUIDELINES

1 only emergency cases are entertained in the ER General consultations are referred to the OPD After office hours and on SaturdaySunday and Holiday consultations may be entertained upon the discretion of the OPD

2 patients must be referred to the MOD

3 NOD should obtain the patientrsquos chief complaint weight vital signs get gestational data (LMP ED BP FH FHT if the patient is an OBGYNE case) and other admitting notes

4 inform patient of the existing hospital policies and guidelines upon admission (visiting schedule rights responsibilities policies and regulations

5 provide watcherrsquos id and provide the admin on duty with the list of admitted patients

6 NOD must facilitate requisition of hospital number

7 MOD attends to the patients The nurse on duty assists the MOD in performing assessments

8 for admitted patients MOD writes order for the medical treatment and the ER nurse on duty immediately executes them

9 a signed consent must be obtained from the patients In case of minor or handicapped patients guardians must fill up the consent for them

10NOD should facilitate laboratory works

11 IVF insertion is done either by the PGI on dutyMOD or NOD

12NOD starts giving the medications available Drugs that require skin testing must be performed at the ER and this should be confirmed by the physician and recorded in the patientrsquos chart

13MODNOD gives initial health teachings to the client or significant others as needed

14NOD regulates the IVF of patients before transporting to the ward

15 if patient refuses admission she must inform the MOD and sign a waiver denouncing the hospital from any liabilities A thorough explanation by the MOD shall be afforded to the patient upon signing of the waiver

16 illiterate patientscompanion must be asked to have their thumb marks on the record

17all stocks medicines used by the patient must be replaced as soon as possible on or before the patient leaves the ER This will be done by the duty ER NCO

18only emergency cases are provided with ER stocks NOD gets the prescription and have these items replaced by the pharmacy andor CSR

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 14

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

19ER NOD duty ER NCO will be held accountable for whatever lossesdeficiencies that may occur during hisher shift

20 inventory of all ER items is done every after shift by the NOD

21ER NCOIC must submit a monthly inventory report to the pharmacy and supply section for auditing purposes

22consultations are not entertained in the ER during office hours They are referred to the OPD

23communicableInfectious conditions which require isolation and cases other than OB-GYNEPedia are not accepted for admission but referred to other agencies after MOD has evaluated the patient The MOD should call and should be the one to make the call to the hospital where the patient is to be transferred to

24wounds of more than 24-hour duration are not entertained in te ER but in the OPD except on holidays Saturdays and Sundays

25 for invasive procedures a consent signed by the patient (if adult) companion andor guardian should be obtained before treatment or care is instituted

26should patient refuse she cannot be submitted to a particular treatment This should be properly documented on the patientrsquos record and have the patient sign a waiver for the refusal

27 for emergency cases where a patientrsquos life is in danger no consent is necessary However proper notation shall be made on the patientrsquos record by the physician and must be affirmed by a witness

28media is not allowed within the ER premises to avoid distortion in the management of patients

29dean on arrival (DOA) clients in ER cases are classified in the following categories

DOA Criteria0 vital signs ndash CPR done rarr failedNo death certificate shall be issuedER death ndash 0 vital signs rarr CPRrarr reviverarr died within 26 hoursHospital issue death certificateDOA and ER deaths should be marked on the patientrsquos record in bold

letters using ball pen

30all procedures performed in the ER shall be subjected to official charging which will be forwarded to the different branch of services where the patient belongs Only CENTCOM organic military personnel will be carried free of charge

15 POLICIES ON DO NOT RESUSCITATE (DNR)

151 Definition of Terms151a Resuscitation is a medical procedure which seeks to

restore cardiac andor respiratory function to individuals who have sustained a cardiac andor respiratory arrest

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 15

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

151b Do Not Resuscitate (DNR) is a medical order to provide no resuscitation to individuals for

whom resuscitation is not warranted151c Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) is the

common term used to refer to resuscitation However the options available to treat very sick patients are broader than CPR as literally defined Other options include intensive care antibiotic therapy hydration and nutritional support Appropriate comfort care measures should be employed for all patients especially terminally ill patients

152 DNR Protocol

1521WILL suction the airway administer oxygen position for comfort splint or immobilize control bleeding provide pain medication provide emotional support and contact other appropriate health care providers and

1521WILL NOT administer chest compressions insert an artificial airway administer resuscitative drugs defibrillate or

cardiovert provide respiratory assistance (other than suctioning the airway and administering oxygen) initiate resuscitative IV or initiate cardiac monitoring

153 Types of DNR Orders

1531a DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time the order

is given DNR Comfort Care orders permit comfort care only both before and during a cardiac or respiratory arrest Resuscitative therapies will not be

administered prior to an arrest This order is generally regarded as appropriate for patients who have a terminal illness short life expectancy little chance of surviving CPR and a desire to let nature take its course in the face of an impending arrest

1531b DNR Comfort Care-ArrestDNR Comfort Care-Arrest orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time of a cardiac or respiratory arrest A cardiac arrest occurs when there is an absence of a palpable pulse A respiratory arrest occurs when there are no spontaneous respirations or there is agonal breathing Resuscitative therapies will be administered before an arrest but not during an arrest The term DNR (without additional wording) when recorded in the medical chart shall be considered a DNR Comfort Care-Arrest order

1531c DNR Specified All other DNR orders are DNR Specified orders DNR Specified orders modify the DNR Protocol in some respect either in treatment modalities or in the timing of the protocol activation

1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 16

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart

1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order

DNR is a medical order to be given only by authorized health care practitioners DNR orders generally should be given with the informed consent of the patient or the patientrsquos surrogate decision-maker Ideally the physician should sensitively discuss the DNR option with the patient while the patient is mentally competent However DNR orders are often considered for patients who are comatose or who otherwise lack decisional capacity with whom this discussion has not occurred or cannot occur

In cases when a patient lacks decisional capacity the DNR option should be considered in conjunction with the patients advance directives if known or should be discussed with a surrogate A surrogate may be designated by a patient as the attorney-in-fact in a Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care A surrogate may also be identified as the first available person(s) from the following list in order

f Spouseg Son of or daughter of legal age h Either parent i Brother or sister of legal age or j Guardian

In all cases the primary physician should discuss the DNR option with the patient if possible and the surrogate(s) if appropriate There is no obligation to offer or initiate CPR if resuscitation would be futile ie if resuscitation would not achieve its physiological objective would offer no benefit to the patient and would violate reasonable medical standards

154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart

The words DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care-Arrest or DNR Specified should be recorded on the left-hand side of the medical chart (where advance directives are maintained) along with the date time rationale for the DNR order the names of the patient andor family members involved in the decision and a statement that the patient andor surrogate was fully informed about and consented to the DNR order If a DNR Specified order is recorded the modifications to the DNR Protocol should be specified in the medical chart as well as the desired timing of the activation of the modified Protocol

DNR decisions for inpatients should be transmitted clearly to those caring for the patients A DNR order should never result in the abandonment of a patient and steps should

155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders

The DNR order should be reassessed as part of the ongoing evaluation of an inpatient A DNR order should be affirmed modified or revoked only after a discussion between the primary physician and the patient if possible or the surrogate(s) if appropriate and the consent of the patient or surrogate DNR orders should be reassessed frequently and

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 17

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

as conditions warrant Reassessments of DNR orders should be documented in the medical chart If a DNR order is changed from one of the three types of DNR orders to a different type the patients DNR bracelet should be replaced with a new bracelet containing the revised designation If a DNR order is revoked the DNR bracelet should be removed and destroyed A physician or other health care worker who feels that he or she cannot honor a patients DNR request may not prevent or delay the transfer of the patient to a physician or facility which will honor the DNR status

156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care

The administration of anesthesia necessarily involves some practices and procedures that might be viewed as resuscitation in other settings Prior to any inpatient or outpatient invasive procedure for which the policy requires the documentation of informed consent any existing DNR order should when possible be reviewed with the patient or the patients surrogate As a result of this review the status of the DNR order during the perioperative period should be affirmed clarified or modified based on the preferences of the patient Any clarifications or modifications should be documented in the medical chart along with a notation indicating if or when the original DNR order should be reinstated Concurrence on these issues by the primary physician the surgeon and the anesthesiologist is desirable The DNR bracelet should not be removed during the perioperative period even if the DNR order has been temporarily modified

157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives

In the event of a conflict between one of the three types of DNR orders and an advance directive which has become effective because a person is unable to communicate and is terminally ill or permanently unconscious the instructions from the document (or person named as an Attorney-in-Fact) ranked higher in the following list shall prevail

a Living will of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

b Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care or an Attorney-in-Fact acting in accordance therewith of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

c DNR order d

16POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS DISCHARGE INSTRUCTION

161 The patient or his her legal guardian has the right to be informed by the physician or his her delegate ( nurse) of his her continuing health care requirements following discharge including instructions about

a Take home medicationsb Dietc Physical activityd Special instructions

- Signs to watch out for - When to bring the patient back to the physician- Instructions to follow in the event of untoward incidences

complications

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 18

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

e Follow-up Check-upf All other pertinent information to promote health and well-being

162 At the end patientrsquos confinement he she is entitled to a brief written summary of the course of his her illness which shall include at least the history physical examination diagnosis medications surgical procedure ancillary and laboratory procedures and the plan of further treatment and which shall be provided by the attending physician

17 POLICIES ON DISCLOSURE OF PATIENTrsquoS INFORMATION

171 The privacy of the patients must be assured at all stages of his her treatment Similarly the patient has the right to be free from unwarranted public exposure EXCEPT in the following cases

a When his her mental or physical condition is in controversy and the appropriate court in its discretion orders him her to submit to a physical or mental examination by a physician

b When the public health and safety so demandc When the patient waives his her rights

172 Any health care provider or practitioner involved in the treatment of the patient and all those who have legitimate access to the patientrsquos record is not authorized to divulge any information to a third party who has no concern with the care and welfare of the patient without his Her consent EXCEPT

a When such disclosure will benefit public health and safetyb When it is in the interest of justice and upon the order of a competent

courtc When patients waives in writing the confidential nature of such

information d When it is needed for continued medical treatment or advancement of

medical science subject to de-identification of patient and shared medical confidentiality for those who have access to the information

1721 Informing the spouse or the family to the first degree of the patientrsquos medical condition may be allowed Provided that the patient of legal age have the right to choose on whom to inform

1722 In case the patient is not of legal age or is mentally incapacitated such information shall be given to the parents legal guardian or his her next of kin

18 ETHICAL CONSIDERATIONS IN THE ADMINISTRATION OF BLOOD

181 The physician should obtain the patients informed consent before administering blood products This includes explaining to the patient the relative benefits and risks of receiving and not receiving the blood product as well as any reasonably viable alternatives

182 Generally in emergency situations where treatment is necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient and consent is not available (because the patient is unconscious or otherwise unable to consent) the physician may administer blood products (and any other treatment) necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient This does not apply if

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 19

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

the patient has expressly refused the treatment before becoming incompetent

183 A competent adult is entitled to refuse or cease any treatment for any reason

184 Parents ordinarily have the responsibility to provide consent on behalf of their young children however it is highly unlikely that parents can refuse life-saving treatment for their children Physicians may not simply override a parents refusal

185 Although it is legally clear that a mentally competent adult is entitled to refuse any medical treatment including a blood transfusion physicians have a responsibility to ensure that the refusal is truly informed and voluntary

186 In the case of adults who were once competent but have become temporarily or permanently incompetent substitute consent laws generally provide that their prior wishes regarding treatment decisions should be respected to the extent that they are known or can be determined

19 LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

191 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for IN-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSDoctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientStaff Nurse Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Proceed to the requesting Ward and collect

blood for the ordered examination Take specimen to the laboratoryExamine specimen Sign the resultRecord the result on its respective logbookRecord the result in PhilHealth logbookEndorse the result to the ward

Nurse On Duty Receive the result Refer the result to the Doctor on Duty

192 Specimens Received for Examination

Forms Needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatientPresent specimen with laboratory request signed by the Physician

Medical Technologist Receive specimen and laboratory requestExamine the specimen

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 20

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Sign the resultRecord the result to the respective logbook Endorse the Result to the Nurse on Duty for In- Patients and Release result to patients in OPD

193 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for OUT-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatient Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Receive the request and collect blood for the

ordered examination Examine specimen Sign the result Record the result on its respective logbook Record the result in OPD logbook Release the result

Patient Take the result to the Physician in OPD

194 Monthly Laboratory Report Census

Form Needed Monthly Report Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSMedical Technologist Record all daily results in the

logbookPrepare Monthly report based on the daily report of examinationsSign the reportGive the report to the OIC of the Laboratory for approval

OIC Laboratory Sign and approve the reportMedical Technologist Release the report

2 Laboratory Uniform

Laboratory uniform is a must on all working days except holidays but must be in laboratory gown when with patients

3 Request Slips

In-patient request slips must be completely filled -up by the nurse medical clerk

Out-patient request slips must be duly signed by the Medical Doctor on Duty assigned in OPD

Only requests from the CLSH Hospital will be honored by the laboratory

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 21

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Examination Performed

A Hematology

1 CBC (Complete Blood Count)2 Platelet Count3 Hemoglobin Test4 Clotting Time5 Bleeding Time

B Clinical Microscopy

1 Urinalysis2 Fecalysis

C Blood Banking and Serology

1 Blood Typing2 Hepatitis B Determination (Qualitative)3 Syphilis (Qualitative)

D Bacteriology

1 Acid fast Staining

E Blood Chemistry

1 Cholesterol2 Triglyceride3 Fasting Blood Sugar4 Blood Uric Acid5 Blood Urea Nitrogen6 Serum Creatinine

5 Reasons for ordering laboratory measurements examinations

a To confirm a clinical impression or establish a diagnosisb To rule out a diagnosisc To monitor therapy (management guide)d To establish prognosise To screen for or detect disease

SPECIMEN COLLECTION

2 General Procedure for Obtaining Blood

1 Skin Puncture2 Venous Puncture

Technique for Venous Puncture

1 Identify the patient2 If fasting is required confirm that fasting order has been followed3 Inform the patient of the procedure to be done

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 22

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Prepare the patient and all equipment needed5 Select a suitable vein for venipuncture Veins of the antecubital fossa in

particular the median cubital and cephalic veins are preferred Wrist ankle and hand veins may also be used If one arm has an intravenous line use the other arm to draw a blood specimen

6 Cleanse the venipuncture site with 70 isopropyl alcohol Allow the arm to dry Do not touch the swabbed area with any unsterile object

7 Apply a tourniquet several inches above the puncture site Never leave the tourniquet in place longer than one minute

8 Anchor the vein firmly both above and below the puncture site Use either the thumb and middle finger or thumb and index finger

9 Perform the venipuncture10Release the tourniquet when blood begins to flow11After all blood has been drawn have the patient relax his or her fist Do

not allow the patient to pump the hand12Place a clean sterile cotton ball lightly over the side Withdraw the needle

then apply pressure to the site13Mix tubes with anticoagulant For syringe-drawn specimens transfer blood

to appropriate tubes taking precautions to avoid hemolyzing the specimens Follow any special handling procedures

14Check condition of the patient whether patient is faint and that bleeding is under control

15Dispose of contaminated material such as needles syringes cotton etc16Deliver tubes of blood for testing to appropriate departments

An additional protocol is important in the venipuncture procedure Follow the recommended ldquoorder of drawrdquo when collecting tubes To avoid contamination draw specimens into non-additive tubes before tubes with additives

17Let the blood sample retract completely before centrifuging Separate serum from clotted blood Make sure proper labeling is observed and practiced

HEMATOLOGY

Preparation and staining of Blood Smears for Diffferential Count

Principle

The examination of the peripheral blood smear is the most important examination one can do in hematological evaluation of a patient

Materials Needed

1 Pricker or lancet2 Microscope slides3 Spreader4 Pencil5 Cotton soaked in alcohol6 Dry cotton

Procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 23

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 Puncture the skin as desired and wipe away the first drop of blood2 Touch the surface of the clean slide to a small drop of blood the drop

should be placed near one end of the slide3 Turn the slide over such that the drop of blood is now on the top side and

the other end of the slide away from the drop of the blood is held by the thumb and forefinger of the left hand The other finger serves to support the slide

4 Pick up another slide and loosely between thumb and forefinger of the right hand

5 The slide in the right hand is called the spreader slide Place the spreader in front of the drop and pull back until it touches the drop

6 As soon as the blood spreads by capillary attraction almost to the edge of the slide push the spreader forwards at an angle of approximately 30-45 degrees using a rapid even motion

Note

The weight of the slide is the only pressure applied the thickness of the spread is controlled by the size of the drop the angle at which the spreader slide is held and the speed of spreading The greater the angle the thicker and shorter is the film

7 Dry the slide in air when dried write the name of the patient and date in the thick end of the blood film using a pencil or at the other side of the slide

Staining for Differential Count

Reagents

Rapid Romanowsky staining using ldquorapi-diffrdquo

Solution A Fixing solution MethanolSolution B Acid dye EosinSolution C Basic dye Methylene blueSolution D Buffer pH 68 phosphate buffer

Procedure

1 Prepare a blood smear and air dry

2 Fix by immersing in Solution A for 30 seconds

3 Transfer without rinsing or drying to Solution B and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

4 Without rinsing transfer the slide to Solution C and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

5 Rinse briefly in buffered water pH 68 and allow to dry

Results Macroscopically

Smear in pinkish violet

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 24

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Normal Values

Neutrophils 40-60

Lymphocytes 20-40

Monocyte 4-8

Eosinophil 1-3

Basophil 0-1

Stab 0-1

Peripheral Blood Smear

Procedure in reading peripheral blood smear

1 Examine the blood smear grossly against the light and note the contour and background color

2 Examine under the low power in order to ascertain the adequacy of the staining and select the best fields for study

3 Note agglutination or rouleaux formation of erythrocytes

4 Examine the slides systematically starting at the thin end In this way reduplication of the field is avoided Fields should be avoided in which the red cells are stacked up or are in rouleaux and fields should be examined in which the red cells are well separated and the white cells thinly spread

5 Examine the erythrocytes and note variations in size shape color hemoglobin content abnormal objects in cytoplasm and number of nucleated red cells per 100 leukocytes

6 Examine the WBC and study the morphology

CLINICAL MICROSCOPY

Routine Urinalysis

I Organization of Work

Steps Multistix Test

1 Agitate the urine container Examine the urine with regards to color and transparency

2 Fill the centrifuge tube with the urine

3 Dip a multistix strip into the tube and determine the following by comparing with test chart after specific reading time

a Specific Gravity - 45 ndash 60 seconds

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 25

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

b Ph - time not criticalc Protein - read immediatelyd Glucose - 10 ndash 30 seconds

II Microscopic Examination

Procedure

1 Mix the urine well first and obtain a few cc into a test tube2 Centrifuge urine for five minutes3 Decant the supernatant liquid in a quick motion so that the

sediments are left at the bottom of the test tube4 Place in a clean slide5 Examine under the microscope (regulate lighting by adjusting the

substage diaphragm)6 Focus first at low power then shift to the high power objective

Report as follows

1 RBC and WBC ndash average cells hpf2 Casts ndash average casts per hpf3 Epithelial Cells lpf or accasional few moderate abundant4 Crystals lpf are rare few moderate abundant

Fecalysis

I Macroscopic or Physical Examination

1 Form Consistency and Size

2 Color

II Direct fecal Smear

Procedure

1 Place a drop of saline on the slide2 Using an applicator stick take a small portion of the stool

Formed ndash take the portion from well inside the sampleMucus or watery ndash take the portion from the bloodstained mucus on the surface or from the surface of the liquid

3 mix the sample with the drop of saline on the slide4 Examine the specimen under LPO then shift to HPO5 Report as follows

Normal No Parasite seenMucous Normal - a very small amount

Blood - no blood present

BACTERIOLOGY

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 26

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

SPUTUM EXAMINATION

Acid Fast Bacilli

Signs and symptoms of Asymptomatic Patient

1 Cough for 2 weeks duration or more2 Chest and upper back pains for one month duration or more3 Hemoptysis or blood streaking4 On and off afternoon fever for one month duration or more5 Regressive loss of weight

Collection of specimen

1 Identify the patient through signs and symptoms2 Instruct the patient properly3 Collect the first sputum in the morning4 The patient should be standing if possible5 He should take a very deep breath filling his lungs6 He should empty his lungs in one breath coughing as hard and deeply as

he can7 He should spit what he brings up into the jar or sputum cup8 Label the jar or sputum cup with his name and date

After Collection

Check that sufficient amount of sputum has been produced

The sputum of an infected person usually containsa thick mucus air bubblesb threads of fibrinc patches of pusd occasional brownish streaks of blood

Preparation of Sputum Smears

Materials glass slides (new if possible unscratched) inoculating loop or coconut midribs cotton wool plug on metal wire for flaming alarm clock (timer)

Procedure

1 Prepare two slides Take a purulent potion of the sputum one scrath slide using either one sterile inoculating loop or two to form tongs

2 Make the smear as thin as possible covering as large an area as possible tracing concentric circles well separated but not reaching the edges of the slide

Preparation for fixing Sputum Smear

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 27

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Materials sputum smears alcohol lamp match

Procedure of fixing

1 Dry smears in the air2 Fix the smears by passing the slides three times through the flame3 Let it cool before staining

Preparation in Staining using Ziehl-Neelsen (Hot Method)

Principle The tubercule bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis is acid-fast and stains res with Ziehl-Neelsen stain while almost all other organisms stain blue

Materials alcohol lamp match forceps sputum smears cotton wool soaked in 70 ethanol Ziehl-Neelsen reagents denatured alcohol (for burning)

Reagents1 carbol fuchsin2 acid water or acid alcohol3 aqueous methylene blue

Procedure in staining

1 Cover the slides with filtered carbol fuchsin2 Dip the cotton wool swab in the methylated spirit ignite and pass slowly

under the slides to heat them3 As soon as steam begins to rise set the timer at five minutes4 Continue to heat so that the steam is seen but without boiling for five

minutes add more fuchsin immediately to avoid drying5 Wash with tap water or distilled water6 Decolorize with acid water or acid alcohol for one minute7 Wash with tap water8 Counterstain with aqueous methylene blue for thirty seconds or one

minute9 Wash with tap water for one minute10Drain and leave to dry on a slide rack

Examine under Oil Immersion Field

Results

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 28

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 14: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1439Patient presents a duly accomplished clearance prior to the release of discharge order and receipt of payment to the nurse on duty

15 EMERGENCY ROOM POLICIES AND GUIDELINES

1 only emergency cases are entertained in the ER General consultations are referred to the OPD After office hours and on SaturdaySunday and Holiday consultations may be entertained upon the discretion of the OPD

2 patients must be referred to the MOD

3 NOD should obtain the patientrsquos chief complaint weight vital signs get gestational data (LMP ED BP FH FHT if the patient is an OBGYNE case) and other admitting notes

4 inform patient of the existing hospital policies and guidelines upon admission (visiting schedule rights responsibilities policies and regulations

5 provide watcherrsquos id and provide the admin on duty with the list of admitted patients

6 NOD must facilitate requisition of hospital number

7 MOD attends to the patients The nurse on duty assists the MOD in performing assessments

8 for admitted patients MOD writes order for the medical treatment and the ER nurse on duty immediately executes them

9 a signed consent must be obtained from the patients In case of minor or handicapped patients guardians must fill up the consent for them

10NOD should facilitate laboratory works

11 IVF insertion is done either by the PGI on dutyMOD or NOD

12NOD starts giving the medications available Drugs that require skin testing must be performed at the ER and this should be confirmed by the physician and recorded in the patientrsquos chart

13MODNOD gives initial health teachings to the client or significant others as needed

14NOD regulates the IVF of patients before transporting to the ward

15 if patient refuses admission she must inform the MOD and sign a waiver denouncing the hospital from any liabilities A thorough explanation by the MOD shall be afforded to the patient upon signing of the waiver

16 illiterate patientscompanion must be asked to have their thumb marks on the record

17all stocks medicines used by the patient must be replaced as soon as possible on or before the patient leaves the ER This will be done by the duty ER NCO

18only emergency cases are provided with ER stocks NOD gets the prescription and have these items replaced by the pharmacy andor CSR

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 14

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

19ER NOD duty ER NCO will be held accountable for whatever lossesdeficiencies that may occur during hisher shift

20 inventory of all ER items is done every after shift by the NOD

21ER NCOIC must submit a monthly inventory report to the pharmacy and supply section for auditing purposes

22consultations are not entertained in the ER during office hours They are referred to the OPD

23communicableInfectious conditions which require isolation and cases other than OB-GYNEPedia are not accepted for admission but referred to other agencies after MOD has evaluated the patient The MOD should call and should be the one to make the call to the hospital where the patient is to be transferred to

24wounds of more than 24-hour duration are not entertained in te ER but in the OPD except on holidays Saturdays and Sundays

25 for invasive procedures a consent signed by the patient (if adult) companion andor guardian should be obtained before treatment or care is instituted

26should patient refuse she cannot be submitted to a particular treatment This should be properly documented on the patientrsquos record and have the patient sign a waiver for the refusal

27 for emergency cases where a patientrsquos life is in danger no consent is necessary However proper notation shall be made on the patientrsquos record by the physician and must be affirmed by a witness

28media is not allowed within the ER premises to avoid distortion in the management of patients

29dean on arrival (DOA) clients in ER cases are classified in the following categories

DOA Criteria0 vital signs ndash CPR done rarr failedNo death certificate shall be issuedER death ndash 0 vital signs rarr CPRrarr reviverarr died within 26 hoursHospital issue death certificateDOA and ER deaths should be marked on the patientrsquos record in bold

letters using ball pen

30all procedures performed in the ER shall be subjected to official charging which will be forwarded to the different branch of services where the patient belongs Only CENTCOM organic military personnel will be carried free of charge

15 POLICIES ON DO NOT RESUSCITATE (DNR)

151 Definition of Terms151a Resuscitation is a medical procedure which seeks to

restore cardiac andor respiratory function to individuals who have sustained a cardiac andor respiratory arrest

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 15

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

151b Do Not Resuscitate (DNR) is a medical order to provide no resuscitation to individuals for

whom resuscitation is not warranted151c Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) is the

common term used to refer to resuscitation However the options available to treat very sick patients are broader than CPR as literally defined Other options include intensive care antibiotic therapy hydration and nutritional support Appropriate comfort care measures should be employed for all patients especially terminally ill patients

152 DNR Protocol

1521WILL suction the airway administer oxygen position for comfort splint or immobilize control bleeding provide pain medication provide emotional support and contact other appropriate health care providers and

1521WILL NOT administer chest compressions insert an artificial airway administer resuscitative drugs defibrillate or

cardiovert provide respiratory assistance (other than suctioning the airway and administering oxygen) initiate resuscitative IV or initiate cardiac monitoring

153 Types of DNR Orders

1531a DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time the order

is given DNR Comfort Care orders permit comfort care only both before and during a cardiac or respiratory arrest Resuscitative therapies will not be

administered prior to an arrest This order is generally regarded as appropriate for patients who have a terminal illness short life expectancy little chance of surviving CPR and a desire to let nature take its course in the face of an impending arrest

1531b DNR Comfort Care-ArrestDNR Comfort Care-Arrest orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time of a cardiac or respiratory arrest A cardiac arrest occurs when there is an absence of a palpable pulse A respiratory arrest occurs when there are no spontaneous respirations or there is agonal breathing Resuscitative therapies will be administered before an arrest but not during an arrest The term DNR (without additional wording) when recorded in the medical chart shall be considered a DNR Comfort Care-Arrest order

1531c DNR Specified All other DNR orders are DNR Specified orders DNR Specified orders modify the DNR Protocol in some respect either in treatment modalities or in the timing of the protocol activation

1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 16

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart

1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order

DNR is a medical order to be given only by authorized health care practitioners DNR orders generally should be given with the informed consent of the patient or the patientrsquos surrogate decision-maker Ideally the physician should sensitively discuss the DNR option with the patient while the patient is mentally competent However DNR orders are often considered for patients who are comatose or who otherwise lack decisional capacity with whom this discussion has not occurred or cannot occur

In cases when a patient lacks decisional capacity the DNR option should be considered in conjunction with the patients advance directives if known or should be discussed with a surrogate A surrogate may be designated by a patient as the attorney-in-fact in a Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care A surrogate may also be identified as the first available person(s) from the following list in order

f Spouseg Son of or daughter of legal age h Either parent i Brother or sister of legal age or j Guardian

In all cases the primary physician should discuss the DNR option with the patient if possible and the surrogate(s) if appropriate There is no obligation to offer or initiate CPR if resuscitation would be futile ie if resuscitation would not achieve its physiological objective would offer no benefit to the patient and would violate reasonable medical standards

154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart

The words DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care-Arrest or DNR Specified should be recorded on the left-hand side of the medical chart (where advance directives are maintained) along with the date time rationale for the DNR order the names of the patient andor family members involved in the decision and a statement that the patient andor surrogate was fully informed about and consented to the DNR order If a DNR Specified order is recorded the modifications to the DNR Protocol should be specified in the medical chart as well as the desired timing of the activation of the modified Protocol

DNR decisions for inpatients should be transmitted clearly to those caring for the patients A DNR order should never result in the abandonment of a patient and steps should

155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders

The DNR order should be reassessed as part of the ongoing evaluation of an inpatient A DNR order should be affirmed modified or revoked only after a discussion between the primary physician and the patient if possible or the surrogate(s) if appropriate and the consent of the patient or surrogate DNR orders should be reassessed frequently and

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 17

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

as conditions warrant Reassessments of DNR orders should be documented in the medical chart If a DNR order is changed from one of the three types of DNR orders to a different type the patients DNR bracelet should be replaced with a new bracelet containing the revised designation If a DNR order is revoked the DNR bracelet should be removed and destroyed A physician or other health care worker who feels that he or she cannot honor a patients DNR request may not prevent or delay the transfer of the patient to a physician or facility which will honor the DNR status

156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care

The administration of anesthesia necessarily involves some practices and procedures that might be viewed as resuscitation in other settings Prior to any inpatient or outpatient invasive procedure for which the policy requires the documentation of informed consent any existing DNR order should when possible be reviewed with the patient or the patients surrogate As a result of this review the status of the DNR order during the perioperative period should be affirmed clarified or modified based on the preferences of the patient Any clarifications or modifications should be documented in the medical chart along with a notation indicating if or when the original DNR order should be reinstated Concurrence on these issues by the primary physician the surgeon and the anesthesiologist is desirable The DNR bracelet should not be removed during the perioperative period even if the DNR order has been temporarily modified

157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives

In the event of a conflict between one of the three types of DNR orders and an advance directive which has become effective because a person is unable to communicate and is terminally ill or permanently unconscious the instructions from the document (or person named as an Attorney-in-Fact) ranked higher in the following list shall prevail

a Living will of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

b Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care or an Attorney-in-Fact acting in accordance therewith of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

c DNR order d

16POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS DISCHARGE INSTRUCTION

161 The patient or his her legal guardian has the right to be informed by the physician or his her delegate ( nurse) of his her continuing health care requirements following discharge including instructions about

a Take home medicationsb Dietc Physical activityd Special instructions

- Signs to watch out for - When to bring the patient back to the physician- Instructions to follow in the event of untoward incidences

complications

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 18

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

e Follow-up Check-upf All other pertinent information to promote health and well-being

162 At the end patientrsquos confinement he she is entitled to a brief written summary of the course of his her illness which shall include at least the history physical examination diagnosis medications surgical procedure ancillary and laboratory procedures and the plan of further treatment and which shall be provided by the attending physician

17 POLICIES ON DISCLOSURE OF PATIENTrsquoS INFORMATION

171 The privacy of the patients must be assured at all stages of his her treatment Similarly the patient has the right to be free from unwarranted public exposure EXCEPT in the following cases

a When his her mental or physical condition is in controversy and the appropriate court in its discretion orders him her to submit to a physical or mental examination by a physician

b When the public health and safety so demandc When the patient waives his her rights

172 Any health care provider or practitioner involved in the treatment of the patient and all those who have legitimate access to the patientrsquos record is not authorized to divulge any information to a third party who has no concern with the care and welfare of the patient without his Her consent EXCEPT

a When such disclosure will benefit public health and safetyb When it is in the interest of justice and upon the order of a competent

courtc When patients waives in writing the confidential nature of such

information d When it is needed for continued medical treatment or advancement of

medical science subject to de-identification of patient and shared medical confidentiality for those who have access to the information

1721 Informing the spouse or the family to the first degree of the patientrsquos medical condition may be allowed Provided that the patient of legal age have the right to choose on whom to inform

1722 In case the patient is not of legal age or is mentally incapacitated such information shall be given to the parents legal guardian or his her next of kin

18 ETHICAL CONSIDERATIONS IN THE ADMINISTRATION OF BLOOD

181 The physician should obtain the patients informed consent before administering blood products This includes explaining to the patient the relative benefits and risks of receiving and not receiving the blood product as well as any reasonably viable alternatives

182 Generally in emergency situations where treatment is necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient and consent is not available (because the patient is unconscious or otherwise unable to consent) the physician may administer blood products (and any other treatment) necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient This does not apply if

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 19

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

the patient has expressly refused the treatment before becoming incompetent

183 A competent adult is entitled to refuse or cease any treatment for any reason

184 Parents ordinarily have the responsibility to provide consent on behalf of their young children however it is highly unlikely that parents can refuse life-saving treatment for their children Physicians may not simply override a parents refusal

185 Although it is legally clear that a mentally competent adult is entitled to refuse any medical treatment including a blood transfusion physicians have a responsibility to ensure that the refusal is truly informed and voluntary

186 In the case of adults who were once competent but have become temporarily or permanently incompetent substitute consent laws generally provide that their prior wishes regarding treatment decisions should be respected to the extent that they are known or can be determined

19 LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

191 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for IN-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSDoctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientStaff Nurse Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Proceed to the requesting Ward and collect

blood for the ordered examination Take specimen to the laboratoryExamine specimen Sign the resultRecord the result on its respective logbookRecord the result in PhilHealth logbookEndorse the result to the ward

Nurse On Duty Receive the result Refer the result to the Doctor on Duty

192 Specimens Received for Examination

Forms Needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatientPresent specimen with laboratory request signed by the Physician

Medical Technologist Receive specimen and laboratory requestExamine the specimen

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 20

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Sign the resultRecord the result to the respective logbook Endorse the Result to the Nurse on Duty for In- Patients and Release result to patients in OPD

193 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for OUT-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatient Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Receive the request and collect blood for the

ordered examination Examine specimen Sign the result Record the result on its respective logbook Record the result in OPD logbook Release the result

Patient Take the result to the Physician in OPD

194 Monthly Laboratory Report Census

Form Needed Monthly Report Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSMedical Technologist Record all daily results in the

logbookPrepare Monthly report based on the daily report of examinationsSign the reportGive the report to the OIC of the Laboratory for approval

OIC Laboratory Sign and approve the reportMedical Technologist Release the report

2 Laboratory Uniform

Laboratory uniform is a must on all working days except holidays but must be in laboratory gown when with patients

3 Request Slips

In-patient request slips must be completely filled -up by the nurse medical clerk

Out-patient request slips must be duly signed by the Medical Doctor on Duty assigned in OPD

Only requests from the CLSH Hospital will be honored by the laboratory

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 21

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Examination Performed

A Hematology

1 CBC (Complete Blood Count)2 Platelet Count3 Hemoglobin Test4 Clotting Time5 Bleeding Time

B Clinical Microscopy

1 Urinalysis2 Fecalysis

C Blood Banking and Serology

1 Blood Typing2 Hepatitis B Determination (Qualitative)3 Syphilis (Qualitative)

D Bacteriology

1 Acid fast Staining

E Blood Chemistry

1 Cholesterol2 Triglyceride3 Fasting Blood Sugar4 Blood Uric Acid5 Blood Urea Nitrogen6 Serum Creatinine

5 Reasons for ordering laboratory measurements examinations

a To confirm a clinical impression or establish a diagnosisb To rule out a diagnosisc To monitor therapy (management guide)d To establish prognosise To screen for or detect disease

SPECIMEN COLLECTION

2 General Procedure for Obtaining Blood

1 Skin Puncture2 Venous Puncture

Technique for Venous Puncture

1 Identify the patient2 If fasting is required confirm that fasting order has been followed3 Inform the patient of the procedure to be done

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 22

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Prepare the patient and all equipment needed5 Select a suitable vein for venipuncture Veins of the antecubital fossa in

particular the median cubital and cephalic veins are preferred Wrist ankle and hand veins may also be used If one arm has an intravenous line use the other arm to draw a blood specimen

6 Cleanse the venipuncture site with 70 isopropyl alcohol Allow the arm to dry Do not touch the swabbed area with any unsterile object

7 Apply a tourniquet several inches above the puncture site Never leave the tourniquet in place longer than one minute

8 Anchor the vein firmly both above and below the puncture site Use either the thumb and middle finger or thumb and index finger

9 Perform the venipuncture10Release the tourniquet when blood begins to flow11After all blood has been drawn have the patient relax his or her fist Do

not allow the patient to pump the hand12Place a clean sterile cotton ball lightly over the side Withdraw the needle

then apply pressure to the site13Mix tubes with anticoagulant For syringe-drawn specimens transfer blood

to appropriate tubes taking precautions to avoid hemolyzing the specimens Follow any special handling procedures

14Check condition of the patient whether patient is faint and that bleeding is under control

15Dispose of contaminated material such as needles syringes cotton etc16Deliver tubes of blood for testing to appropriate departments

An additional protocol is important in the venipuncture procedure Follow the recommended ldquoorder of drawrdquo when collecting tubes To avoid contamination draw specimens into non-additive tubes before tubes with additives

17Let the blood sample retract completely before centrifuging Separate serum from clotted blood Make sure proper labeling is observed and practiced

HEMATOLOGY

Preparation and staining of Blood Smears for Diffferential Count

Principle

The examination of the peripheral blood smear is the most important examination one can do in hematological evaluation of a patient

Materials Needed

1 Pricker or lancet2 Microscope slides3 Spreader4 Pencil5 Cotton soaked in alcohol6 Dry cotton

Procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 23

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 Puncture the skin as desired and wipe away the first drop of blood2 Touch the surface of the clean slide to a small drop of blood the drop

should be placed near one end of the slide3 Turn the slide over such that the drop of blood is now on the top side and

the other end of the slide away from the drop of the blood is held by the thumb and forefinger of the left hand The other finger serves to support the slide

4 Pick up another slide and loosely between thumb and forefinger of the right hand

5 The slide in the right hand is called the spreader slide Place the spreader in front of the drop and pull back until it touches the drop

6 As soon as the blood spreads by capillary attraction almost to the edge of the slide push the spreader forwards at an angle of approximately 30-45 degrees using a rapid even motion

Note

The weight of the slide is the only pressure applied the thickness of the spread is controlled by the size of the drop the angle at which the spreader slide is held and the speed of spreading The greater the angle the thicker and shorter is the film

7 Dry the slide in air when dried write the name of the patient and date in the thick end of the blood film using a pencil or at the other side of the slide

Staining for Differential Count

Reagents

Rapid Romanowsky staining using ldquorapi-diffrdquo

Solution A Fixing solution MethanolSolution B Acid dye EosinSolution C Basic dye Methylene blueSolution D Buffer pH 68 phosphate buffer

Procedure

1 Prepare a blood smear and air dry

2 Fix by immersing in Solution A for 30 seconds

3 Transfer without rinsing or drying to Solution B and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

4 Without rinsing transfer the slide to Solution C and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

5 Rinse briefly in buffered water pH 68 and allow to dry

Results Macroscopically

Smear in pinkish violet

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 24

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Normal Values

Neutrophils 40-60

Lymphocytes 20-40

Monocyte 4-8

Eosinophil 1-3

Basophil 0-1

Stab 0-1

Peripheral Blood Smear

Procedure in reading peripheral blood smear

1 Examine the blood smear grossly against the light and note the contour and background color

2 Examine under the low power in order to ascertain the adequacy of the staining and select the best fields for study

3 Note agglutination or rouleaux formation of erythrocytes

4 Examine the slides systematically starting at the thin end In this way reduplication of the field is avoided Fields should be avoided in which the red cells are stacked up or are in rouleaux and fields should be examined in which the red cells are well separated and the white cells thinly spread

5 Examine the erythrocytes and note variations in size shape color hemoglobin content abnormal objects in cytoplasm and number of nucleated red cells per 100 leukocytes

6 Examine the WBC and study the morphology

CLINICAL MICROSCOPY

Routine Urinalysis

I Organization of Work

Steps Multistix Test

1 Agitate the urine container Examine the urine with regards to color and transparency

2 Fill the centrifuge tube with the urine

3 Dip a multistix strip into the tube and determine the following by comparing with test chart after specific reading time

a Specific Gravity - 45 ndash 60 seconds

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 25

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

b Ph - time not criticalc Protein - read immediatelyd Glucose - 10 ndash 30 seconds

II Microscopic Examination

Procedure

1 Mix the urine well first and obtain a few cc into a test tube2 Centrifuge urine for five minutes3 Decant the supernatant liquid in a quick motion so that the

sediments are left at the bottom of the test tube4 Place in a clean slide5 Examine under the microscope (regulate lighting by adjusting the

substage diaphragm)6 Focus first at low power then shift to the high power objective

Report as follows

1 RBC and WBC ndash average cells hpf2 Casts ndash average casts per hpf3 Epithelial Cells lpf or accasional few moderate abundant4 Crystals lpf are rare few moderate abundant

Fecalysis

I Macroscopic or Physical Examination

1 Form Consistency and Size

2 Color

II Direct fecal Smear

Procedure

1 Place a drop of saline on the slide2 Using an applicator stick take a small portion of the stool

Formed ndash take the portion from well inside the sampleMucus or watery ndash take the portion from the bloodstained mucus on the surface or from the surface of the liquid

3 mix the sample with the drop of saline on the slide4 Examine the specimen under LPO then shift to HPO5 Report as follows

Normal No Parasite seenMucous Normal - a very small amount

Blood - no blood present

BACTERIOLOGY

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 26

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

SPUTUM EXAMINATION

Acid Fast Bacilli

Signs and symptoms of Asymptomatic Patient

1 Cough for 2 weeks duration or more2 Chest and upper back pains for one month duration or more3 Hemoptysis or blood streaking4 On and off afternoon fever for one month duration or more5 Regressive loss of weight

Collection of specimen

1 Identify the patient through signs and symptoms2 Instruct the patient properly3 Collect the first sputum in the morning4 The patient should be standing if possible5 He should take a very deep breath filling his lungs6 He should empty his lungs in one breath coughing as hard and deeply as

he can7 He should spit what he brings up into the jar or sputum cup8 Label the jar or sputum cup with his name and date

After Collection

Check that sufficient amount of sputum has been produced

The sputum of an infected person usually containsa thick mucus air bubblesb threads of fibrinc patches of pusd occasional brownish streaks of blood

Preparation of Sputum Smears

Materials glass slides (new if possible unscratched) inoculating loop or coconut midribs cotton wool plug on metal wire for flaming alarm clock (timer)

Procedure

1 Prepare two slides Take a purulent potion of the sputum one scrath slide using either one sterile inoculating loop or two to form tongs

2 Make the smear as thin as possible covering as large an area as possible tracing concentric circles well separated but not reaching the edges of the slide

Preparation for fixing Sputum Smear

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 27

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Materials sputum smears alcohol lamp match

Procedure of fixing

1 Dry smears in the air2 Fix the smears by passing the slides three times through the flame3 Let it cool before staining

Preparation in Staining using Ziehl-Neelsen (Hot Method)

Principle The tubercule bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis is acid-fast and stains res with Ziehl-Neelsen stain while almost all other organisms stain blue

Materials alcohol lamp match forceps sputum smears cotton wool soaked in 70 ethanol Ziehl-Neelsen reagents denatured alcohol (for burning)

Reagents1 carbol fuchsin2 acid water or acid alcohol3 aqueous methylene blue

Procedure in staining

1 Cover the slides with filtered carbol fuchsin2 Dip the cotton wool swab in the methylated spirit ignite and pass slowly

under the slides to heat them3 As soon as steam begins to rise set the timer at five minutes4 Continue to heat so that the steam is seen but without boiling for five

minutes add more fuchsin immediately to avoid drying5 Wash with tap water or distilled water6 Decolorize with acid water or acid alcohol for one minute7 Wash with tap water8 Counterstain with aqueous methylene blue for thirty seconds or one

minute9 Wash with tap water for one minute10Drain and leave to dry on a slide rack

Examine under Oil Immersion Field

Results

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 28

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 15: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

19ER NOD duty ER NCO will be held accountable for whatever lossesdeficiencies that may occur during hisher shift

20 inventory of all ER items is done every after shift by the NOD

21ER NCOIC must submit a monthly inventory report to the pharmacy and supply section for auditing purposes

22consultations are not entertained in the ER during office hours They are referred to the OPD

23communicableInfectious conditions which require isolation and cases other than OB-GYNEPedia are not accepted for admission but referred to other agencies after MOD has evaluated the patient The MOD should call and should be the one to make the call to the hospital where the patient is to be transferred to

24wounds of more than 24-hour duration are not entertained in te ER but in the OPD except on holidays Saturdays and Sundays

25 for invasive procedures a consent signed by the patient (if adult) companion andor guardian should be obtained before treatment or care is instituted

26should patient refuse she cannot be submitted to a particular treatment This should be properly documented on the patientrsquos record and have the patient sign a waiver for the refusal

27 for emergency cases where a patientrsquos life is in danger no consent is necessary However proper notation shall be made on the patientrsquos record by the physician and must be affirmed by a witness

28media is not allowed within the ER premises to avoid distortion in the management of patients

29dean on arrival (DOA) clients in ER cases are classified in the following categories

DOA Criteria0 vital signs ndash CPR done rarr failedNo death certificate shall be issuedER death ndash 0 vital signs rarr CPRrarr reviverarr died within 26 hoursHospital issue death certificateDOA and ER deaths should be marked on the patientrsquos record in bold

letters using ball pen

30all procedures performed in the ER shall be subjected to official charging which will be forwarded to the different branch of services where the patient belongs Only CENTCOM organic military personnel will be carried free of charge

15 POLICIES ON DO NOT RESUSCITATE (DNR)

151 Definition of Terms151a Resuscitation is a medical procedure which seeks to

restore cardiac andor respiratory function to individuals who have sustained a cardiac andor respiratory arrest

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 15

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

151b Do Not Resuscitate (DNR) is a medical order to provide no resuscitation to individuals for

whom resuscitation is not warranted151c Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) is the

common term used to refer to resuscitation However the options available to treat very sick patients are broader than CPR as literally defined Other options include intensive care antibiotic therapy hydration and nutritional support Appropriate comfort care measures should be employed for all patients especially terminally ill patients

152 DNR Protocol

1521WILL suction the airway administer oxygen position for comfort splint or immobilize control bleeding provide pain medication provide emotional support and contact other appropriate health care providers and

1521WILL NOT administer chest compressions insert an artificial airway administer resuscitative drugs defibrillate or

cardiovert provide respiratory assistance (other than suctioning the airway and administering oxygen) initiate resuscitative IV or initiate cardiac monitoring

153 Types of DNR Orders

1531a DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time the order

is given DNR Comfort Care orders permit comfort care only both before and during a cardiac or respiratory arrest Resuscitative therapies will not be

administered prior to an arrest This order is generally regarded as appropriate for patients who have a terminal illness short life expectancy little chance of surviving CPR and a desire to let nature take its course in the face of an impending arrest

1531b DNR Comfort Care-ArrestDNR Comfort Care-Arrest orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time of a cardiac or respiratory arrest A cardiac arrest occurs when there is an absence of a palpable pulse A respiratory arrest occurs when there are no spontaneous respirations or there is agonal breathing Resuscitative therapies will be administered before an arrest but not during an arrest The term DNR (without additional wording) when recorded in the medical chart shall be considered a DNR Comfort Care-Arrest order

1531c DNR Specified All other DNR orders are DNR Specified orders DNR Specified orders modify the DNR Protocol in some respect either in treatment modalities or in the timing of the protocol activation

1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 16

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart

1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order

DNR is a medical order to be given only by authorized health care practitioners DNR orders generally should be given with the informed consent of the patient or the patientrsquos surrogate decision-maker Ideally the physician should sensitively discuss the DNR option with the patient while the patient is mentally competent However DNR orders are often considered for patients who are comatose or who otherwise lack decisional capacity with whom this discussion has not occurred or cannot occur

In cases when a patient lacks decisional capacity the DNR option should be considered in conjunction with the patients advance directives if known or should be discussed with a surrogate A surrogate may be designated by a patient as the attorney-in-fact in a Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care A surrogate may also be identified as the first available person(s) from the following list in order

f Spouseg Son of or daughter of legal age h Either parent i Brother or sister of legal age or j Guardian

In all cases the primary physician should discuss the DNR option with the patient if possible and the surrogate(s) if appropriate There is no obligation to offer or initiate CPR if resuscitation would be futile ie if resuscitation would not achieve its physiological objective would offer no benefit to the patient and would violate reasonable medical standards

154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart

The words DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care-Arrest or DNR Specified should be recorded on the left-hand side of the medical chart (where advance directives are maintained) along with the date time rationale for the DNR order the names of the patient andor family members involved in the decision and a statement that the patient andor surrogate was fully informed about and consented to the DNR order If a DNR Specified order is recorded the modifications to the DNR Protocol should be specified in the medical chart as well as the desired timing of the activation of the modified Protocol

DNR decisions for inpatients should be transmitted clearly to those caring for the patients A DNR order should never result in the abandonment of a patient and steps should

155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders

The DNR order should be reassessed as part of the ongoing evaluation of an inpatient A DNR order should be affirmed modified or revoked only after a discussion between the primary physician and the patient if possible or the surrogate(s) if appropriate and the consent of the patient or surrogate DNR orders should be reassessed frequently and

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 17

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

as conditions warrant Reassessments of DNR orders should be documented in the medical chart If a DNR order is changed from one of the three types of DNR orders to a different type the patients DNR bracelet should be replaced with a new bracelet containing the revised designation If a DNR order is revoked the DNR bracelet should be removed and destroyed A physician or other health care worker who feels that he or she cannot honor a patients DNR request may not prevent or delay the transfer of the patient to a physician or facility which will honor the DNR status

156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care

The administration of anesthesia necessarily involves some practices and procedures that might be viewed as resuscitation in other settings Prior to any inpatient or outpatient invasive procedure for which the policy requires the documentation of informed consent any existing DNR order should when possible be reviewed with the patient or the patients surrogate As a result of this review the status of the DNR order during the perioperative period should be affirmed clarified or modified based on the preferences of the patient Any clarifications or modifications should be documented in the medical chart along with a notation indicating if or when the original DNR order should be reinstated Concurrence on these issues by the primary physician the surgeon and the anesthesiologist is desirable The DNR bracelet should not be removed during the perioperative period even if the DNR order has been temporarily modified

157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives

In the event of a conflict between one of the three types of DNR orders and an advance directive which has become effective because a person is unable to communicate and is terminally ill or permanently unconscious the instructions from the document (or person named as an Attorney-in-Fact) ranked higher in the following list shall prevail

a Living will of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

b Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care or an Attorney-in-Fact acting in accordance therewith of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

c DNR order d

16POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS DISCHARGE INSTRUCTION

161 The patient or his her legal guardian has the right to be informed by the physician or his her delegate ( nurse) of his her continuing health care requirements following discharge including instructions about

a Take home medicationsb Dietc Physical activityd Special instructions

- Signs to watch out for - When to bring the patient back to the physician- Instructions to follow in the event of untoward incidences

complications

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 18

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

e Follow-up Check-upf All other pertinent information to promote health and well-being

162 At the end patientrsquos confinement he she is entitled to a brief written summary of the course of his her illness which shall include at least the history physical examination diagnosis medications surgical procedure ancillary and laboratory procedures and the plan of further treatment and which shall be provided by the attending physician

17 POLICIES ON DISCLOSURE OF PATIENTrsquoS INFORMATION

171 The privacy of the patients must be assured at all stages of his her treatment Similarly the patient has the right to be free from unwarranted public exposure EXCEPT in the following cases

a When his her mental or physical condition is in controversy and the appropriate court in its discretion orders him her to submit to a physical or mental examination by a physician

b When the public health and safety so demandc When the patient waives his her rights

172 Any health care provider or practitioner involved in the treatment of the patient and all those who have legitimate access to the patientrsquos record is not authorized to divulge any information to a third party who has no concern with the care and welfare of the patient without his Her consent EXCEPT

a When such disclosure will benefit public health and safetyb When it is in the interest of justice and upon the order of a competent

courtc When patients waives in writing the confidential nature of such

information d When it is needed for continued medical treatment or advancement of

medical science subject to de-identification of patient and shared medical confidentiality for those who have access to the information

1721 Informing the spouse or the family to the first degree of the patientrsquos medical condition may be allowed Provided that the patient of legal age have the right to choose on whom to inform

1722 In case the patient is not of legal age or is mentally incapacitated such information shall be given to the parents legal guardian or his her next of kin

18 ETHICAL CONSIDERATIONS IN THE ADMINISTRATION OF BLOOD

181 The physician should obtain the patients informed consent before administering blood products This includes explaining to the patient the relative benefits and risks of receiving and not receiving the blood product as well as any reasonably viable alternatives

182 Generally in emergency situations where treatment is necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient and consent is not available (because the patient is unconscious or otherwise unable to consent) the physician may administer blood products (and any other treatment) necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient This does not apply if

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 19

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

the patient has expressly refused the treatment before becoming incompetent

183 A competent adult is entitled to refuse or cease any treatment for any reason

184 Parents ordinarily have the responsibility to provide consent on behalf of their young children however it is highly unlikely that parents can refuse life-saving treatment for their children Physicians may not simply override a parents refusal

185 Although it is legally clear that a mentally competent adult is entitled to refuse any medical treatment including a blood transfusion physicians have a responsibility to ensure that the refusal is truly informed and voluntary

186 In the case of adults who were once competent but have become temporarily or permanently incompetent substitute consent laws generally provide that their prior wishes regarding treatment decisions should be respected to the extent that they are known or can be determined

19 LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

191 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for IN-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSDoctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientStaff Nurse Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Proceed to the requesting Ward and collect

blood for the ordered examination Take specimen to the laboratoryExamine specimen Sign the resultRecord the result on its respective logbookRecord the result in PhilHealth logbookEndorse the result to the ward

Nurse On Duty Receive the result Refer the result to the Doctor on Duty

192 Specimens Received for Examination

Forms Needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatientPresent specimen with laboratory request signed by the Physician

Medical Technologist Receive specimen and laboratory requestExamine the specimen

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 20

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Sign the resultRecord the result to the respective logbook Endorse the Result to the Nurse on Duty for In- Patients and Release result to patients in OPD

193 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for OUT-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatient Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Receive the request and collect blood for the

ordered examination Examine specimen Sign the result Record the result on its respective logbook Record the result in OPD logbook Release the result

Patient Take the result to the Physician in OPD

194 Monthly Laboratory Report Census

Form Needed Monthly Report Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSMedical Technologist Record all daily results in the

logbookPrepare Monthly report based on the daily report of examinationsSign the reportGive the report to the OIC of the Laboratory for approval

OIC Laboratory Sign and approve the reportMedical Technologist Release the report

2 Laboratory Uniform

Laboratory uniform is a must on all working days except holidays but must be in laboratory gown when with patients

3 Request Slips

In-patient request slips must be completely filled -up by the nurse medical clerk

Out-patient request slips must be duly signed by the Medical Doctor on Duty assigned in OPD

Only requests from the CLSH Hospital will be honored by the laboratory

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 21

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Examination Performed

A Hematology

1 CBC (Complete Blood Count)2 Platelet Count3 Hemoglobin Test4 Clotting Time5 Bleeding Time

B Clinical Microscopy

1 Urinalysis2 Fecalysis

C Blood Banking and Serology

1 Blood Typing2 Hepatitis B Determination (Qualitative)3 Syphilis (Qualitative)

D Bacteriology

1 Acid fast Staining

E Blood Chemistry

1 Cholesterol2 Triglyceride3 Fasting Blood Sugar4 Blood Uric Acid5 Blood Urea Nitrogen6 Serum Creatinine

5 Reasons for ordering laboratory measurements examinations

a To confirm a clinical impression or establish a diagnosisb To rule out a diagnosisc To monitor therapy (management guide)d To establish prognosise To screen for or detect disease

SPECIMEN COLLECTION

2 General Procedure for Obtaining Blood

1 Skin Puncture2 Venous Puncture

Technique for Venous Puncture

1 Identify the patient2 If fasting is required confirm that fasting order has been followed3 Inform the patient of the procedure to be done

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 22

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Prepare the patient and all equipment needed5 Select a suitable vein for venipuncture Veins of the antecubital fossa in

particular the median cubital and cephalic veins are preferred Wrist ankle and hand veins may also be used If one arm has an intravenous line use the other arm to draw a blood specimen

6 Cleanse the venipuncture site with 70 isopropyl alcohol Allow the arm to dry Do not touch the swabbed area with any unsterile object

7 Apply a tourniquet several inches above the puncture site Never leave the tourniquet in place longer than one minute

8 Anchor the vein firmly both above and below the puncture site Use either the thumb and middle finger or thumb and index finger

9 Perform the venipuncture10Release the tourniquet when blood begins to flow11After all blood has been drawn have the patient relax his or her fist Do

not allow the patient to pump the hand12Place a clean sterile cotton ball lightly over the side Withdraw the needle

then apply pressure to the site13Mix tubes with anticoagulant For syringe-drawn specimens transfer blood

to appropriate tubes taking precautions to avoid hemolyzing the specimens Follow any special handling procedures

14Check condition of the patient whether patient is faint and that bleeding is under control

15Dispose of contaminated material such as needles syringes cotton etc16Deliver tubes of blood for testing to appropriate departments

An additional protocol is important in the venipuncture procedure Follow the recommended ldquoorder of drawrdquo when collecting tubes To avoid contamination draw specimens into non-additive tubes before tubes with additives

17Let the blood sample retract completely before centrifuging Separate serum from clotted blood Make sure proper labeling is observed and practiced

HEMATOLOGY

Preparation and staining of Blood Smears for Diffferential Count

Principle

The examination of the peripheral blood smear is the most important examination one can do in hematological evaluation of a patient

Materials Needed

1 Pricker or lancet2 Microscope slides3 Spreader4 Pencil5 Cotton soaked in alcohol6 Dry cotton

Procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 23

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 Puncture the skin as desired and wipe away the first drop of blood2 Touch the surface of the clean slide to a small drop of blood the drop

should be placed near one end of the slide3 Turn the slide over such that the drop of blood is now on the top side and

the other end of the slide away from the drop of the blood is held by the thumb and forefinger of the left hand The other finger serves to support the slide

4 Pick up another slide and loosely between thumb and forefinger of the right hand

5 The slide in the right hand is called the spreader slide Place the spreader in front of the drop and pull back until it touches the drop

6 As soon as the blood spreads by capillary attraction almost to the edge of the slide push the spreader forwards at an angle of approximately 30-45 degrees using a rapid even motion

Note

The weight of the slide is the only pressure applied the thickness of the spread is controlled by the size of the drop the angle at which the spreader slide is held and the speed of spreading The greater the angle the thicker and shorter is the film

7 Dry the slide in air when dried write the name of the patient and date in the thick end of the blood film using a pencil or at the other side of the slide

Staining for Differential Count

Reagents

Rapid Romanowsky staining using ldquorapi-diffrdquo

Solution A Fixing solution MethanolSolution B Acid dye EosinSolution C Basic dye Methylene blueSolution D Buffer pH 68 phosphate buffer

Procedure

1 Prepare a blood smear and air dry

2 Fix by immersing in Solution A for 30 seconds

3 Transfer without rinsing or drying to Solution B and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

4 Without rinsing transfer the slide to Solution C and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

5 Rinse briefly in buffered water pH 68 and allow to dry

Results Macroscopically

Smear in pinkish violet

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 24

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Normal Values

Neutrophils 40-60

Lymphocytes 20-40

Monocyte 4-8

Eosinophil 1-3

Basophil 0-1

Stab 0-1

Peripheral Blood Smear

Procedure in reading peripheral blood smear

1 Examine the blood smear grossly against the light and note the contour and background color

2 Examine under the low power in order to ascertain the adequacy of the staining and select the best fields for study

3 Note agglutination or rouleaux formation of erythrocytes

4 Examine the slides systematically starting at the thin end In this way reduplication of the field is avoided Fields should be avoided in which the red cells are stacked up or are in rouleaux and fields should be examined in which the red cells are well separated and the white cells thinly spread

5 Examine the erythrocytes and note variations in size shape color hemoglobin content abnormal objects in cytoplasm and number of nucleated red cells per 100 leukocytes

6 Examine the WBC and study the morphology

CLINICAL MICROSCOPY

Routine Urinalysis

I Organization of Work

Steps Multistix Test

1 Agitate the urine container Examine the urine with regards to color and transparency

2 Fill the centrifuge tube with the urine

3 Dip a multistix strip into the tube and determine the following by comparing with test chart after specific reading time

a Specific Gravity - 45 ndash 60 seconds

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 25

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

b Ph - time not criticalc Protein - read immediatelyd Glucose - 10 ndash 30 seconds

II Microscopic Examination

Procedure

1 Mix the urine well first and obtain a few cc into a test tube2 Centrifuge urine for five minutes3 Decant the supernatant liquid in a quick motion so that the

sediments are left at the bottom of the test tube4 Place in a clean slide5 Examine under the microscope (regulate lighting by adjusting the

substage diaphragm)6 Focus first at low power then shift to the high power objective

Report as follows

1 RBC and WBC ndash average cells hpf2 Casts ndash average casts per hpf3 Epithelial Cells lpf or accasional few moderate abundant4 Crystals lpf are rare few moderate abundant

Fecalysis

I Macroscopic or Physical Examination

1 Form Consistency and Size

2 Color

II Direct fecal Smear

Procedure

1 Place a drop of saline on the slide2 Using an applicator stick take a small portion of the stool

Formed ndash take the portion from well inside the sampleMucus or watery ndash take the portion from the bloodstained mucus on the surface or from the surface of the liquid

3 mix the sample with the drop of saline on the slide4 Examine the specimen under LPO then shift to HPO5 Report as follows

Normal No Parasite seenMucous Normal - a very small amount

Blood - no blood present

BACTERIOLOGY

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 26

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

SPUTUM EXAMINATION

Acid Fast Bacilli

Signs and symptoms of Asymptomatic Patient

1 Cough for 2 weeks duration or more2 Chest and upper back pains for one month duration or more3 Hemoptysis or blood streaking4 On and off afternoon fever for one month duration or more5 Regressive loss of weight

Collection of specimen

1 Identify the patient through signs and symptoms2 Instruct the patient properly3 Collect the first sputum in the morning4 The patient should be standing if possible5 He should take a very deep breath filling his lungs6 He should empty his lungs in one breath coughing as hard and deeply as

he can7 He should spit what he brings up into the jar or sputum cup8 Label the jar or sputum cup with his name and date

After Collection

Check that sufficient amount of sputum has been produced

The sputum of an infected person usually containsa thick mucus air bubblesb threads of fibrinc patches of pusd occasional brownish streaks of blood

Preparation of Sputum Smears

Materials glass slides (new if possible unscratched) inoculating loop or coconut midribs cotton wool plug on metal wire for flaming alarm clock (timer)

Procedure

1 Prepare two slides Take a purulent potion of the sputum one scrath slide using either one sterile inoculating loop or two to form tongs

2 Make the smear as thin as possible covering as large an area as possible tracing concentric circles well separated but not reaching the edges of the slide

Preparation for fixing Sputum Smear

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 27

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Materials sputum smears alcohol lamp match

Procedure of fixing

1 Dry smears in the air2 Fix the smears by passing the slides three times through the flame3 Let it cool before staining

Preparation in Staining using Ziehl-Neelsen (Hot Method)

Principle The tubercule bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis is acid-fast and stains res with Ziehl-Neelsen stain while almost all other organisms stain blue

Materials alcohol lamp match forceps sputum smears cotton wool soaked in 70 ethanol Ziehl-Neelsen reagents denatured alcohol (for burning)

Reagents1 carbol fuchsin2 acid water or acid alcohol3 aqueous methylene blue

Procedure in staining

1 Cover the slides with filtered carbol fuchsin2 Dip the cotton wool swab in the methylated spirit ignite and pass slowly

under the slides to heat them3 As soon as steam begins to rise set the timer at five minutes4 Continue to heat so that the steam is seen but without boiling for five

minutes add more fuchsin immediately to avoid drying5 Wash with tap water or distilled water6 Decolorize with acid water or acid alcohol for one minute7 Wash with tap water8 Counterstain with aqueous methylene blue for thirty seconds or one

minute9 Wash with tap water for one minute10Drain and leave to dry on a slide rack

Examine under Oil Immersion Field

Results

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 28

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 16: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

151b Do Not Resuscitate (DNR) is a medical order to provide no resuscitation to individuals for

whom resuscitation is not warranted151c Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) is the

common term used to refer to resuscitation However the options available to treat very sick patients are broader than CPR as literally defined Other options include intensive care antibiotic therapy hydration and nutritional support Appropriate comfort care measures should be employed for all patients especially terminally ill patients

152 DNR Protocol

1521WILL suction the airway administer oxygen position for comfort splint or immobilize control bleeding provide pain medication provide emotional support and contact other appropriate health care providers and

1521WILL NOT administer chest compressions insert an artificial airway administer resuscitative drugs defibrillate or

cardiovert provide respiratory assistance (other than suctioning the airway and administering oxygen) initiate resuscitative IV or initiate cardiac monitoring

153 Types of DNR Orders

1531a DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time the order

is given DNR Comfort Care orders permit comfort care only both before and during a cardiac or respiratory arrest Resuscitative therapies will not be

administered prior to an arrest This order is generally regarded as appropriate for patients who have a terminal illness short life expectancy little chance of surviving CPR and a desire to let nature take its course in the face of an impending arrest

1531b DNR Comfort Care-ArrestDNR Comfort Care-Arrest orders activate the DNR Protocol at the time of a cardiac or respiratory arrest A cardiac arrest occurs when there is an absence of a palpable pulse A respiratory arrest occurs when there are no spontaneous respirations or there is agonal breathing Resuscitative therapies will be administered before an arrest but not during an arrest The term DNR (without additional wording) when recorded in the medical chart shall be considered a DNR Comfort Care-Arrest order

1531c DNR Specified All other DNR orders are DNR Specified orders DNR Specified orders modify the DNR Protocol in some respect either in treatment modalities or in the timing of the protocol activation

1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 16

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart

1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order

DNR is a medical order to be given only by authorized health care practitioners DNR orders generally should be given with the informed consent of the patient or the patientrsquos surrogate decision-maker Ideally the physician should sensitively discuss the DNR option with the patient while the patient is mentally competent However DNR orders are often considered for patients who are comatose or who otherwise lack decisional capacity with whom this discussion has not occurred or cannot occur

In cases when a patient lacks decisional capacity the DNR option should be considered in conjunction with the patients advance directives if known or should be discussed with a surrogate A surrogate may be designated by a patient as the attorney-in-fact in a Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care A surrogate may also be identified as the first available person(s) from the following list in order

f Spouseg Son of or daughter of legal age h Either parent i Brother or sister of legal age or j Guardian

In all cases the primary physician should discuss the DNR option with the patient if possible and the surrogate(s) if appropriate There is no obligation to offer or initiate CPR if resuscitation would be futile ie if resuscitation would not achieve its physiological objective would offer no benefit to the patient and would violate reasonable medical standards

154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart

The words DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care-Arrest or DNR Specified should be recorded on the left-hand side of the medical chart (where advance directives are maintained) along with the date time rationale for the DNR order the names of the patient andor family members involved in the decision and a statement that the patient andor surrogate was fully informed about and consented to the DNR order If a DNR Specified order is recorded the modifications to the DNR Protocol should be specified in the medical chart as well as the desired timing of the activation of the modified Protocol

DNR decisions for inpatients should be transmitted clearly to those caring for the patients A DNR order should never result in the abandonment of a patient and steps should

155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders

The DNR order should be reassessed as part of the ongoing evaluation of an inpatient A DNR order should be affirmed modified or revoked only after a discussion between the primary physician and the patient if possible or the surrogate(s) if appropriate and the consent of the patient or surrogate DNR orders should be reassessed frequently and

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 17

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

as conditions warrant Reassessments of DNR orders should be documented in the medical chart If a DNR order is changed from one of the three types of DNR orders to a different type the patients DNR bracelet should be replaced with a new bracelet containing the revised designation If a DNR order is revoked the DNR bracelet should be removed and destroyed A physician or other health care worker who feels that he or she cannot honor a patients DNR request may not prevent or delay the transfer of the patient to a physician or facility which will honor the DNR status

156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care

The administration of anesthesia necessarily involves some practices and procedures that might be viewed as resuscitation in other settings Prior to any inpatient or outpatient invasive procedure for which the policy requires the documentation of informed consent any existing DNR order should when possible be reviewed with the patient or the patients surrogate As a result of this review the status of the DNR order during the perioperative period should be affirmed clarified or modified based on the preferences of the patient Any clarifications or modifications should be documented in the medical chart along with a notation indicating if or when the original DNR order should be reinstated Concurrence on these issues by the primary physician the surgeon and the anesthesiologist is desirable The DNR bracelet should not be removed during the perioperative period even if the DNR order has been temporarily modified

157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives

In the event of a conflict between one of the three types of DNR orders and an advance directive which has become effective because a person is unable to communicate and is terminally ill or permanently unconscious the instructions from the document (or person named as an Attorney-in-Fact) ranked higher in the following list shall prevail

a Living will of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

b Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care or an Attorney-in-Fact acting in accordance therewith of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

c DNR order d

16POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS DISCHARGE INSTRUCTION

161 The patient or his her legal guardian has the right to be informed by the physician or his her delegate ( nurse) of his her continuing health care requirements following discharge including instructions about

a Take home medicationsb Dietc Physical activityd Special instructions

- Signs to watch out for - When to bring the patient back to the physician- Instructions to follow in the event of untoward incidences

complications

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 18

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

e Follow-up Check-upf All other pertinent information to promote health and well-being

162 At the end patientrsquos confinement he she is entitled to a brief written summary of the course of his her illness which shall include at least the history physical examination diagnosis medications surgical procedure ancillary and laboratory procedures and the plan of further treatment and which shall be provided by the attending physician

17 POLICIES ON DISCLOSURE OF PATIENTrsquoS INFORMATION

171 The privacy of the patients must be assured at all stages of his her treatment Similarly the patient has the right to be free from unwarranted public exposure EXCEPT in the following cases

a When his her mental or physical condition is in controversy and the appropriate court in its discretion orders him her to submit to a physical or mental examination by a physician

b When the public health and safety so demandc When the patient waives his her rights

172 Any health care provider or practitioner involved in the treatment of the patient and all those who have legitimate access to the patientrsquos record is not authorized to divulge any information to a third party who has no concern with the care and welfare of the patient without his Her consent EXCEPT

a When such disclosure will benefit public health and safetyb When it is in the interest of justice and upon the order of a competent

courtc When patients waives in writing the confidential nature of such

information d When it is needed for continued medical treatment or advancement of

medical science subject to de-identification of patient and shared medical confidentiality for those who have access to the information

1721 Informing the spouse or the family to the first degree of the patientrsquos medical condition may be allowed Provided that the patient of legal age have the right to choose on whom to inform

1722 In case the patient is not of legal age or is mentally incapacitated such information shall be given to the parents legal guardian or his her next of kin

18 ETHICAL CONSIDERATIONS IN THE ADMINISTRATION OF BLOOD

181 The physician should obtain the patients informed consent before administering blood products This includes explaining to the patient the relative benefits and risks of receiving and not receiving the blood product as well as any reasonably viable alternatives

182 Generally in emergency situations where treatment is necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient and consent is not available (because the patient is unconscious or otherwise unable to consent) the physician may administer blood products (and any other treatment) necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient This does not apply if

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 19

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

the patient has expressly refused the treatment before becoming incompetent

183 A competent adult is entitled to refuse or cease any treatment for any reason

184 Parents ordinarily have the responsibility to provide consent on behalf of their young children however it is highly unlikely that parents can refuse life-saving treatment for their children Physicians may not simply override a parents refusal

185 Although it is legally clear that a mentally competent adult is entitled to refuse any medical treatment including a blood transfusion physicians have a responsibility to ensure that the refusal is truly informed and voluntary

186 In the case of adults who were once competent but have become temporarily or permanently incompetent substitute consent laws generally provide that their prior wishes regarding treatment decisions should be respected to the extent that they are known or can be determined

19 LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

191 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for IN-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSDoctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientStaff Nurse Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Proceed to the requesting Ward and collect

blood for the ordered examination Take specimen to the laboratoryExamine specimen Sign the resultRecord the result on its respective logbookRecord the result in PhilHealth logbookEndorse the result to the ward

Nurse On Duty Receive the result Refer the result to the Doctor on Duty

192 Specimens Received for Examination

Forms Needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatientPresent specimen with laboratory request signed by the Physician

Medical Technologist Receive specimen and laboratory requestExamine the specimen

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 20

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Sign the resultRecord the result to the respective logbook Endorse the Result to the Nurse on Duty for In- Patients and Release result to patients in OPD

193 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for OUT-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatient Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Receive the request and collect blood for the

ordered examination Examine specimen Sign the result Record the result on its respective logbook Record the result in OPD logbook Release the result

Patient Take the result to the Physician in OPD

194 Monthly Laboratory Report Census

Form Needed Monthly Report Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSMedical Technologist Record all daily results in the

logbookPrepare Monthly report based on the daily report of examinationsSign the reportGive the report to the OIC of the Laboratory for approval

OIC Laboratory Sign and approve the reportMedical Technologist Release the report

2 Laboratory Uniform

Laboratory uniform is a must on all working days except holidays but must be in laboratory gown when with patients

3 Request Slips

In-patient request slips must be completely filled -up by the nurse medical clerk

Out-patient request slips must be duly signed by the Medical Doctor on Duty assigned in OPD

Only requests from the CLSH Hospital will be honored by the laboratory

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 21

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Examination Performed

A Hematology

1 CBC (Complete Blood Count)2 Platelet Count3 Hemoglobin Test4 Clotting Time5 Bleeding Time

B Clinical Microscopy

1 Urinalysis2 Fecalysis

C Blood Banking and Serology

1 Blood Typing2 Hepatitis B Determination (Qualitative)3 Syphilis (Qualitative)

D Bacteriology

1 Acid fast Staining

E Blood Chemistry

1 Cholesterol2 Triglyceride3 Fasting Blood Sugar4 Blood Uric Acid5 Blood Urea Nitrogen6 Serum Creatinine

5 Reasons for ordering laboratory measurements examinations

a To confirm a clinical impression or establish a diagnosisb To rule out a diagnosisc To monitor therapy (management guide)d To establish prognosise To screen for or detect disease

SPECIMEN COLLECTION

2 General Procedure for Obtaining Blood

1 Skin Puncture2 Venous Puncture

Technique for Venous Puncture

1 Identify the patient2 If fasting is required confirm that fasting order has been followed3 Inform the patient of the procedure to be done

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 22

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Prepare the patient and all equipment needed5 Select a suitable vein for venipuncture Veins of the antecubital fossa in

particular the median cubital and cephalic veins are preferred Wrist ankle and hand veins may also be used If one arm has an intravenous line use the other arm to draw a blood specimen

6 Cleanse the venipuncture site with 70 isopropyl alcohol Allow the arm to dry Do not touch the swabbed area with any unsterile object

7 Apply a tourniquet several inches above the puncture site Never leave the tourniquet in place longer than one minute

8 Anchor the vein firmly both above and below the puncture site Use either the thumb and middle finger or thumb and index finger

9 Perform the venipuncture10Release the tourniquet when blood begins to flow11After all blood has been drawn have the patient relax his or her fist Do

not allow the patient to pump the hand12Place a clean sterile cotton ball lightly over the side Withdraw the needle

then apply pressure to the site13Mix tubes with anticoagulant For syringe-drawn specimens transfer blood

to appropriate tubes taking precautions to avoid hemolyzing the specimens Follow any special handling procedures

14Check condition of the patient whether patient is faint and that bleeding is under control

15Dispose of contaminated material such as needles syringes cotton etc16Deliver tubes of blood for testing to appropriate departments

An additional protocol is important in the venipuncture procedure Follow the recommended ldquoorder of drawrdquo when collecting tubes To avoid contamination draw specimens into non-additive tubes before tubes with additives

17Let the blood sample retract completely before centrifuging Separate serum from clotted blood Make sure proper labeling is observed and practiced

HEMATOLOGY

Preparation and staining of Blood Smears for Diffferential Count

Principle

The examination of the peripheral blood smear is the most important examination one can do in hematological evaluation of a patient

Materials Needed

1 Pricker or lancet2 Microscope slides3 Spreader4 Pencil5 Cotton soaked in alcohol6 Dry cotton

Procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 23

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 Puncture the skin as desired and wipe away the first drop of blood2 Touch the surface of the clean slide to a small drop of blood the drop

should be placed near one end of the slide3 Turn the slide over such that the drop of blood is now on the top side and

the other end of the slide away from the drop of the blood is held by the thumb and forefinger of the left hand The other finger serves to support the slide

4 Pick up another slide and loosely between thumb and forefinger of the right hand

5 The slide in the right hand is called the spreader slide Place the spreader in front of the drop and pull back until it touches the drop

6 As soon as the blood spreads by capillary attraction almost to the edge of the slide push the spreader forwards at an angle of approximately 30-45 degrees using a rapid even motion

Note

The weight of the slide is the only pressure applied the thickness of the spread is controlled by the size of the drop the angle at which the spreader slide is held and the speed of spreading The greater the angle the thicker and shorter is the film

7 Dry the slide in air when dried write the name of the patient and date in the thick end of the blood film using a pencil or at the other side of the slide

Staining for Differential Count

Reagents

Rapid Romanowsky staining using ldquorapi-diffrdquo

Solution A Fixing solution MethanolSolution B Acid dye EosinSolution C Basic dye Methylene blueSolution D Buffer pH 68 phosphate buffer

Procedure

1 Prepare a blood smear and air dry

2 Fix by immersing in Solution A for 30 seconds

3 Transfer without rinsing or drying to Solution B and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

4 Without rinsing transfer the slide to Solution C and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

5 Rinse briefly in buffered water pH 68 and allow to dry

Results Macroscopically

Smear in pinkish violet

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 24

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Normal Values

Neutrophils 40-60

Lymphocytes 20-40

Monocyte 4-8

Eosinophil 1-3

Basophil 0-1

Stab 0-1

Peripheral Blood Smear

Procedure in reading peripheral blood smear

1 Examine the blood smear grossly against the light and note the contour and background color

2 Examine under the low power in order to ascertain the adequacy of the staining and select the best fields for study

3 Note agglutination or rouleaux formation of erythrocytes

4 Examine the slides systematically starting at the thin end In this way reduplication of the field is avoided Fields should be avoided in which the red cells are stacked up or are in rouleaux and fields should be examined in which the red cells are well separated and the white cells thinly spread

5 Examine the erythrocytes and note variations in size shape color hemoglobin content abnormal objects in cytoplasm and number of nucleated red cells per 100 leukocytes

6 Examine the WBC and study the morphology

CLINICAL MICROSCOPY

Routine Urinalysis

I Organization of Work

Steps Multistix Test

1 Agitate the urine container Examine the urine with regards to color and transparency

2 Fill the centrifuge tube with the urine

3 Dip a multistix strip into the tube and determine the following by comparing with test chart after specific reading time

a Specific Gravity - 45 ndash 60 seconds

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 25

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

b Ph - time not criticalc Protein - read immediatelyd Glucose - 10 ndash 30 seconds

II Microscopic Examination

Procedure

1 Mix the urine well first and obtain a few cc into a test tube2 Centrifuge urine for five minutes3 Decant the supernatant liquid in a quick motion so that the

sediments are left at the bottom of the test tube4 Place in a clean slide5 Examine under the microscope (regulate lighting by adjusting the

substage diaphragm)6 Focus first at low power then shift to the high power objective

Report as follows

1 RBC and WBC ndash average cells hpf2 Casts ndash average casts per hpf3 Epithelial Cells lpf or accasional few moderate abundant4 Crystals lpf are rare few moderate abundant

Fecalysis

I Macroscopic or Physical Examination

1 Form Consistency and Size

2 Color

II Direct fecal Smear

Procedure

1 Place a drop of saline on the slide2 Using an applicator stick take a small portion of the stool

Formed ndash take the portion from well inside the sampleMucus or watery ndash take the portion from the bloodstained mucus on the surface or from the surface of the liquid

3 mix the sample with the drop of saline on the slide4 Examine the specimen under LPO then shift to HPO5 Report as follows

Normal No Parasite seenMucous Normal - a very small amount

Blood - no blood present

BACTERIOLOGY

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 26

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

SPUTUM EXAMINATION

Acid Fast Bacilli

Signs and symptoms of Asymptomatic Patient

1 Cough for 2 weeks duration or more2 Chest and upper back pains for one month duration or more3 Hemoptysis or blood streaking4 On and off afternoon fever for one month duration or more5 Regressive loss of weight

Collection of specimen

1 Identify the patient through signs and symptoms2 Instruct the patient properly3 Collect the first sputum in the morning4 The patient should be standing if possible5 He should take a very deep breath filling his lungs6 He should empty his lungs in one breath coughing as hard and deeply as

he can7 He should spit what he brings up into the jar or sputum cup8 Label the jar or sputum cup with his name and date

After Collection

Check that sufficient amount of sputum has been produced

The sputum of an infected person usually containsa thick mucus air bubblesb threads of fibrinc patches of pusd occasional brownish streaks of blood

Preparation of Sputum Smears

Materials glass slides (new if possible unscratched) inoculating loop or coconut midribs cotton wool plug on metal wire for flaming alarm clock (timer)

Procedure

1 Prepare two slides Take a purulent potion of the sputum one scrath slide using either one sterile inoculating loop or two to form tongs

2 Make the smear as thin as possible covering as large an area as possible tracing concentric circles well separated but not reaching the edges of the slide

Preparation for fixing Sputum Smear

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 27

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Materials sputum smears alcohol lamp match

Procedure of fixing

1 Dry smears in the air2 Fix the smears by passing the slides three times through the flame3 Let it cool before staining

Preparation in Staining using Ziehl-Neelsen (Hot Method)

Principle The tubercule bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis is acid-fast and stains res with Ziehl-Neelsen stain while almost all other organisms stain blue

Materials alcohol lamp match forceps sputum smears cotton wool soaked in 70 ethanol Ziehl-Neelsen reagents denatured alcohol (for burning)

Reagents1 carbol fuchsin2 acid water or acid alcohol3 aqueous methylene blue

Procedure in staining

1 Cover the slides with filtered carbol fuchsin2 Dip the cotton wool swab in the methylated spirit ignite and pass slowly

under the slides to heat them3 As soon as steam begins to rise set the timer at five minutes4 Continue to heat so that the steam is seen but without boiling for five

minutes add more fuchsin immediately to avoid drying5 Wash with tap water or distilled water6 Decolorize with acid water or acid alcohol for one minute7 Wash with tap water8 Counterstain with aqueous methylene blue for thirty seconds or one

minute9 Wash with tap water for one minute10Drain and leave to dry on a slide rack

Examine under Oil Immersion Field

Results

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 28

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 17: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart

1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order

DNR is a medical order to be given only by authorized health care practitioners DNR orders generally should be given with the informed consent of the patient or the patientrsquos surrogate decision-maker Ideally the physician should sensitively discuss the DNR option with the patient while the patient is mentally competent However DNR orders are often considered for patients who are comatose or who otherwise lack decisional capacity with whom this discussion has not occurred or cannot occur

In cases when a patient lacks decisional capacity the DNR option should be considered in conjunction with the patients advance directives if known or should be discussed with a surrogate A surrogate may be designated by a patient as the attorney-in-fact in a Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care A surrogate may also be identified as the first available person(s) from the following list in order

f Spouseg Son of or daughter of legal age h Either parent i Brother or sister of legal age or j Guardian

In all cases the primary physician should discuss the DNR option with the patient if possible and the surrogate(s) if appropriate There is no obligation to offer or initiate CPR if resuscitation would be futile ie if resuscitation would not achieve its physiological objective would offer no benefit to the patient and would violate reasonable medical standards

154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart

The words DNR Comfort Care DNR Comfort Care-Arrest or DNR Specified should be recorded on the left-hand side of the medical chart (where advance directives are maintained) along with the date time rationale for the DNR order the names of the patient andor family members involved in the decision and a statement that the patient andor surrogate was fully informed about and consented to the DNR order If a DNR Specified order is recorded the modifications to the DNR Protocol should be specified in the medical chart as well as the desired timing of the activation of the modified Protocol

DNR decisions for inpatients should be transmitted clearly to those caring for the patients A DNR order should never result in the abandonment of a patient and steps should

155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders

The DNR order should be reassessed as part of the ongoing evaluation of an inpatient A DNR order should be affirmed modified or revoked only after a discussion between the primary physician and the patient if possible or the surrogate(s) if appropriate and the consent of the patient or surrogate DNR orders should be reassessed frequently and

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 17

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

as conditions warrant Reassessments of DNR orders should be documented in the medical chart If a DNR order is changed from one of the three types of DNR orders to a different type the patients DNR bracelet should be replaced with a new bracelet containing the revised designation If a DNR order is revoked the DNR bracelet should be removed and destroyed A physician or other health care worker who feels that he or she cannot honor a patients DNR request may not prevent or delay the transfer of the patient to a physician or facility which will honor the DNR status

156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care

The administration of anesthesia necessarily involves some practices and procedures that might be viewed as resuscitation in other settings Prior to any inpatient or outpatient invasive procedure for which the policy requires the documentation of informed consent any existing DNR order should when possible be reviewed with the patient or the patients surrogate As a result of this review the status of the DNR order during the perioperative period should be affirmed clarified or modified based on the preferences of the patient Any clarifications or modifications should be documented in the medical chart along with a notation indicating if or when the original DNR order should be reinstated Concurrence on these issues by the primary physician the surgeon and the anesthesiologist is desirable The DNR bracelet should not be removed during the perioperative period even if the DNR order has been temporarily modified

157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives

In the event of a conflict between one of the three types of DNR orders and an advance directive which has become effective because a person is unable to communicate and is terminally ill or permanently unconscious the instructions from the document (or person named as an Attorney-in-Fact) ranked higher in the following list shall prevail

a Living will of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

b Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care or an Attorney-in-Fact acting in accordance therewith of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

c DNR order d

16POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS DISCHARGE INSTRUCTION

161 The patient or his her legal guardian has the right to be informed by the physician or his her delegate ( nurse) of his her continuing health care requirements following discharge including instructions about

a Take home medicationsb Dietc Physical activityd Special instructions

- Signs to watch out for - When to bring the patient back to the physician- Instructions to follow in the event of untoward incidences

complications

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 18

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

e Follow-up Check-upf All other pertinent information to promote health and well-being

162 At the end patientrsquos confinement he she is entitled to a brief written summary of the course of his her illness which shall include at least the history physical examination diagnosis medications surgical procedure ancillary and laboratory procedures and the plan of further treatment and which shall be provided by the attending physician

17 POLICIES ON DISCLOSURE OF PATIENTrsquoS INFORMATION

171 The privacy of the patients must be assured at all stages of his her treatment Similarly the patient has the right to be free from unwarranted public exposure EXCEPT in the following cases

a When his her mental or physical condition is in controversy and the appropriate court in its discretion orders him her to submit to a physical or mental examination by a physician

b When the public health and safety so demandc When the patient waives his her rights

172 Any health care provider or practitioner involved in the treatment of the patient and all those who have legitimate access to the patientrsquos record is not authorized to divulge any information to a third party who has no concern with the care and welfare of the patient without his Her consent EXCEPT

a When such disclosure will benefit public health and safetyb When it is in the interest of justice and upon the order of a competent

courtc When patients waives in writing the confidential nature of such

information d When it is needed for continued medical treatment or advancement of

medical science subject to de-identification of patient and shared medical confidentiality for those who have access to the information

1721 Informing the spouse or the family to the first degree of the patientrsquos medical condition may be allowed Provided that the patient of legal age have the right to choose on whom to inform

1722 In case the patient is not of legal age or is mentally incapacitated such information shall be given to the parents legal guardian or his her next of kin

18 ETHICAL CONSIDERATIONS IN THE ADMINISTRATION OF BLOOD

181 The physician should obtain the patients informed consent before administering blood products This includes explaining to the patient the relative benefits and risks of receiving and not receiving the blood product as well as any reasonably viable alternatives

182 Generally in emergency situations where treatment is necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient and consent is not available (because the patient is unconscious or otherwise unable to consent) the physician may administer blood products (and any other treatment) necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient This does not apply if

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 19

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

the patient has expressly refused the treatment before becoming incompetent

183 A competent adult is entitled to refuse or cease any treatment for any reason

184 Parents ordinarily have the responsibility to provide consent on behalf of their young children however it is highly unlikely that parents can refuse life-saving treatment for their children Physicians may not simply override a parents refusal

185 Although it is legally clear that a mentally competent adult is entitled to refuse any medical treatment including a blood transfusion physicians have a responsibility to ensure that the refusal is truly informed and voluntary

186 In the case of adults who were once competent but have become temporarily or permanently incompetent substitute consent laws generally provide that their prior wishes regarding treatment decisions should be respected to the extent that they are known or can be determined

19 LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

191 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for IN-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSDoctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientStaff Nurse Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Proceed to the requesting Ward and collect

blood for the ordered examination Take specimen to the laboratoryExamine specimen Sign the resultRecord the result on its respective logbookRecord the result in PhilHealth logbookEndorse the result to the ward

Nurse On Duty Receive the result Refer the result to the Doctor on Duty

192 Specimens Received for Examination

Forms Needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatientPresent specimen with laboratory request signed by the Physician

Medical Technologist Receive specimen and laboratory requestExamine the specimen

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 20

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Sign the resultRecord the result to the respective logbook Endorse the Result to the Nurse on Duty for In- Patients and Release result to patients in OPD

193 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for OUT-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatient Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Receive the request and collect blood for the

ordered examination Examine specimen Sign the result Record the result on its respective logbook Record the result in OPD logbook Release the result

Patient Take the result to the Physician in OPD

194 Monthly Laboratory Report Census

Form Needed Monthly Report Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSMedical Technologist Record all daily results in the

logbookPrepare Monthly report based on the daily report of examinationsSign the reportGive the report to the OIC of the Laboratory for approval

OIC Laboratory Sign and approve the reportMedical Technologist Release the report

2 Laboratory Uniform

Laboratory uniform is a must on all working days except holidays but must be in laboratory gown when with patients

3 Request Slips

In-patient request slips must be completely filled -up by the nurse medical clerk

Out-patient request slips must be duly signed by the Medical Doctor on Duty assigned in OPD

Only requests from the CLSH Hospital will be honored by the laboratory

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 21

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Examination Performed

A Hematology

1 CBC (Complete Blood Count)2 Platelet Count3 Hemoglobin Test4 Clotting Time5 Bleeding Time

B Clinical Microscopy

1 Urinalysis2 Fecalysis

C Blood Banking and Serology

1 Blood Typing2 Hepatitis B Determination (Qualitative)3 Syphilis (Qualitative)

D Bacteriology

1 Acid fast Staining

E Blood Chemistry

1 Cholesterol2 Triglyceride3 Fasting Blood Sugar4 Blood Uric Acid5 Blood Urea Nitrogen6 Serum Creatinine

5 Reasons for ordering laboratory measurements examinations

a To confirm a clinical impression or establish a diagnosisb To rule out a diagnosisc To monitor therapy (management guide)d To establish prognosise To screen for or detect disease

SPECIMEN COLLECTION

2 General Procedure for Obtaining Blood

1 Skin Puncture2 Venous Puncture

Technique for Venous Puncture

1 Identify the patient2 If fasting is required confirm that fasting order has been followed3 Inform the patient of the procedure to be done

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 22

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Prepare the patient and all equipment needed5 Select a suitable vein for venipuncture Veins of the antecubital fossa in

particular the median cubital and cephalic veins are preferred Wrist ankle and hand veins may also be used If one arm has an intravenous line use the other arm to draw a blood specimen

6 Cleanse the venipuncture site with 70 isopropyl alcohol Allow the arm to dry Do not touch the swabbed area with any unsterile object

7 Apply a tourniquet several inches above the puncture site Never leave the tourniquet in place longer than one minute

8 Anchor the vein firmly both above and below the puncture site Use either the thumb and middle finger or thumb and index finger

9 Perform the venipuncture10Release the tourniquet when blood begins to flow11After all blood has been drawn have the patient relax his or her fist Do

not allow the patient to pump the hand12Place a clean sterile cotton ball lightly over the side Withdraw the needle

then apply pressure to the site13Mix tubes with anticoagulant For syringe-drawn specimens transfer blood

to appropriate tubes taking precautions to avoid hemolyzing the specimens Follow any special handling procedures

14Check condition of the patient whether patient is faint and that bleeding is under control

15Dispose of contaminated material such as needles syringes cotton etc16Deliver tubes of blood for testing to appropriate departments

An additional protocol is important in the venipuncture procedure Follow the recommended ldquoorder of drawrdquo when collecting tubes To avoid contamination draw specimens into non-additive tubes before tubes with additives

17Let the blood sample retract completely before centrifuging Separate serum from clotted blood Make sure proper labeling is observed and practiced

HEMATOLOGY

Preparation and staining of Blood Smears for Diffferential Count

Principle

The examination of the peripheral blood smear is the most important examination one can do in hematological evaluation of a patient

Materials Needed

1 Pricker or lancet2 Microscope slides3 Spreader4 Pencil5 Cotton soaked in alcohol6 Dry cotton

Procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 23

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 Puncture the skin as desired and wipe away the first drop of blood2 Touch the surface of the clean slide to a small drop of blood the drop

should be placed near one end of the slide3 Turn the slide over such that the drop of blood is now on the top side and

the other end of the slide away from the drop of the blood is held by the thumb and forefinger of the left hand The other finger serves to support the slide

4 Pick up another slide and loosely between thumb and forefinger of the right hand

5 The slide in the right hand is called the spreader slide Place the spreader in front of the drop and pull back until it touches the drop

6 As soon as the blood spreads by capillary attraction almost to the edge of the slide push the spreader forwards at an angle of approximately 30-45 degrees using a rapid even motion

Note

The weight of the slide is the only pressure applied the thickness of the spread is controlled by the size of the drop the angle at which the spreader slide is held and the speed of spreading The greater the angle the thicker and shorter is the film

7 Dry the slide in air when dried write the name of the patient and date in the thick end of the blood film using a pencil or at the other side of the slide

Staining for Differential Count

Reagents

Rapid Romanowsky staining using ldquorapi-diffrdquo

Solution A Fixing solution MethanolSolution B Acid dye EosinSolution C Basic dye Methylene blueSolution D Buffer pH 68 phosphate buffer

Procedure

1 Prepare a blood smear and air dry

2 Fix by immersing in Solution A for 30 seconds

3 Transfer without rinsing or drying to Solution B and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

4 Without rinsing transfer the slide to Solution C and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

5 Rinse briefly in buffered water pH 68 and allow to dry

Results Macroscopically

Smear in pinkish violet

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 24

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Normal Values

Neutrophils 40-60

Lymphocytes 20-40

Monocyte 4-8

Eosinophil 1-3

Basophil 0-1

Stab 0-1

Peripheral Blood Smear

Procedure in reading peripheral blood smear

1 Examine the blood smear grossly against the light and note the contour and background color

2 Examine under the low power in order to ascertain the adequacy of the staining and select the best fields for study

3 Note agglutination or rouleaux formation of erythrocytes

4 Examine the slides systematically starting at the thin end In this way reduplication of the field is avoided Fields should be avoided in which the red cells are stacked up or are in rouleaux and fields should be examined in which the red cells are well separated and the white cells thinly spread

5 Examine the erythrocytes and note variations in size shape color hemoglobin content abnormal objects in cytoplasm and number of nucleated red cells per 100 leukocytes

6 Examine the WBC and study the morphology

CLINICAL MICROSCOPY

Routine Urinalysis

I Organization of Work

Steps Multistix Test

1 Agitate the urine container Examine the urine with regards to color and transparency

2 Fill the centrifuge tube with the urine

3 Dip a multistix strip into the tube and determine the following by comparing with test chart after specific reading time

a Specific Gravity - 45 ndash 60 seconds

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 25

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

b Ph - time not criticalc Protein - read immediatelyd Glucose - 10 ndash 30 seconds

II Microscopic Examination

Procedure

1 Mix the urine well first and obtain a few cc into a test tube2 Centrifuge urine for five minutes3 Decant the supernatant liquid in a quick motion so that the

sediments are left at the bottom of the test tube4 Place in a clean slide5 Examine under the microscope (regulate lighting by adjusting the

substage diaphragm)6 Focus first at low power then shift to the high power objective

Report as follows

1 RBC and WBC ndash average cells hpf2 Casts ndash average casts per hpf3 Epithelial Cells lpf or accasional few moderate abundant4 Crystals lpf are rare few moderate abundant

Fecalysis

I Macroscopic or Physical Examination

1 Form Consistency and Size

2 Color

II Direct fecal Smear

Procedure

1 Place a drop of saline on the slide2 Using an applicator stick take a small portion of the stool

Formed ndash take the portion from well inside the sampleMucus or watery ndash take the portion from the bloodstained mucus on the surface or from the surface of the liquid

3 mix the sample with the drop of saline on the slide4 Examine the specimen under LPO then shift to HPO5 Report as follows

Normal No Parasite seenMucous Normal - a very small amount

Blood - no blood present

BACTERIOLOGY

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 26

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

SPUTUM EXAMINATION

Acid Fast Bacilli

Signs and symptoms of Asymptomatic Patient

1 Cough for 2 weeks duration or more2 Chest and upper back pains for one month duration or more3 Hemoptysis or blood streaking4 On and off afternoon fever for one month duration or more5 Regressive loss of weight

Collection of specimen

1 Identify the patient through signs and symptoms2 Instruct the patient properly3 Collect the first sputum in the morning4 The patient should be standing if possible5 He should take a very deep breath filling his lungs6 He should empty his lungs in one breath coughing as hard and deeply as

he can7 He should spit what he brings up into the jar or sputum cup8 Label the jar or sputum cup with his name and date

After Collection

Check that sufficient amount of sputum has been produced

The sputum of an infected person usually containsa thick mucus air bubblesb threads of fibrinc patches of pusd occasional brownish streaks of blood

Preparation of Sputum Smears

Materials glass slides (new if possible unscratched) inoculating loop or coconut midribs cotton wool plug on metal wire for flaming alarm clock (timer)

Procedure

1 Prepare two slides Take a purulent potion of the sputum one scrath slide using either one sterile inoculating loop or two to form tongs

2 Make the smear as thin as possible covering as large an area as possible tracing concentric circles well separated but not reaching the edges of the slide

Preparation for fixing Sputum Smear

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 27

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Materials sputum smears alcohol lamp match

Procedure of fixing

1 Dry smears in the air2 Fix the smears by passing the slides three times through the flame3 Let it cool before staining

Preparation in Staining using Ziehl-Neelsen (Hot Method)

Principle The tubercule bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis is acid-fast and stains res with Ziehl-Neelsen stain while almost all other organisms stain blue

Materials alcohol lamp match forceps sputum smears cotton wool soaked in 70 ethanol Ziehl-Neelsen reagents denatured alcohol (for burning)

Reagents1 carbol fuchsin2 acid water or acid alcohol3 aqueous methylene blue

Procedure in staining

1 Cover the slides with filtered carbol fuchsin2 Dip the cotton wool swab in the methylated spirit ignite and pass slowly

under the slides to heat them3 As soon as steam begins to rise set the timer at five minutes4 Continue to heat so that the steam is seen but without boiling for five

minutes add more fuchsin immediately to avoid drying5 Wash with tap water or distilled water6 Decolorize with acid water or acid alcohol for one minute7 Wash with tap water8 Counterstain with aqueous methylene blue for thirty seconds or one

minute9 Wash with tap water for one minute10Drain and leave to dry on a slide rack

Examine under Oil Immersion Field

Results

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 28

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 18: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

as conditions warrant Reassessments of DNR orders should be documented in the medical chart If a DNR order is changed from one of the three types of DNR orders to a different type the patients DNR bracelet should be replaced with a new bracelet containing the revised designation If a DNR order is revoked the DNR bracelet should be removed and destroyed A physician or other health care worker who feels that he or she cannot honor a patients DNR request may not prevent or delay the transfer of the patient to a physician or facility which will honor the DNR status

156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care

The administration of anesthesia necessarily involves some practices and procedures that might be viewed as resuscitation in other settings Prior to any inpatient or outpatient invasive procedure for which the policy requires the documentation of informed consent any existing DNR order should when possible be reviewed with the patient or the patients surrogate As a result of this review the status of the DNR order during the perioperative period should be affirmed clarified or modified based on the preferences of the patient Any clarifications or modifications should be documented in the medical chart along with a notation indicating if or when the original DNR order should be reinstated Concurrence on these issues by the primary physician the surgeon and the anesthesiologist is desirable The DNR bracelet should not be removed during the perioperative period even if the DNR order has been temporarily modified

157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives

In the event of a conflict between one of the three types of DNR orders and an advance directive which has become effective because a person is unable to communicate and is terminally ill or permanently unconscious the instructions from the document (or person named as an Attorney-in-Fact) ranked higher in the following list shall prevail

a Living will of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

b Durable Power of Attorney for Health Care or an Attorney-in-Fact acting in accordance therewith of a person who is in a terminal condition or a permanent unconscious state

c DNR order d

16POLICIES ON PATIENTrsquoS DISCHARGE INSTRUCTION

161 The patient or his her legal guardian has the right to be informed by the physician or his her delegate ( nurse) of his her continuing health care requirements following discharge including instructions about

a Take home medicationsb Dietc Physical activityd Special instructions

- Signs to watch out for - When to bring the patient back to the physician- Instructions to follow in the event of untoward incidences

complications

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 18

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

e Follow-up Check-upf All other pertinent information to promote health and well-being

162 At the end patientrsquos confinement he she is entitled to a brief written summary of the course of his her illness which shall include at least the history physical examination diagnosis medications surgical procedure ancillary and laboratory procedures and the plan of further treatment and which shall be provided by the attending physician

17 POLICIES ON DISCLOSURE OF PATIENTrsquoS INFORMATION

171 The privacy of the patients must be assured at all stages of his her treatment Similarly the patient has the right to be free from unwarranted public exposure EXCEPT in the following cases

a When his her mental or physical condition is in controversy and the appropriate court in its discretion orders him her to submit to a physical or mental examination by a physician

b When the public health and safety so demandc When the patient waives his her rights

172 Any health care provider or practitioner involved in the treatment of the patient and all those who have legitimate access to the patientrsquos record is not authorized to divulge any information to a third party who has no concern with the care and welfare of the patient without his Her consent EXCEPT

a When such disclosure will benefit public health and safetyb When it is in the interest of justice and upon the order of a competent

courtc When patients waives in writing the confidential nature of such

information d When it is needed for continued medical treatment or advancement of

medical science subject to de-identification of patient and shared medical confidentiality for those who have access to the information

1721 Informing the spouse or the family to the first degree of the patientrsquos medical condition may be allowed Provided that the patient of legal age have the right to choose on whom to inform

1722 In case the patient is not of legal age or is mentally incapacitated such information shall be given to the parents legal guardian or his her next of kin

18 ETHICAL CONSIDERATIONS IN THE ADMINISTRATION OF BLOOD

181 The physician should obtain the patients informed consent before administering blood products This includes explaining to the patient the relative benefits and risks of receiving and not receiving the blood product as well as any reasonably viable alternatives

182 Generally in emergency situations where treatment is necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient and consent is not available (because the patient is unconscious or otherwise unable to consent) the physician may administer blood products (and any other treatment) necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient This does not apply if

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 19

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

the patient has expressly refused the treatment before becoming incompetent

183 A competent adult is entitled to refuse or cease any treatment for any reason

184 Parents ordinarily have the responsibility to provide consent on behalf of their young children however it is highly unlikely that parents can refuse life-saving treatment for their children Physicians may not simply override a parents refusal

185 Although it is legally clear that a mentally competent adult is entitled to refuse any medical treatment including a blood transfusion physicians have a responsibility to ensure that the refusal is truly informed and voluntary

186 In the case of adults who were once competent but have become temporarily or permanently incompetent substitute consent laws generally provide that their prior wishes regarding treatment decisions should be respected to the extent that they are known or can be determined

19 LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

191 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for IN-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSDoctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientStaff Nurse Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Proceed to the requesting Ward and collect

blood for the ordered examination Take specimen to the laboratoryExamine specimen Sign the resultRecord the result on its respective logbookRecord the result in PhilHealth logbookEndorse the result to the ward

Nurse On Duty Receive the result Refer the result to the Doctor on Duty

192 Specimens Received for Examination

Forms Needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatientPresent specimen with laboratory request signed by the Physician

Medical Technologist Receive specimen and laboratory requestExamine the specimen

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 20

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Sign the resultRecord the result to the respective logbook Endorse the Result to the Nurse on Duty for In- Patients and Release result to patients in OPD

193 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for OUT-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatient Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Receive the request and collect blood for the

ordered examination Examine specimen Sign the result Record the result on its respective logbook Record the result in OPD logbook Release the result

Patient Take the result to the Physician in OPD

194 Monthly Laboratory Report Census

Form Needed Monthly Report Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSMedical Technologist Record all daily results in the

logbookPrepare Monthly report based on the daily report of examinationsSign the reportGive the report to the OIC of the Laboratory for approval

OIC Laboratory Sign and approve the reportMedical Technologist Release the report

2 Laboratory Uniform

Laboratory uniform is a must on all working days except holidays but must be in laboratory gown when with patients

3 Request Slips

In-patient request slips must be completely filled -up by the nurse medical clerk

Out-patient request slips must be duly signed by the Medical Doctor on Duty assigned in OPD

Only requests from the CLSH Hospital will be honored by the laboratory

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 21

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Examination Performed

A Hematology

1 CBC (Complete Blood Count)2 Platelet Count3 Hemoglobin Test4 Clotting Time5 Bleeding Time

B Clinical Microscopy

1 Urinalysis2 Fecalysis

C Blood Banking and Serology

1 Blood Typing2 Hepatitis B Determination (Qualitative)3 Syphilis (Qualitative)

D Bacteriology

1 Acid fast Staining

E Blood Chemistry

1 Cholesterol2 Triglyceride3 Fasting Blood Sugar4 Blood Uric Acid5 Blood Urea Nitrogen6 Serum Creatinine

5 Reasons for ordering laboratory measurements examinations

a To confirm a clinical impression or establish a diagnosisb To rule out a diagnosisc To monitor therapy (management guide)d To establish prognosise To screen for or detect disease

SPECIMEN COLLECTION

2 General Procedure for Obtaining Blood

1 Skin Puncture2 Venous Puncture

Technique for Venous Puncture

1 Identify the patient2 If fasting is required confirm that fasting order has been followed3 Inform the patient of the procedure to be done

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 22

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Prepare the patient and all equipment needed5 Select a suitable vein for venipuncture Veins of the antecubital fossa in

particular the median cubital and cephalic veins are preferred Wrist ankle and hand veins may also be used If one arm has an intravenous line use the other arm to draw a blood specimen

6 Cleanse the venipuncture site with 70 isopropyl alcohol Allow the arm to dry Do not touch the swabbed area with any unsterile object

7 Apply a tourniquet several inches above the puncture site Never leave the tourniquet in place longer than one minute

8 Anchor the vein firmly both above and below the puncture site Use either the thumb and middle finger or thumb and index finger

9 Perform the venipuncture10Release the tourniquet when blood begins to flow11After all blood has been drawn have the patient relax his or her fist Do

not allow the patient to pump the hand12Place a clean sterile cotton ball lightly over the side Withdraw the needle

then apply pressure to the site13Mix tubes with anticoagulant For syringe-drawn specimens transfer blood

to appropriate tubes taking precautions to avoid hemolyzing the specimens Follow any special handling procedures

14Check condition of the patient whether patient is faint and that bleeding is under control

15Dispose of contaminated material such as needles syringes cotton etc16Deliver tubes of blood for testing to appropriate departments

An additional protocol is important in the venipuncture procedure Follow the recommended ldquoorder of drawrdquo when collecting tubes To avoid contamination draw specimens into non-additive tubes before tubes with additives

17Let the blood sample retract completely before centrifuging Separate serum from clotted blood Make sure proper labeling is observed and practiced

HEMATOLOGY

Preparation and staining of Blood Smears for Diffferential Count

Principle

The examination of the peripheral blood smear is the most important examination one can do in hematological evaluation of a patient

Materials Needed

1 Pricker or lancet2 Microscope slides3 Spreader4 Pencil5 Cotton soaked in alcohol6 Dry cotton

Procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 23

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 Puncture the skin as desired and wipe away the first drop of blood2 Touch the surface of the clean slide to a small drop of blood the drop

should be placed near one end of the slide3 Turn the slide over such that the drop of blood is now on the top side and

the other end of the slide away from the drop of the blood is held by the thumb and forefinger of the left hand The other finger serves to support the slide

4 Pick up another slide and loosely between thumb and forefinger of the right hand

5 The slide in the right hand is called the spreader slide Place the spreader in front of the drop and pull back until it touches the drop

6 As soon as the blood spreads by capillary attraction almost to the edge of the slide push the spreader forwards at an angle of approximately 30-45 degrees using a rapid even motion

Note

The weight of the slide is the only pressure applied the thickness of the spread is controlled by the size of the drop the angle at which the spreader slide is held and the speed of spreading The greater the angle the thicker and shorter is the film

7 Dry the slide in air when dried write the name of the patient and date in the thick end of the blood film using a pencil or at the other side of the slide

Staining for Differential Count

Reagents

Rapid Romanowsky staining using ldquorapi-diffrdquo

Solution A Fixing solution MethanolSolution B Acid dye EosinSolution C Basic dye Methylene blueSolution D Buffer pH 68 phosphate buffer

Procedure

1 Prepare a blood smear and air dry

2 Fix by immersing in Solution A for 30 seconds

3 Transfer without rinsing or drying to Solution B and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

4 Without rinsing transfer the slide to Solution C and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

5 Rinse briefly in buffered water pH 68 and allow to dry

Results Macroscopically

Smear in pinkish violet

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 24

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Normal Values

Neutrophils 40-60

Lymphocytes 20-40

Monocyte 4-8

Eosinophil 1-3

Basophil 0-1

Stab 0-1

Peripheral Blood Smear

Procedure in reading peripheral blood smear

1 Examine the blood smear grossly against the light and note the contour and background color

2 Examine under the low power in order to ascertain the adequacy of the staining and select the best fields for study

3 Note agglutination or rouleaux formation of erythrocytes

4 Examine the slides systematically starting at the thin end In this way reduplication of the field is avoided Fields should be avoided in which the red cells are stacked up or are in rouleaux and fields should be examined in which the red cells are well separated and the white cells thinly spread

5 Examine the erythrocytes and note variations in size shape color hemoglobin content abnormal objects in cytoplasm and number of nucleated red cells per 100 leukocytes

6 Examine the WBC and study the morphology

CLINICAL MICROSCOPY

Routine Urinalysis

I Organization of Work

Steps Multistix Test

1 Agitate the urine container Examine the urine with regards to color and transparency

2 Fill the centrifuge tube with the urine

3 Dip a multistix strip into the tube and determine the following by comparing with test chart after specific reading time

a Specific Gravity - 45 ndash 60 seconds

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 25

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

b Ph - time not criticalc Protein - read immediatelyd Glucose - 10 ndash 30 seconds

II Microscopic Examination

Procedure

1 Mix the urine well first and obtain a few cc into a test tube2 Centrifuge urine for five minutes3 Decant the supernatant liquid in a quick motion so that the

sediments are left at the bottom of the test tube4 Place in a clean slide5 Examine under the microscope (regulate lighting by adjusting the

substage diaphragm)6 Focus first at low power then shift to the high power objective

Report as follows

1 RBC and WBC ndash average cells hpf2 Casts ndash average casts per hpf3 Epithelial Cells lpf or accasional few moderate abundant4 Crystals lpf are rare few moderate abundant

Fecalysis

I Macroscopic or Physical Examination

1 Form Consistency and Size

2 Color

II Direct fecal Smear

Procedure

1 Place a drop of saline on the slide2 Using an applicator stick take a small portion of the stool

Formed ndash take the portion from well inside the sampleMucus or watery ndash take the portion from the bloodstained mucus on the surface or from the surface of the liquid

3 mix the sample with the drop of saline on the slide4 Examine the specimen under LPO then shift to HPO5 Report as follows

Normal No Parasite seenMucous Normal - a very small amount

Blood - no blood present

BACTERIOLOGY

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 26

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

SPUTUM EXAMINATION

Acid Fast Bacilli

Signs and symptoms of Asymptomatic Patient

1 Cough for 2 weeks duration or more2 Chest and upper back pains for one month duration or more3 Hemoptysis or blood streaking4 On and off afternoon fever for one month duration or more5 Regressive loss of weight

Collection of specimen

1 Identify the patient through signs and symptoms2 Instruct the patient properly3 Collect the first sputum in the morning4 The patient should be standing if possible5 He should take a very deep breath filling his lungs6 He should empty his lungs in one breath coughing as hard and deeply as

he can7 He should spit what he brings up into the jar or sputum cup8 Label the jar or sputum cup with his name and date

After Collection

Check that sufficient amount of sputum has been produced

The sputum of an infected person usually containsa thick mucus air bubblesb threads of fibrinc patches of pusd occasional brownish streaks of blood

Preparation of Sputum Smears

Materials glass slides (new if possible unscratched) inoculating loop or coconut midribs cotton wool plug on metal wire for flaming alarm clock (timer)

Procedure

1 Prepare two slides Take a purulent potion of the sputum one scrath slide using either one sterile inoculating loop or two to form tongs

2 Make the smear as thin as possible covering as large an area as possible tracing concentric circles well separated but not reaching the edges of the slide

Preparation for fixing Sputum Smear

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 27

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Materials sputum smears alcohol lamp match

Procedure of fixing

1 Dry smears in the air2 Fix the smears by passing the slides three times through the flame3 Let it cool before staining

Preparation in Staining using Ziehl-Neelsen (Hot Method)

Principle The tubercule bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis is acid-fast and stains res with Ziehl-Neelsen stain while almost all other organisms stain blue

Materials alcohol lamp match forceps sputum smears cotton wool soaked in 70 ethanol Ziehl-Neelsen reagents denatured alcohol (for burning)

Reagents1 carbol fuchsin2 acid water or acid alcohol3 aqueous methylene blue

Procedure in staining

1 Cover the slides with filtered carbol fuchsin2 Dip the cotton wool swab in the methylated spirit ignite and pass slowly

under the slides to heat them3 As soon as steam begins to rise set the timer at five minutes4 Continue to heat so that the steam is seen but without boiling for five

minutes add more fuchsin immediately to avoid drying5 Wash with tap water or distilled water6 Decolorize with acid water or acid alcohol for one minute7 Wash with tap water8 Counterstain with aqueous methylene blue for thirty seconds or one

minute9 Wash with tap water for one minute10Drain and leave to dry on a slide rack

Examine under Oil Immersion Field

Results

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 28

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 19: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

e Follow-up Check-upf All other pertinent information to promote health and well-being

162 At the end patientrsquos confinement he she is entitled to a brief written summary of the course of his her illness which shall include at least the history physical examination diagnosis medications surgical procedure ancillary and laboratory procedures and the plan of further treatment and which shall be provided by the attending physician

17 POLICIES ON DISCLOSURE OF PATIENTrsquoS INFORMATION

171 The privacy of the patients must be assured at all stages of his her treatment Similarly the patient has the right to be free from unwarranted public exposure EXCEPT in the following cases

a When his her mental or physical condition is in controversy and the appropriate court in its discretion orders him her to submit to a physical or mental examination by a physician

b When the public health and safety so demandc When the patient waives his her rights

172 Any health care provider or practitioner involved in the treatment of the patient and all those who have legitimate access to the patientrsquos record is not authorized to divulge any information to a third party who has no concern with the care and welfare of the patient without his Her consent EXCEPT

a When such disclosure will benefit public health and safetyb When it is in the interest of justice and upon the order of a competent

courtc When patients waives in writing the confidential nature of such

information d When it is needed for continued medical treatment or advancement of

medical science subject to de-identification of patient and shared medical confidentiality for those who have access to the information

1721 Informing the spouse or the family to the first degree of the patientrsquos medical condition may be allowed Provided that the patient of legal age have the right to choose on whom to inform

1722 In case the patient is not of legal age or is mentally incapacitated such information shall be given to the parents legal guardian or his her next of kin

18 ETHICAL CONSIDERATIONS IN THE ADMINISTRATION OF BLOOD

181 The physician should obtain the patients informed consent before administering blood products This includes explaining to the patient the relative benefits and risks of receiving and not receiving the blood product as well as any reasonably viable alternatives

182 Generally in emergency situations where treatment is necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient and consent is not available (because the patient is unconscious or otherwise unable to consent) the physician may administer blood products (and any other treatment) necessary to preserve the life or health of the patient This does not apply if

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 19

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

the patient has expressly refused the treatment before becoming incompetent

183 A competent adult is entitled to refuse or cease any treatment for any reason

184 Parents ordinarily have the responsibility to provide consent on behalf of their young children however it is highly unlikely that parents can refuse life-saving treatment for their children Physicians may not simply override a parents refusal

185 Although it is legally clear that a mentally competent adult is entitled to refuse any medical treatment including a blood transfusion physicians have a responsibility to ensure that the refusal is truly informed and voluntary

186 In the case of adults who were once competent but have become temporarily or permanently incompetent substitute consent laws generally provide that their prior wishes regarding treatment decisions should be respected to the extent that they are known or can be determined

19 LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

191 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for IN-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSDoctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientStaff Nurse Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Proceed to the requesting Ward and collect

blood for the ordered examination Take specimen to the laboratoryExamine specimen Sign the resultRecord the result on its respective logbookRecord the result in PhilHealth logbookEndorse the result to the ward

Nurse On Duty Receive the result Refer the result to the Doctor on Duty

192 Specimens Received for Examination

Forms Needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatientPresent specimen with laboratory request signed by the Physician

Medical Technologist Receive specimen and laboratory requestExamine the specimen

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 20

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Sign the resultRecord the result to the respective logbook Endorse the Result to the Nurse on Duty for In- Patients and Release result to patients in OPD

193 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for OUT-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatient Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Receive the request and collect blood for the

ordered examination Examine specimen Sign the result Record the result on its respective logbook Record the result in OPD logbook Release the result

Patient Take the result to the Physician in OPD

194 Monthly Laboratory Report Census

Form Needed Monthly Report Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSMedical Technologist Record all daily results in the

logbookPrepare Monthly report based on the daily report of examinationsSign the reportGive the report to the OIC of the Laboratory for approval

OIC Laboratory Sign and approve the reportMedical Technologist Release the report

2 Laboratory Uniform

Laboratory uniform is a must on all working days except holidays but must be in laboratory gown when with patients

3 Request Slips

In-patient request slips must be completely filled -up by the nurse medical clerk

Out-patient request slips must be duly signed by the Medical Doctor on Duty assigned in OPD

Only requests from the CLSH Hospital will be honored by the laboratory

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 21

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Examination Performed

A Hematology

1 CBC (Complete Blood Count)2 Platelet Count3 Hemoglobin Test4 Clotting Time5 Bleeding Time

B Clinical Microscopy

1 Urinalysis2 Fecalysis

C Blood Banking and Serology

1 Blood Typing2 Hepatitis B Determination (Qualitative)3 Syphilis (Qualitative)

D Bacteriology

1 Acid fast Staining

E Blood Chemistry

1 Cholesterol2 Triglyceride3 Fasting Blood Sugar4 Blood Uric Acid5 Blood Urea Nitrogen6 Serum Creatinine

5 Reasons for ordering laboratory measurements examinations

a To confirm a clinical impression or establish a diagnosisb To rule out a diagnosisc To monitor therapy (management guide)d To establish prognosise To screen for or detect disease

SPECIMEN COLLECTION

2 General Procedure for Obtaining Blood

1 Skin Puncture2 Venous Puncture

Technique for Venous Puncture

1 Identify the patient2 If fasting is required confirm that fasting order has been followed3 Inform the patient of the procedure to be done

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 22

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Prepare the patient and all equipment needed5 Select a suitable vein for venipuncture Veins of the antecubital fossa in

particular the median cubital and cephalic veins are preferred Wrist ankle and hand veins may also be used If one arm has an intravenous line use the other arm to draw a blood specimen

6 Cleanse the venipuncture site with 70 isopropyl alcohol Allow the arm to dry Do not touch the swabbed area with any unsterile object

7 Apply a tourniquet several inches above the puncture site Never leave the tourniquet in place longer than one minute

8 Anchor the vein firmly both above and below the puncture site Use either the thumb and middle finger or thumb and index finger

9 Perform the venipuncture10Release the tourniquet when blood begins to flow11After all blood has been drawn have the patient relax his or her fist Do

not allow the patient to pump the hand12Place a clean sterile cotton ball lightly over the side Withdraw the needle

then apply pressure to the site13Mix tubes with anticoagulant For syringe-drawn specimens transfer blood

to appropriate tubes taking precautions to avoid hemolyzing the specimens Follow any special handling procedures

14Check condition of the patient whether patient is faint and that bleeding is under control

15Dispose of contaminated material such as needles syringes cotton etc16Deliver tubes of blood for testing to appropriate departments

An additional protocol is important in the venipuncture procedure Follow the recommended ldquoorder of drawrdquo when collecting tubes To avoid contamination draw specimens into non-additive tubes before tubes with additives

17Let the blood sample retract completely before centrifuging Separate serum from clotted blood Make sure proper labeling is observed and practiced

HEMATOLOGY

Preparation and staining of Blood Smears for Diffferential Count

Principle

The examination of the peripheral blood smear is the most important examination one can do in hematological evaluation of a patient

Materials Needed

1 Pricker or lancet2 Microscope slides3 Spreader4 Pencil5 Cotton soaked in alcohol6 Dry cotton

Procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 23

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 Puncture the skin as desired and wipe away the first drop of blood2 Touch the surface of the clean slide to a small drop of blood the drop

should be placed near one end of the slide3 Turn the slide over such that the drop of blood is now on the top side and

the other end of the slide away from the drop of the blood is held by the thumb and forefinger of the left hand The other finger serves to support the slide

4 Pick up another slide and loosely between thumb and forefinger of the right hand

5 The slide in the right hand is called the spreader slide Place the spreader in front of the drop and pull back until it touches the drop

6 As soon as the blood spreads by capillary attraction almost to the edge of the slide push the spreader forwards at an angle of approximately 30-45 degrees using a rapid even motion

Note

The weight of the slide is the only pressure applied the thickness of the spread is controlled by the size of the drop the angle at which the spreader slide is held and the speed of spreading The greater the angle the thicker and shorter is the film

7 Dry the slide in air when dried write the name of the patient and date in the thick end of the blood film using a pencil or at the other side of the slide

Staining for Differential Count

Reagents

Rapid Romanowsky staining using ldquorapi-diffrdquo

Solution A Fixing solution MethanolSolution B Acid dye EosinSolution C Basic dye Methylene blueSolution D Buffer pH 68 phosphate buffer

Procedure

1 Prepare a blood smear and air dry

2 Fix by immersing in Solution A for 30 seconds

3 Transfer without rinsing or drying to Solution B and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

4 Without rinsing transfer the slide to Solution C and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

5 Rinse briefly in buffered water pH 68 and allow to dry

Results Macroscopically

Smear in pinkish violet

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 24

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Normal Values

Neutrophils 40-60

Lymphocytes 20-40

Monocyte 4-8

Eosinophil 1-3

Basophil 0-1

Stab 0-1

Peripheral Blood Smear

Procedure in reading peripheral blood smear

1 Examine the blood smear grossly against the light and note the contour and background color

2 Examine under the low power in order to ascertain the adequacy of the staining and select the best fields for study

3 Note agglutination or rouleaux formation of erythrocytes

4 Examine the slides systematically starting at the thin end In this way reduplication of the field is avoided Fields should be avoided in which the red cells are stacked up or are in rouleaux and fields should be examined in which the red cells are well separated and the white cells thinly spread

5 Examine the erythrocytes and note variations in size shape color hemoglobin content abnormal objects in cytoplasm and number of nucleated red cells per 100 leukocytes

6 Examine the WBC and study the morphology

CLINICAL MICROSCOPY

Routine Urinalysis

I Organization of Work

Steps Multistix Test

1 Agitate the urine container Examine the urine with regards to color and transparency

2 Fill the centrifuge tube with the urine

3 Dip a multistix strip into the tube and determine the following by comparing with test chart after specific reading time

a Specific Gravity - 45 ndash 60 seconds

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 25

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

b Ph - time not criticalc Protein - read immediatelyd Glucose - 10 ndash 30 seconds

II Microscopic Examination

Procedure

1 Mix the urine well first and obtain a few cc into a test tube2 Centrifuge urine for five minutes3 Decant the supernatant liquid in a quick motion so that the

sediments are left at the bottom of the test tube4 Place in a clean slide5 Examine under the microscope (regulate lighting by adjusting the

substage diaphragm)6 Focus first at low power then shift to the high power objective

Report as follows

1 RBC and WBC ndash average cells hpf2 Casts ndash average casts per hpf3 Epithelial Cells lpf or accasional few moderate abundant4 Crystals lpf are rare few moderate abundant

Fecalysis

I Macroscopic or Physical Examination

1 Form Consistency and Size

2 Color

II Direct fecal Smear

Procedure

1 Place a drop of saline on the slide2 Using an applicator stick take a small portion of the stool

Formed ndash take the portion from well inside the sampleMucus or watery ndash take the portion from the bloodstained mucus on the surface or from the surface of the liquid

3 mix the sample with the drop of saline on the slide4 Examine the specimen under LPO then shift to HPO5 Report as follows

Normal No Parasite seenMucous Normal - a very small amount

Blood - no blood present

BACTERIOLOGY

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 26

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

SPUTUM EXAMINATION

Acid Fast Bacilli

Signs and symptoms of Asymptomatic Patient

1 Cough for 2 weeks duration or more2 Chest and upper back pains for one month duration or more3 Hemoptysis or blood streaking4 On and off afternoon fever for one month duration or more5 Regressive loss of weight

Collection of specimen

1 Identify the patient through signs and symptoms2 Instruct the patient properly3 Collect the first sputum in the morning4 The patient should be standing if possible5 He should take a very deep breath filling his lungs6 He should empty his lungs in one breath coughing as hard and deeply as

he can7 He should spit what he brings up into the jar or sputum cup8 Label the jar or sputum cup with his name and date

After Collection

Check that sufficient amount of sputum has been produced

The sputum of an infected person usually containsa thick mucus air bubblesb threads of fibrinc patches of pusd occasional brownish streaks of blood

Preparation of Sputum Smears

Materials glass slides (new if possible unscratched) inoculating loop or coconut midribs cotton wool plug on metal wire for flaming alarm clock (timer)

Procedure

1 Prepare two slides Take a purulent potion of the sputum one scrath slide using either one sterile inoculating loop or two to form tongs

2 Make the smear as thin as possible covering as large an area as possible tracing concentric circles well separated but not reaching the edges of the slide

Preparation for fixing Sputum Smear

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 27

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Materials sputum smears alcohol lamp match

Procedure of fixing

1 Dry smears in the air2 Fix the smears by passing the slides three times through the flame3 Let it cool before staining

Preparation in Staining using Ziehl-Neelsen (Hot Method)

Principle The tubercule bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis is acid-fast and stains res with Ziehl-Neelsen stain while almost all other organisms stain blue

Materials alcohol lamp match forceps sputum smears cotton wool soaked in 70 ethanol Ziehl-Neelsen reagents denatured alcohol (for burning)

Reagents1 carbol fuchsin2 acid water or acid alcohol3 aqueous methylene blue

Procedure in staining

1 Cover the slides with filtered carbol fuchsin2 Dip the cotton wool swab in the methylated spirit ignite and pass slowly

under the slides to heat them3 As soon as steam begins to rise set the timer at five minutes4 Continue to heat so that the steam is seen but without boiling for five

minutes add more fuchsin immediately to avoid drying5 Wash with tap water or distilled water6 Decolorize with acid water or acid alcohol for one minute7 Wash with tap water8 Counterstain with aqueous methylene blue for thirty seconds or one

minute9 Wash with tap water for one minute10Drain and leave to dry on a slide rack

Examine under Oil Immersion Field

Results

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 28

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 20: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

the patient has expressly refused the treatment before becoming incompetent

183 A competent adult is entitled to refuse or cease any treatment for any reason

184 Parents ordinarily have the responsibility to provide consent on behalf of their young children however it is highly unlikely that parents can refuse life-saving treatment for their children Physicians may not simply override a parents refusal

185 Although it is legally clear that a mentally competent adult is entitled to refuse any medical treatment including a blood transfusion physicians have a responsibility to ensure that the refusal is truly informed and voluntary

186 In the case of adults who were once competent but have become temporarily or permanently incompetent substitute consent laws generally provide that their prior wishes regarding treatment decisions should be respected to the extent that they are known or can be determined

19 LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

191 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for IN-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSDoctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientStaff Nurse Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Proceed to the requesting Ward and collect

blood for the ordered examination Take specimen to the laboratoryExamine specimen Sign the resultRecord the result on its respective logbookRecord the result in PhilHealth logbookEndorse the result to the ward

Nurse On Duty Receive the result Refer the result to the Doctor on Duty

192 Specimens Received for Examination

Forms Needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatientPresent specimen with laboratory request signed by the Physician

Medical Technologist Receive specimen and laboratory requestExamine the specimen

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 20

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Sign the resultRecord the result to the respective logbook Endorse the Result to the Nurse on Duty for In- Patients and Release result to patients in OPD

193 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for OUT-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatient Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Receive the request and collect blood for the

ordered examination Examine specimen Sign the result Record the result on its respective logbook Record the result in OPD logbook Release the result

Patient Take the result to the Physician in OPD

194 Monthly Laboratory Report Census

Form Needed Monthly Report Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSMedical Technologist Record all daily results in the

logbookPrepare Monthly report based on the daily report of examinationsSign the reportGive the report to the OIC of the Laboratory for approval

OIC Laboratory Sign and approve the reportMedical Technologist Release the report

2 Laboratory Uniform

Laboratory uniform is a must on all working days except holidays but must be in laboratory gown when with patients

3 Request Slips

In-patient request slips must be completely filled -up by the nurse medical clerk

Out-patient request slips must be duly signed by the Medical Doctor on Duty assigned in OPD

Only requests from the CLSH Hospital will be honored by the laboratory

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 21

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Examination Performed

A Hematology

1 CBC (Complete Blood Count)2 Platelet Count3 Hemoglobin Test4 Clotting Time5 Bleeding Time

B Clinical Microscopy

1 Urinalysis2 Fecalysis

C Blood Banking and Serology

1 Blood Typing2 Hepatitis B Determination (Qualitative)3 Syphilis (Qualitative)

D Bacteriology

1 Acid fast Staining

E Blood Chemistry

1 Cholesterol2 Triglyceride3 Fasting Blood Sugar4 Blood Uric Acid5 Blood Urea Nitrogen6 Serum Creatinine

5 Reasons for ordering laboratory measurements examinations

a To confirm a clinical impression or establish a diagnosisb To rule out a diagnosisc To monitor therapy (management guide)d To establish prognosise To screen for or detect disease

SPECIMEN COLLECTION

2 General Procedure for Obtaining Blood

1 Skin Puncture2 Venous Puncture

Technique for Venous Puncture

1 Identify the patient2 If fasting is required confirm that fasting order has been followed3 Inform the patient of the procedure to be done

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 22

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Prepare the patient and all equipment needed5 Select a suitable vein for venipuncture Veins of the antecubital fossa in

particular the median cubital and cephalic veins are preferred Wrist ankle and hand veins may also be used If one arm has an intravenous line use the other arm to draw a blood specimen

6 Cleanse the venipuncture site with 70 isopropyl alcohol Allow the arm to dry Do not touch the swabbed area with any unsterile object

7 Apply a tourniquet several inches above the puncture site Never leave the tourniquet in place longer than one minute

8 Anchor the vein firmly both above and below the puncture site Use either the thumb and middle finger or thumb and index finger

9 Perform the venipuncture10Release the tourniquet when blood begins to flow11After all blood has been drawn have the patient relax his or her fist Do

not allow the patient to pump the hand12Place a clean sterile cotton ball lightly over the side Withdraw the needle

then apply pressure to the site13Mix tubes with anticoagulant For syringe-drawn specimens transfer blood

to appropriate tubes taking precautions to avoid hemolyzing the specimens Follow any special handling procedures

14Check condition of the patient whether patient is faint and that bleeding is under control

15Dispose of contaminated material such as needles syringes cotton etc16Deliver tubes of blood for testing to appropriate departments

An additional protocol is important in the venipuncture procedure Follow the recommended ldquoorder of drawrdquo when collecting tubes To avoid contamination draw specimens into non-additive tubes before tubes with additives

17Let the blood sample retract completely before centrifuging Separate serum from clotted blood Make sure proper labeling is observed and practiced

HEMATOLOGY

Preparation and staining of Blood Smears for Diffferential Count

Principle

The examination of the peripheral blood smear is the most important examination one can do in hematological evaluation of a patient

Materials Needed

1 Pricker or lancet2 Microscope slides3 Spreader4 Pencil5 Cotton soaked in alcohol6 Dry cotton

Procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 23

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 Puncture the skin as desired and wipe away the first drop of blood2 Touch the surface of the clean slide to a small drop of blood the drop

should be placed near one end of the slide3 Turn the slide over such that the drop of blood is now on the top side and

the other end of the slide away from the drop of the blood is held by the thumb and forefinger of the left hand The other finger serves to support the slide

4 Pick up another slide and loosely between thumb and forefinger of the right hand

5 The slide in the right hand is called the spreader slide Place the spreader in front of the drop and pull back until it touches the drop

6 As soon as the blood spreads by capillary attraction almost to the edge of the slide push the spreader forwards at an angle of approximately 30-45 degrees using a rapid even motion

Note

The weight of the slide is the only pressure applied the thickness of the spread is controlled by the size of the drop the angle at which the spreader slide is held and the speed of spreading The greater the angle the thicker and shorter is the film

7 Dry the slide in air when dried write the name of the patient and date in the thick end of the blood film using a pencil or at the other side of the slide

Staining for Differential Count

Reagents

Rapid Romanowsky staining using ldquorapi-diffrdquo

Solution A Fixing solution MethanolSolution B Acid dye EosinSolution C Basic dye Methylene blueSolution D Buffer pH 68 phosphate buffer

Procedure

1 Prepare a blood smear and air dry

2 Fix by immersing in Solution A for 30 seconds

3 Transfer without rinsing or drying to Solution B and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

4 Without rinsing transfer the slide to Solution C and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

5 Rinse briefly in buffered water pH 68 and allow to dry

Results Macroscopically

Smear in pinkish violet

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 24

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Normal Values

Neutrophils 40-60

Lymphocytes 20-40

Monocyte 4-8

Eosinophil 1-3

Basophil 0-1

Stab 0-1

Peripheral Blood Smear

Procedure in reading peripheral blood smear

1 Examine the blood smear grossly against the light and note the contour and background color

2 Examine under the low power in order to ascertain the adequacy of the staining and select the best fields for study

3 Note agglutination or rouleaux formation of erythrocytes

4 Examine the slides systematically starting at the thin end In this way reduplication of the field is avoided Fields should be avoided in which the red cells are stacked up or are in rouleaux and fields should be examined in which the red cells are well separated and the white cells thinly spread

5 Examine the erythrocytes and note variations in size shape color hemoglobin content abnormal objects in cytoplasm and number of nucleated red cells per 100 leukocytes

6 Examine the WBC and study the morphology

CLINICAL MICROSCOPY

Routine Urinalysis

I Organization of Work

Steps Multistix Test

1 Agitate the urine container Examine the urine with regards to color and transparency

2 Fill the centrifuge tube with the urine

3 Dip a multistix strip into the tube and determine the following by comparing with test chart after specific reading time

a Specific Gravity - 45 ndash 60 seconds

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 25

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

b Ph - time not criticalc Protein - read immediatelyd Glucose - 10 ndash 30 seconds

II Microscopic Examination

Procedure

1 Mix the urine well first and obtain a few cc into a test tube2 Centrifuge urine for five minutes3 Decant the supernatant liquid in a quick motion so that the

sediments are left at the bottom of the test tube4 Place in a clean slide5 Examine under the microscope (regulate lighting by adjusting the

substage diaphragm)6 Focus first at low power then shift to the high power objective

Report as follows

1 RBC and WBC ndash average cells hpf2 Casts ndash average casts per hpf3 Epithelial Cells lpf or accasional few moderate abundant4 Crystals lpf are rare few moderate abundant

Fecalysis

I Macroscopic or Physical Examination

1 Form Consistency and Size

2 Color

II Direct fecal Smear

Procedure

1 Place a drop of saline on the slide2 Using an applicator stick take a small portion of the stool

Formed ndash take the portion from well inside the sampleMucus or watery ndash take the portion from the bloodstained mucus on the surface or from the surface of the liquid

3 mix the sample with the drop of saline on the slide4 Examine the specimen under LPO then shift to HPO5 Report as follows

Normal No Parasite seenMucous Normal - a very small amount

Blood - no blood present

BACTERIOLOGY

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 26

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

SPUTUM EXAMINATION

Acid Fast Bacilli

Signs and symptoms of Asymptomatic Patient

1 Cough for 2 weeks duration or more2 Chest and upper back pains for one month duration or more3 Hemoptysis or blood streaking4 On and off afternoon fever for one month duration or more5 Regressive loss of weight

Collection of specimen

1 Identify the patient through signs and symptoms2 Instruct the patient properly3 Collect the first sputum in the morning4 The patient should be standing if possible5 He should take a very deep breath filling his lungs6 He should empty his lungs in one breath coughing as hard and deeply as

he can7 He should spit what he brings up into the jar or sputum cup8 Label the jar or sputum cup with his name and date

After Collection

Check that sufficient amount of sputum has been produced

The sputum of an infected person usually containsa thick mucus air bubblesb threads of fibrinc patches of pusd occasional brownish streaks of blood

Preparation of Sputum Smears

Materials glass slides (new if possible unscratched) inoculating loop or coconut midribs cotton wool plug on metal wire for flaming alarm clock (timer)

Procedure

1 Prepare two slides Take a purulent potion of the sputum one scrath slide using either one sterile inoculating loop or two to form tongs

2 Make the smear as thin as possible covering as large an area as possible tracing concentric circles well separated but not reaching the edges of the slide

Preparation for fixing Sputum Smear

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 27

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Materials sputum smears alcohol lamp match

Procedure of fixing

1 Dry smears in the air2 Fix the smears by passing the slides three times through the flame3 Let it cool before staining

Preparation in Staining using Ziehl-Neelsen (Hot Method)

Principle The tubercule bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis is acid-fast and stains res with Ziehl-Neelsen stain while almost all other organisms stain blue

Materials alcohol lamp match forceps sputum smears cotton wool soaked in 70 ethanol Ziehl-Neelsen reagents denatured alcohol (for burning)

Reagents1 carbol fuchsin2 acid water or acid alcohol3 aqueous methylene blue

Procedure in staining

1 Cover the slides with filtered carbol fuchsin2 Dip the cotton wool swab in the methylated spirit ignite and pass slowly

under the slides to heat them3 As soon as steam begins to rise set the timer at five minutes4 Continue to heat so that the steam is seen but without boiling for five

minutes add more fuchsin immediately to avoid drying5 Wash with tap water or distilled water6 Decolorize with acid water or acid alcohol for one minute7 Wash with tap water8 Counterstain with aqueous methylene blue for thirty seconds or one

minute9 Wash with tap water for one minute10Drain and leave to dry on a slide rack

Examine under Oil Immersion Field

Results

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 28

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 21: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Sign the resultRecord the result to the respective logbook Endorse the Result to the Nurse on Duty for In- Patients and Release result to patients in OPD

193 REQUEST FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION for OUT-PATIENTS

Form needed Request Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPS

Doctor On Duty Orders Laboratory Examination for the PatientPatient Give the request to the LaboratoryMedcial Technologist Receive the request and collect blood for the

ordered examination Examine specimen Sign the result Record the result on its respective logbook Record the result in OPD logbook Release the result

Patient Take the result to the Physician in OPD

194 Monthly Laboratory Report Census

Form Needed Monthly Report Form

UNIT OR POSITION STEPSMedical Technologist Record all daily results in the

logbookPrepare Monthly report based on the daily report of examinationsSign the reportGive the report to the OIC of the Laboratory for approval

OIC Laboratory Sign and approve the reportMedical Technologist Release the report

2 Laboratory Uniform

Laboratory uniform is a must on all working days except holidays but must be in laboratory gown when with patients

3 Request Slips

In-patient request slips must be completely filled -up by the nurse medical clerk

Out-patient request slips must be duly signed by the Medical Doctor on Duty assigned in OPD

Only requests from the CLSH Hospital will be honored by the laboratory

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 21

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Examination Performed

A Hematology

1 CBC (Complete Blood Count)2 Platelet Count3 Hemoglobin Test4 Clotting Time5 Bleeding Time

B Clinical Microscopy

1 Urinalysis2 Fecalysis

C Blood Banking and Serology

1 Blood Typing2 Hepatitis B Determination (Qualitative)3 Syphilis (Qualitative)

D Bacteriology

1 Acid fast Staining

E Blood Chemistry

1 Cholesterol2 Triglyceride3 Fasting Blood Sugar4 Blood Uric Acid5 Blood Urea Nitrogen6 Serum Creatinine

5 Reasons for ordering laboratory measurements examinations

a To confirm a clinical impression or establish a diagnosisb To rule out a diagnosisc To monitor therapy (management guide)d To establish prognosise To screen for or detect disease

SPECIMEN COLLECTION

2 General Procedure for Obtaining Blood

1 Skin Puncture2 Venous Puncture

Technique for Venous Puncture

1 Identify the patient2 If fasting is required confirm that fasting order has been followed3 Inform the patient of the procedure to be done

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 22

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Prepare the patient and all equipment needed5 Select a suitable vein for venipuncture Veins of the antecubital fossa in

particular the median cubital and cephalic veins are preferred Wrist ankle and hand veins may also be used If one arm has an intravenous line use the other arm to draw a blood specimen

6 Cleanse the venipuncture site with 70 isopropyl alcohol Allow the arm to dry Do not touch the swabbed area with any unsterile object

7 Apply a tourniquet several inches above the puncture site Never leave the tourniquet in place longer than one minute

8 Anchor the vein firmly both above and below the puncture site Use either the thumb and middle finger or thumb and index finger

9 Perform the venipuncture10Release the tourniquet when blood begins to flow11After all blood has been drawn have the patient relax his or her fist Do

not allow the patient to pump the hand12Place a clean sterile cotton ball lightly over the side Withdraw the needle

then apply pressure to the site13Mix tubes with anticoagulant For syringe-drawn specimens transfer blood

to appropriate tubes taking precautions to avoid hemolyzing the specimens Follow any special handling procedures

14Check condition of the patient whether patient is faint and that bleeding is under control

15Dispose of contaminated material such as needles syringes cotton etc16Deliver tubes of blood for testing to appropriate departments

An additional protocol is important in the venipuncture procedure Follow the recommended ldquoorder of drawrdquo when collecting tubes To avoid contamination draw specimens into non-additive tubes before tubes with additives

17Let the blood sample retract completely before centrifuging Separate serum from clotted blood Make sure proper labeling is observed and practiced

HEMATOLOGY

Preparation and staining of Blood Smears for Diffferential Count

Principle

The examination of the peripheral blood smear is the most important examination one can do in hematological evaluation of a patient

Materials Needed

1 Pricker or lancet2 Microscope slides3 Spreader4 Pencil5 Cotton soaked in alcohol6 Dry cotton

Procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 23

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 Puncture the skin as desired and wipe away the first drop of blood2 Touch the surface of the clean slide to a small drop of blood the drop

should be placed near one end of the slide3 Turn the slide over such that the drop of blood is now on the top side and

the other end of the slide away from the drop of the blood is held by the thumb and forefinger of the left hand The other finger serves to support the slide

4 Pick up another slide and loosely between thumb and forefinger of the right hand

5 The slide in the right hand is called the spreader slide Place the spreader in front of the drop and pull back until it touches the drop

6 As soon as the blood spreads by capillary attraction almost to the edge of the slide push the spreader forwards at an angle of approximately 30-45 degrees using a rapid even motion

Note

The weight of the slide is the only pressure applied the thickness of the spread is controlled by the size of the drop the angle at which the spreader slide is held and the speed of spreading The greater the angle the thicker and shorter is the film

7 Dry the slide in air when dried write the name of the patient and date in the thick end of the blood film using a pencil or at the other side of the slide

Staining for Differential Count

Reagents

Rapid Romanowsky staining using ldquorapi-diffrdquo

Solution A Fixing solution MethanolSolution B Acid dye EosinSolution C Basic dye Methylene blueSolution D Buffer pH 68 phosphate buffer

Procedure

1 Prepare a blood smear and air dry

2 Fix by immersing in Solution A for 30 seconds

3 Transfer without rinsing or drying to Solution B and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

4 Without rinsing transfer the slide to Solution C and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

5 Rinse briefly in buffered water pH 68 and allow to dry

Results Macroscopically

Smear in pinkish violet

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 24

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Normal Values

Neutrophils 40-60

Lymphocytes 20-40

Monocyte 4-8

Eosinophil 1-3

Basophil 0-1

Stab 0-1

Peripheral Blood Smear

Procedure in reading peripheral blood smear

1 Examine the blood smear grossly against the light and note the contour and background color

2 Examine under the low power in order to ascertain the adequacy of the staining and select the best fields for study

3 Note agglutination or rouleaux formation of erythrocytes

4 Examine the slides systematically starting at the thin end In this way reduplication of the field is avoided Fields should be avoided in which the red cells are stacked up or are in rouleaux and fields should be examined in which the red cells are well separated and the white cells thinly spread

5 Examine the erythrocytes and note variations in size shape color hemoglobin content abnormal objects in cytoplasm and number of nucleated red cells per 100 leukocytes

6 Examine the WBC and study the morphology

CLINICAL MICROSCOPY

Routine Urinalysis

I Organization of Work

Steps Multistix Test

1 Agitate the urine container Examine the urine with regards to color and transparency

2 Fill the centrifuge tube with the urine

3 Dip a multistix strip into the tube and determine the following by comparing with test chart after specific reading time

a Specific Gravity - 45 ndash 60 seconds

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 25

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

b Ph - time not criticalc Protein - read immediatelyd Glucose - 10 ndash 30 seconds

II Microscopic Examination

Procedure

1 Mix the urine well first and obtain a few cc into a test tube2 Centrifuge urine for five minutes3 Decant the supernatant liquid in a quick motion so that the

sediments are left at the bottom of the test tube4 Place in a clean slide5 Examine under the microscope (regulate lighting by adjusting the

substage diaphragm)6 Focus first at low power then shift to the high power objective

Report as follows

1 RBC and WBC ndash average cells hpf2 Casts ndash average casts per hpf3 Epithelial Cells lpf or accasional few moderate abundant4 Crystals lpf are rare few moderate abundant

Fecalysis

I Macroscopic or Physical Examination

1 Form Consistency and Size

2 Color

II Direct fecal Smear

Procedure

1 Place a drop of saline on the slide2 Using an applicator stick take a small portion of the stool

Formed ndash take the portion from well inside the sampleMucus or watery ndash take the portion from the bloodstained mucus on the surface or from the surface of the liquid

3 mix the sample with the drop of saline on the slide4 Examine the specimen under LPO then shift to HPO5 Report as follows

Normal No Parasite seenMucous Normal - a very small amount

Blood - no blood present

BACTERIOLOGY

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 26

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

SPUTUM EXAMINATION

Acid Fast Bacilli

Signs and symptoms of Asymptomatic Patient

1 Cough for 2 weeks duration or more2 Chest and upper back pains for one month duration or more3 Hemoptysis or blood streaking4 On and off afternoon fever for one month duration or more5 Regressive loss of weight

Collection of specimen

1 Identify the patient through signs and symptoms2 Instruct the patient properly3 Collect the first sputum in the morning4 The patient should be standing if possible5 He should take a very deep breath filling his lungs6 He should empty his lungs in one breath coughing as hard and deeply as

he can7 He should spit what he brings up into the jar or sputum cup8 Label the jar or sputum cup with his name and date

After Collection

Check that sufficient amount of sputum has been produced

The sputum of an infected person usually containsa thick mucus air bubblesb threads of fibrinc patches of pusd occasional brownish streaks of blood

Preparation of Sputum Smears

Materials glass slides (new if possible unscratched) inoculating loop or coconut midribs cotton wool plug on metal wire for flaming alarm clock (timer)

Procedure

1 Prepare two slides Take a purulent potion of the sputum one scrath slide using either one sterile inoculating loop or two to form tongs

2 Make the smear as thin as possible covering as large an area as possible tracing concentric circles well separated but not reaching the edges of the slide

Preparation for fixing Sputum Smear

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 27

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Materials sputum smears alcohol lamp match

Procedure of fixing

1 Dry smears in the air2 Fix the smears by passing the slides three times through the flame3 Let it cool before staining

Preparation in Staining using Ziehl-Neelsen (Hot Method)

Principle The tubercule bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis is acid-fast and stains res with Ziehl-Neelsen stain while almost all other organisms stain blue

Materials alcohol lamp match forceps sputum smears cotton wool soaked in 70 ethanol Ziehl-Neelsen reagents denatured alcohol (for burning)

Reagents1 carbol fuchsin2 acid water or acid alcohol3 aqueous methylene blue

Procedure in staining

1 Cover the slides with filtered carbol fuchsin2 Dip the cotton wool swab in the methylated spirit ignite and pass slowly

under the slides to heat them3 As soon as steam begins to rise set the timer at five minutes4 Continue to heat so that the steam is seen but without boiling for five

minutes add more fuchsin immediately to avoid drying5 Wash with tap water or distilled water6 Decolorize with acid water or acid alcohol for one minute7 Wash with tap water8 Counterstain with aqueous methylene blue for thirty seconds or one

minute9 Wash with tap water for one minute10Drain and leave to dry on a slide rack

Examine under Oil Immersion Field

Results

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 28

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 22: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Examination Performed

A Hematology

1 CBC (Complete Blood Count)2 Platelet Count3 Hemoglobin Test4 Clotting Time5 Bleeding Time

B Clinical Microscopy

1 Urinalysis2 Fecalysis

C Blood Banking and Serology

1 Blood Typing2 Hepatitis B Determination (Qualitative)3 Syphilis (Qualitative)

D Bacteriology

1 Acid fast Staining

E Blood Chemistry

1 Cholesterol2 Triglyceride3 Fasting Blood Sugar4 Blood Uric Acid5 Blood Urea Nitrogen6 Serum Creatinine

5 Reasons for ordering laboratory measurements examinations

a To confirm a clinical impression or establish a diagnosisb To rule out a diagnosisc To monitor therapy (management guide)d To establish prognosise To screen for or detect disease

SPECIMEN COLLECTION

2 General Procedure for Obtaining Blood

1 Skin Puncture2 Venous Puncture

Technique for Venous Puncture

1 Identify the patient2 If fasting is required confirm that fasting order has been followed3 Inform the patient of the procedure to be done

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 22

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Prepare the patient and all equipment needed5 Select a suitable vein for venipuncture Veins of the antecubital fossa in

particular the median cubital and cephalic veins are preferred Wrist ankle and hand veins may also be used If one arm has an intravenous line use the other arm to draw a blood specimen

6 Cleanse the venipuncture site with 70 isopropyl alcohol Allow the arm to dry Do not touch the swabbed area with any unsterile object

7 Apply a tourniquet several inches above the puncture site Never leave the tourniquet in place longer than one minute

8 Anchor the vein firmly both above and below the puncture site Use either the thumb and middle finger or thumb and index finger

9 Perform the venipuncture10Release the tourniquet when blood begins to flow11After all blood has been drawn have the patient relax his or her fist Do

not allow the patient to pump the hand12Place a clean sterile cotton ball lightly over the side Withdraw the needle

then apply pressure to the site13Mix tubes with anticoagulant For syringe-drawn specimens transfer blood

to appropriate tubes taking precautions to avoid hemolyzing the specimens Follow any special handling procedures

14Check condition of the patient whether patient is faint and that bleeding is under control

15Dispose of contaminated material such as needles syringes cotton etc16Deliver tubes of blood for testing to appropriate departments

An additional protocol is important in the venipuncture procedure Follow the recommended ldquoorder of drawrdquo when collecting tubes To avoid contamination draw specimens into non-additive tubes before tubes with additives

17Let the blood sample retract completely before centrifuging Separate serum from clotted blood Make sure proper labeling is observed and practiced

HEMATOLOGY

Preparation and staining of Blood Smears for Diffferential Count

Principle

The examination of the peripheral blood smear is the most important examination one can do in hematological evaluation of a patient

Materials Needed

1 Pricker or lancet2 Microscope slides3 Spreader4 Pencil5 Cotton soaked in alcohol6 Dry cotton

Procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 23

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 Puncture the skin as desired and wipe away the first drop of blood2 Touch the surface of the clean slide to a small drop of blood the drop

should be placed near one end of the slide3 Turn the slide over such that the drop of blood is now on the top side and

the other end of the slide away from the drop of the blood is held by the thumb and forefinger of the left hand The other finger serves to support the slide

4 Pick up another slide and loosely between thumb and forefinger of the right hand

5 The slide in the right hand is called the spreader slide Place the spreader in front of the drop and pull back until it touches the drop

6 As soon as the blood spreads by capillary attraction almost to the edge of the slide push the spreader forwards at an angle of approximately 30-45 degrees using a rapid even motion

Note

The weight of the slide is the only pressure applied the thickness of the spread is controlled by the size of the drop the angle at which the spreader slide is held and the speed of spreading The greater the angle the thicker and shorter is the film

7 Dry the slide in air when dried write the name of the patient and date in the thick end of the blood film using a pencil or at the other side of the slide

Staining for Differential Count

Reagents

Rapid Romanowsky staining using ldquorapi-diffrdquo

Solution A Fixing solution MethanolSolution B Acid dye EosinSolution C Basic dye Methylene blueSolution D Buffer pH 68 phosphate buffer

Procedure

1 Prepare a blood smear and air dry

2 Fix by immersing in Solution A for 30 seconds

3 Transfer without rinsing or drying to Solution B and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

4 Without rinsing transfer the slide to Solution C and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

5 Rinse briefly in buffered water pH 68 and allow to dry

Results Macroscopically

Smear in pinkish violet

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 24

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Normal Values

Neutrophils 40-60

Lymphocytes 20-40

Monocyte 4-8

Eosinophil 1-3

Basophil 0-1

Stab 0-1

Peripheral Blood Smear

Procedure in reading peripheral blood smear

1 Examine the blood smear grossly against the light and note the contour and background color

2 Examine under the low power in order to ascertain the adequacy of the staining and select the best fields for study

3 Note agglutination or rouleaux formation of erythrocytes

4 Examine the slides systematically starting at the thin end In this way reduplication of the field is avoided Fields should be avoided in which the red cells are stacked up or are in rouleaux and fields should be examined in which the red cells are well separated and the white cells thinly spread

5 Examine the erythrocytes and note variations in size shape color hemoglobin content abnormal objects in cytoplasm and number of nucleated red cells per 100 leukocytes

6 Examine the WBC and study the morphology

CLINICAL MICROSCOPY

Routine Urinalysis

I Organization of Work

Steps Multistix Test

1 Agitate the urine container Examine the urine with regards to color and transparency

2 Fill the centrifuge tube with the urine

3 Dip a multistix strip into the tube and determine the following by comparing with test chart after specific reading time

a Specific Gravity - 45 ndash 60 seconds

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 25

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

b Ph - time not criticalc Protein - read immediatelyd Glucose - 10 ndash 30 seconds

II Microscopic Examination

Procedure

1 Mix the urine well first and obtain a few cc into a test tube2 Centrifuge urine for five minutes3 Decant the supernatant liquid in a quick motion so that the

sediments are left at the bottom of the test tube4 Place in a clean slide5 Examine under the microscope (regulate lighting by adjusting the

substage diaphragm)6 Focus first at low power then shift to the high power objective

Report as follows

1 RBC and WBC ndash average cells hpf2 Casts ndash average casts per hpf3 Epithelial Cells lpf or accasional few moderate abundant4 Crystals lpf are rare few moderate abundant

Fecalysis

I Macroscopic or Physical Examination

1 Form Consistency and Size

2 Color

II Direct fecal Smear

Procedure

1 Place a drop of saline on the slide2 Using an applicator stick take a small portion of the stool

Formed ndash take the portion from well inside the sampleMucus or watery ndash take the portion from the bloodstained mucus on the surface or from the surface of the liquid

3 mix the sample with the drop of saline on the slide4 Examine the specimen under LPO then shift to HPO5 Report as follows

Normal No Parasite seenMucous Normal - a very small amount

Blood - no blood present

BACTERIOLOGY

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 26

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

SPUTUM EXAMINATION

Acid Fast Bacilli

Signs and symptoms of Asymptomatic Patient

1 Cough for 2 weeks duration or more2 Chest and upper back pains for one month duration or more3 Hemoptysis or blood streaking4 On and off afternoon fever for one month duration or more5 Regressive loss of weight

Collection of specimen

1 Identify the patient through signs and symptoms2 Instruct the patient properly3 Collect the first sputum in the morning4 The patient should be standing if possible5 He should take a very deep breath filling his lungs6 He should empty his lungs in one breath coughing as hard and deeply as

he can7 He should spit what he brings up into the jar or sputum cup8 Label the jar or sputum cup with his name and date

After Collection

Check that sufficient amount of sputum has been produced

The sputum of an infected person usually containsa thick mucus air bubblesb threads of fibrinc patches of pusd occasional brownish streaks of blood

Preparation of Sputum Smears

Materials glass slides (new if possible unscratched) inoculating loop or coconut midribs cotton wool plug on metal wire for flaming alarm clock (timer)

Procedure

1 Prepare two slides Take a purulent potion of the sputum one scrath slide using either one sterile inoculating loop or two to form tongs

2 Make the smear as thin as possible covering as large an area as possible tracing concentric circles well separated but not reaching the edges of the slide

Preparation for fixing Sputum Smear

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 27

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Materials sputum smears alcohol lamp match

Procedure of fixing

1 Dry smears in the air2 Fix the smears by passing the slides three times through the flame3 Let it cool before staining

Preparation in Staining using Ziehl-Neelsen (Hot Method)

Principle The tubercule bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis is acid-fast and stains res with Ziehl-Neelsen stain while almost all other organisms stain blue

Materials alcohol lamp match forceps sputum smears cotton wool soaked in 70 ethanol Ziehl-Neelsen reagents denatured alcohol (for burning)

Reagents1 carbol fuchsin2 acid water or acid alcohol3 aqueous methylene blue

Procedure in staining

1 Cover the slides with filtered carbol fuchsin2 Dip the cotton wool swab in the methylated spirit ignite and pass slowly

under the slides to heat them3 As soon as steam begins to rise set the timer at five minutes4 Continue to heat so that the steam is seen but without boiling for five

minutes add more fuchsin immediately to avoid drying5 Wash with tap water or distilled water6 Decolorize with acid water or acid alcohol for one minute7 Wash with tap water8 Counterstain with aqueous methylene blue for thirty seconds or one

minute9 Wash with tap water for one minute10Drain and leave to dry on a slide rack

Examine under Oil Immersion Field

Results

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 28

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 23: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 Prepare the patient and all equipment needed5 Select a suitable vein for venipuncture Veins of the antecubital fossa in

particular the median cubital and cephalic veins are preferred Wrist ankle and hand veins may also be used If one arm has an intravenous line use the other arm to draw a blood specimen

6 Cleanse the venipuncture site with 70 isopropyl alcohol Allow the arm to dry Do not touch the swabbed area with any unsterile object

7 Apply a tourniquet several inches above the puncture site Never leave the tourniquet in place longer than one minute

8 Anchor the vein firmly both above and below the puncture site Use either the thumb and middle finger or thumb and index finger

9 Perform the venipuncture10Release the tourniquet when blood begins to flow11After all blood has been drawn have the patient relax his or her fist Do

not allow the patient to pump the hand12Place a clean sterile cotton ball lightly over the side Withdraw the needle

then apply pressure to the site13Mix tubes with anticoagulant For syringe-drawn specimens transfer blood

to appropriate tubes taking precautions to avoid hemolyzing the specimens Follow any special handling procedures

14Check condition of the patient whether patient is faint and that bleeding is under control

15Dispose of contaminated material such as needles syringes cotton etc16Deliver tubes of blood for testing to appropriate departments

An additional protocol is important in the venipuncture procedure Follow the recommended ldquoorder of drawrdquo when collecting tubes To avoid contamination draw specimens into non-additive tubes before tubes with additives

17Let the blood sample retract completely before centrifuging Separate serum from clotted blood Make sure proper labeling is observed and practiced

HEMATOLOGY

Preparation and staining of Blood Smears for Diffferential Count

Principle

The examination of the peripheral blood smear is the most important examination one can do in hematological evaluation of a patient

Materials Needed

1 Pricker or lancet2 Microscope slides3 Spreader4 Pencil5 Cotton soaked in alcohol6 Dry cotton

Procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 23

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 Puncture the skin as desired and wipe away the first drop of blood2 Touch the surface of the clean slide to a small drop of blood the drop

should be placed near one end of the slide3 Turn the slide over such that the drop of blood is now on the top side and

the other end of the slide away from the drop of the blood is held by the thumb and forefinger of the left hand The other finger serves to support the slide

4 Pick up another slide and loosely between thumb and forefinger of the right hand

5 The slide in the right hand is called the spreader slide Place the spreader in front of the drop and pull back until it touches the drop

6 As soon as the blood spreads by capillary attraction almost to the edge of the slide push the spreader forwards at an angle of approximately 30-45 degrees using a rapid even motion

Note

The weight of the slide is the only pressure applied the thickness of the spread is controlled by the size of the drop the angle at which the spreader slide is held and the speed of spreading The greater the angle the thicker and shorter is the film

7 Dry the slide in air when dried write the name of the patient and date in the thick end of the blood film using a pencil or at the other side of the slide

Staining for Differential Count

Reagents

Rapid Romanowsky staining using ldquorapi-diffrdquo

Solution A Fixing solution MethanolSolution B Acid dye EosinSolution C Basic dye Methylene blueSolution D Buffer pH 68 phosphate buffer

Procedure

1 Prepare a blood smear and air dry

2 Fix by immersing in Solution A for 30 seconds

3 Transfer without rinsing or drying to Solution B and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

4 Without rinsing transfer the slide to Solution C and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

5 Rinse briefly in buffered water pH 68 and allow to dry

Results Macroscopically

Smear in pinkish violet

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 24

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Normal Values

Neutrophils 40-60

Lymphocytes 20-40

Monocyte 4-8

Eosinophil 1-3

Basophil 0-1

Stab 0-1

Peripheral Blood Smear

Procedure in reading peripheral blood smear

1 Examine the blood smear grossly against the light and note the contour and background color

2 Examine under the low power in order to ascertain the adequacy of the staining and select the best fields for study

3 Note agglutination or rouleaux formation of erythrocytes

4 Examine the slides systematically starting at the thin end In this way reduplication of the field is avoided Fields should be avoided in which the red cells are stacked up or are in rouleaux and fields should be examined in which the red cells are well separated and the white cells thinly spread

5 Examine the erythrocytes and note variations in size shape color hemoglobin content abnormal objects in cytoplasm and number of nucleated red cells per 100 leukocytes

6 Examine the WBC and study the morphology

CLINICAL MICROSCOPY

Routine Urinalysis

I Organization of Work

Steps Multistix Test

1 Agitate the urine container Examine the urine with regards to color and transparency

2 Fill the centrifuge tube with the urine

3 Dip a multistix strip into the tube and determine the following by comparing with test chart after specific reading time

a Specific Gravity - 45 ndash 60 seconds

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 25

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

b Ph - time not criticalc Protein - read immediatelyd Glucose - 10 ndash 30 seconds

II Microscopic Examination

Procedure

1 Mix the urine well first and obtain a few cc into a test tube2 Centrifuge urine for five minutes3 Decant the supernatant liquid in a quick motion so that the

sediments are left at the bottom of the test tube4 Place in a clean slide5 Examine under the microscope (regulate lighting by adjusting the

substage diaphragm)6 Focus first at low power then shift to the high power objective

Report as follows

1 RBC and WBC ndash average cells hpf2 Casts ndash average casts per hpf3 Epithelial Cells lpf or accasional few moderate abundant4 Crystals lpf are rare few moderate abundant

Fecalysis

I Macroscopic or Physical Examination

1 Form Consistency and Size

2 Color

II Direct fecal Smear

Procedure

1 Place a drop of saline on the slide2 Using an applicator stick take a small portion of the stool

Formed ndash take the portion from well inside the sampleMucus or watery ndash take the portion from the bloodstained mucus on the surface or from the surface of the liquid

3 mix the sample with the drop of saline on the slide4 Examine the specimen under LPO then shift to HPO5 Report as follows

Normal No Parasite seenMucous Normal - a very small amount

Blood - no blood present

BACTERIOLOGY

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 26

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

SPUTUM EXAMINATION

Acid Fast Bacilli

Signs and symptoms of Asymptomatic Patient

1 Cough for 2 weeks duration or more2 Chest and upper back pains for one month duration or more3 Hemoptysis or blood streaking4 On and off afternoon fever for one month duration or more5 Regressive loss of weight

Collection of specimen

1 Identify the patient through signs and symptoms2 Instruct the patient properly3 Collect the first sputum in the morning4 The patient should be standing if possible5 He should take a very deep breath filling his lungs6 He should empty his lungs in one breath coughing as hard and deeply as

he can7 He should spit what he brings up into the jar or sputum cup8 Label the jar or sputum cup with his name and date

After Collection

Check that sufficient amount of sputum has been produced

The sputum of an infected person usually containsa thick mucus air bubblesb threads of fibrinc patches of pusd occasional brownish streaks of blood

Preparation of Sputum Smears

Materials glass slides (new if possible unscratched) inoculating loop or coconut midribs cotton wool plug on metal wire for flaming alarm clock (timer)

Procedure

1 Prepare two slides Take a purulent potion of the sputum one scrath slide using either one sterile inoculating loop or two to form tongs

2 Make the smear as thin as possible covering as large an area as possible tracing concentric circles well separated but not reaching the edges of the slide

Preparation for fixing Sputum Smear

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 27

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Materials sputum smears alcohol lamp match

Procedure of fixing

1 Dry smears in the air2 Fix the smears by passing the slides three times through the flame3 Let it cool before staining

Preparation in Staining using Ziehl-Neelsen (Hot Method)

Principle The tubercule bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis is acid-fast and stains res with Ziehl-Neelsen stain while almost all other organisms stain blue

Materials alcohol lamp match forceps sputum smears cotton wool soaked in 70 ethanol Ziehl-Neelsen reagents denatured alcohol (for burning)

Reagents1 carbol fuchsin2 acid water or acid alcohol3 aqueous methylene blue

Procedure in staining

1 Cover the slides with filtered carbol fuchsin2 Dip the cotton wool swab in the methylated spirit ignite and pass slowly

under the slides to heat them3 As soon as steam begins to rise set the timer at five minutes4 Continue to heat so that the steam is seen but without boiling for five

minutes add more fuchsin immediately to avoid drying5 Wash with tap water or distilled water6 Decolorize with acid water or acid alcohol for one minute7 Wash with tap water8 Counterstain with aqueous methylene blue for thirty seconds or one

minute9 Wash with tap water for one minute10Drain and leave to dry on a slide rack

Examine under Oil Immersion Field

Results

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 28

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 24: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 Puncture the skin as desired and wipe away the first drop of blood2 Touch the surface of the clean slide to a small drop of blood the drop

should be placed near one end of the slide3 Turn the slide over such that the drop of blood is now on the top side and

the other end of the slide away from the drop of the blood is held by the thumb and forefinger of the left hand The other finger serves to support the slide

4 Pick up another slide and loosely between thumb and forefinger of the right hand

5 The slide in the right hand is called the spreader slide Place the spreader in front of the drop and pull back until it touches the drop

6 As soon as the blood spreads by capillary attraction almost to the edge of the slide push the spreader forwards at an angle of approximately 30-45 degrees using a rapid even motion

Note

The weight of the slide is the only pressure applied the thickness of the spread is controlled by the size of the drop the angle at which the spreader slide is held and the speed of spreading The greater the angle the thicker and shorter is the film

7 Dry the slide in air when dried write the name of the patient and date in the thick end of the blood film using a pencil or at the other side of the slide

Staining for Differential Count

Reagents

Rapid Romanowsky staining using ldquorapi-diffrdquo

Solution A Fixing solution MethanolSolution B Acid dye EosinSolution C Basic dye Methylene blueSolution D Buffer pH 68 phosphate buffer

Procedure

1 Prepare a blood smear and air dry

2 Fix by immersing in Solution A for 30 seconds

3 Transfer without rinsing or drying to Solution B and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

4 Without rinsing transfer the slide to Solution C and stain for 15-30 seconds Gently agitate during this period

5 Rinse briefly in buffered water pH 68 and allow to dry

Results Macroscopically

Smear in pinkish violet

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 24

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Normal Values

Neutrophils 40-60

Lymphocytes 20-40

Monocyte 4-8

Eosinophil 1-3

Basophil 0-1

Stab 0-1

Peripheral Blood Smear

Procedure in reading peripheral blood smear

1 Examine the blood smear grossly against the light and note the contour and background color

2 Examine under the low power in order to ascertain the adequacy of the staining and select the best fields for study

3 Note agglutination or rouleaux formation of erythrocytes

4 Examine the slides systematically starting at the thin end In this way reduplication of the field is avoided Fields should be avoided in which the red cells are stacked up or are in rouleaux and fields should be examined in which the red cells are well separated and the white cells thinly spread

5 Examine the erythrocytes and note variations in size shape color hemoglobin content abnormal objects in cytoplasm and number of nucleated red cells per 100 leukocytes

6 Examine the WBC and study the morphology

CLINICAL MICROSCOPY

Routine Urinalysis

I Organization of Work

Steps Multistix Test

1 Agitate the urine container Examine the urine with regards to color and transparency

2 Fill the centrifuge tube with the urine

3 Dip a multistix strip into the tube and determine the following by comparing with test chart after specific reading time

a Specific Gravity - 45 ndash 60 seconds

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 25

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

b Ph - time not criticalc Protein - read immediatelyd Glucose - 10 ndash 30 seconds

II Microscopic Examination

Procedure

1 Mix the urine well first and obtain a few cc into a test tube2 Centrifuge urine for five minutes3 Decant the supernatant liquid in a quick motion so that the

sediments are left at the bottom of the test tube4 Place in a clean slide5 Examine under the microscope (regulate lighting by adjusting the

substage diaphragm)6 Focus first at low power then shift to the high power objective

Report as follows

1 RBC and WBC ndash average cells hpf2 Casts ndash average casts per hpf3 Epithelial Cells lpf or accasional few moderate abundant4 Crystals lpf are rare few moderate abundant

Fecalysis

I Macroscopic or Physical Examination

1 Form Consistency and Size

2 Color

II Direct fecal Smear

Procedure

1 Place a drop of saline on the slide2 Using an applicator stick take a small portion of the stool

Formed ndash take the portion from well inside the sampleMucus or watery ndash take the portion from the bloodstained mucus on the surface or from the surface of the liquid

3 mix the sample with the drop of saline on the slide4 Examine the specimen under LPO then shift to HPO5 Report as follows

Normal No Parasite seenMucous Normal - a very small amount

Blood - no blood present

BACTERIOLOGY

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 26

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

SPUTUM EXAMINATION

Acid Fast Bacilli

Signs and symptoms of Asymptomatic Patient

1 Cough for 2 weeks duration or more2 Chest and upper back pains for one month duration or more3 Hemoptysis or blood streaking4 On and off afternoon fever for one month duration or more5 Regressive loss of weight

Collection of specimen

1 Identify the patient through signs and symptoms2 Instruct the patient properly3 Collect the first sputum in the morning4 The patient should be standing if possible5 He should take a very deep breath filling his lungs6 He should empty his lungs in one breath coughing as hard and deeply as

he can7 He should spit what he brings up into the jar or sputum cup8 Label the jar or sputum cup with his name and date

After Collection

Check that sufficient amount of sputum has been produced

The sputum of an infected person usually containsa thick mucus air bubblesb threads of fibrinc patches of pusd occasional brownish streaks of blood

Preparation of Sputum Smears

Materials glass slides (new if possible unscratched) inoculating loop or coconut midribs cotton wool plug on metal wire for flaming alarm clock (timer)

Procedure

1 Prepare two slides Take a purulent potion of the sputum one scrath slide using either one sterile inoculating loop or two to form tongs

2 Make the smear as thin as possible covering as large an area as possible tracing concentric circles well separated but not reaching the edges of the slide

Preparation for fixing Sputum Smear

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 27

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Materials sputum smears alcohol lamp match

Procedure of fixing

1 Dry smears in the air2 Fix the smears by passing the slides three times through the flame3 Let it cool before staining

Preparation in Staining using Ziehl-Neelsen (Hot Method)

Principle The tubercule bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis is acid-fast and stains res with Ziehl-Neelsen stain while almost all other organisms stain blue

Materials alcohol lamp match forceps sputum smears cotton wool soaked in 70 ethanol Ziehl-Neelsen reagents denatured alcohol (for burning)

Reagents1 carbol fuchsin2 acid water or acid alcohol3 aqueous methylene blue

Procedure in staining

1 Cover the slides with filtered carbol fuchsin2 Dip the cotton wool swab in the methylated spirit ignite and pass slowly

under the slides to heat them3 As soon as steam begins to rise set the timer at five minutes4 Continue to heat so that the steam is seen but without boiling for five

minutes add more fuchsin immediately to avoid drying5 Wash with tap water or distilled water6 Decolorize with acid water or acid alcohol for one minute7 Wash with tap water8 Counterstain with aqueous methylene blue for thirty seconds or one

minute9 Wash with tap water for one minute10Drain and leave to dry on a slide rack

Examine under Oil Immersion Field

Results

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 28

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 25: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Normal Values

Neutrophils 40-60

Lymphocytes 20-40

Monocyte 4-8

Eosinophil 1-3

Basophil 0-1

Stab 0-1

Peripheral Blood Smear

Procedure in reading peripheral blood smear

1 Examine the blood smear grossly against the light and note the contour and background color

2 Examine under the low power in order to ascertain the adequacy of the staining and select the best fields for study

3 Note agglutination or rouleaux formation of erythrocytes

4 Examine the slides systematically starting at the thin end In this way reduplication of the field is avoided Fields should be avoided in which the red cells are stacked up or are in rouleaux and fields should be examined in which the red cells are well separated and the white cells thinly spread

5 Examine the erythrocytes and note variations in size shape color hemoglobin content abnormal objects in cytoplasm and number of nucleated red cells per 100 leukocytes

6 Examine the WBC and study the morphology

CLINICAL MICROSCOPY

Routine Urinalysis

I Organization of Work

Steps Multistix Test

1 Agitate the urine container Examine the urine with regards to color and transparency

2 Fill the centrifuge tube with the urine

3 Dip a multistix strip into the tube and determine the following by comparing with test chart after specific reading time

a Specific Gravity - 45 ndash 60 seconds

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 25

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

b Ph - time not criticalc Protein - read immediatelyd Glucose - 10 ndash 30 seconds

II Microscopic Examination

Procedure

1 Mix the urine well first and obtain a few cc into a test tube2 Centrifuge urine for five minutes3 Decant the supernatant liquid in a quick motion so that the

sediments are left at the bottom of the test tube4 Place in a clean slide5 Examine under the microscope (regulate lighting by adjusting the

substage diaphragm)6 Focus first at low power then shift to the high power objective

Report as follows

1 RBC and WBC ndash average cells hpf2 Casts ndash average casts per hpf3 Epithelial Cells lpf or accasional few moderate abundant4 Crystals lpf are rare few moderate abundant

Fecalysis

I Macroscopic or Physical Examination

1 Form Consistency and Size

2 Color

II Direct fecal Smear

Procedure

1 Place a drop of saline on the slide2 Using an applicator stick take a small portion of the stool

Formed ndash take the portion from well inside the sampleMucus or watery ndash take the portion from the bloodstained mucus on the surface or from the surface of the liquid

3 mix the sample with the drop of saline on the slide4 Examine the specimen under LPO then shift to HPO5 Report as follows

Normal No Parasite seenMucous Normal - a very small amount

Blood - no blood present

BACTERIOLOGY

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 26

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

SPUTUM EXAMINATION

Acid Fast Bacilli

Signs and symptoms of Asymptomatic Patient

1 Cough for 2 weeks duration or more2 Chest and upper back pains for one month duration or more3 Hemoptysis or blood streaking4 On and off afternoon fever for one month duration or more5 Regressive loss of weight

Collection of specimen

1 Identify the patient through signs and symptoms2 Instruct the patient properly3 Collect the first sputum in the morning4 The patient should be standing if possible5 He should take a very deep breath filling his lungs6 He should empty his lungs in one breath coughing as hard and deeply as

he can7 He should spit what he brings up into the jar or sputum cup8 Label the jar or sputum cup with his name and date

After Collection

Check that sufficient amount of sputum has been produced

The sputum of an infected person usually containsa thick mucus air bubblesb threads of fibrinc patches of pusd occasional brownish streaks of blood

Preparation of Sputum Smears

Materials glass slides (new if possible unscratched) inoculating loop or coconut midribs cotton wool plug on metal wire for flaming alarm clock (timer)

Procedure

1 Prepare two slides Take a purulent potion of the sputum one scrath slide using either one sterile inoculating loop or two to form tongs

2 Make the smear as thin as possible covering as large an area as possible tracing concentric circles well separated but not reaching the edges of the slide

Preparation for fixing Sputum Smear

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 27

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Materials sputum smears alcohol lamp match

Procedure of fixing

1 Dry smears in the air2 Fix the smears by passing the slides three times through the flame3 Let it cool before staining

Preparation in Staining using Ziehl-Neelsen (Hot Method)

Principle The tubercule bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis is acid-fast and stains res with Ziehl-Neelsen stain while almost all other organisms stain blue

Materials alcohol lamp match forceps sputum smears cotton wool soaked in 70 ethanol Ziehl-Neelsen reagents denatured alcohol (for burning)

Reagents1 carbol fuchsin2 acid water or acid alcohol3 aqueous methylene blue

Procedure in staining

1 Cover the slides with filtered carbol fuchsin2 Dip the cotton wool swab in the methylated spirit ignite and pass slowly

under the slides to heat them3 As soon as steam begins to rise set the timer at five minutes4 Continue to heat so that the steam is seen but without boiling for five

minutes add more fuchsin immediately to avoid drying5 Wash with tap water or distilled water6 Decolorize with acid water or acid alcohol for one minute7 Wash with tap water8 Counterstain with aqueous methylene blue for thirty seconds or one

minute9 Wash with tap water for one minute10Drain and leave to dry on a slide rack

Examine under Oil Immersion Field

Results

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 28

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 26: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

b Ph - time not criticalc Protein - read immediatelyd Glucose - 10 ndash 30 seconds

II Microscopic Examination

Procedure

1 Mix the urine well first and obtain a few cc into a test tube2 Centrifuge urine for five minutes3 Decant the supernatant liquid in a quick motion so that the

sediments are left at the bottom of the test tube4 Place in a clean slide5 Examine under the microscope (regulate lighting by adjusting the

substage diaphragm)6 Focus first at low power then shift to the high power objective

Report as follows

1 RBC and WBC ndash average cells hpf2 Casts ndash average casts per hpf3 Epithelial Cells lpf or accasional few moderate abundant4 Crystals lpf are rare few moderate abundant

Fecalysis

I Macroscopic or Physical Examination

1 Form Consistency and Size

2 Color

II Direct fecal Smear

Procedure

1 Place a drop of saline on the slide2 Using an applicator stick take a small portion of the stool

Formed ndash take the portion from well inside the sampleMucus or watery ndash take the portion from the bloodstained mucus on the surface or from the surface of the liquid

3 mix the sample with the drop of saline on the slide4 Examine the specimen under LPO then shift to HPO5 Report as follows

Normal No Parasite seenMucous Normal - a very small amount

Blood - no blood present

BACTERIOLOGY

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 26

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

SPUTUM EXAMINATION

Acid Fast Bacilli

Signs and symptoms of Asymptomatic Patient

1 Cough for 2 weeks duration or more2 Chest and upper back pains for one month duration or more3 Hemoptysis or blood streaking4 On and off afternoon fever for one month duration or more5 Regressive loss of weight

Collection of specimen

1 Identify the patient through signs and symptoms2 Instruct the patient properly3 Collect the first sputum in the morning4 The patient should be standing if possible5 He should take a very deep breath filling his lungs6 He should empty his lungs in one breath coughing as hard and deeply as

he can7 He should spit what he brings up into the jar or sputum cup8 Label the jar or sputum cup with his name and date

After Collection

Check that sufficient amount of sputum has been produced

The sputum of an infected person usually containsa thick mucus air bubblesb threads of fibrinc patches of pusd occasional brownish streaks of blood

Preparation of Sputum Smears

Materials glass slides (new if possible unscratched) inoculating loop or coconut midribs cotton wool plug on metal wire for flaming alarm clock (timer)

Procedure

1 Prepare two slides Take a purulent potion of the sputum one scrath slide using either one sterile inoculating loop or two to form tongs

2 Make the smear as thin as possible covering as large an area as possible tracing concentric circles well separated but not reaching the edges of the slide

Preparation for fixing Sputum Smear

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 27

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Materials sputum smears alcohol lamp match

Procedure of fixing

1 Dry smears in the air2 Fix the smears by passing the slides three times through the flame3 Let it cool before staining

Preparation in Staining using Ziehl-Neelsen (Hot Method)

Principle The tubercule bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis is acid-fast and stains res with Ziehl-Neelsen stain while almost all other organisms stain blue

Materials alcohol lamp match forceps sputum smears cotton wool soaked in 70 ethanol Ziehl-Neelsen reagents denatured alcohol (for burning)

Reagents1 carbol fuchsin2 acid water or acid alcohol3 aqueous methylene blue

Procedure in staining

1 Cover the slides with filtered carbol fuchsin2 Dip the cotton wool swab in the methylated spirit ignite and pass slowly

under the slides to heat them3 As soon as steam begins to rise set the timer at five minutes4 Continue to heat so that the steam is seen but without boiling for five

minutes add more fuchsin immediately to avoid drying5 Wash with tap water or distilled water6 Decolorize with acid water or acid alcohol for one minute7 Wash with tap water8 Counterstain with aqueous methylene blue for thirty seconds or one

minute9 Wash with tap water for one minute10Drain and leave to dry on a slide rack

Examine under Oil Immersion Field

Results

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 28

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 27: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

SPUTUM EXAMINATION

Acid Fast Bacilli

Signs and symptoms of Asymptomatic Patient

1 Cough for 2 weeks duration or more2 Chest and upper back pains for one month duration or more3 Hemoptysis or blood streaking4 On and off afternoon fever for one month duration or more5 Regressive loss of weight

Collection of specimen

1 Identify the patient through signs and symptoms2 Instruct the patient properly3 Collect the first sputum in the morning4 The patient should be standing if possible5 He should take a very deep breath filling his lungs6 He should empty his lungs in one breath coughing as hard and deeply as

he can7 He should spit what he brings up into the jar or sputum cup8 Label the jar or sputum cup with his name and date

After Collection

Check that sufficient amount of sputum has been produced

The sputum of an infected person usually containsa thick mucus air bubblesb threads of fibrinc patches of pusd occasional brownish streaks of blood

Preparation of Sputum Smears

Materials glass slides (new if possible unscratched) inoculating loop or coconut midribs cotton wool plug on metal wire for flaming alarm clock (timer)

Procedure

1 Prepare two slides Take a purulent potion of the sputum one scrath slide using either one sterile inoculating loop or two to form tongs

2 Make the smear as thin as possible covering as large an area as possible tracing concentric circles well separated but not reaching the edges of the slide

Preparation for fixing Sputum Smear

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 27

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Materials sputum smears alcohol lamp match

Procedure of fixing

1 Dry smears in the air2 Fix the smears by passing the slides three times through the flame3 Let it cool before staining

Preparation in Staining using Ziehl-Neelsen (Hot Method)

Principle The tubercule bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis is acid-fast and stains res with Ziehl-Neelsen stain while almost all other organisms stain blue

Materials alcohol lamp match forceps sputum smears cotton wool soaked in 70 ethanol Ziehl-Neelsen reagents denatured alcohol (for burning)

Reagents1 carbol fuchsin2 acid water or acid alcohol3 aqueous methylene blue

Procedure in staining

1 Cover the slides with filtered carbol fuchsin2 Dip the cotton wool swab in the methylated spirit ignite and pass slowly

under the slides to heat them3 As soon as steam begins to rise set the timer at five minutes4 Continue to heat so that the steam is seen but without boiling for five

minutes add more fuchsin immediately to avoid drying5 Wash with tap water or distilled water6 Decolorize with acid water or acid alcohol for one minute7 Wash with tap water8 Counterstain with aqueous methylene blue for thirty seconds or one

minute9 Wash with tap water for one minute10Drain and leave to dry on a slide rack

Examine under Oil Immersion Field

Results

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 28

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 28: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Materials sputum smears alcohol lamp match

Procedure of fixing

1 Dry smears in the air2 Fix the smears by passing the slides three times through the flame3 Let it cool before staining

Preparation in Staining using Ziehl-Neelsen (Hot Method)

Principle The tubercule bacillus Mycobacterium tuberculosis is acid-fast and stains res with Ziehl-Neelsen stain while almost all other organisms stain blue

Materials alcohol lamp match forceps sputum smears cotton wool soaked in 70 ethanol Ziehl-Neelsen reagents denatured alcohol (for burning)

Reagents1 carbol fuchsin2 acid water or acid alcohol3 aqueous methylene blue

Procedure in staining

1 Cover the slides with filtered carbol fuchsin2 Dip the cotton wool swab in the methylated spirit ignite and pass slowly

under the slides to heat them3 As soon as steam begins to rise set the timer at five minutes4 Continue to heat so that the steam is seen but without boiling for five

minutes add more fuchsin immediately to avoid drying5 Wash with tap water or distilled water6 Decolorize with acid water or acid alcohol for one minute7 Wash with tap water8 Counterstain with aqueous methylene blue for thirty seconds or one

minute9 Wash with tap water for one minute10Drain and leave to dry on a slide rack

Examine under Oil Immersion Field

Results

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 28

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 29: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

0 - no bacilli found in the entire smear+ - 1 ndash 5 bacilli++ - 6 ndash 24 bacilli+++ - 25 or more++++ - too numerousU - specimen spoiled not sufficientX - slide is broken unreadable or not received

BLOOD CHEMISTRY

FBS (Fasting Blood Sugar)

The glucose is determined after enzymatic oxidation in the presence of glucose oxidase The formed hydrogen peroxide reacts under catalysis of peroxidase with phenol and 4- aminophenazone to a rd-violet quinoneimine dye as indicator

Specimen Serum Plasma

The glucose is stable for 24 hours at 2-8 C if serum plasma is prepared within 30 minutes after collection

Procedure

1 Pipette into tubes cuvettes 1000 ul of the reagent (Blank Standard Normal Control Pathologic Control Test) then add 10ul of the Standard Normal and Pathologic Control and the serum for the test into their respective tubes

2 Mix and incubate for 10 minutes at 20 ndash 25 C or for 5 minutes at 37 C Read

Normal Values 75 ndash 115 mg dl

MICRO HEMATOCRIT CENTRIFUGEOperatorrsquos Manual

Standard Operation

1 Capillary (fingerstick) blood - prepare a skin site and lance Use heparinized tubes or Venous blood - take well-mixed anticoagulated blood from a syringe or a vacuum blood collection tube

2 Hold the micro-capillary tube by the end with the color-coded band

3 Fill to the color-coded band Remove from sample and tilt the banded end downward until the blood moves half-way between the band and the end of the tube

4 Hold the tube in a horizontal position and push the dry (banded) end of the tube fully into the vertically held sealing compound Twist and remove

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 29

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 30: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

5 Using a laboratory tissue wipe off any blood that is forced from the other end

6 Put the tube sealed end towards the outer rim in any of the positions on the Hematocrit Rotor with a balance Screw cover in place

7 Centrifuge the Hematocrit Rotor

8 After the rotor stops remove the rotor Read the Hematocrit using the Hematocrit Reader

Care and Maintenance

Cleaning

The outside surfaces and switch overlay panel can be cleaned with a water-dampened cloth and mild detergent The inner surface or bowl a powder coated steel surface can be cleaned with a mild detergent and disinfected if necessary by wiping with a cloth dampened with 70 alcohol or 10 bleach

Microscope Owners Manual

Assembly

After removing the microscope parts from the protective foam packaging and checking it for all components and accessories you can begin assembly

1 Place the stand on a stable countertop

2 Position the head on top of the stand so that the dovetail flangeslides into place Secure with the knurled head set screw

NOTE Do not release the head until itrsquos firmly secured with thehead set screw

3 For subsequent rotation of the head loosen the head set screw androtate the head to the desired position Secure the head set screw

4 Slide the eyepieces into the eyetubes

Focusing amp Mechanical Stage Adjustments

1 Focusing adjustment is achieved by turning the coarse and fine focus control knobs The large knob is used for coarse adjustment while the small knob is used for fine adjustment

2 Focusing tension is adjusted by turning the focus tension adjustment ring located just inside of the left coarse focus control knob

3 To ensure long life for the mechanical gears always turn the focusing knobs slowly and uniformly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 30

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 31: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

4 The X-Y controls located on the left side of the slide holder mechanical stage provide fluid and accurate positioning of the sample

Interpupillary Adjustment

1 Interpupillary adjustment (the distance between eyepieces) is made via a sliding action Slide the eyepieces (inwards or outwards) until they are the proper distance apart for comfortable use

2 If set properly the circular field of view (seen through the eyepieces) will be one solid shape with no overlapping circular images

Diopter Adjustment

1 Diopter adjustment allows for proper optical correction based on each individuals eyesight

2 Set the diopter adjustment mechanism on the right eyetube to 0

3 Using the 40X objective and a sample slide (one which produces an easily focused image) close your left eye and bring the image into focus with your right eye

4 Once the image is well-focused using only your right eye check the focus with your left eye by closing your right eye If the image is not perfectly focused for your left eye make fine adjustments with the diopter adjustment mechanism located on the left eyetube

5 Once complete the microscope is corrected for your vision

Substage Adjustments

1 Adjustments to the substage condensing system are crucial for proper illumination and performance

2 CENTERING The condenser on this microscope is factory-centered and therefore does not require centering adjustments

3 VERTICAL FOCUSING The condenser can be raised and lowered with the condenser adjustment lever to focus the light for optimal illumination As a rule of thumb the lower the magnification the higher the condenser should be positioned in the optical path

4 APERTURE ADJUSTMENT The light path can be adjusted with the iris diaphragm adjustment lever located on the condenser Aperture adjustments are made to induce contrast for a specimen not to adjust light intensity

Oil Immersion Objectives

1 The 100X objective which comes with this microscope must be immersed in oil for highest image quality After use the objective tip needs to be wiped with lens tissue clean so that no oil residue remains

2 Under no circumstances should an oil immersion objective be left sitting in oil for an extended period of time Exceptionally long immersion periods can cause oil to

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 31

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 32: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

penetrate the objectiversquos sealant and obscure the optics which is not covered under warranty

Maintenance

The eyepieces and objectives on this microscope are coated They should never be wiped while dry as any dirt or dust will scratch the coating The surfaces should either be blown with an air canister or blown and cleaned with an air bulb and camel-hair brush Its recommended to then use a lens cleaner Apply with a cotton swab for a minimum of wetting then wipe the surface clean with a quality lens tissue Xylene which breaks down the bonding material holding the lenses should never be used as a cleaner

Centrifuge Safety Manual

Standard Operation

1 Set POWER switch to OFF position Unlatch and open cover Ensure that rotor turns freely and that there are no loose objects in the chamber and that the rubber suction cup mounting feet on the bottom of the unit are not worn or missing

2 Ensure the centrifuge bowl and tubes are dry

3 Ensure the appropriate tube size is employed

4 If possible use capped tubes to contain samples and prevent aerosols

5 Inspect tubes and bottles for possible cracks or flaws Do not use if damaged

6 Do not use instrument with concentrated mineral acids such as hydrochloric sulfuric or nitric acid

7 Avoid overfilling tubes

8 Ensure samples are symmetrically placed in rotor

9 Close and latch cover Do not operate the rotor without the cover in position and latched in place

10Set POWER to ON (Slight vibration and noise are normal)

11Do not lean or place items on the instrument while it is operating

12 If vibration is excessive set POWER to OFF position wait until rotor completely stops and then check that the load is correctly balanced

13To stop run set POWER to OFF position Do not use the cover latch as a startstop switch

14Wait until rotor comes to a full stop and then unlatch and open the cover

15When working with infectious materials wait 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped before opening the centrifuge lid Be aware of decontamination and clean-up procedures which apply to materials being centrifuged

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 32

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 33: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

16Ensure no leakage or glass breakage has occurred before removing tubes If breakage has occurred wait at least 10 minutes after the rotor has stopped for aerosols and droplets to settle before opening the lid

17 If leakage has occurred follow all necessary precautions and use of appropriate decontamination procedures if applicable should be taken

18Centrifugation causes a slight vacuum to build up in the tube cavity occasionally resulting in the suction effect when removing the tubes from the rotor Allow at least 5 minutes after the rotor comes to rest before removing the tubes from the rotor

Care and Maintenance

1 Always maintain the rotor in the recommended manner The rotor and all accessories must be clean and inspected prior to each run do not use if rotor shows signs of corrosion or cracking Replace the affected parts immediately

2 To avoid corrosion do not expose aluminum part of rotor to strong acids bases or alkaline laboratory detergents liquid chlorine bleach or salts of heavy metals

3 Always unplug unit before cleaning

4 Release latch open cover check chamber for spillage or broken glass If present and materials are non-toxic non-radioactive and non-pathogenic mop-up with a sponge dampened with water

5 Rotors and sample cups or cavities should be cleaned and disinfected after each use with a non-corrosive cleaning solution (mild detergent and distilled water are recommended) Metal test tube brushes must not be used for cleaning the cup cavities All traces of detergent should be removed prior to air-drying

6 Never pour water directly into chamber

7 Check that vent holes in the cover and in the chamber bottom are not blocked

8 Should parts need replacement follow detailed instructions provided in manual or contact a repair technician

9 Keep logs of maintenance and use of centrifuge

LABORATORY DEPARTMENT

WASTE MANAGEMENT

Segregation

NON ndash INFECTIOUS DRY WASTE - Black bags

for non-infectious waste such as tin cans empty soft drinks medicine bottles tetrabrick containers styropor containers wrappers empty medical boxes and plastics

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 33

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 34: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

These are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious dry wastes all over the hospital

Black bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

NON ndash INFECTIOUS WET WASTE - Green Bags

are for biodegradable wastes (can be used as feeds or for composting purposes) such as fruit vegetable peelings and skin and leftover food these are collected and stored together with the rest of the non-infectious wates

wastes all over the hospital Green bags are collected by the Barangay Garbage Collector

INFECTIOUS WASTE - Yellow bags

for infectious wastes such as used bandages bandages (for wounds) cotton balls materials (like tissue) with blood secretion and other exudates disposable materials used for collection of blood and body fluids tubings used syringes foley catheters F suction bags and gloves

pathological wastes such as organs tissues and blood are treated before collection

these are collected together with the rest of the non-infectious wastes all over the hospital and stored in a place exclusively for this type of waste

SHARPS - Sharps Container

sharps like disposable syringe needles and other sharps placed in puncture free containers

they are also treated before collection

A container for the safe disposal of sharp objects should be

ndashWell labelled puncture proof watertight and break resistant

ndashOpening large enough to pass needles and scalpel blades but never large enough for someone to reach into

ndashSecured to a surface such as wall or counter to ensure stability during use

ndashRemovable for disposal

QUALITY CONTROL

Quality control (QC) is a system used to maintain a determined level of accuracy and precision

Proper quality control helps ensure that reported results of patient laboratory testing are correct

Quality control applies not only to specimen testing but also to collection storage and transportation

CONTROL

QC programs require the same sample to be tested every day testing is done This type of sample is called a control

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 34

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 35: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Controls which are often purchased from manufacturers use a human base to ensure the analytes being tested parallel human ranges

Manufacturers pool together many human blood samples to create the large volume needed for a lot number of control

Running controls helps monitor and control analytic error when performing a testing procedure

There is no one quality control format that is appropriate or practical for every testing situation nor will a single QC system detect every error

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limitThe 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Calculation of control limits

Two sets of control limits will be needed to implement the rules described above The first set uses 2s control limits (for implementation of the 12s rule) calculated as the

mean plus or minus 2 times the standard deviation The second set uses 3s control limits (for implementation of the 13s rule) calculated as the mean plus or minus 3 times

the standard deviation

QC procedure(s) to be implemented

Each of the two control materials will be analyzed once per run providing a total of two control measurements per run Control status will be judged by either the 12s or

13s rule These rules are defined as follows

12s refers to the control rule that is commonly used with a Levey-Jennings chart when

the control limits are set as the mean plusminus 2s In many laboratories this rule is used to reject a run when a single control measurement exceeds a 2s control limit

13s corresponds to a Levey-Jennings chart having control limits set as the mean

plusminus 3s An analytical run is rejected when a single control measurement exceeds a 3s control limit

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 35

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 36: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The 12s rule is very commonly used today and while it provides high error detection

the use of 2s control limits gives an expected high level of false rejections The 13s rule

provides an alternative QC procedure that has lower false rejections but also lower error detection In this exercise you will see how to apply both QC procedures and also get a feel for the difference in their performance

Label charts Include the name of the test and the name of the control material in a prominent place so that this information is quickly and easily discerned when viewing the chart The measurement unit in this case mgdL can be included in the label or included in the label for the y-axis Other information typically included on the chart are the name of the analytical system the lot number of the control material the current mean and standard deviation and the time period covered by the chart

Scale and label x-axis The horizontal or x-axis represents time and you will typically set the scale to accomodate 30 days per month or 30 runs per month For this example divide the x-axis into evenly sized increments and number them sequentially from 1 to 30 Label the x-axis Day

Scale and label y-axis The vertical or y-axis represents the observed control value and you need to set the scale to accomodate the lowest and highest results expected A generally useful scale is to allow for a value as low as the mean - 4 standard deviations and a value as high as the mean + 4 standard deviations For this example the chart for Control 1 should be scaled to accomodate a range from 200 - 44 which is 184 to 200 + 44 which is 216 This can be rounded to 180 to 220 to fit the 10x10 or 20x20 grids of the graph paper Mark off and identify appropriate concentrations on the y-axis Label the y-axis Control value What is the range for scaling the chart for Control 2

Draw lines for mean and control limits On the y-axis locate the values that correspond to the mean and draw a green horizontal line (at 200 mgdL for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +2s and the mean -2s and draw yellow horizontal lines (at 192 and 208 for Control 1) Locate the values that correspond to the mean +3s and the mean -3s and draw red horizontal lines (at 188 and 212 for control 1)

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 36

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 37: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

General Risk Assessment Form

Activity Hazard Existing Measures to control risk

Entry into Lab

Handling biological samples

Use of centrifuges

Disposal of waste

Infectious and other hazardous substancesInfection by inhalation ingestion needlestick injury

Potentially infective human samples

Corrosives-cause burns and may have toxic properties

Disruption due to imbalance

contaminationinfection

Standard PPE worn Frequently laundered laboratory coats and latexnitrile gloves for laboratory staff Specified disinfection procedure in place

Workers recommended to be immunised against Hep B if indicated by risk assessment

Segregated storage in appropriate cabinet(s)

Instruction and training on balancing given for use on all models New models fitted with balance sensors

Suitable disinfectiondecontamination procedures in place

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 37

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 38: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Notes to accompany General Risk Assessment Form

(1) Activity use the column to describe each separate activity covered by the assessment The number of rows is unlimited although how many are used for one assessment will depend on how the task premises is sub-divided For laboratory work activities in one particular lab or for one particular project might include use of gas cylinders use of fume cupboard use of computer or other electrical equipment use of lab ovens hot plates or heaters use of substances hazardous to health etc

(2) Hazard for each activity list the hazards Remember to look at hazards that are not immediately obvious For example use of a lathe will require identification of the machine hazards but also identification of hazards associated with the use of cutting oils (dermatitis) poor lighting slipping on oil leaks etc The same activity might well have several hazards associated with it Assessment of simple chemical risks (eg use of cleaning chemicals in accordance with the instructions on the bottle) may be recorded here

(3) Existing measures to control the risk list all measures that already mitigate the risk Many of these will have been implemented for other reasons but should nevertheless be recognised as means of controlling risk

(4) Risk Rating the simplest form of risk assessment is to rate the remaining risk as high medium or low depending on how likely the activity is to cause harm and how serious that harm might be

The risk is LOW - if it is most unlikely that harm would arise under the controlled conditions listed and even if exposure occurred the injury would be relatively slightThe risk is MEDIUM - if it is more likely that harm might actually occur and the outcome could be more serious (eg some time off work or a minor physical injuryThe risk is HIGH - if injury is likely to arise (eg there have been previous incidents the situation looks like an accident waiting to happen) and that injury might be serious (broken bones trip to the hospital loss of consciousness) or even a fatality

INFECTION CONTROL AND ASEPSIS

Infection Prevention and Universal Precautions

Treat all body substances of all people as potentially Infectious

Asepsis depends on standard procedures staff training personal discipline and careful attention to detail

Hand washing use of barrier protection such as gloves and aprons the safe handling and disposal of sharps and medical waste and proper cleaning disinfection and sterilization are all part of creating a safe hospital

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 38

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 39: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Hand washing

Hand washing is the single most important measure for the prevention of infection

Plain soap and water is effective for removal of visible contaminants

Wash your hands with a vigorous mechanical action on all surfaces of the hands Continue for at least 15 seconds Wash above the wrists and remove jewellery if possible Nails are the areas of greatest contamination

Rinse under poured or running water

Prevention of transmission of HIV

A safe injection does not harm the recipient does not expose the provider to any avoidable risk and does not result in any waste that is dangerous for other people

Use a sterile syringe and needle for each injection and to reconstitute each unit of medication

Ideally use new quality controlled disposable syringes and needles

If single-use syringes and needles are unavailable use equipment designed for steam sterilization

Aseptic technique

Anyone entering the operating room for whatever reason should first put on

ndashClean clothes

ndashAn impermeable mask to cover the mouth and nose

ndashA cap to cover all the hair on the head and face

ndashA clean pair of shoes or clean shoe-covers

Caps gowns and masks are worn to decrease patient exposure to contamination or infection from the surgical team

Sterile instruments gloves and drapes are also key elements in the fight against contamination

DISINFECTIONCLEANING AND STERILIZATION

Disinfection decreases the viral and bacterial burden of an instrument but does not clean debris or confer sterility

- It is important to use all disinfectant solutions within expiry date as some solutions like hypochlorite lose their

their activity very quickly

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 39

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 40: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Cleaning removes debris

- They must always be available for cleaning working surfaces equipment that cannot be -autoclaved and non disposable items and for dealing with any spillage involving pathological specimens

Sterilization kills microbes

- All disinfectants have Contact Time which means they must be left in contact with an infectious agent for a certain period of time

The methods of sterilization in common use are

ndashAutoclaving or steam sterilization

ndashExposure to dry heat

ndashTreatment with chemical antiseptics

Autoclaving should be the main form of sterilization at the district hospital

Autoclaving Dry Heat

All viruses including HIV are inactivated by autoclaving for 20 minutes at 121-131 C for 30 minutes if the instruments are in wrapped packs

It is often more practical to use a small autoclave several times a day than to use a large machine once

At the end of the procedure the outside of the packs of instruments should not have wet spots which may indicate that sterilization has not occurred

It is suitable only for metal instruments and a few natural suture material

They can be sterilized by dry heat for 1-2 hours at 170 C

Boiling instruments is now regarded as an unreliable means of sterilization and is not recommended as a routine in hospital practice

Antiseptics

Instruments are no longer stored in liquid antiseptic

Sharp instruments other delicate equipment and certain catheters and tubes can be sterilised by exposure to formaldehyde glutaral or cholorohexidine

When using formaldehyde carefully clean the equipment and then expose it to vapour from paraformaldehydetablets in a closed container for 48 hours

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 40

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 41: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Glutaral is extremely effective against bacteria fungi and a wide range of viruses

PREVENTION OF NEEDLESTICK INJURIES

A needlestick means a break in the skin from a needle or other sharp such as a scalpel

always report your injuries to your employer immediately to ensure that you receive proper follow-up medical care

Who are at risk

You are at risk of injury or infection if you handle sharps such as hypodermic needles IV catheters phlebotomy devices suture needles scalpels or lancets Nurses phlebotomists physicians physicians assistantstechnicians and public health and safety workers may be at risk because of the type of work they perform

Infections caused by Needlestick injuries

An injury from contaminated needle exposes workers to bloodborne pathogens that can cause serious or fatal infections

The most serious infections are

1048698 HIV1048698 Hepatitis B1048698 Hepatitis C

Prevention Strategies

Be Prepared

Remind your employer that they are required by law to evaluate and purchase safety devices

Be sure you receive training on any new safety devices

Always use safety devices

Place a sharps disposal container close to the procedure area

Limit interruptions during procedures

Explain the procedure to patients to gain their cooperation and avoid potential movement during the procedure

Ask for assistance with patients that might be uncooperative such as childrenDispose with care

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 41

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 42: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Never recap needles

Dispose of used needles in sharps disposal containers

Avoid overfilling sharps disposal containers

Care for yourself

Get a hepatitis B vaccination

Report all needlestick and other injuries

If you sustain a needlestick injury

Immediately report your injury to your supervisor do not wait until theend of your shift or the end of the procedure

Do not apply pressure to the wound allow it to bleed freely

Wash the wound with soap and water

Identify the patient involved so that they can be evaluated for an infection

Get a medical assessment

Follow the directions for any necessary blood tests vaccinations ormedications to prevent infection

Sharps disposal

Proper disposal of needles and other sharp devices is an important part of needlestick prevention

Important requirements for safe sharps disposal include

Conveniently place sharps disposal containers where sharps are used

Select containers that are closable puncture-resistant and leak proof

Ensure that the containers are clearly and correctly labeled - that is red in color or biohazard symbol

Replace sharps disposal containers promptly when full to avoid overfilling

Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab

Eye Protection

Eye protection is mandatory in all areas where there is potential for injury This applies not only to persons who work continuously in these areas but also to persons who may be in the area only temporarily such as maintenance or clerical personnel

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 42

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 43: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

1 The type of eye protection required depends on the hazard For most situations safety glasses with side shields are adequate Where there is a danger of splashing chemicals goggles are required More hazardous operations include conducting reactions that have potential for explosion and using or mixing strong caustics or acids In these situations a face shield or a combination of face shield and safety goggles or glasses should be used

2 Plastic safety glasses should be issued to employees who do not require corrective lenses

3 For persons requiring corrective lenses safety glasses ground to their prescription are available in a safety frame Please note that the wearing of safety glasses does not excuse the employee from the requirement of wearing safety goggles

4 It is recommended that contact lenses not be permitted in the laboratory The reasons for this prohibition are

a If a corrosive liquid should splash in the eye the natural reflex to clamp the eyelids shut makes it very difficult if not impossible to remove the contact lens before damage is done

b The plastic used in contact lenses is permeable to some of the vapors found in the laboratory These vapors can be trapped behind the lenses and can cause extensive irritation

c The lenses can prevent tears from removing the irritant

5 Although safety glasses are adequate protection for the majority of laboratory operations they are not sufficient for certain specific operations where there is danger from splashes of corrosive liquids or flying particles Examples are washing glassware in chromic acid solution grinding materials or laboratory operations using glassware where there is significant hazard of explosion or breakage (ie in reduced or excess pressure or temperature) In such cases goggles or face shields shall be worn if there is need for protection of the entire face and throat

6 If despite all precautions an employee should experience a splash of corrosive liquid in the eye the employee is to proceed (with the assistance of a co-worker if possible) to the nearest eyewash fountain and flush the eyes with water for at least 15 to 30 minutes Flush from the eye outward During this time a co-worker should notify the proper authorities

Clothing

The following guidelines for laboratory clothing are offered strictly from a safety standpoint

1 Due to the potential for ignition absorption and entanglement in machinery loose or torn clothing should be avoided unless wearing a lab coat

2 Dangling jewelry and excessively long hair pose the same type of safety hazard

3 Finger rings or other tight jewelry which is not easily removed should be avoided because of the danger of corrosive or irritating liquids getting underneath the piece and producing irritation

4 Lab coats should be provided for protection and convenience

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 43

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 44: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

They should be worn at all times in the lab areas Due to the possible absorption and accumulation of chemicals in the material lab coats should not be worn in the lunchroom or elsewhere outside the laboratory

5 Where infectious materials are present closed (snapped) lab coats and gloves are essential

6 Shoes shall be worn at all times in the laboratories Sandals open-toed shoes and shoes with woven uppers shall not be worn because of the danger of spillage of corrosive or irritating chemicals

7 Care should be exercised in protective clothing selection some protective clothing has very limited resistance to selected chemicals or fire

Gloves

When handling chemicals it is recommended that the correct gloves be used to protect the worker from accidental spills or contamination If the gloves become contaminated they should be removed and discarded as soon as possible

Before each use gloves should be inspected for discoloration punctures and tears Rubber and plastic gloves may be checked by inflating with air and submersing them in water to check for air bubbles

mployees shall remove gloves before leaving the immediate work site to prevent contamination of door knobs light switches telephones etc When gloves are removed pull the cuff over the hand

Mask

prevention against respiratory infection Some of the work carried out in the lab will generate fine dust eg grinding or

sieving sediment or plant material If this cannot be carried out in a fume cupboard other precautions must be taken to avoid inhalation of these particles Dust masks are available and should be worn by all who are working in the affected area

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 44

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 45: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

STANDING OPERATING PROCEDURE (PRARMACY SECTION)

DISPENSING OF MEDICINES

1 This SOP on Dispensing of Medicines is hereby prescribed for orderly process and defining the responsibility of the personnel involved

2 Procedure for Pharmacy Section

A Requirements for Dispensing of Medicines for Out-Patients

A1 Military ID for personnel in Civilian clothes

A2 Dependentrsquos ID or certification duly signed by authorities (for Dependents)

A3 Dispensing of OPS medicines with in the OPS hours only

Monday ndash Friday

0800H - 1100H1400H - 1700H

Saturday

0800H ndash 1100H

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 45

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 46: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

B 53rd PN PAF personnel and dependent shall get their medicines at their respective dispensary

C Medicines given good for three (3) days or upon the availability of prescribed medicines

D No prescription from authorized physician no issuance of medicines

B REQUIREMENT FOR IN- PATIENTS

B1 Dispensing of medicines of In-patient based on medicines ticket submitted

B2 Anti-biotic be given by number of days specified in the order of the physician

5 EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 46

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 47: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

RADIOLOGY SECTION

Radiology Services in CLSH(Camp Lapulapu Station Hospital) does not provide exams using contrast media or invasive technique such as Flouroscopy CT Scan MRI etc General radiography exams such as skull extremities spine chest abdomen facial bones and ribs are provided Procedures such as CT Scan MRI and other such procedures are referred to radiology services by outside provider

Radiological exams can be perform in CLSH radiology section during regular office hours ( 800 am ndash 1100 am and 100 pm ndash 400 pm ) Monday to Friday Weekend and holiday exams are for emergency exams only

Radiology exams are performed by a Registered Radiologic Technologist Films are interpreted by a certified Radiologist

Diagnostics radiologic services are regularly and conveniently available to meet the needs of patients as to be determined by the integrated medical staff

The OIC radiology section is a member of the integrated medical staff and has appropriate hospital specific clinical privileges granted by the governing body

A qualified registered radiologic Technologist is employed full-time basis The hospital Radiologic Technologist provides only general diagnostic x-

rays Flouroscopic and invasive procedures are done through a service

provider The OIC radiology section and Commanding Officer with input from the

radiologic technologist advice hospital admin as to equipment needs The Radiology section follows a comprehensive quality control program

through DOH-RHS (Department of Health ndash Radiological Health Services ) The Radiology section has a comprehensive quality improvement

program to assure quality care Policies and procedures have been developed which ensure effective

management safety proper performance of equipments effective communication and quality control in Diagnostic Radiology ServicesSection

Policies and procedure are developed with cooperation from the Nursing service Medical Staff Hospital Admin and other clinical services

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES IN RADIOLOGY SECTION

Understand and apply the Cardinal Principles of radiation Protection (Time Distance amp Shielding)

Donrsquot allow familiarity to result in false security Never stand in the primary beam Always wear protective apron and gloves when not behind a protective barrier Always wear a personnel monitoring device and position it properly Never hold a patient during radiographic exam Person holding the patient must wear a lead apron and gloves Use gonadal shields in all persons within the child-bearing age when such use

will not interfere with the exam Examination of the pelvis and lower abdomen of women of reproductive capacity

should be limited to the 10-day interval following the on-set of menstruation Pregnant patient should never undergo radiological examinations but it cannot be

avoided she should not undergo during the first trimester Always collimate to the smallest film size appropriate for the examination

procedure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 47

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 48: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All exposures shall be kept ALARA ( as low as reasonably achievable) The dose equivalent to the individual shall not exceed limits recommended for

the appropriate circumstance by commission

OPERATING MANUAL OF X-RAY MACHINE

1 OnOff Turns generator power On or Off Illuminates when turned ON2 Bucky Pushbutton selector for either table or auxiliary bucky3 kV Major Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately20 kVp4 kV Minor Rotary selector of radiographic kVp in increments of approximately2 kVp5 mA Selector Provides selection of x-ray tube small and large filament currentsas given belowsmall 25 mAsmall 50 mAsmall 100 mAlarge 200 mAlarge 300 mA6 Timer Provides the selection of eighteen position radiographic exposure values from 1120 to 60 seconds (in impulses of 1100 second for 50 Hz operation)When setting the timer for 4 mAs use the 1120 seconds value when setting the timer for 8 mAs use the 160 seconds value7 Rotor Push button switch to start rotor and pre-exposure When pushed this boosts the tube8 Exposure Pushbutton switch to initiate exposure when the pushbutton is pressed If the switch is released during an exposure cycle the exposure will automatically be terminated

PATIENT AND STAFF TRAFFIC

In-Patient From the ward request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician

including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information In-patient request forms are to be brought by nursing service personnel All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic Technologist performs the requested radiological exams and

processes the films for interpretation of radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by a certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH Authenticated reports are distributed to corresponding wards and placed in the patientrsquos medical records A copy is restrained in the radiology section

Out-patient

From the out-patient section out-patientrsquos request forms are to be completed by the requesting physician including patientrsquos name and all relevant clinical information

Out-patients will personally bring their request forms to the radiology section All completed request forms are to be received by the radiology section

personnel for logging of patientrsquos relevant information The Radiologic technologist performs the request radiological and processes the

films for interpretation of the radiologist Interpretations of radiological studies are done by certified radiologist with

current privileges at CLSH

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 48

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 49: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Authenticated reports are released and received with signature from the patient A copy is retained in the radiology section

CODE OF ETHICS OF RADIOLOGIC TECHNOLOGIST

The Radiologic Technologist conducts his her in a professional manner responds to patientrsquos needs and support colleagues and associates in providing quality patient care

The radiologic technologist acts to advance the principal objective of the profession to provide services to humanity with full respect for the dignity of mankind The radiologic technologist delivers patient care and service unrestricted by concerns of personnel attributes or the nature of the disease or illness and without discrimination on the basis of sex race creed religion or socio-economic status

The radiologic technologist practices technology founded upon theoretical knowledge and concepts uses equipments and accessories consistent with the purpose for which they were designed and employs procedures and techniques appropriately

The radiologic technologist acts as an agent through observation and communication to obtain pertinent information for the physician to aid in the diagnosis and treatment of the patient and recognizes that interpretation and diagnosis are outside the scope of practice for the profession

The radiologic technologist assesses situations exercises care discretion and judgment assumes responsibility for professional decisions and acts in the best interest of the patient

The radiologic technologist uses equipment and accessories employs technique and procedures and performs services in accordance with an accepted standard of practice and demonstration expertise in minimizing radiation exposure to the patient self and other members of the health care team

The radiologic technologist practices ethical conduct appropriate to the profession and protects the patientrsquos right to quality radiologic technology care

The radiologic technologist respects confidence entrusted in the course of professional practice respects the patientrsquos right to privacy and reveals confidential information only as required by law or to protect the welfare of the individual or the community

The radiologic technologist continually strives to improve knowledge and skills by participating in continuing education and professional activities sharing knowledge with colleagues and investigating new aspects of professional practice

RADIOLOGICAL EXAM PROCEDURES

Pre-examination Proceduresa Properly identify patient and enter relevant information on the log bookb Explain the procedure to the patientc Prepare identification marker with the patient case number and the dated Have the patient remove jewelry from the area of intereste Select adequate film size and load cassette (if not done previously)

CHEST X-RAY

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations will

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 49

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 50: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

position the patient with hands on hips and chest pressed against the image plate For the second view the patients side is against the image plate with arms elevated

Patients who cannot stand may be positioned lying down on a table for chest x-rays

You must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

When the examination is complete you will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

The chest x-ray examination is usually completed within 15 minutes

Additional views may be required within hours days or months to evaluate any changes in the chest

BONE X-RAY EXAM

The technologist an individual specially trained to perform radiology examinations positions the patient on the x-ray table and places the x-ray film holder or digital recording plate under the table in the area of the body being imaged When necessary sandbags pillows or other positioning devices will be used to help you maintain the proper position A lead apron may be placed over your pelvic area or breasts when feasible to protect from radiation

Patient must hold very still and may be asked to keep from breathing for a few seconds while the x-ray picture is taken to reduce the possibility of a blurred image The technologist will walk behind a wall or into the next room to activate the x-ray machine

You may be repositioned for another view and the process is repeated Two or three images (from different angles) will typically be taken around a joint (knee elbow or wrist)

An x-ray may also be taken of the unaffected limb or of a childs growth plate (where new bone is forming) for comparison purposes

When the examination is complete patient will be asked to wait until the radiologist determines that all the necessary images have been obtained

A bone x-ray examination is usually completed within five to 10 minutes

Post Examination Procedures

a Remove lead apron from patientb Assist patient off x-ray tablec Complete x-ray data in the log bookd Close darkroom doore Open cassettes and remove film from cassettesf Place films in the darkroom and start processingg Reload cassettes

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Quality Control Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 50

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 51: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

To ensure complete and accurate data collection and to document the data collection process a variety of quality control procedures have been developed for this survey This section describes procedures to be followed by radiologic technologist and the radiology OIC

Radiologic Exam Request Form

After completing the request form review the form for accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the x-ray area

The Daily X-Ray Log

After filling in information on the X-Ray Daily Log the radiologic technologist should review the log for completeness accuracy and legibility before the patient leaves the room so that missing information can be retrieved if necessary The radiologic technologist should make the following checks

All appropriate itemscolumns have been completed No conflicting information has been entered and All entries are legible

Review Observations and Replications

The physician will review all x-rays for both technique and abnormal findings If the physician has any questions about technique heshe may request a retake of the view Abnormal findings will require an expedited reading by the radiologist

Ongoing review of all x-ray films by the radiologist will provide continuous feedbackon individual radiologic technologistrsquos techniquesThe radiology OIC will periodically observe a sample of x-rays taken by the radiologic technologist

Using an observation checklist the NCOIC will observe whether all appropriate x-rays were taken whether the procedures for the taking of the x-rays were strictly followed including the position of the patient and position of the x-ray equipment for each part of the body being x-rayed Any deviation from standard procedures will be noted by the consultant as well as any problems that arise

Variations in procedures and problems will be reviewed with the radiologic technologist at the end of the day If problems or other issues are considered to be serious by CLSH or the radiology OIC retraining will be scheduled

The radiology OIC will also review a sample of the X-Ray Daily Log Sheets for completeness and accuracy Since it is impractical to ask a patient to submit to two complete x-ray sessions by two technologist Replicate x-rays may be conducted on the dry run at the beginning of a stand

Refresher Sessions

Refresher sessions may be periodically scheduled to update the radiologic technologist on the x-ray procedure or changes in protocol

SAFETY PROCEDURES

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 51

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 52: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Due to the fact that overexposure to x-rays can have serious detrimental side effects all suggested protective procedures and precautions will be taken in CLSH to protect the patient and the radiologic technologist

Protection of the Patient

For the CLSH the patient will be protected from unnecessary radiation during the x-ray examinations by certain design features of the x-ray equipment and by specially fabricated auxiliary apparatus

Equipment and Apparatus Design

Those features of radiographic equipment that are designed to reduce patient dose will also reduce technologist exposure This aspect of radiation control has been kept in mind when considering patient protection

Filtration

For the CLSH a minimum of 25 mm A1 equivalent total filtration will be used on radiographic tubes operating above 70 kVp The purpose of this filtration is to reduce the amount of low energy radiation (soft x-rays) reaching the patient Since only penetrating radiation is useful in producing an x-ray image non penetrating soft radiation is absorbed and contributes only to patient dose and not to the radiographic image In general the higher the total filtration the lower will be the patient dose

Collimation

Collimation is extremely important in patient protection and will be utilized as part of the CLSH guideline The x-ray beam will always be collimated to the region of anatomic interest The larger the useful x-ray beam the higher will be the examinee dose Restricting the x-ray beam by collimation reduces not only the examinee dose the volume of tissue irradiated but also the absolute dose at any point because of the accompanying reduction in scatter radiation Reduction of scatter radiation also contributes to increased image quality by increasing radiographic contrast

Specific Area Shielding

In specific area shielding part of the primary beam is absorbed during the examination by shielding a specific area of the body Gonad shielding is a good example of specific area shielding and will be applied in the CLSH with the use of contact shields or a lead apron Shielding will be used at all times that an examinee is being x-rayed

Radiographic Technique

Good radiographic technique tends to produce a quality image while reducing the patient dose Ideally the higher the voltage the lower will be the examinee dose This is so because of the inverse relationship between voltage and current However as voltage is raised and the current lowered the image contrast is reduced thus possibly reducing the acceptability of the exposure However the radiographic contrast would be very poor and the image would contain less diagnostic information In general the highest practicable voltage with an appropriately low current will be employed in all examinations

Exposure Limitation

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 52

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 53: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

More than two x-rays in each position are not taken on any one patient The taking of extra films should occur very rarely All repeated films for a patient are placed in the x-ray jacket If more than one film per position is taken for an patient the radiologist will select the best one to evaluate

Protection of Radiologic Technologist - Equipment and Apparatus Design

Particular safeguards and attention will be exercised by Radiologic Technologist during x-ray sessions

Protective Apparel

A leaded apron and gloves will be available and will be used whenever the Radiologic technologist takes an exposure and is not behind a protective barrier

Protective Barriers

During radiography the radiologic technologist will be positioned behind the control booth barrier which contains lead

Personnel Monitoring

Perhaps the single most important aspect of a radiation control program is a properly designed personnel radiation monitoring program Three types of radiation measuring devices are used as personnel monitors -- pocket ionization chambers film badges and thermoluminescent dosimetry badges The film badge will be the device used in CLSH The design of the film badge has undergone many refinements and it can measure not only the quantity of radiation but also the type of radiation the approximate energy and the direction Consequently it is very important that such a monitor be properly handled and worn

Each shipment of personnel monitors will be accompanied by a control badge The control badge will be stored in a location distant from any radiation source The badge will be worn unshielded at the collar region New badges will require delivery every three months When the new ones are received the used badges will be returned to PNRI for evaluation

Pregnant Radiologic Technologist

Should the radiologic technologist become pregnant during the field period of the study it will be her responsibility to inform the radiology OIC when she discovers or suspects that the pregnant technologist will be provided with a second radiation badge with instructions to wear it at waist level The radiation monitoring report associated with this badge will reflect that it is a fetal dose monitor

Patient Movement and Positioning

The radiologic technologist must be aware of the patientrsquos condition positioning him or assisting him onto the gurney In many cases this will dictate the positioning technique used The patient may not be able to achieve a certain position consequently the technologist will have to use good judgment and common sense to get the radiograph while at the same time making the patient as comfortable as possible

Emergency Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 53

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 54: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

All emergencies should be handled as discussed in the Standardized Procedures Equipment failures and emergencies should be immediately reported to the radiology OIC and hospital admin

JOB DESCRIPTION DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Ensures the systematic and efficient performance of high quality radiographic procedures based on standards

Handles and operates all radiographic machines and equipments properly during procedures

Performs radiologic procedures for patients based on request Assist the radiologistmilitary doctors in administering procedures Accommodates the annual ocular inspection done by the DOH PHILHEALTH

and RHS Processes and sorts films and other form of results for systemic endorsement Ensures proper filing of patientsrsquo official reading results and radiographs To establish standards of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor

or reject to establish additional radiographic technique charts when needed or revise

existing charts when appropriate To establish standard dark room quality control checks to standardize film

processing technique and maintain proper dark room condition Ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for the patientsrsquo and

employeesrsquo comfort by checking all areas before the procedure To establish radiation safety program for patients personnel and the general

public

QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAMS AND CORRECTIVE AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

The diagnostic radiology section has planned a systematic process for monitoring and evaluating the quality and appropriate patient care and to resolve problems identified

The Radiologic Technologist is responsible for implementation of a quality improvement program for the department

Monitoring and evaluation of the quality and appropriateness of the patient care process is accomplished through the following

Routine collection of information about important aspects of diagnostic radiology services

Assessment of the collected data from diagnostic section and by the quality and by the quality improvement section to monitor and evaluate patient care services reflects current knowledge and clinical experience

Findings and conclusions of the monitoring process action taken to resolve problems and improve patient care and the results of these actions are reported of the head of the QA and QC Committee medical section committee and the OIC of the radiology section

All annual report of the diagnostic radiology section activities are part of the annual re-appraisal of the hospital quality improvement program and problem solving activities of the section

All x-ray producing equipment will be operated only by trained staff and will be secured when not in use I such a manner that it cannot be used by untrained unauthorized personnel or members of the public either knowingly or

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 54

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 55: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

unknowingly This must be done by locking the room on which the equipment is located

All x-ray producing equipment will be used according to manufacturerrsquos manual of operations and will not be modified

A manually reset commulative timing device must be used which will either indicate elapsed time or turn off the machine when total exposure reaches certain previously determined limit If the safe use of the x-ray producing equipment depends on the mechanical set-up of the unit or on technical factors then these restrictions must be rigidly followed

All x-ray producing equipment must be properly maintained Attempts to ldquofixrdquo equipment should only be made by properly trained technical staff of HMS(Hospital Maintenance Service)No repair cleaning work on structures and shielding materials or no routine works that could result in exposure will be allowed unless it has been positively ascertained that x-ray tube has been completely de-energized

The radiology section stabilizes standard of image of image quality to categorize radiographs as good poor or reject

Additional radiographic techniques are being established when needed and revise existing radiographic charts when necessary

The radiology section ensures safety cleanliness and orderliness of the section for patientrsquos and employeesrsquo comfort

POLICIES AND PROCEDURES ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF MEDICAL DEVICES

POLICY

A radiation survey of all radiographic equipment are performed at least every 6 months by a properly trained technical staff of HMS ( Hospital Maintenance Service )

PROCEDURE

1 The Radiation survey includes at least the following areaa Machine radiation outputb Leakage radiation and scattered radiationc Focal spot sized Collimation and beam alignmente KV Timer MAS linearity and half ndash value layer

2 Any deviations in any of the above areas are corrected by the proper services3 A copy of the survey results are maintained in the radiology section as well as in the HMS 4 Aprons Gloves and Shields are checked annually for defects and replaced when necessary5 An analysis is done in a continuing basis and summarized monthly to keep track of the repeat film ratio 6 The developing tank is cleaned and checked every month

POLICY The radiology section adheres to safety precautions for equipments and personnel

PROCEDURE

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 55

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 56: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

The radiology section adheres to the safety precautions in four major areas Electrical Mechanical Fire Radiation Safety

ELECTRICALHigh voltages are inherent with radiographic equipment but due to

shockproofing The hazard present is small as long as the unit remains well grounded The equipment is inspected at least weekly for bent twisted or frayed cables loose electrical connectors and wires broken receptacles etc

When any damage is noted in the electrical system the system is shut down until repairs are completed

MECHANICAL Because of the variety of mechanical functions of the radiography equipment care is given to gear systems into which clothing gowns and sheets could be trapped in the table top unit The elevating and lowering chest stand is counter balanced to prevent from dropping

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible counterbalance failure

The Radiologic Technologist is constantly alert for possible mechanical equipment malfunction or damage

Any malfunctions in equipment are repaired as soon as possible

FIREIf a fire occurs in the radiology section all occupants are removed from the area All windows and doors are closed All machinery and power switches are turned off if possible dependent upon the location of fire All equipment is covered to protect from water damage if possible

RADIATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRadiology Section PersonnelThe maximum permissible occupational dose to whole body radiation is 5REMS per year The individual in the department is expected to be well below this limitations

Film badges are worn at all times while in the section Loss of a badge is reported immediately When the protective apron is worn the badge is worn outside the apron at the

collar level Personnel are not to intercept the direct beam at anytime wherever wearing

an apron or not aprons are intended as protection from the direct beam If the Radiologic technologist receives in excess in excess of 40mREMS in a

month the cause for exposure is investigation and corrected The holding of patient is discouraged and is avoided if all possible In the

event a patient is held a protective apron and gloves are worn and the patient is held in such a manner as to assure that the holder does not intercept the direct beam and is exposed to scatter radiation only

The Radiologic Technologist remains behind the control booth barrier or when making exposures

Patients

Every precaution is taken to avoid any unnecessary radiation exposure

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 56

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 57: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Child bearing age- All women in the child bearing age group up to age 45 who are having abdomen pelvis hips andor lumbar spine films must observe the 10 day rule

Collimation- The primary beam is collimated to the minimum field necessary for the study being performed Under no circumstances does the beam exceed the dimentions of the field

Gonadal shielding is used on all patients whenever possible through the child bearing years Shields are placed so as not to interfere with the examination being done and yet protect the patient

Policy

Waste disposal in Radiology Section

Old radiographs are bought per kilo Used dark room solutions are stored in containers bought and collected

together with the old radiographs by Mr Robert Mabatid of RCM Scrap Dapdap Liloan Cebu with a DENR ID no 07-22-00263 for proper hazardous waste disposal

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 57

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 58: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

Risk Assessment and action plan in CLSH Radiology Section

Risk S F Control Performance measure Action taken

1 Excess staff radiation dose (radiation workers)

M L bull Staff training bull Dose monitoring results

Review local rules of PNRIbull Local Rules

bull Staff sign to state that local rules adhered to

bull Personnel monitors worn bull DOH-RHS annual visit reportbull Contingency plans bull Procedures in place

bull Training records

2 Excess radiation dose to carerssupporters

M L bull Radiographer-in-Charge bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Some new procedures need developingbull Some procedures bull Dose records of carerssupporters

Review existing procedures of PNRIbull Personal protective equipment

3 Excess radiation dose to publicvisitors

M Lbull Room secured No casual access

bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

Review dose rates outside controlled areas

bull Warning signs bull Environmental monitoring resultsbull Shieldingmdashno significant external radiation risk through wallsdoors etc

bull Radiation incident log

bull Environmental monitoring strategy

4 Excess radiation dose to patient

H Mbull Imaging equipment subject to regular maintenance

bull Compliance with HMSReview scopebreadth of required procedures

bull Some process procedures bull DOH-RHS annual visit report Introduce complete set of reference dosesbull Optimization program required

bull Patient dose measurement program results

Rolling program of auditoptimization required

5 Failure to follow procedures leading to risk of litigation

H M bull Staff training bull Training recordsConsider external accreditationbull Audit bull DOH-RHS annual visit report

bull Audit reports

S severity F frequency L low M medium H high

STANDARD OPERATING MANUAL MEDICAL SERVICE 58

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab
Page 59: Policy

CAMP LAPULAPU STATION HOSPITAL MANUAL OF OPERATIONS

EFFECTIVITY This SOP shall take effect upon publication

BY ORDER OF LIEUTENANT COLONEL LARIN

RUBEMA M CANDELARIOMAJ VC (GHQ)Chief Admin Service

Page 59

  • 153 Types of DNR Orders
    • 1531d Authority to Give a DNR Order Only a patients primary physician may give a DNR order The primary physician is generally the first physician listed on the patients data card Primary physicians may delegate to physician residents the authority to record a DNR order in the medical chart
    • 1531e Patient Consent to a DNR Order
    • 154 Recording the DNR Order in the Medical Chart
    • 155 Reassessment and Revocation of DNR Orders
    • 156 Invasive Procedures and Anesthesia Care
    • 157 Conflicts Between DNR Orders and Advance Directives
    • Calculation of control limits
    • QC procedure(s) to be implemented
    • Personal Protective Equipment in the Lab